MBenz SLK350 R171 272 Repair

Mercedes Benz SLK 350 (171.456) V6-3.5L (272.
963) 1
Mercedes Benz SLK350

R171 Chassis
Ch i - 272 Engine
E i V6 3.5
3 5 lts.
lt
Repair Manual
2006 Mercedes Benz SLK 350 (171.456) V6-3.5L (272.963) Copyright © 2012, ALLDATA 10.52SS Page 1
Mercedes Benz SLK 350 (171.456) V6-3.5L (272.963) 2
Vehicle: Application and ID
AH60.00-P-0800-02B Vehicle Identification Number
AH60.00-P-0800-02B Vehicle Identification Number
- with CODE (491) USA version
The vehicle identification number starts and ends with the "Mercedes star" trademark (1, 19) and has 19 punched numbers with a total length of 103
mm
If, in case of repair, the area where the vehicle identification number has been embossed is replaced, it is necessary to punch in the vehicle identification
number at the same point.
This involves a change to the vehicle which is subject to compulsory notification. In the Federal Republic of Germany immediately inform the vehicle
licensing authority in writing.
The vehicle owner is required to complete a certificate for the vehicle licensing authority which indicates that the vehicle identification number has been
re-stamped after completing body repairs.
As prove, the original vehicle identification number cut out of the old part, may also be enclosed.
A vehicle identification number incompletely punched in by the workshop must be crossed out and pinched in correctly in the spare field on the right
crossmember, the right side of the drive shaft tunnel, the rear partition wall or the firewall.
This procedure should be noted additionally in the certificate for the vehicle licensing authority as follows:
"The incorrectly or incompletely punched vehicle identification number was crossed out and the correct vehicle identification number punched in the
spare field."
Export countries must observe their relevant vehicle licensing provisions and legal regulations.
GF00.10-P-0025-01K Model Survey
GF00.10-P-0025-01K Model Survey
GF00.10-P-0025-02K Overview of Major Assemblies
GF00.10-P-0025-02K Overview Of Major Assemblies
Vehicle: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
AP00.20-P-0053V Check All Visible Parts For Leaks and Damage

AP00.20-P-0053V Check All Visible Parts For Leaks And Damage
- MODEL 171, 172
Model 171 shown

AR00.10-P-1010A Check Gear Capacity

AR00.10-P-1010A Check Gear Capacity
- MODEL all
Vehicle: Programming and Relearning
AH54.21-P-0001-03Y Notes on Programming Control Units

AH54.21-P-0001-03Y Notes On Programming Control Units
Program using STAR DIAGNOSIS (Xentry flash)
Xentry Flash: The term Xentry flash is used to designate the Daimler AG standard for programming control units.
In the process a distinction is made between two types of programming:
^ Offline programming with Release CD
^ Offline programming with Special Release CD
Further explanation of terms:

^ Flashing: Programming of control units
^ Software: Control unit software
^ Release CD: Control unit software integrated on Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS) DVD
^ Special Release CD: Special CD which contains software updates
Deliveries and costs
The release CD is integrated into the DAS-DVD and together with the Workshop Information System DVD is delivered monthly by the Daimler AG.
Delivery is free of charge for the case of repair.
Offline programming with Release CD
The control unit software of the Release CD can be installed on the hard disk in the case of the "STAR DIAGNOSIS Compact" diagnosis system.
Installation of the dat in not possible in the case of the "STAR DIAGNOSIS Basic" diagnosis system. In this case, the Release CD must be inserted into
the CD or DVD drive.
^ The information on the Release CD:
- applies to all divisions
- applies to all model series
- applies to all control units
^ The information on the Release CD provides a "basic supply" of control unit software for the vehicle. The current software releases of all
programmable control units are located on the Release-CD. An old software release can therefore be repeatedly replaced (updated) by a new
software release.
^ If a plant service measure requires a change in software release in a programmable control unit, the workshop can carry out this change with the
Release CD.
AH54.21-P-0001-03Z Notes on Programming Control Units
AH54.21-P-0001-03Z Notes On Programming Control Units
Offline programming with Special Release CD
Program using STAR DIAGNOSIS (Xentry flash)
Xentry Flash: The term Xentry flash is used to designate the Daimler AG standard for programming control units. In the process a distinction is made
between two types of programming:
^ Offline programming with Release CD
^ Offline programming with Special Release CD
Further explanation of terms:

^ Flashing: Programming of control units
^ Software: Control unit software
^ Release CD: Control unit software, integrated onto DAS DVD
^ Special Release CD: Special CD which contains software updates

^ The Special Release CD is a special CD which contains software updates
^ The workshop must ask for the Special Release CD at the STAR DIAGNOSIS user help desk and request it via the usual ordering channels
^ Manual redocumentation required in the vehicle documentation system (FDOK)
AH54.21-P-0001-04Z Flow Chart For Off-Line Programming With Special Release CD
AH54.21-P-0001-04Z Flow Chart For Off-line Programming With Special Release CD
AH54.21-P-0004-01X Notes on SCN Coding of Control Units

AH54.21-P-0004-01X Notes On SCN Coding Of Control Units
The "Software Calibration Number" (SCN) is specified by law in Europe and USA for all control units relevant to exhaust emission as of model year
2002.
Accordingly the software and coding of such a control unit must be clearly identifiable by means of the SCN. As a number the SCN consists of 16
numbers. The first 10 places correspond to the object number to be coded (mostly object number of control unit software). The next 2 places designate
the manufacturing plant or field organization, in which the vehicle has been coded. The last 4 places are a number of the variants of the coding string of
the vehicle-specific as-built configuration. This number is serially numbered for each newly formed variant.
If special equipment has been installed or removed in the vehicle (e.g. retrofitting a telephone), these retrofit codes must be added to the central system
before requesting the SCN coding data. The appropriate national organization must be contacted (MPC) for this.
AR54.21-P-0013-01X Online SCN Coding
AR54.21-P-0013-01X Online SCN Coding
The following work instructions describe the procedure for the online software calibration number (SCN) coding with Xentry Flash.
Precondition for SCN coding:

^ Networked STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis system
^ User ID and password for Xentry flash (user on aftersales platform)
Entry into coding in the Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS)

1. Select control unit.
2. Select menu item "control unit adaptations" or "initial startup". Continue with "F3".
3. Select menu item "SCN coding". Continue with "F3".
4. Select "Online (networked STAR DIAGNOSIS device)" menu item. Continue with "F3".
5. Enter user ID and password into the login screen. Continue with "Log in". After logging in the SCN coding data are automatically queried in the
background and the control unit is then coded.
6. Press "F11" to print out the order log and enclose the repair order.
The order record can also be stored in the Diagnosis Assistance system (DAS). This is done by clicking on "F11", "Print to file", selecting
"printout of test step" and entering a file name. In StarUtilities, the StarPad program can be used to display and printout the order log at the
"Logs" menu item.
7. Continue with "F2".

The SCN coding of the control unit is completed.

AR54.21-P-0013-04X Offline SCN Coding
AR54.21-P-0013-04X Offline SCN Coding
The following work instructions describe the procedure for the online software calibration number (SCN) coding with Xentry Flash. The SCN coding
data are requested by fax through the Star Diagnosis User Help Desk.
For the Off-line fallback process Daimler ERG reserves the right to invoice 9 EUR per fax query.
Precondition for offline SCN coding:

^ STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis system with printer
^ Fax device
The offline SCN coding is broken down into 2 steps:

A. Determine vehicle data for offline SCN coding from vehicle. The vehicle data is used to create the fax form for ordering the SCN coding data
through the Star Diagnosis Help Desk.
B. Perform SCN coding. The coding is performed with the SCN coding data from the Star Diagnosis Help Desk.
A. Determine vehicle data for offline SCN coding from the vehicle.
1. Select control unit in Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS).
2. Select menu item "control unit adaptations" or "initial startup". Continue with "F3".
3. Select menu item "SCN coding". Continue with "F3".
4. Select "Offline (STAR DIAGNOSIS device not-networked)" menu item. Continue with "F3".
5. Confirm note on sequence of SCN coding with "F2".
6. Completely fill out fax form and click "F11" to print out.
If an email address is entered in the fax form, you will be sent the SCN coding data per email. If a fax number is entered in the fax form, you
will be sent the SCN coding data per fax.
7. Send printed out fax form to the given fax no. for the Star Diagnosis Help Desk.
B. Perform SCN coding. The coding is performed with the SCN coding data from the Star Diagnosis Help Desk.
If the SCN coding data are received per email, burn the data to a CD or save the data on a USB removable storage device and identify
accordingly. Unpack the Zip files first when doing so.
8. In the Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS) choose the "Step 2: Perform SCN coding" menu item. Continue with "F3".
9.1 Select keyboard input using "F4".
For SCN coding data per fax.
9.2 Insert CD or connect USB removable storage device.
For SCN coding data per email.
10.1 Enter SCN coding data manually into the DAS.
For SCN coding data per fax.
10.2 Confirm using "F3" and import the data per CD or USB removable storage device.
For SCN coding data per email.
11. Perform SCN coding.
12. Switch ignition on/off.
Control unit specific, refer to specification in DAS.
13. Press "F11" to print out the order log and enclose the repair order.
The order log can also be stored on the DAS. This is done by clicking on "F11", "Print to file", selecting "printout of test step" and entering a
file name. In StarUtilities, the StarPad program can be used to display and printout the order log at the "Logs" menu item.
14. Continue with "F2".
The SCN coding of the control unit is completed. Scrap the CD following successful SCN coding as per the guidelines for theft-relevant parts
(DTR 69/00). The scrapping process is to be documented on the repair order. The data on the USB removable storage device are to be deleted
properly once they have been used.
AR54.21-P-0014-01Y Program Control Unit
AR54.21-P-0014-01Y Program Control Unit
Offline programming with Release CD

1. Start Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS) and select category/vehicle model.
Selection of main menu, systems and select the control unit to be programmed.
3. Select menu item "control unit adaptations".
4. Select menu item "control unit programming".
5. Select menu item "Program control unit using DVD or removable storage device".
6. With new software press the "F3" button and program the control unit.
Display appears if new software is present.
Only perform the following steps, if no communication (communication error) is possible between the Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS) and control
unit.
7. Eliminate the cause of the error message using the test steps in the "error messages" menu.
If the cause of the fault cannot be found or eliminated, please inform the STAR DIAGNOSIS User Help Desk. Replace control unit in agreement
with STAR DIAGNOSIS User Help Desk.
8. If necessary determine the part number of the control unit and replace the control unit.
9. Select menu item "Initial startup with automatic adoption of settings from the old control unit" or "Initial startup without automatic adoption of
the settings from the old control unit" in the main menu. Then select "Repair functions" and carry out "Replace control unit".
When installing new control unit
AR54.21-P-0014-01Z Program Control Unit
AR54.21-P-0014-01Z Program Control Unit
Offline programming with special release CD.

1. Start Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS) and select category/vehicle model.
Selection of main menu, systems and select the control unit to be programmed.
3. Select menu item "control unit adaptations".
4. Select menu item "control unit programming".
5. Select "Offline (STAR DIAGNOSIS device not-networked)" menu item.
6. Select menu item "Program control unit using DVD or removable storage device".
7 Insert Special Release CD.
The programming of the control unit now starts automatically.
AR00.19-P-0200V Perform Basic Programming
AR00.19-P-0200V Perform Basic Programming
- MODEL 171.4
AR54.21-P-0014Y Programming Of Control Units

AR54.21-P-0014Y Programming Of Control Units
- MODEL 129.058 /063 /067 /076, 163, 164, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 199, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220, 221,
230, 240, 245, 251, 450, 452, 454, 461.302 /304 /305 /331 /332 /333 /334 /340 /342 /343 /344 /345 /346, 463.206 /208 /209 /232 /233 /240 /241
/243 /244 /245 /246 /247 /248 /249 /250 /254 /270 /271 /303 /306 /308 /309 /322 /323 /332 /333 /336 /340 /341 /346 (except, 245.286)
Off-line programming with Release CD

AR54.21-P-0014Z Programming Of Control Units

AR54.21-P-0014Z Programming Of Control Units
- MODEL 129.058 /063 /067 /076, 163, 164, 168, 169, 170, 171, 199, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220, 221, 230,
240, 245, 251, 461.302 /304 /305 /331 /332 /333 /334 /340 /342 /343 /344 /345 /346, 463.206 /208 /209 /232 /233 /240 /241 /243 /244 /245 /246
/247 /248 /249 /250 /254 /270 /271 /303 /306 /308 /309 /322 /323 /332 /333 /336 /340 /341 /346 (except, 245.286)
Offline-Programmierung mit Special Release-CD

AR54.21-P-0015X SCN Coding Of Control Units

AR54.21-P-0015X SCN Coding Of Control Units
- MODEL 129.058 /063 /067 /076, 163, 164, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 199, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220, 221,
230, 240, 245, 251, 450, 452, 454, 461.302 /304 /305 /331 /332 /333 /334 /340 /342 /343 /344 /345 /346, 463.206 /208 /209 /232 /233 /240 /241
/243 /244 /245 /246 /247 /248 /249 /250 /254 /270 /271 /303 /306 /308 /309 /322 /323 /332 /333 /336 /340 /341 /346
Vehicle: Service and Repair
AH00.00-P-0015-01CW Notes on Calculating Tightening Torque When Using Insertion Tool With
Various Effective Lengths.
AH00.00-P-0015-01CW Notes On Calculating Tightening Torque When Using Insertion Tool With Various Effective Lengths.
The working length of the insertion tool (2) plugged onto the torque wrench (1) changes the leverage of the torque wrench (1). This in turn alters the
actual tightening torque. Therefore the tightening torque to be set has to be calculated as a function of the working length of the insertion tool (2) and
the specified tightening torque.
Component Identification
The following formula is used to calculate the torque to be set.
Engine: Application and ID
AH01.00-P-0001-01D Notes on position of engine number
Shown on engine 275

The engine number is located on the upper right transmission flange.
With OM 642 the engine number is located on the left front on the cylinder crankcase below the vacuum pump
With OM 651 the engine number is located on the left side on the cylinder crankcase below the vacuum pump
Engine: Description and Operation
AP01.00-P-1000ZZ Cleaning and preserving engine and engine compartment
Cleaning and preserving engine and engine compartment

Engine: Testing and Inspection
AH01.00-P-0300-01VA General Information on Inspecting Cylinder

AH01.00-P-0300-01VA General information on inspecting cylinder
1. Pressure Gloss Marks, Smoothings
2. Visible Stripes, Friction Marks

3. Ring Shaped Imprints
4. Rotary Bright, Reflecting, Polished Upper Surfaces Of Cylinder
5. Roughened Streaks, Rubbing Seizures (+ 6, 7, 8)
AR01.00-P-0200V Inspecting Cylinders With A Light Probe

AR01.00-P-0200V Inspecting cylinders with a light probe
Steps 1-8
Steps 9-10
Commercially Available Tools
AR01.00-P-1300VA Inspect Cylinders For Leaks

AR01.00-P-1300VA Inspect cylinders for leaks
Steps 1-11
Cylinder Leakage
Cylinder Leakage
AR18.00-P-0025QB Measure Oil Consumption

AR18.00-P-0025QB Measure oil consumption
Steps 1-10
AR18.00-P-0025V Measure Oil Consumption

AR18.00-P-0025V Measure oil consumption
Steps 1-6
Workshop Equipment/MB Testers
AR18.00-P-1250SX Check Oil Pressure

AR18.00-P-1250SX Check oil pressure
Steps 1-10
Oil pressure test specifications

Crankcase, timing case cover, end cover
Special Tools
AH01.00-N-1300-02A Determine Loss of Pressure at Cylinder

AH01.00-N-1300-02A Determine loss of pressure at cylinder
If an increased pressure loss was found with the cylinder leak tightness tester, inspect engine by listening at cylinder head gasket, air intake area,
exhaust, oil filler opening and prechamber or spark plug bores of the adjacent cylinder or cylinders.
Check the coolant in the coolant expansion reservoir for the formation of air bubbles.
Possible causes for the pressure loss are:
1. Outlet of air through prechamber or spark plug bore of adjacent cylinder or cylinders, air bubbles in coolant expansion reservoir:
pressure loss at cylinder head gasket
2. Outlet of air through air intake area: For inspecting by listening, open throttle valve
pressure loss at inlet valve(s)
3. Outlet of air through exhaust:
pressure loss at exhaust valve(s)
4. Outlet of air through oil filler opening:
pressure loss through pistons and piston rings

It is possible to pinpoint the pressure loss of the relevant cylinder by spraying with engine oil. Engine oil seals off the gap between piston and
cylinder briefly.
If a reduced pressure loss now occurs for a short time, the cause is very likely to be at the pistons, piston rings or cylinder contact surface of the
relevant cylinder.
Determining the cause can be falsified by the position of the piston ring joints. If suspicion exists that the loss of pressure is caused by the piston
ring joints being positioned directly one above the other, fit parts to engine and repeat test after running engine for a short time.
AH01.00-P-0300-01A General Information on Inspecting Cylinder Walls
AH01.00-P-0300-01A General information on inspecting cylinder walls
Pressure gloss marks, smooth spots

Isolated bright areas in the middle of the cylinder barrel or at the cylinder head bolts.
Continue to use crankcase.
Visible mottling, friction marks
Visible mottling, friction marks

Starting from reverse area of the upper piston ring tapering downwards.
Traces of dry friction marks which cannot be felt, caused by oil film being washed off by fuel, for example from many cold starts when driving short
distances.
Friction marks occurring mainly around the cylinder head bolts and on the pressure side are not a problem provided that they are smoothed out.
The piston rings are not damaged.
Ring shaped imprints

Visible imprints on cylinder barrel in the upper and lower reverse area of piston rings are not a cause for complaint.
Circumferential bright, reflecting, polished upper surfaces of cylinder
Circumferential bright, reflecting, polished upper surfaces of cylinder

Starting from the reverse area of the upper piston ring with measurable, partial cylinder wear.
The cylinder barrel is unusable.
Do not use the crankcase anymore.

Roughened mottling, friction scoring

Starting from first and second piston ring, tapering to an end only in bottom part of cylinder. Progressive signs of friction lead to friction score marks.
Where these signs of friction are perceptible, the cylinder barrel is unusable.
The piston rings may be damaged.
Continuous individual traces of scratch

Caused by soiling, for example, by the back-pulsation of soot particles from the catalytic converter or exhaust.
Piston seizure
Most of cylinder wall perceptibly roughened over the entire length. Material deposits and perceptible scoring marks on cylinder wall and at piston
skirt.
The cylinder barrel is unusable.
Brown coloring of cylinder upper surface.

A brown coloration over large areas of the cylinder barrel is oil varnish and indicates that the engine has been driven at a high temperature level.
Oil varnish above piston ring zone is normal and is not a reason for complaint.
Reuse crankcase provided no impermissible cylinder distortion is present.

AH01.00-P-0300-01VA General Information on Inspecting Cylinder Walls
AH01.00-P-0300-01VA General information on inspecting cylinder walls
General note
If a complaint is made about an engine, for example because of noises, overheating, oil consumption etc., perform a visual inspection of the mounted
cylinder head by inspecting with light probe with an endoscope. The following notes should be helpful in assessing the cylinder barrels to allow a
professional decision to be made about the condition and further use of the crankcase. If this can cannot be assessed with sufficient security through
inspecting with an endoscope then the work "Check compression pressure" and "Check cylinder leakage" must be performed before removal of the
cylinder head as described in the Workshop Information System (WIS).
The results of checking should be documented on a repair order. For deviations from the prescribed wear and tolerance values one should particularly
determine the direction of the leakage while checking the leak tightness of the cylinder (in the direction valve or in the direction of the crankcase).
In the case of deviating compression pressure values, in particular when not achieving the installation tolerance/new values (measured with a
compression recorder), one should check for indications of a fluid lock (e.g. wet piston crown, wet air filter, water-oil-glycol residues).
Ideal condition
Ideal condition
A matt gray user interface, no honing pattern, a dry cylinder barrel, without polished sections or mirror polished flats.
It is also possible that irregularities can occur which should be individually assessed.
Individual score marks up fields of score marks
Individual score marks up fields of score marks

Caused by residual waste or soiling during company, e.g. through back pulsation of particle from the catalytic converter or the exhaust system.


Visible in the upper and lower reversal range of piston rings, are not a reason for complaint.
Brown coloring of cylinder upper surface
Brown coloring of cylinder upper surface.

Brown coloration (oil varnish) over large areas of the cylinder barrel indicates that the engine has been driven at a high temperature level. This is
normal and not a cause for complaint.


Individual blank points, e.g. in middle of cylinder or in area of cylinder head bolts. An all-round impression at the piston ring reversing point above
and below.
Imprint on valve cooling bore for an 8 and 12 cylinder engine
Optical stripes, friction marks

Starting from the first, second or third piston ring, run out after approx. 30 mm. Traces of dry friction marks which cannot be felt, caused by soot
particles and oil film being washed off by fuel, e.g. from frequent cold starts associated with short-distance driving. These traces of friction marks
which occur principally in area of cylinder head bolts and on pressure side are not a problem provided they are smoothed.

Corrugated wear of the cylinder barrel
Imprint on valve cooling bore for an 8 and 12 cylinder engine

The cooling bore in the crankcase shows a different coloration to the cylinder barrel.
Optical stripes, friction marks
Corrugated wear of the cylinder barrel

A washboard type surface structure of the cylinder barrel, partially or all around.


Starting from first, second or third piston ring, tapering to an end only in bottom part of cylinder. Friction marks as described under "Optical streaks,
friction marks", in an advanced for becoming friction eroded areas.
If friction eroded areas are perceptible the cylinder barrel is unusable.
Piston seizure, eroded areas on the ring
Piston seizure, eroded areas on the ring

Most of cylinder wall perceptibly roughened over the entire length. Material deposits and perceptible scoring marks on cylinder wall and at piston
skirt.
Cylinder barrel unusable.

AR18.00-P-0025-05QB Determine Oil Consumption
AR18.00-P-0025-05QB Determine oil consumption
Weigh engine oil

1 Allow engine oil to drain in the oil reservoir provided.
When oil filler cap is opened and engine is at operating temperature.
2 Place oil reservoir on a balance and weigh.

3 Note oil mass in kg and kilometer reading for the vehicle.
4 Fill up the engine with the prescribed quantity of engine oil.
5 Fit remaining parts to vehicle
Determine oil consumption

1 Weigh engine oil.
3 Perform measurement run.
4 Weigh engine oil again.
To prevent measurement errors, the new measurement must be carried out at the place of the first oil measurement!

6 Determine differential mass and measurement distance.
Oil consumption over 1000 km:

Differential mass in kg x 1000 km Oil consumption in
Measurement distance in km x 0.85 1000 km
Calculated oil consumption in liters (1) per 1000 km.

Engine: Procedures
AH00.00-P-0007-01SF Notes on Bolted Connections With Self Tapping Screws

AH00.00-P-0007-01SF Notes on bolted connections with self tapping screws
General:
Terms:
"Self-tapping" is the generic term and it comprises both "thread-forming" and "thread-cutting". The following covers only thread forming screws that
meet the globally applicable "TAPTITE" standard.
Properties:
Thread forming screws create a screw-in thread in prefabricated core holes via typical conical crests without cutting.
The screw-in threads created by thread forming screws can easily take up screws with a metric ISO thread (standard screw).
Automatic centering during initial manual installation of self-tapping screws is given.
Repair and replacement solutions:

^ It is permissible to reuse an existing or other used thread forming screw.
^ The installation of a new thread forming screw into an already existing screw-in thread is not permissible.
^ It is permissible to replace a thread forming screw with a new or used standard screw. The length of the standard screw must be three threads
(groove tip) shorter than the length of the originally installed thread forming screw.
AH01.10-P-0001-01A Use of Engine No. When Installing Reconditioned Engines and Factory-New
Replacement Engines or Crankcases
AH01.10-P-0001-01A Use of engine no. when installing reconditioned engines and factory-new replacement engines or crankcases
The engine number has a different legal significance in individual countries. In the Federal Republic of Germany, for example, it has been classified
by the legislative authorities since mid-1972 as "insignificant in terms of traffic legislation". It is therefore no longer included in the vehicle title
document and vehicle registration document.
Practically all other countries continue to require the indication of the engine number on motor vehicles which are registered in such countries. In
dealing with international traffic, the authorities proceed on the basis of the provisions of the country in which the vehicle is registered.
In order to avoid any problems on the occasion of vehicle checks or when crossing international frontiers as a result of the lack of or incorrect engine
number, the following directives have to be observed when carrying out repairs.
1. Directives for vehicles which are registered in the Federal Republic of Germany
a) In the case of vehicles for which no engine number is indicated in the vehicle registration document (first registration after approx. mid-1972), it
is not necessary to stamp or revise an engine number if a replacement engine or crankcase of the same type is fitted.
b) If an engine number is indicated in the vehicle registration document, it is possible, if an engine of the same type is fitted, to transfer the number
of the removed component to the new engine, or the appropriate authority (vehicle inspection authority, vehicle registration authority) should be
requested to delete the engine number in the vehicle title document or registration document. The German Federal Minister of Transport has
issued appropriate ministerial orders in Transport Gazette 1973, p. 66.
2. Vehicles which are registered outside of the Federal Republic of Germany

If a reconditioned engine or factory-new replacement engine or crankcase is fitted and this is of the identical type, it is then necessary to adopt the
engine number of the engine removed and to transfer it to the new engine or crankcase.
Note
It is possible in the case of various engines only to stamp the engine number in place when the engine is removed.
For this reason, pay attention to the particular directives stated in Para 3 for the installation of reconditioned engines, crankcases and short blocks.
3. Special directives
3.1 Installation of factory-new replacement engine of identical type

a) If a factory-new engine is installed and an engine number is required (e.g. vehicle registered outside of the Federal Republic of Germany), the
number of the factory-new engine must be ground off and the number of the originally installed engine of identical type stamped in its place.
b) If the factory-new engine is fitted with an engine type plate (older car engines) and it is necessary to indicate an engine number in the vehicle
documents, in this case take the engine type plate off the engine removed and affix it at the same point on the engine of identical type to be
installed.
3.2 Installation of reconditioned engine of identical type

a) The reconditioned engine plate must not be removed either from the reconditioned engine to be installed, nor from the engine removed, if the
latter was a reconditioned engine.
b) If the engine removed is fitted with an Engine type plate (older car engines) and it is necessary to indicate an engine number in the vehicle
documents, the engine type plate then has to be taken off the engine removed and affixed at the same point to the reconditioned engine to be
installed. This plate should be affixed in addition to the reconditioned engine plate.
In the event that a vehicle owner has problems on the occasion of vehicle checks or when crossing international frontiers because of the lack of an
engine number, the workshop in question may in certain circumstances be held liable.
After replacing an engine, the engine number has to be altered in the vehicle maintenance booklet and on the vehicle data cards as well as in the
repair customer file. These documents should clearly show which engine is installed in the vehicle in order to ensure smooth parts service.
In addition, the copy of the vehicle data card which is held at the Parts Department of the relevant Branch or Importer should also be altered.
3.3 Model designation identification of crankcases and short blocks

Crankcases and short blocks available in the parts sector are not provided with an engine model designation identification and also not with an engine
number.
Extract from Transport Gazette 1973 p. 66

(applies only to the Federal Republic of Germany)
Official Gazette of the Federal Minister of Transport
Directive in respect of vehicle title document (VkBI 1972 p. 354)
Bonn, 28 December 1972
StV 2/36.15.17
To make it possible to identify the engine on the occasion of vehicle inspections (e.g. by an inspection authority when a vehicle is taken out of
service or at the Customs on the occasion of importation of vehicle), the workshop carrying out the repairs has to stamp the engine model designation
in the crankcase or the short block in the space provided for the engine number.
Example:
Type Engine model designation
201.024 102.962
Pursuant to the directive relating to the vehicle title document dated 20 June 1972, Part C. No. 9.1, a dash should be inserted at the relevant point in
the place of data which are no longer required in future (e.g. in the case of the "factory number of engine") in those instances where the older type of
title documents are used for the preparation of the vehicle title document.
The question which is now posed is what procedure should be adopted in respect of the vehicle title document or the vehicle registration document in
the event that the factory number of the engine from the past is still entered in the older type of title documents and a replacement engine with a new
number is now installed in the vehicle in question. Following consultation with the competent authorities in the regions, now provide the following
instructions:
1.
In view of the fact that the factory number of the engine is regarded as insignificant in respect of traffic legislation, no change requires to be made to
the vehicle documents. This also does not conflict with section 27 Para 1 StVZO pursuant to which the data in the vehicle title and registration
documents constantly have to reflect actual circumstances. This requirement namely covers only those particulars relating to actual circumstances
which are of significance in terms of traffic legislation. This is no longer the case, however, in respect of the factory number of the engine.
II.
In order to spare the relevant vehicle owner any misunderstandings or indeed possible disadvantages (e.g. on the occasion of checks when abroad),
recommend proceeding as follows:
In the event that the replacement engine installed has a different number than that entered in the title and registration document, the figures in the
column "engine factory number" shall be deleted and the following endorsement made at a suitable point both in the title as well as in the registration
document:
"Entry of engine factory number no longer necessary".

If the endorsement is made close to the deletion, it is sufficient to state:
"Entry no longer required".

The Federal Minister of Transport
Ip. p.
Wagner
AP01.00-P-1000ZZ Cleaning and Preserving Engine and Engine Compartment
AP01.00-P-1000ZZ Cleaning and preserving engine and engine compartment
Cleaning and preserving engine and engine compartment
AR01.00-P-0050-01A Remove Sealant

AR01.00-P-0050-01A Remove sealant
Repair materials
1 Wipe off operating fluids and other soiling from sealing surface using rags.
2 Spray Loctite(R) 7200 onto sealing surfaces and leave to work for about 10 to 20 minutes.
Observe manufacturer's processing instructions!
3 Remove loosened silicone sealant with a scraper from sealing surfaces and wipe off with rags.
Do not use any sharp-edged tools or abrasive paper as this will damage the sealing surfaces.
The sealing surfaces must feel even after treatment. The sealing surfaces must not be metallic bright; a thin layer of firmly adhering silicone
sealant must remain (see picture).
4 Absolutely be sure to thoroughly clean the sealing surface with cleaning spray Loctite(R) 7063 and blow off using compressed air.
Fully blow off the cleaning spray Loctite(R) 7063 before applying the new silicone sealant otherwise leaks can occur.
AR01.10-P-0110-01V Crank Engine With Starter
AR01.10-P-0110-01V Crank Engine With Starter
001 589 76 21 00
Compression recorder
220 589 00 99 00
Electrical connection set
Ensure that the ignition is switched off and the key has been removed from the ignition switch (electronic ignition switch control unit).
1 Remove cover (1) of the fuse and relay box (F1).
Installation: Check sealing rubber in the cover (1) and replace as necessary. The cover (1) must be located in the groove at the rear.
2 Pull out starter relay (N10/1clutch control) from relay location S.
3 Plug adapter cable (2) into plug position 3 of the starter relay (N10/1clutch control).
4 Link adapter line (2) to the cable of the compression recorder (7).
5 Open cover (3) of front backup fuse box (F32).

6 Connect connection terminal (4) of compression tester (7) to terminal (5) of the front prefuse box (F32).
7 Crank engine so that the contact switch (6) on the compression tester (7) is actuated.
AR33.10-P-0100-01VA Attach Engine Supporting Frame and Lifting Engine

AR33.10-P-0100-01VA Attach Engine Supporting Frame and Lifting Engine
240 589 00 61 00
Engine lifting fixture
Model 171
1 Hose
Shown on model 171
01 Engine hoisting device

2 Lifting device
3 Clamping bolt
Observe the manufacturer's assembly specifications and safety information on the engine lifting device (01), in order to avoid assembly faults.
1 Pull front engine cover up and out.

2.1 Remove hose (1).
Model 171
2.2 Unclip wiring harness from left longitudinal member.
Model 172
3 Mount preassembled engine lifting device (01) onto suspension strut towers and longitudinal members.
When mounting the engine lifting device (01), ensure that in the area of the longitudinal members suspension and strut towers no lines or hoses
are pinched and that the paintwork is not damaged.
4 Adjust the engine lifting device (01) and tighten the bolted connections.
5 Mount lifting device (2) onto engine's front lifting eye.
6 Tighten clamping bolt (3) and raise engine far enough to relieve the front engine mount.
Engine: Removal and Replacement
AR01.10-P-2400VA Remove/Install Engine

AR01.10-P-2400VA Remove/install engine
- TRANSMISSION 722.9
Modification notes
Steps 1-7
Steps 8 (Continued)-27
Steps 28-34
Power steering pump
Oil pan
Refrigerant compressor
Propeller shaft
Exhaust system
Injectors, injection valves, lines
Engine suspension, engine mounts, engine supports

Engine lubrication
Special Tools
AR01.10-P-2400VB Remove/Install Engine

AR01.10-P-2400VB Remove/install engine
Modification notes
Steps 1-16
Steps 17-34
Power steering pump
Oil pan
Propeller shaft
Clutch actuation
Exhaust system
Housing
Engine lubrication
Transmission complete
Special Tools
AR03.30-P-5000VA Remove/Install Retaining Lock For Crankshaft / Ring Gear

AR03.30-P-5000VA Remove/install retaining lock for crankshaft / ring gear
Steps 1-7
Special Tools
AR01.00-P-2410-02VB Disconnect Engine Wiring Harness

AR01.00-P-2410-02VB Disconnect engine wiring harness
1 Unclip electrical connectors (G3/3x1, G3/4x1, G3/5x1, G3/6x1) and electrical lines for O2 sensors out of retaining clamps.
2 Disconnect electrical connector (G3,mk3xl, G3/4x1, G3/5x1, G3/6x1) for O2 sensors.
3 Detach the heat shield (1) and disconnect plug (2) from the automatic transmission.
4 Release plug (3) and disconnect from the ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10).
5 Disconnect electrical connectors (4, 5).
6 Loosen engine wiring harness and place aside.
7 Detach ground line (6) from longitudinal member.
8 Remove nut (7) and electrical line for circuit 30 (8) for battery (G1).
9 Loosen nut (9) and remove electrical line for circuit 30 (10) from battery (G1).
10 Detach sealing (11) from partition wall and lay engine wiring harness on cylinder head cover.
AR01.00-P-2410-02VD Disconnect Engine Wiring Harness
AR01.00-P-2410-02VD Disconnect engine wiring harness

1 Unclip electrical connectors (G3/3x1, G3/4x1, G3/5x1, G3/6x1) and electrical lines for O2 sensors out of retaining clamps.
2 Disconnect electrical connector (G3/3x1, G3/4x1, G3/5x1, G3/6x1) for O2 sensors.
3 Detach connector from backup lamp switch (S16/2).
4 Release plug (3) and disconnect from the ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10).
5 Disconnect electrical connectors (4, 5).
6 Loosen engine wiring harness and place aside.
7 Detach ground line (6) from longitudinal member.
8 Remove nut (7) and electrical line for circuit 30 (8) for battery (G1).
9 Loosen nut (9) and remove electrical line for circuit 30 (10) from battery (G1).
10 Detach sealing (11) from partition wall and lay engine wiring harness on cylinder head cover.
AR01.10-P-2500-01A Position Portable Lifting Platform
AR01.10-P-2500-01A Position portable lifting platform
The lifting platform (01) is variably adjustable in the vehicle longitudinal direction at the adjusting screw (03). The mounting plates (2) guided in
rails are also variably adjustable in the vehicle longitudinal direction and transverse direction at the adjusting screw (04) to the transmission and front
axle carrier. The respectively individual mounting plates (2) can be adjusted for height by means of an adjusting rod (05) to the required tilt of the
transmission and front axle carrier.
Ensure that no cables of lines get caught when lowering.
1 Position lifting platform (01) with aggregate mount (02) under the front axle carrier (1).
Take note in doing so of even alignment of the mounting plates (2) on the engine/transmission unit.
2 Fix the whole engine/transmission unit by means of tensioning straps (3) to the mounting plates (2).
AR03.30-P-5000VA Remove/Install Retaining Lock For Crankshaft Ring Gear
AR03.30-P-5000VA Remove/install retaining lock for crankshaft ring gear
Steps 1-6
Special Tools
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Procedures
AR05.20-P-7201-06VA Loosen/tighten the center valves
Modification notes
Camshaft, camshaft adjustment
Special Tools
Counter hold camshafts at the rear with a Torx(R) screwdriver bit T60 to unfasten and fasten the center valves. Before installing, the center valves
must be lubricated with oil on the contact surfaces with the pulse wheels.
Center valves of right cylinder head

1 Loosen the center valves in the direction of the arrow.
2 Tighten the center valves against the direction of the arrow.
Center valves of left cylinder head

3 Loosen the center valves in the direction of the arrow.
4 Tighten the center valves against the direction of the arrow.
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Removal and Replacement
AR05.20-P-7201VB Remove/Install Camshaft Adjuster for Exhaust Camshafts

AR05.20-P-7201VB Remove/Install Camshaft Adjuster for Exhaust Camshafts
Removin/installing
Removing/installing
Steps 4-12
Special Tools
AR05.20-P-7201VA Remove/Install Camshafts

AR05.20-P-7201VA Remove/install camshafts
- Camshaft adjuster for intake camshafts
Modification notes
Steps 1 - 3
Steps 4 - 18
Step 19
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation
GF05.20-P-2100V Component Description For A Camshaft Solenoid
Location
The solenoids are located in front of the respective camshaft.
Task
The solenoids actuate the control plunger on the vane-cell adjuster according to the performance map related duty cycle. Depending on their position,
more or less pressure oil flows from the hollow camshaft into the oil galleries of the vane-type adjuster.
Design
The solenoids for camshaft adjustment are designed as proportional magnets, i.e. the direction of the armature and thus the position of the control
plunger in the vane-type adjuster are dependent on the intensity of the current in the coil.
Function
The solenoids before the camshafts are actuated by the ME control unit at the ground end by means of a PWM signal (150 Hz). The voltage supply for
the solenoid takes place from circuit 87. The vane-cell adjuster are actuated according to the performance map related duty cycle.
The maximum current (duty cycle 100 %) is emitted for a short time (about 0.5 seconds) for rapid adjusting of the anchor. A hold-in winding voltage
with a small duty cycle is then set afterwards. The coil resistance at room temperature is approx. 7.5 ohms.
Depending on their position, the oil volume in the vane-type adjusters is controlled. This takes place through differently arranged holes in the control
plunger as well as through oil ducts in the vane-cell adjusters. The adjusting range of the camshaft is limited by the forming of the vane-cell adjuster
mechanically. If the solenoids are no longer actuated then resetting takes place against the direction of rotation.
The following positions are possible:

- Filling the oil gallery
Pressure oil flows out of the hollow camshafts into the vane- cell adjuster. The camshafts adjust themselves to the respective direction of rotation.
The inlet camshafts adjust to "advanced". The exhaust camshafts adjust themselves due to their reversed direction of rotation to "retarded".
- Oil gallery closed
Each camshaft position is detected by a camshaft Hall sensor. Once the requested adjustment has been achieved then the respective solenoid will
be actuated in such a way that oil galleries in the vane-cell adjusters are closed.
- Emptying the oil gallery
The camshafts adjust themselves against their direction of rotation.
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
AR05.20-P-7295V Remove/Install Solenoid Camshaft
AR05.20-P-7295V Remove/install solenoid camshaft
- Right cylinder head
Steps 1-8
Position Sensor
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
AR05.20-P-7295VA Remove/Install Solenoid Camshaft
AR05.20-P-7295VA Remove/install solenoid camshaft
- LH cylinder head
Modification notes
Steps 1-9
Position sensor
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
AR01.00-P-1200VA Testing the Compression Pressure
AR01.00-P-1200VA Testing the compression pressure
Steps 1-11
Step 12
Compression Pressure
Special Tools
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
AR01.00-P-1300-01VA Connect Cylinder Leakage Testing Unit
AR01.00-P-1300-01VA Connect cylinder leakage testing unit
Special Tools
1 Calibrate cylinder leakage tester (04). tester (pressure loss).

2 Screw threaded adapter (06) to high-pressure testing hose (05).
3 Turn threaded adapter (06) with high-pressure testing hose (05) in tapped bore for spark plug.
4 Mount high-pressure testing hose (05) on cylinder leakage tester (04).
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair
AR05.20-P-7201-05VA Lock the gear backlash compensation
The tooth flanks (1, 2) are held against each other by spring pressure and should not be skewed, otherwise the camshaft adjuster will be irreparably
damaged
1 Insert the drift (3, diameter 3mm) into the bore (4) of the cover plate and lock the tooth flanks (1, 2) with each other.
Push the drift (3) through to the end of tooth flank (2).
To allow the drift (3) to be inserted more easily, align the tooth flanks with each other (in the direction of the arrows).
Shown on camshaft adjuster, engine 273.965
Shown on camshaft adjuster, engine 272.968

Camshaft: Testing and Inspection
AR05.20-P-6010VA Check Basic Position of Camshafts
AR05.20-P-6010VA Check basic position of camshafts
- with front covers fitted at the cylinder head at 55° crankshaft angle before TDC
Steps 1-6
Camshaft: Testing and Inspection
AR05.20-P-6010-01VB Inspect Basic Position of Camshaft
AR05.20-P-6010-01VB Inspect basic position of camshaft
Shown without pulse wheels on the camshaft adjusters

1 Crank the engine at the crankshaft in Turn the direction of engine rotation (arrow) to 40 degrees crank angle after ignition TDC.
The 40 degrees marking (1) on the belt pulley must be aligned with the positioning edge (2) on the timing case cover.
The markings (3) on the camshaft adjusters face upward, and the markings (4) align with the contact surfaces on the cylinder head covers.
Camshaft: Service and Repair
AR05.20-P-6992VA Remove/install camshafts
Steps 1-5
Steps 6-19
Steps 20-21
Camshaft, Camshaft Adjustment
Special Tools
Auxiliary Repair Materials

Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Testing and Inspection
AR05.00-P-2010VA Inspecting hydraulic valve clearance compensation elements
Steps 1-8
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair
AR05.00-P-2011VA Remove/install hydraulic valve clearance compensation elements
Steps 1-10
Cylinder Block Assembly: Procedures
AR03.10-P-7021-01SX Removing/installing oil deflector plate
Oil pump
Oil pump
Shown on engine 273
1 Unscrew bolts (1).

2 Remove oil baffle (2) from crankcase.
3 Install in the reverse sequence.
Cylinder Block Assembly: Removal and Replacement
AR03.10-P-7021-01SX Removing/installing oil deflector plate
Oil pump
Shown on engine 273
1 Unscrew bolts (1).

2 Remove oil baffle (2) from crankcase.
3 Install in the reverse sequence.
Balance Shaft: Service and Repair
AR03.20-P-1000VA Remove/Install the Balancing Shaft
AR03.20-P-1000VA Removing/installing the balancing shaft
Steps 1-6
Steps 7-15
Balancing Shaft
Balance Shaft: Service and Repair
AR03.20-P-1000VA Remove/Install Balance Shaft
AR03.20-P-1000VA Remove/install balance shaft
Steps 1-19
Torque converter
Balance shaft
Special Tools
Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair
AR03.10-P-6111-06VA Install and gauge connecting rod bearings
Test specifications for crankshaft bearing clearance
Assignment of conrod bearings to conrod bearing journals on engine 272
1 Clean the bearing points of connecting rod, connecting rod bearing caps and connecting rod bearing journals with a chamois leather.
Blow through oil ducts in direction of flow oil with compressed air. Never use hard objects for cleaning.
2 The assignment of connecting rods to connecting rod bearing journals is indicated on the back of connecting rod bearing shells by a colored dot.
Only the assigned color combinations of the conrod bearing shells (per the table) may be installed together. The sequence of the individual color
combinations on the connecting rod bearing journals can be selected at random.
3 Insert connecting rod bearing shells (1) into connecting rod and connecting rod bearing cap (2).
The anti-twist locks (3) of the conrod bearing shells (1) must be located in the slots (4) of the conrods (2) and the conrod bearing caps.
Connecting Rod: Testing and Inspection
AR03.10-P-6111-01VA Check connecting rod bolts
Test specifications for connecting rod bolts
Connecting rod bolt shank length inspection
1 Measure length (L).
If the length (L) exceeds maximum permissible size, the connecting rod bolts must be replaced!
Connecting Rod: Service and Repair
AR03.10-P-6111-01VA Check Connecting Rod Bolts
Connecting rod bolt length inspection

Connecting Rod: Service and Repair
AR03.10-P-6111-02VA Tighten Connecting Rod Bolts
AR03.10-P-6111-02VA Tighten connecting rod bolts
Connecting rod
Tightening angle
1 Lubricate the bolt thread and head contact surface with engine oil.
2 Tighten connecting rod bolts to step 1.
If no angle tightener is available, continue turning the connecting rod bolts to the specified angle using a socket wrench and locking handle.
Do not use a flexi-rod torque wrench for tightening in order to avoid any angle errors.
Shown on engine 272

Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair
AR03.20-P-4291-03VA Determine Crankshaft Bearing Axial Play
AR03.20-P-4291-03VA Determine crankshaft bearing axial play
Modification Notes
Modification notes
Special Tools
Only the one washer disc thickness is used.

1 Install dial indicator (2) with dial indicator holder (1)
2 Using a suitable tool, press the crankshaft axially on one side up to the attachment and hold it.
3 Set scale of dial gage (2) to zero.
4 Using a suitable tool, press the crankshaft axially on the other side up to the attachment and hold it.
5 Read off measurement value at dial indicator (2).
The measured value corresponds to the axial play of the crankshaft.
AR03.20-P-4351-02VA Tightening Procedure For Crankshaft Bearing Caps
AR03.20-P-4351-02VA Tightening procedure for crankshaft bearing caps
Crankshaft bearing cap
Tightening sequence for the crankshaft bearing cap and the crankshaft fitted bearing cap
Tighten the crankshaft bearing cap (2, 3, 4) and the crankshaft fitted bearing cap (1) individually in the numerical sequence. The arrow identifies
direction of travel.
Tightening sequence for bolts for the crankshaft bearing cap and the crankshaft fitted bearing cap
1 Lubricate bolts for bearing cap at thread and bolt head contact surfaces.
2 Tighten bolts for bearing cap in the specified sequence.
If no torquing angle wrench is available for the final tightening, the bearing cap bolts can be torqued further by the specified angle in a single
operation using a wrench and locking handle. Do not use a flexi-rod torque wrench for tightening in order to avoid any angle errors.
3 Tighten the screws:

^ Tighten bolt 1 (M10) to stage 1.
^ Tighten side bolt 5 (final tightening).
^ Tighten bolt 3 (M8) with the stage 2 tightening angle (final tightening).
AR03.20-P-4360-01VA Assign Crankshaft Bearing Shells
AR03.20-P-4360-01VA Assign crankshaft bearing shells
Inspection data for crankshaft bearing clearance
Assignment of crankshaft bearing shell upper half (crankcase)
Assignment of crankshaft bearing shell lower half (bearing cap)
1 Clean crankshaft bearing points in crankcase, crankshaft bearing caps and crankshaft journal for crankshaft using a chamois leather.
After bearing damage has occurred, it may be necessary to remove swarf from the conrod bores and from the crankshaft and crankcase oil
galleries as well as from the crankcase!
- Do not use a hard object for cleaning.
- Blow through oil galleries in direction of flow oil with compressed air.
The top main bearing halves are assigned to the crankshaft journal by means of a colored coding (on the rear of the main bearing shells) and numbers
or chisel punches, which are stamped on the crankcase (per the arrows).
Only assigned color and numerical combinations (per the table) may be fitted together.
^ The bottom crankshaft bearing shells are assigned to the crankshaft journal of the crankshaft by means of letters (initial letter of the particular
color).
^ The colored coding of the lower crankshaft journal is located at its rear.
^ The initial letters of the particular colors are engraved on the crankshaft journal.
When installing the crankshaft bearing shells it is important to keep to the order of the colors which is engraved on the crankshaft journal!
Arrow identifies direction of travel.

- First letter r: A crankshaft bearing shell must be inserted in the crankshaft bearing cap (1) with the colored coding red
- Second letter b: A crankshaft bearing shell must be inserted in the crankshaft bearing cap (2) with the colored coding blue.
- Third letter v: A crankshaft bearing shell must be inserted in the crankshaft bearing cap (3) with the colored coding violet
- Fourth letter w: A crankshaft bearing shell must be inserted in the crankshaft bearing cap (4) with the colored coding white.
2 Insert top crankshaft bearing shell halves (1) with the oil drill holes (2) and the oil grooves (3) into the crankcase.
When doing this, ensure that the anti-twist locks (4) of the crankshaft bearing shell halves (1) are located in the recesses of the crankcase.
3 Insert bottom bearing shell halves (7) into the bearing caps (6).
When doing this, ensure that the anti-twist locks (5) of the bottom crankshaft bearing shell halves (7) are located in the recesses of the crankshaft
bearing caps (6).
4 Insert crankshaft (7) in the crankcase.

5 Install top thrust washers (8).
There is only one fitted bearing width and therefore only one washer disc width is used.
The oil grooves of the thrust washers (8) must point toward the crankshaft webs (10).
6 Install crankshaft bearing caps (2) according to their identification.

Installation: The anti-twist locks (11) of the lower thrust washers (8) must be located in the slots (12) of the fit bearing cap (3). The oil grooves
(9) of the lower thrust washers (8) must point toward the crankshaft webs (10).
When installing the crankshaft fit bearing cap (3), hold both repair thrust washers (8) tight.
Crankshaft: Description and Operation
AH03.20-P-4351-02VA Interference fit of crankshaft bearing cap
^ The crankshaft bearing cap (main bearing cap (1), fitted bearing cap (2)) are to be machined together with the cylinder crankcase and must not get
exchanged with each other.
^ The crankshaft bearing caps are fitted on the side in the crankcase and must only be mounted in one position. If the installation position is correct,
the semicircle will point (3) in the direction of travel (arrow).
^ The crankshaft bearing caps are numbered consecutively on the semicircles (3) beginning with the first crankshaft bearing cap at the front.
Crankshaft: Service and Repair
AR03.20-P-4351VA Remove/install crankshaft
Modification notes
Steps 1-24
Steps 25-47
Steps 48-52

Connecting rod
Oil pump
Special Tools
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair
AR03.30-P-1600VA Remove/install belt pulley/vibration damper
Steps 1-11
Flywheel, Driven Plate, Vibration Damper, Starter Ring Gear

Piston: Procedures
AR03.10-P-7021-02VA Assigning a standard size piston to a cylinder bore
Test values for cylinder bore
Test values for pistons

Cylinder bore diameter identification
1 Assign piston to the cylinder bore
Piston diameters are specified in two tolerances. The piston diameters are differentiated from each other by the identification x or (x). This is
located on the top of the piston crown. Pistons marked with x must only be installed in cylinder bores marked with x.
Pistons marked with x must only be installed in cylinder bores marked with x.
Piston diameter identification
Cylinder bore diameters are specified in two tolerances. The cylinder bore diameters are differentiated from each other by the identification x or (x).
This is located at the bottom right on the crankcase at the mount for engine support.
Shown on engine 272

Piston: Removal and Replacement
AR03.10-P-7021VA Remove/install piston
Steps 1.1-9
Steps 10-33.2
Test specifications for cylinder bore

Test specifications for pistons
Connecting rod
Oil pump
Special Tools
Piston Ring: Procedures
AR03.10-P-7311-01VA Measure Vertical Clearance of Piston Rings

AR03.10-P-7311-01VA Measure vertical clearance of piston rings
Check values for piston rings
Compression ring side clearance measurement
1 Measure vertical clearance between compression ring and mounting groove in piston with a feeler gauge for the compression ring concerned;
replace compression ring or piston if necessary.
The vertical clearance of the oil scraper ring cannot be measured because of its three part structure. The oil scraper ring must be replaced along
with the compression rings.
AR03.10-P-7311-02VA Measure Piston Ring End Gap
AR03.10-P-7311-02VA Measure piston ring end gap
Piston ring end gap measurement
1 Clean the cylinder barrel.

2 Insert both compression rings one after the other above running surface in the cylinder bore, and measure end gap with a feeler gauge; replace
piston rings if necessary.
The end gap of the oil scraper ring cannot be measured because of its three-part structure. The oil scraper ring must be replaced along with the
compression rings.
Piston Ring: Removal and Replacement
AR03.10-P-7311VA Removing/Installing Piston Rings

AR03.10-P-7311VA Removing/installing piston rings
- Piston removed
Steps 1-9
Inspection Data For Piston Rings
Inspection Data For Piston Rings
Special Tools
AR03.10-P-7311VA Remove, Install Piston Rings

AR03.10-P-7311VA Remove, install piston rings
- Piston removed
Steps 1-7
Test values for piston rings
Test values for piston rings

Special Tools
Cylinder Head Assembly: Procedures
AH01.30-P-1000-02V Notes on Sealant Path For Front Cover to Cylinder Head

AH01.30-P-1000-02V Notes on sealant path for front cover to cylinder head
Application of sealant to the right front cover

The line (A) identifies the sealant run.
The sealing compound must only be applied along the line (A) in the form of a bead with a height and width of 1.0 mm (+0.5 mm).
The sealing compound must be applied within 10 min.
The sealant bead must not be spread. Only the approved seal be used.
Application of sealant to the left front cover

AH01.30-P-1000-04RX Information on Applying Sealant to Cylinder Head Gasket
AH01.30-P-1000-04RX Information on applying sealant to cylinder head gasket
Information on applying sealant to cylinder head gasket
Before mounting the cylinder heads, apply sealant around the timing case cover on the cylinder crankcase.
Repair information
The sealing surface must be cleaned. Sealant should be applied only to the specified surface, in the form of a bead 2.0 mm (±0.5 mm) in height and
width (per the picture).
The sealant remains workable for 10 min.
The bead should not be spread.

AH01.30-P-1000-05A Information on Cylinder Head Contact Surface
AH01.30-P-1000-05A Information on cylinder head contact surface
The cylinder head contact surface should only be machined if there is mechanical damage.
It should not be machined (by face grinding) if the contact surface of the cylinder head is uneven (warped) in the longitudinal and transverse
directions.
When the cylinder head is mounted again, surface warping will be evened out when the cylinder head bolts are tightened.
Stock removal from the cylinder head and cylinder crankcase of an engine should together be no more than 0.3 mm
If the cylinder head contact surface is machined, the valve seats must be reset.
AR01.30-P-5800-03VA Checking Cylinder Head Bolts
AR01.30-P-5800-03VA Checking cylinder head bolts
Cylinder head/cylinder head bolts

Cylinder head bolt length inspection
If the length (L) is greater than the maximum permissible dimension, use new cylinder head bolts.
AR01.30-P-5800-04V Pull Out Guide Rail Pins at Cylinder Head
AR01.30-P-5800-04V Pull out guide rail pins at cylinder head
Special Tools
Shown on tensioning rail bolts
Only extract the tensioning rail bolts (1) using the impact extractor (03) in order to avoid damaging the contact surface on the front cover.
1 Screw threaded insert (02) into the tensioning rail bolts (1) and extract the tensioning rail bolts (1) using an impact extractor (03).
The guide rail pins (2) are like tensioning rail bolts (1).
AR01.30-P-5800-07VA Tightening Specifications For Cylinder Head Bolts
AR01.30-P-5800-07VA Tightening specifications for cylinder head bolts
Modification Notes
Modification notes
Cylinder head
Tightening of the cylinder head bolts must take place according to the numerical sequence given in the figure. Loosening of bolts takes place in
reverse order.
1 Tighten cylinder head bolts (1-8) to stage 1.
3 Tighten cylinder head bolts (1-8) to stage 2 (follow-up tightening).
6 Tighten bolts (9).
M272
Cylinder Head Assembly: Removal and Replacement
AR01.30-P-5700VA Remove/Install Front Cover on the Cylinder Head

AR01.30-P-5700VA Removing/installing front cover on the cylinder head
- Right side
Steps 1-8
Steps 9-12
Cylinder Head
AR01.30-P-5700VB Removing/Installing Front Cover on Cylinder Head

AR01.30-P-5700VB Removing/installing front cover on cylinder head
- Left side
Steps 1-6
Steps 7-19
Cylinder Head
Special Tools

AR01.30-P-5800VA Remove/Install Cylinder Head

AR01.30-P-5800VA Remove/install cylinder head
- RH cylinder head
Modification notes
Step 1
Steps 2-26
Steps 27-36

Exhaust system
Starter
Oil pan
Cylinder head
Special Tools
Repair materials
AR01.30-P-5800VB Remove/Install Cylinder Head

AR01.30-P-5800VB Remove/install cylinder head
- LH cylinder head
Modification notes
Steps 1-4
Steps 4 (Continued)-29
Steps 30-38

Exhaust system
Air shutoff valve
Cylinder head
Special Tools
Repair materials


The sealing compound must be applied within 10 min. The sealant bead must not be spread. Only the approved sealant may be used.

AR01.30-P-5700VA Remove/Install Front Cover on Cylinder Head
AR01.30-P-5700VA Remove/install front cover on cylinder head
- RH cylinder head
Steps 1-12
Cylinder head
Repair materials
AR01.30-P-5700VB Remove/Install Front Cover on Cylinder Head

AR01.30-P-5700VB Remove/install front cover on cylinder head
- LH cylinder head
Steps 1-19
Cylinder head
Special Tools
Repair materials
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
AR07.03-P-1460-01VA Danger! Reduce fuel pressure through service valve
Risk of explosion caused by fuel igniting, risk of poisoning caused by inhaling and swallowing fuel and risk of injury to eyes and skin caused by
contact with fuel
No fire, sparks, open flames or smoking. Pour fuels only into suitable and appropriately marked containers.Wear protective clothing when
handling fuel.
Injection nozzles, injection valves, lines
Special Tools
Shown on engine 272 in model 171 without fuel tank with exterior filter, code 917
1 Unscrew protective cap (1) of the service valve (2) of the fuel distributor.
2 Insert end of the pressure hose (01) into the container (3).
3 Screw on union nut of the angled piece (01 a) to the service valve
(2).
At this point, the service valve (2) is opened and the fuel pressure in the fuel distributor is reduced. Fuel escapes from the end of the hose.
4 Unscrew the union nut of the angled piece (01a) from the service valve (2).
5 Screw protective cap (1) onto the service valve (2) of the fuel distributor.
For vehicles with fuel tank with exterior filter, code 917 the protective cap (1) must be tighten with torque.
Ensure that the sealing ring of the protective cap (1) is replaced.
Valve Cover: Procedures
AH01.30-P-1000-08V Notes on Application of Sealant to Cylinder Head Cover

AH01.30-P-1000-08V Notes on application of sealant to cylinder head cover
Sealant beads on the right cylinder head cover

The lines (A) identify the sealant beads.
The sealant must be applied along the specified lines (A) in the form of a sealant bead of
1.0 mm ±0.2 mm.
The sealant must be applied within 10 min.
The sealant bead must not be spread. Only the approved sealant may be used.
Sealant beads on the left cylinder head cover
sealant beads on the left cylinder head cover

The sealant must be applied along the specified lines (A) in the form of a sealant bead of
1.0 mm ± 0.2 mm.
AR01.20-P-5014-03VA Bolt Tightening Diagram For Cylinder Head Cover
AR01.20-P-5014-03VA Bolt tightening diagram for cylinder head cover
Cylinder head
Cylinder Head Cover Bolts
Right cylinder head cover
Right cylinder head cover

Tighten cylinder head cover bolts in the numerical sequence.
1 Tighten bolts (1-18) in the 1st stage.
2 Tighten bolts (1-18) in the 2nd stage.
Left cylinder head cover
Left cylinder head cover

Tighten cylinder head cover bolts in the numerical sequence.
1 Tighten bolts (1-18) in the 1st stage.
2 Tighten bolts (1-18) in the 2nd stage.
Valve Cover: Removal and Replacement
AH01.30-P-1000-08V Notes on Application of Sealing Compound

AH01.30-P-1000-08V Notes on the course of the application of sealing compound on a cylinder head cover
AR01.20-P-5014-03VA Bolt Tightening Diagram For Cylinder Head cover

AR01.20-P-5014-03VA Bolt tightening diagram for cylinder head
cover
Bolt of cylinder head cover

- 1st stage ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm
- 2nd stage .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 90°
AR01.20-P-5014VA Removing/Installing the Cylinder Head Cover

AR01.20-P-5014VA Removing/installing the cylinder head cover
- Left side
Removing/installing
Steps 1-24
Injection Nozzles, Injection Valves, Lines

Cylinder Head
Special Tools
AR01.20-P-5014VB Removing/Installing the Cylinder Head Cover

AR01.20-P-5014VB Removing/installing the cylinder head cover
- Right side
Steps 1-4
Steps 5-17
Cylinder Head
AH01.30-P-1000-08V Notes on Application of Sealant to Cylinder Head Cover

AH01.30-P-1000-08V Notes on application of sealant to cylinder head cover

The sealant must be applied along the specified lines (A) in the form of a sealant bead of 1.0 mm ± 0.2 mm.
Sealant beads on the left cylinder head cover
sealant beads on the left cylinder head cover

The sealant must be applied along the specified lines (A) in the form of a sealant bead of 1.0 mm ± 0.2 mm.
AR01.20-P-5014VA Remove/Install Cylinder Head Cover
AR01.20-P-5014VA Remove/install cylinder head cover
- Left cylinder head cover
Remove/install Steps
Steps 1-24
Cylinder head
Special Tools
Repair materials
AR01.20-P-5014VB Remove/Install Cylinder Head Cover

AR01.20-P-5014VB Remove/install cylinder head cover
- Right cylinder head cover
Steps 1-17
Cylinder head
Repair materials
Valve Spring: Service and Repair
AR05.30-P-3500VA Removing/installing valve springs and / or valve stem seals
Steps 1-7
Steps 8-20
Special Tools
Special Tools

Valve: Testing and Inspection
AR05.30-P-4201-01VA Inspect valves
Test values for valves
Valve dimensions
1 Check dimensions (A, B, C, D,) on valve.

Valve: Service and Repair
AR05.30-P-3511VA Remove/Install Valves
AR05.30-P-3511VA Removing/installing valves
Steps 1-2
Steps 3-12
Special Tools

Valve: Service and Repair
AR05.30-P-3511SX Removing/Installing Valves
AR05.30-P-3511SX Removing/installing valves
- Cylinder head removed
Remove/install
Remove/install Steps 1-11

Special Tools
Commercially available tools

Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
AP13.22-P-1351VA Inspect Poly V-Belt For Wear and Damage
AP13.22-P-1351VA Inspect poly V-belt for wear and damage
Steps 1-4
Steps 5-6
Special Tools
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
AP13.22-P-1352VA Check Poly-V-Belt In Visible Area For Wear
AP13.22-P-1352VA Check poly-V-belt in visible area for wear
Steps 1 - 5
Step 6
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
AR13.22-P-1202VA Remove/Install Poly V-Belt
AR13.22-P-1202VA Remove/install poly V-belt
Special Tools
Steps 1-10
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
AR13.22-P-3902-02VA Routing Diagram of Poly V-Belt
AR13.22-P-3902-02VA Routing Diagram Of Poly V-belt
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
AR13.25-P-3200VA Remove/install poly V-belt tensioning device
Steps 1-9
Belt Tensioning Device

Bolt, Vibration Damper To Coolant Pump
Special Tools
Engine Mount: Service and Repair
AR22.10-P-4340VA Remove/Install Right Engine Support
AR22.10-P-4340VA Remove/install right engine support
Steps 1-15

Engine support (engine side)
Special Tools
Repair materials
AR22.10-P-4350VA Remove/Install Left Engine Support
AR22.10-P-4350VA Remove/install left engine support
Steps 1-15
Engine support (engine side)
Special Tools
Repair materials
AR22.10-P-1100VA Remove/Install Engine Mount
AR22.10-P-1100VA Remove/install engine mount
Steps 1-13
Special Tools
Repair materials
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair
AR13.21-P-3350VA Remove/install poly V-belt guide pulley
Steps 1-6
Coolant Pump, Coolant Thermostat

Engine Lubrication: Removal and Replacement
AP18.00-P-0101VA Engine oil and filter change
Steps 1-13
Oil Filter
Oil Pan
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools

Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
AR18.00-P-1250SX Check oil pressure
Steps 1-10

Special Tools
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
AR18.40-P-3510VA Remove/install oil dipstick guide tube 20.2.04
Modification Notes
Steps 1-10
Oil Pan
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair
AR18.30-P-3481VA Removing/installing the oil/water heat exchanger at the oil filter
Steps 1-11
Hydraulic Fluid Reservoir

Oil Cooling System

Oil Filter: Service and Repair
AP18.00-P-0101-06V Replace Oil Filter Element, Drain Oil Filter
AP18.00-P-0101-06V Replace oil filter element, drain oil filter
Oil filter
Special Tools
Shown on engine 272.963

1 Remove front engine cover.
2 Remove screw cap (1) using socket and remove.
Use a drain pan to catch the dripping oil.
3 Remove oil filter element (2) from screw cap (1).

4 Replace sealing rings (3).
5 Push new oil filter element (2) onto screw cap (1).
6 Screw screw-cap (1) into oil filter housing and tighten.
7 Mount front engine cover after engine test run and leak tightness test.
Oil Filter Housing: Service and Repair
AR18.20-P-3471VA Remove/install oil filter housing
Modification notes
Steps 1-18
Oil filter
Coolant pump, coolant thermostat
Special Tools
Oil Level Sensor: Description and Operation
Component Description For The Oil Level Check Switch
Location
The oil level check switch is in the oil pan; the outer connector is located on the oil pan.
Task
To recognize reaching a minimum oil level in the oil pan.
Design
In the oil pan there is a dry-reed contact mounted in the float chamber and a float with ring magnet. A short line leads to the connector on the side on
the oil pan.
Function
When the oil level is adequate the contact to engine ground is closed. If the switch opens due to oil starvation then this is recognized by the ME-SFI
[ME] control unit and a message sent over the CAN to the instrument cluster.
Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair
AR18.40-P-5113SX Remove/install oil level check switch
Steps 1-6
Oil sensor
Oil Level Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
GF18.40-P-4114V Component Description For The Oil Level Check Switch
Location
The oil level check switch is in the oil pan; the outer connector is located on the oil pan.
Task
To recognize reaching a minimum oil level in the oil pan.
Design
In the oil pan there is a dry-reed contact mounted in the float chamber and a float with ring magnet. A short line leads to the connector on the side on
the oil pan.
Function
When the oil level is adequate the contact to engine ground is closed. If the switch opens due to oil starvation then this is recognized by the ME-SFI
[ME] control unit and a message sent over the CAN to the instrument cluster.
Oil Pan: Removal and Replacement
AH01.45-P-0001-01VA Notes on Application of Sealant to Oil Pan

AH01.45-P-0001-01VA Notes on application of sealant to oil pan
AR01.45-P-7500VA Remove/Install the Oil Pan

AR01.45-P-7500VA Removing/installing the oil pan
Removing/installing
Steps 1-20
Engine Suspension, Engine Mounts, Engine Supports

Engine Suspension, Engine Mounts, Engine Supports
Transmission Cooler
Housing
Complete Manual Transmission
Engine Lubrication
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
AR01.45-P-7555VB Remove/Install Oil Pan Bottom Section

AR01.45-P-7555VB Removing/installing oil pan bottom section
Steps 1-5
Steps 6-8
Oil Pan
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
AH01.45-P-0001-01VB Notes on Application of Sealant to Oil Pan

AH01.45-P-0001-01VB Notes on application of sealant to oil pan
Modification notes
Oil pan with rear sump

The sealing surface must be cleaned. The sealant must only be applied to the specified surface in the form of a bead and a height and width of 2.0 mm
(± 0.5 mm).
The sealant bead must not be spread. Only the approved sealing compound may be used.
Oil pan with front sump

Oil pan with middle sump

AR01.45-P-7500VA Remove/Install Oil Pan
AR01.45-P-7500VA Remove/install oil pan
Modification notes
Steps 1-19
Step 20
Oil pan
Transmission oil cooling system

Housing
Complete manual transmission
Engine lubrication
Special Tools
Repair materials
AR01.45-P-7555VB Remove/Install Bottom Part of Oil Pan

AR01.45-P-7555VB Remove/install bottom part of oil pan
Modification notes
Steps 1-8
Oil pan
Engine lubrication
Special Tools
Repair materials
Oil Pump: Procedures
AR18.10-P-2140-01TX Separate Oil-Pump Chain

AR18.10-P-2140-01TX Separate oil-pump chain
Special Tools
1 Screw the pressure screw (02) with the pressure pin (02a) into the chain separating tool (03).
2 Fit chain separating tool (03) onto oil pump chain.
3 Turn in pressure screw (02).
Turn in until the pressure pin (02a) contacts the bolt on the oil pump chain (arrow).
4 Turn in pressure pin (02a) and press out bolt of oil pump chain.
5 Unscrew pressure screw (02) and remove chain separating tool (03).
6 Remove bolt (1) of oil pump chain from chain separating tool (03).
AR18.10-P-2140-02TX Rivet Oil Pump Chain
AR18.10-P-2140-02TX Rivet oil pump chain
Special Tools
1 Connect new oil pump chain (2) and old oil pump chain (1) together using an assembly link (3).
2 Slowly rotate crankshaft in the direction of engine rotation (arrowed) until it is possible to connect both ends of the new oil pump chain (2).
3 Remove assembly link (3) and old oil pump chain (1).
4 Connect ends of new oil pump chain (2) using a riveted link (4).
Insert riveted link (4) from front.
5 Place assembly insert with digit F10 into rivet press tool (arrow) and fix in place by a bolt (28).
6 Place moveable assembly insert with digit D10 into rivet press tool (arrow).
7 Insert outer plate (5) of the rivet link (4) into the assembly insert with the digit D10 (arrow).
8 Place rivet press tool on the new oil pump chain (2).
Fit in such a way that the rollers of the riveted link (4) rest on the spacer web (arrow).
9 Tighten pressure screw (6) until a firm resistance is felt.
While turning the pressure screw (6), ensure that pin in rivet link (4) is inserted in holes in the external mounting link (5).
10 Remove rivet press tool.
11 Move assembly insert with digit D10 onto rivet profile (arrow).
12 Place rivet press tool on new oil pump chain (2) riveted link (4).
Fit the in such a way that pins for the riveted link (4) are located exactly in the center of prism support (arrow).
13 Tighten pressure screw (6).
The torque applied to pressure screw (6) is about 30 to 35 Nm (reference value).
14 Rivet bolts for riveted link (4) individually.
15 Test riveted joints (arrow) and rivet the pins again if necessary.
Oil Pump: Removal and Replacement
AR18.10-P-2000SX Remove/Install Tensioning Device For Oil Pump Chain

AR18.10-P-2000SX Remove/install the tensioning device for the oil pump chain
Steps 1 - 3
Oil Pump
AR18.10-P-2140SX Replace Oil Pump Chain

AR18.10-P-2140SX Replace the oil pump chain
Steps 1 - 4
AR18.10-P-6020VA Remove/Install Oil Pump

AR18.10-P-6020VA Remove/install oil pump
Modification notes
Steps 1-6
Oil pump
Special Tools
AR18.10-P-2140SX Replace the Oil Pump Chain

AR18.10-P-2140SX Replace the oil pump chain
Steps 1-4
Oil Spray Jet: Service and Repair
AR18.00-P-4000QB Remove/install oil spray nozzles (pistons)
Steps 1-6
Oil pump
Engine lubrication, engine oil cooling, general

Intake Manifold: Description and Operation
GF09.20-P-6010V Intake Manifold Component Description
Location
The intake manifold is located between the cylinder banks.
Task
Optimizes engine torque curve by means of two different intake manifold lengths Improves flow via swing-out tumble flaps in the intake port.
Design
The intake manifold is assembled out of several magnesium pressure castings. During assembly, the individual intake manifolds for each cylinder and
the air manifold collecting sections are in the center. The intake manifold cannot be disassembled. A total of four shafts are stored in the intake
manifold.
The vacuum pressure for the aneroid capsules is supplied by a vacuum reservoir in the intake manifold when the switchover valves are actuated. The
reservoir volume is designed for several operations without renewed evacuation.
Intake manifold switchover, function
The individual intake manifolds each approx. 800 mm long, are arranged in a spiral shape around the air collecting volume. Each single intake manifold
has a further opening to the air collecting volume somewhere in the middle. These can be opened or closed by rotating longitudinal switch flap shafts.
The switch flaps of a cylinder bank are interconnected by a shaft and each of the flap is actuated by an aneroid capsule in case of engine 272 BOTH
aneroid capsules for the intake manifold switchover are connected to the variable intake manifold switchover valve via hose pipes. Engine 273 has only
one aneroid capsule. The flap shafts are connected in the intake manifold. The switch flaps open by spring force without actuation and enable the short
suction way
At higher speeds (from approx. 3500/min) the intake manifold switchover aneroid capsules are ventilated and the switch flaps opened by the spring
force. The intake air takes the short intake route.
At lower speed (up to approx. 3500/min) the intake manifold aneroid capsules are pressurized with vacuum pressure and the longitudinal switch flaps
closed. The intake air takes the long intake route. The result is improved cylinder charge and thus an increase in torque.
Tumble flap switchover function
At partial load, tumble flaps can be fully swung out in each cylinder intake port in the intake manifold. This closes the intake manifold by around 50 %.
The flow speed of the intake air is increased and allows for improved distribution of the fuel/air mixture in the combustion chamber. The tumble flaps
are actuated via an aneroid capsule and linkage.
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair
AR09.20-P-1961VA Removing and Installing the Resonance Intake Manifold
Steps 1 - 26.1
Steps 27.1 - 30
Control Unit
Engine Wiring Harness
Cylinder Head

Intake Manifold
ME-SFI Fuel Injection And Ignition System
Special Tools
Rear Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
AR03.20-P-3063VA Replacing the Rear Crankshaft Radial Seal
AR03.20-P-3063VA Replacing the rear crankshaft radial seal
Removing/installing
Steps 4-18
Crankcase, Timing Case Cover, End Cover

Special Tools

AR03.20-P-3063-01VA Installing Rear Crankshaft Radial Sealing Ring
AR03.20-P-3063-01VA Installing rear crankshaft radial sealing ring
Modification notes
Special Tools
Repair materials
The crankshaft radial sealing ring (1) is vulcanized into the end cover (2) and can only, therefore, be replaced together with the end cover (2). Do not
reuse the end cover (2) with the rear crankshaft radial sealing ring (1) after removal.
The crankshaft radial sealing ring (1) has a protective lip (1s) in addition to the sealing lip (1d). The sealing lip (1d), protective lip (1s) and contact
surface (3a) at the crankshaft flange (3) must not be lubricated for assembly!
1 Clean and degrease crankcase (4) and oil pan in the area of the applied sealant as well as contact surface (3a) on the crankshaft flange (3).
2 Clean and degrease sealing surface of new end cover (2).

3 Apply sealant in the form of a bead (A) with a height and width of 2.0 mm (± 0.5) mm to crankcase (4) and oil pan.
Use exclusively approved sealants. Do not spread bead (A). Mount end cover (2) within 5 minutes after applying sealant.
4 Mount end cover (2) with crankshaft radial sealing ring (1) on insertion tool (6).
Make sure that protective lip (1s) faces towards the side applying the force and sealing lip (1d) faces in the direction of the crankcase (4).
Leakage could occur otherwise at rear crankshaft radial sealing ring (1).
The crankshaft radial sealing ring (1) can only be mounted on the insertion tool (6), if insertion tool (6) is fitted together with insertion tool (7).
5 Separate insertion tool (7) from insertion tool (6).

6 Mount end cover (2) with crankshaft radial shaft sealing ring (1) and insertion tool (6) onto contact surface (3a) on crankshaft flange (3).
The contact surface (3a) must not be removed with emery board as this can destroy the surface of the crankshaft and render the crankshaft
unusable.
7 Tighten bolts (2a) gradually in crosswise pattern, then tighten the bolts (2b). Observe tightening torque.
8 Detach insertion tool (6) from crankshaft flange (3).
9 Carefully lift protective lip (1s) and check the correct installation position of sealing lip (1d).
A wrong installation position leads to leakage.
The sealing lip (1d) must point towards crankcase (4) all around its circumference.
10 Check for correct installation position of the protective lip (1s).
An incorrect installation position leads to premature wear of crankshaft radial sealing ring (1).
The protective lip (1s) must point towards transmission housing around its entire circumference.
AR03.20-P-3063VA Replace Rear Crankshaft Radial Sealing Ring
AR03.20-P-3063VA Replace rear crankshaft radial sealing ring
Modification notes
Steps 1-17
Special Tools
Repair materials
Cylinder Head Gasket: Service and Repair
AH01.30-P-1000-04RX Information on applying sealant to cylinder head gasket
Applying sealant to cylinder head gasket
Before mounting the cylinder heads, apply sealant around the timing case cover on the cylinder crankcase.
Repair information
The sealing surface must be cleaned. Sealant should be applied only to the specified surface, in the form of a bead 2.0 mm (± 0.5 mm) in height and
width (see picture).
The sealant remains workable for 10 min.
The bead should not be spread.

Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
AR03.20-P-3000VA Replace Front Crankshaft Radial Sealing Ring
AR03.20-P-3000VA Replace front crankshaft radial sealing ring
Steps 1-13
Flywheel, Driven Plate, Vibration Damper, Starter Ring Gear
Special Tools
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
AR03.20-P-3000-01B Install Front Crankshaft Radial Seal
AR03.20-P-3000-01B Install front crankshaft radial seal
Special Tools
1 Deburr edge of mounting bore for crankshaft radial sealing ring at timing case cover.
2 Push the crankshaft radial sealing ring onto the side (a) of the sleeve (2).
Circumference and sealing lip of crankshaft radial seal as well as the mating contact surface on the vibration damper must be free of oil and
grease.
3 Align groove of sleeve (2) to the Woodruff key of the crankshaft.
Turn to ensure that the slot in the sleeve (2) is aligned with the Woodruff key in the crankshaft.
4 Push sleeve (2) onto crankshaft and press in crankshaft radial sealing about 2 mm.
If necessary, knock in sleeve (2) with light blows from a hammer until it is possible to insert the central bolt (3).
5 Draw in sleeve (2) with central bolt (3) as far as the stop.
6 Detach sleeve (2).
The crankshaft radial sealing ring must be positioned at right angles to the crank journal otherwise proper sealing is not assured.
Shown on engine 112
Repair size 1 is identified by a 3 mm wide shoulder on the contact surface.
7 Turn sleeve (2) and push onto the crankshaft with side of repair size 1 (b).
Turn to ensure that the slot in the sleeve (2) is aligned with the Woodruff key in the crankshaft.
8 Draw in sleeve (2) with central bolt (3) as far as the stop.
9 Detach sleeve (2).
Shown on engine 112
10 Check installation location of the crankshaft radial sealing ring (1) to the crank pin (4).
The crankshaft radial sealing ring (1) must be positioned at right angles to the crank journal (4) otherwise proper sealing is not assured.
The installation depth (B) of the crankshaft radial sealing ring (1) is preset through the sleeve (2) and must not be altered subsequently.
Shown on engine 112

Timing Chain: Removal and Replacement
AR05.10-P-7601-01VA Separate Timing Chain

AR05.10-P-7601-01VA Separate Timing Chain
Special Tools
Steps 1 - 5
AR05.10-P-7601-02VA Riveting Timing Chain

AR05.10-P-7601-02VA Riveting the timing chain
Timing Chain, Chain Tensioner

Special Tools
Steps 1 - 2
Step 3
Steps 4 - 5
Steps 6 - 7
Step 8
Steps 9 - 11
Step 12
Sep 13 - 15
AR05.10-P-7601-04VA Drawing In Timing Chain

AR05.10-P-7601-04VA Drawing in timing chain
Steps 1 - 2
Steps 3 - 6
Special Tools
AR05.10-P-7601VA Replacing the Timing Chain

AR05.10-P-7601VA Replacing the timing chain
Steps 1-4
Steps 5-12
Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair
AR05.10-P-8127VA Remove/Install Tensioning Rail
AR05.10-P-8127VA Remove/install tensioning rail
Steps 1-16
Special Tools

AR05.10-P-8484TS Remove/Install Slide Rail In Timing Case Cover
AR05.10-P-8484TS Remove/install slide rail in timing case cover
- Engine 272.### ## as of 013489
Steps 1 - 8
AR05.10-P-8484VA Remove/Install Slide Rail In Timing Case Cover
AR05.10-P-8484VA Remove/install slide rail in timing case cover
- Engine 272.### ## up to 013488
Steps 1-9
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair
AR05.10-P-7800VA Remove/Install Chain Tensioner
AR05.10-P-7800VA Remove/install chain tensioner
- M24x1.5
Modification Notes
Steps 1-7

AR05.10-P-7800VB Remove/Install Chain Tensioner
AR05.10-P-7800VB Remove/install chain tensioner
- M22x1.5
Remove
Remove
Steps 1-10
Special Tools
AR05.10-P-8127VA Remove/Install Tensioning Rail
AR05.10-P-8127VA Remove/install tensioning rail
Steps 1-16
Special Tools

AR05.10-P-7800-02VA Installing Chain Tensioner
AR05.10-P-7800-02VA Installing chain tensioner
- M24 1, 5
Modification notes
Timing chain, chain tensioner
1 Press out the bolt (8) and detent spring (9) from chain tensioner housing (5) (arrowed).
2 Insert the bolt (8) and detent spring (9) in chain tensioner housing (5) (arrowed).
Insert the bolt (8) and detent spring (9) so that the detent springs (9) sit in the first notch (10).
The bolt (8) must remain in this position.
3 Screw in the chain tensioner housing (5) with bolt (8), detent spring (9) and new sealing ring (7) into the timing case cover, and tighten.
4 Insert the push spring (3) and filler pin (4) in chain tensioner housing (5).
5 Screw in the end piece (1) with new sealing ring (2) into chain tensioner housing (5), and tighten.
When the push spring (3), filler pin (4) and end piece (1) are installed, bolt (8) is moved into the correct position in chain tensioner housing (5).
Timing Cover: Removal and Replacement
AR01.30-P-5700VA Remove/Install Front Cover on the Cylinder Head

AR01.30-P-5700VA Removing/installing front cover on the cylinder head
- Right side
Steps 1-8
Steps 9-12
Cylinder Head
AR01.30-P-5700VB Removing/Installing Front Cover on Cylinder Head

AR01.30-P-5700VB Removing/installing front cover on cylinder head
- Left side
Steps 1-6
Steps 7-19
Cylinder Head
Special Tools

AR01.40-P-8000VA Remove/Install Timing Case Cover

AR01.40-P-8000VA Remove/install timing case cover
Modification notes
Steps 1-15
Steps 16-39
Air shutoff valve
Cylinder head

Special Tools
Repair materials


The sealing compound must be applied within 10 min. The sealant bead must not be spread. Only the approved sealant may be used.

AH01.40-P-1000-01VA Notes on Sealant Path For Timing Case Cover
AH01.40-P-1000-01VA Notes on sealant path for timing case cover
Sealant path for timing case cover
The lines (1) identify the application of the sealant.
The sealing surface must be cleaned. Sealant should be applied only to the specified surface, in the form of a bead of height and width 1.5 mm ± 0.5
mm. The sealing compound must be applied within 10 min. The sealing compound bead must not be spread. Use only the approved sealant.
AR01.30-P-5700VA Remove/Install Front Cover on Cylinder Head
AR01.30-P-5700VA Remove/install front cover on cylinder head
- RH cylinder head
Steps 1-12
Cylinder head
Repair materials
AR01.30-P-5700VB Remove/Install Front Cover on Cylinder Head

AR01.30-P-5700VB Remove/install front cover on cylinder head

- LH cylinder head
Steps 1-19
Cylinder head
Special Tools
Repair materials
AR01.40-P-8000-01VA Bolt Diagram For Timing Case Cover

AR01.40-P-8000-01VA Bolt diagram for timing case cover
Bolt diagram for timing case cover

Water Pump: Service and Repair
AR20.10-P-1271VA Remove/install coolant pump
Steps 1-11

Cooling System: Testing and Inspection
AR20.00-P-1010V Inspect cooling system for leaks
Steps 1-15
Steps 16
Cap Of Radiator Or Expansion Reservoir
Special Tools

Cooling System: Procedures
AR20.00-P-1142VA Drain/fill with coolant
Component Location
Modification Notes
Steps 1-10
Steps 11-19.1
Engine Cooling, General
Cooling System
Special Tools

Cooling System: Removal and Replacement
AP20.00-P-2080V Replace coolant
Steps 1-7
Step 7 (Continued)
Mixture ratio for coolant

Auxiliary Water Pump: Description and Operation
GF83.20-P-2122SK Coolant Circulation Pump Location/task
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
AR83.25-P-1170V Remove/install/replace Heating Water Circulation Pump
component Identification
Steps 1 - 15
Special Tools

Coolant: Description and Operation
AH20.00-P-1141-01V Notes on Coolant Level
AH20.00-P-1141-01V Notes on coolant level
Model 171 with engine 271, 272

When the engine is cold, the engine coolant level must reach up to the marking "Min" on the coolant expansion reservoir (arrow).
When coolant is warm: approx. 1 cm above this scribe mark.
Model 220 with engine 112
Model 215, 220 with engine 113, 137
Model 215, 220 with engine 275, main circuit
Model 461, 463 with engine 612
Model 463 with engine 112, 113, 273, 628, 642

When engine is cold, the engine coolant level must reach up to the marking (arrow) on the coolant expansion reservoir.

Model 461 with engine 642

When the engine is cold, the coolant level must reach up to the marking (arrow) on the coolant expansion reservoir.
When the coolant is warm, about 1 cm above the marking (arrow).

Model 202, 208 with engine 112, 113



Model 230 with engine 275, main circuit

Model 211 with engine 112, 113, 156, 271, 272, 273 model 219 with engine 113, 156, 272, 273
When the engine is cold, the engine coolant level must reach up to the marking (arrow) in the coolant expansion reservoir.

Model 216, 221 with engine 275, main circuit

Model 240 with engine 285, Main circuit

Model 215, 216, 220, 221, 230 with engine 275, low temperature circuit
Model 240 with engine 285, low temperature circuit

The engine coolant level must be placed, when coolant is warm or cold, in the crosshatched illustrated area of filler neck.
Coolant: Removal and Replacement
AP20.00-P-2080V Replace coolant
Steps 1-7
Step 7 (Continued)
Mixture ratio for coolant

Coolant Level Sensor: Service and Repair
AR20.30-P-4392V Removing/installing coolant level switch
Steps 1-5
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
AR20.30-P-4950V Removing/installing expansion reservoir
Steps 1-12
Special Tools

Radiator Cooling Fan: Description and Operation
GF83.40-P-2175SK Engine/AC Electric Suction Fan Location/task
- 171.4 up to 08
Radiator Cooling Fan: Service and Repair
AR20.40-P-5000V Remove/install electric fan
Steps 1-8
Steps 9-10

Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
GF07.04-P-6040V Coolant Temperature Sensor Component Description
Location
The coolant temperature sensor is located at the rear in the left cylinder head.
Task
Detects the coolant temperature and supplies a voltage signal to the ME control unit.
Function
The NTC resistor integrated in the coolant temperature sensor, alters its electrical resistance in line with the coolant temperature. NTC is the
abbreviation for " Negative Temperature Coefficient", which means electrical resistance falls as the temperature increases (hot conductor).
Body
Metal casing with an integrated, highly responsive NTC resistor and a 2-pole, slanted plug connection. It is inserted into a bore hole and sealed with an
O-ring. Fixing via a bracket.
The rapidly responsive NTC temperature sensor is supplied with 5 V by the ME control unit via a series resistor (1470 ohms ± 1 %). Following a
short-circuit to battery voltage or 5 V (without a series resistor), the temperature sensor coolant is defective.
The signal is plausible between 0.1 V to 4.93 V, otherwise a fault is identified and a substitute value taken by the ME control unit from a stored
temperature model.
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
AR15.60-P-2711VA Remove/Install Coolant Temperature Sensor
AR15.60-P-2711VA Removing/installing coolant temperature sensor
Steps 1-9
Temperature Sensor
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
AR15.60-P-3000VA Remove/Install Temperature Sensor
AR15.60-P-3000VA Remove/Install Temperature Sensor
- Coolant temperature sensor
Modification Notes
Steps 1 - 14
Temperature Sensor

Fan Shroud: Service and Repair
AR20.40-P-6800VA Remove fan shroud, install
Steps 1-10
Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation
GF20.00-P-2200V Component Description For the Heating System Shutoff Valve
GF20.00-P-2200V Component Description For The Heating System Shutoff Valve
Location
The heating system shutoff valve is located behind the left cylinder bank at the coolant outlet of the engine.
Task
To rapidly warm up the engine following a cold start, locks the coolant circuit to the heat exchangers. When the vehicle heater is switched on, the valve
is always open.
Function
The heating system shutoff valve is actuated by the ME control unit via a ground signal. The valve is opened without a current. The coil resistance at
room temperature is approx. 12 Ohms.
Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation
GF83.20-P-2107SK Duovalve Location/Task/Function
GF83.20-P-2107SK Duovalve Location/task/function
Heater Control Valve: Service and Repair
AR83.25-P-1150V Remove/ Install/ Replace Duovalve
Steps 1 - 19
Special Tools
Special Tools

Heater Core: Service and Repair
AR83.25-P-1100V Remove And Install Heat Exchanger
Steps 1.1 - 13
Heater Core: Description and Operation
GF83.20-P-2116SK Heater Heat Exchanger, Location/task
Radiator: Service and Repair
AR20.20-P-3865VA Remove/install radiator
Steps 1-14
Special Tools
Thermostat: Description and Operation
GF20.10-P-3160V Component Description For The Three-disk Thermostat Valve
Location
The three-disk thermostat valve is located at the front of the engine.
Task
To control the coolant temperature in the range of approx. 80 °C to 100 °C. From approx. 110 °C, to fully open independently of the control.
Function
Voltage supply to terminal 87, actuation of the heating element on the ground side of the ME control unit. The opening cross-section is set via the
operating time.
Thermostat: Service and Repair
AR20.10-P-2460VA Remove/install coolant thermostat
- Three-disk thermostat
Steps 1-13

Exhaust System: Procedures
AZ49.10-P-0001V Retrofit AMG muffler system
Steps 1-5
Parts ordering notes

Exhaust System: Removal and Replacement
AR49.10-P-7000VA Remove/Install Complete Exhaust System

AR49.10-P-7000VA Removing and installing complete exhaust system
Steps 1-6
Steps 7-12
Frame Floor
Exhaust System
AR49.10-P-7280VA Remove/Install Exhaust System As From Flange Connection

AR49.10-P-7280VA Remove / install exhaust system as from flange connection
Steps 1-6
Steps 7-8
Frame Floor
Exhaust System
AR49.10-P-7282VA Remove/Install Center Exhaust System

AR49.10-P-7282VA Remove, install center exhaust system
Steps 1-5
Steps 6-14
Exhaust System

Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
GF49.10-P-2010V Three-Way Catalytic Converter, Component Description
GF49.10-P-2010V Three-way Catalytic Converter, Component Description
Location
Near the engine in the front section of the exhaust system.
Task
Reduction of the following pollutants in the exhaust:

- Carbon monoxide (CO)
- Hydrocarbon (HC)
- Nitrogen oxide (NOx).
In each catalytic converter, there are two ceramic monoliths with each approx. 600 cells. The exhaust gas flows through these passages. The ceramic
consists of high temperature-resistant magnesium aluminum silicate.
The monoliths are extremely sensitive to warping and are embedded in an elastic wire mesh of high-carbon steel wire and mounted inside a double-wall
housing of stainless steel.
Ceramic monoliths require a support layer of alumina (Al2O3) (the "washcoat"), which increases the effective surface of the catalytic converter by a
factor of 7000.
The active catalytic layer coated on the substrate is available in three-way catalysts primarily out of platinum and rhodium. Platinum promotes the
oxidation of hydrocarbons (HC) and carbon monoxide (CO) and rhodium the reduction of nitrogen oxides (NOx).
Owing to its property of simultaneously reducing three pollutant components, it is called a "three-way catalyst".
Function
The exhaust gases flow through the three way catalytic converter and hence come into contact with the rare metals, platinum and rhodium.
- The carbon monoxide (CO) is converted to carbon dioxide (CO2) and hydrocarbons (HC) converted to water (H2O) + carbon dioxide (CO2) by
oxidation.
- Due to reduction, nitrogen oxides (NOx) are converted into nitrogen (N2) + carbon dioxide (CO2).
The critical factors for the conversion of the pollutants is the residual oxygen content in the exhaust. It is determined through lambda control and
maintained at Lambda=1 in normal operation.
Operating conditions
As is the case for the O2 sensor, the operating temperature also plays a very important role in the case of the catalytic converter.
Appreciable conversion of the pollutants does not commence until an operating temperature of approx. 250 °C. This temperature is reached quickly
after the engine is started, due to the near-engine location, the air-gap insulation on the exhaust manifold and mixture enrichment.
Ideal operating conditions for high conversion rates and a long life prevail at temperatures between around 400 to 800 °C.
The temperature of the three way catalytic converter can increase beyond 1400 °C due to a malfunctioning of the engine such as misfiring etc. These
high temperatures can lead to destruction of the catalytic converter, by melting the ceramic monoliths.
Another requirement for reliable long-term operation is that only unleaded fuel be used. Lead compounds form a deposit on the active surface and as a
result prevent the exhaust gases from coming into contact with the catalytic layer.
If the vehicle is driven during direct injection in stratified charge operation with excess air, the catalytic converter cannot convert the nitrogen oxide
sufficiently. Additional NOX storage catalytic converters are necessary.
GF49.10-P-3033V Monitoring Catalytic Converter Efficiency, Function
GF49.10-P-3033V Monitoring Catalytic Converter Efficiency, Function
Each catalytic converter is evaluated on the basis of its ability to store oxygen. The oxygen stored during the lean phase is then reduced totally or
partially during the rich phases. Aging reduces the ability of catalytic converters to store oxygen. It also reduces the ability to convert HCs.
By law, HC emissions must not go above certain limits. The task of the catalytic converter monitoring is to evaluate aging through the ability to store
oxygen and therefore to convert hydrocarbons.
Active diagnosis depends on direct measurement of the oxygen stored during the transition from rich to lean mixture, when the catalytic converter is at
operating temperature and the lambda control is enabled. Several measurements are taken in the lower partial load range.
The wideband-lambda sensor is located upstream of the catalytic converter, and is used to obtain precise measurements of the mixture. Downstream of
the catalytic converter is a lambda discrete sensor, which identifies its current condition.
During the first stage, the oxygen stored when the mixture is rich (lambda about 0.95) is reduced until the sensor voltage downstream of the converter is
over about 650 mV.
The next stage switches to the lean mixture (lambda about 1.05) and monitors how long it takes until the sensor voltage downstream of the converter is
below about 200 mV.
If the length of time measured in this way is below the value set as the borderline characteristic for catalytic converters, then oxygen storage capacity is
insufficient and the converter must be replaced.
If a fault is detected, the engine diagnosis indicator lamp or the "CHECK ENGINE" indicator lamp (USA) is lit on the instrument cluster. The stored
faults can be read out and erased with the STAR DIAGNOSIS.
GF07.61-P-3032V ME-SFI TWC Heating-Up, Function
GF07.61-P-3032V ME-SFI TWC Heating-Up, Function
The TWC heating-up function heats up the catalytic converters more rapidly to their operating temperature (300 to 450 °C) and thus considerably
reduces the exhaust emissions in the cold start and heating-up phase.
The ME control unit is able to detect that the operating temperature has been reached and that the catalytic converters are operating at normal efficiency
from the signals supplied by the O2 sensors.
The following conditions determine whether TWC heating is enabled:

- Engine starting temperature
- Altitude level
- Residual heat in the catalytic convertor (from theoretical calculation)
- Difference between intake air and engine starting temperatures
- Air mass
The following systems are involved in the TWC heating-up:

- Ignition system
At idle speed and coolant temperature dependent, the ignition angle is retarded for e.g. 20 seconds and thus the exhaust temperature is increased.
- Idle speed control
Dependent on coolant temperature, the idle speed is increased to approx. 1100 to 1300 rpm for a maximum of 20 seconds.
- Camshaft adjustment
For TWC heating, special positions are specified separately for the intake and exhaust camshafts
- Coolant-temperature dependent transmission shift delay is retarded for automatic transmissions.
- Secondary air injection
After starting and during warm-up, the enriched mixture results in more unburned hydrocarbons in the exhaust. The injected air (high oxygen
concentration) causes post-oxidation in the catalytic converters. Heat is released as a result, which more rapidly warms up the catalytic converters
to operating temperature.
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
AR49.10-P-5500VA Remove/Install Right Catalytic Converter
AR49.10-P-5500VA Remove/install catalytic converter
- Right catalytic converter
Modification Notes
Steps 1-4
Steps 5.1-14
Exhaust System
Exhaust System
O2 Sensor
Uxiliary Repair Materials

AR49.10-P-5500VB Remove/Install Left Catalytic Converter
AR49.10-P-5500VB Remove/install catalytic converter
- Left catalytic converter
Modification Notes
Remove/install
Steps 1-15
Step 16
Exhaust Sysytem
Exhaust System
O2 Sensor

AR49.10-P-5500VA Remove/Install Catalytic Converter
AR49.10-P-5500VA Remove/install catalytic converter
- Right catalytic converter
Modification notes
Steps 1-5
Steps 6-14
Exhaust system
Exhaust system
O2 sensor
Repair materials
Exhaust Manifold: Removal and Replacement
AR14.10-P-3930V Remove/Install Left Exhaust Manifold

AR14.10-P-3930V Remove/Install Left Exhaust Manifold
Steps 1 - 11
Exhaust Manifold
AR14.10-P-4005V Remove/Install Right Exhaust Manifold

AR14.10-P-4005V Remove Exhaust Manifold on Right, Install
Steps 1 - 12
Exhaust Manifold
Powertrain Management: Description and Operation
GF07.61-P-0001-02CY Motor Electronics (ME-SFI) Gasoline Injection and Ignition System Function
Diagram
GF07.61-P-0001-02CY Motor Electronics (ME-SFI) Gasoline Injection And Ignition System Function Diagram
- up to model year 08
GF07.61-P-0001CY Motor Electronics (ME-SFI) Fuel Injection and Ignition System, Function
GF07.61-P-0001CY Motor Electronics (ME-SFI) Fuel Injection And Ignition System, Function
The fuel, injection and ignition system (engine control) for engine 272 KE (Kanal-Einspritzung) (duct injection) is delivered by the company "Bosch"
and has the internal designation "ME 9.7".
The abbreviation "ME 9.7" means:

M = Motronic
E = Electronic accelerator pedal
9.7 = Version 9.7
The engine control in ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10) controls and coordinates input signals to the following systems appropriately:
^ Ignition system
^ Injection system
^ Electronic accelerator
^ Diagnosis and fault storage
^ Drive authorization system and immobilizer
^ Regulated camshaft adjustment
^ Torque interface
^ Heat management
^ Intake manifold and tumble flap switchover
^ Alternator interface (via drive train LIN (LIN C1))
^ Emission control system
The ME-SFI [ME] control unit evaluates the following basic information for engine control:
- Intake air temperature
- Coolant temperature
- Atmospheric pressure
- Intake manifold pressure
- O2 concentration upstream and downstream of firewall catalytic converters
- Throttle valve position
- Tumble flap positions
- Intake and exhaust camshaft positions
- Accelerator pedal position
- Clutch operating system (for manual transmission 716.6)
- Clutch operating system start enable (for manual transmission 716.6 United States of America)
- Fuel tank pressure (at United States of America)
- Alternator data
- Air mass
- Engine speed and crankshaft position
- Knock identification
Further input signals which the CDI control unit receives via the CAN data bus system are, for example:
- Fuel pressure
- Vehicle speed
- Wheel speed signal
- Fuel reserve signal
- Drive position detection (with automatic transmission 722.9)
- Cruise control mode
- Brake recognition
- Start enable (drive authorization system)
- Load request
- Crash signal
The ME-SFI [ME] control unit exchanges data for this via the attached drive train CAN (CAN-C) and chassis CAN (CAN-E). The ME-SFI [ME]
control unit also serves as an interface (gateway) between the two CAN bus systems.
The following control units are networked with the ME-SFI [ME] control unit via the CAN data bus systems depending on the equipment which are
responsible for the engine control:
^ Instrument cluster (A1)
^ Supplemental restraint system control unit (N2/10)
^ Front SAM control unit with fuse and relay module (N10/1)
^ Rear SAM control unit with fuse and relay module (N10/2)
^ Fully integrated transmission control controller unit (Y3/8) (with automatic transmission 722.9)
^ Electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5) (with automatic transmission 722.9)
^ Automatic air conditioning control and operating unit (N22/7)
^ Electronic Stability Program control unit (N30/4)
^ Electronic ignition lock control unit (N73)
^ Steering column module control unit (N80)
^ Fuel pump control unit (N118)
GF07.61-P-2005V ME-SFI Driving Mode, Function

GF07.61-P-2005V ME-SFI Driving Mode, Function
- ENGINE 272.920 in MODEL 203 up to Model Year 2008 /AEJ 07
- ENGINE 272.922 in MODEL 211
- ENGINE 272.943 in MODEL 211, 219 ENGINE 272.944 in MODEL 211
- ENGINE 272.964 in MODEL 211, 219 ENGINE 272.965 in MODEL 221 up to Model Year 2008 /AEJ 07
- ENGINE 272.967 in MODEL 164, 251 up to Model Year 2008 /AEJ 07
- ENGINE 273.960 in MODEL 211, 219
GF07.61-P-2006V ME-SFI Idle, Function

GF07.61-P-2006V ME-SFI Idle, Function
- ENGINE 272.920 in MODEL 203 up to Model Year 8
- ENGINE 272.943 in MODEL 211, 219
- ENGINE 272.964 in MODEL 211, 219
- ENGINE 272.967 in MODEL 164, 251 up to Model Year 8
- ENGINE 273.960 in MODEL 211, 219
GF07.61-P-4016V ME Engine Coolant Heat Management Function

GF07.61-P-4016V ME Engine Coolant Heat Management Function
Heat management controls the coolant temperature of the engine. Advantages are
^ The operating temperature is reached more rapidly
^ Emissions reduced
^ Fuel savings up to around 4 %
^ Improved heat comfort.
Heat management is dependent on the following input signals:

^ Coolant temperature
^ Engine load
^ Engine speed
^ Outside air temperature
^ Intake air temperature
^ Actuation of the suction fan
^ Vehicle speed
^ Driver type (quiet or sporty).
Depending on the operating conditions, the ME control unit actuates the heater element in the three-disk thermostat depending on performance mapping
via a ground signal. The voltage is supplied to the three disk thermostat via circuit 87. The coolant temperature is regulated between 80 °C and 100 °C
via the duty cycle.
If the coolant temperature is too high, the coolant temperature warning lamp in the instrument cluster is actuated. To do this, the ME control units sends
a CAN command to the instrument cluster.
Full throttle position (A)
For a cold start, the three disk thermostat is not actuated and additionally, when the vehicle heater is shut off, the heater circuit is closed via the
duovalve. The standing coolant warms up very quickly. Heat is sent from the engine oil via the heat exchanger at the front of the engine.
At a coolant temperature from around 70 °C or from around 45 °C (with outside temperature above around 12 °C), switching from full throttle to
short-circuit operation takes place. In addition, the closing disk opens due to pressure via the running coolant pump over around 3500 rpm.
Short-circuit operation position (B)

Short-circuit operation with the engine and heat exchanger can be throttled so that the heater responds more rapidly.
Mixed fuel operation position (C)
Temperature regulation with the three-disk thermostat is not enabled until the coolant temperature following start reaches around 98 °C. At outside
temperatures above around 12 °C it is active immediately.
At partial load, the three-disk thermostat regulates at an increased coolant temperature of around 100 °C.
To prevent critical temperatures, the increased coolant temperature range is reduced under the following conditions to around 90 °C (with outside
temperature below 12 °C) or to around 80 °C (with outside temperature over 12 °C):
^ Engine speed greater than 3000 rpm
^ Engine load more than 30 %
^ Intake air temperature more than around 38 °C
^ sporty driver detected.
Maximum radiator operation position (D)
The three-disk thermostat is actuated constantly during radiator operation. Above around 110 °C, the three-disk thermostat is always fully opened
independently of actuation (emergency operation function).
GF07.61-P-4018V ME Power Steering Pump Pressure Regulator Valve Actuation Function

GF07.61-P-4018V ME Power Steering Pump Pressure Regulator Valve Actuation Function
Via the map-dependent actuation of the quantity control valve at the power steering pump, engine load is reduced to optimize fuel consumption.
The quantity control valve is located in a bypass to the working chamber of the power steering pump.
Actuation takes place via a PWM signal (duty cycle from 10 to 90 %). Current consumption is from 0 to 900 mA.
Via the valve opening, the volume flow to the power steering pump is matched to the requirement. It is dependent on the following input signals:
^ Engine speed
^ Vehicle speed (via CAN)
^ Steering angle (via CAN)
^ Steering angle speed (via CAN).
The quantity control valve is connected fast to the power steering pump. The coil resistance at room temperature is around 5.5 ohms and the max.
current uptake around 0.9 A.
With ignition ON, during engine start and in the event of a fault, the pressure control valve is fully opened (actuation interrupted). Maximum support
via the power steering pump is thus available.
GF07.61-P-5001V Voltage Supply of ME-SFI Control Unit, Function

GF07.61-P-5001V Voltage Supply Of ME-SFI Control Unit, Function
Engine circuit 87 relay supplied through circuit 30z.
If the relay has closed the power contact, power is supplied from circuit 30z via two fuses as circuit 87 M1 and circuit 87 M2 to the engine control in
the ME control unit (N3/10).
Engine circuit 87 relay is actuated by ME control unit at the ground end if the "Circuit . 15 On" signal from the EIS control unit (N73) is detected by the
ME control unit.
If the ME control unit detects the "Circuit 15 Off" signal from the EIS control unit, engine circuit 87 relay remains actuated until the computer has
powered down.
If the computer has powered down, engine circuit 87 relay is switched off and the ME control unit, and therefore the engine control, is disconnected
from the on-board electrical system.
The ME control unit features a short-circuit protection as well as a reversed polarity protection in the operating voltage section.
Ignition System: Description and Operation
GF15.12-P-0001V ME-SFI Ignition System, Function
Cylinder arrangement and ignition firing order
The ME-SFI control unit essentially analyzes the following signals for determining the ignition angle:
- Air mass
- Position and rpm of crankshaft
- Positions of intake camshafts
- Positions of exhaust camshafts
- Knock sensor signals
- Intake manifold air pressure
- Engine torque requests
The ME-SFI [ME] control unit interrupts the respective ignition coil at the moment of the ignition timing of the primary circuit to "terminal 1".
Ignition angle adaptation
For the following partial functions an ignition angle adjustment in the direction "retarded" or "advanced" can take place:
- Catalytic converter heating-up
- Overheating / knock protection
- Deceleration fuel shutoff
- Transmission overload protection (with automatic transmission 722.9)
- Anti-knock control [AKC]
- Engine torque requests
The ignition angle can only be checked using the DAS.

Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
GF07.04-P-6020V Component Description For A Camshaft Hall Sensor
Location
The camshaft Hall sensors are located before the respective camshaft.
Task
Detects the camshaft position for the following functions contactlessly via the pulse wheel at the front at every camshaft:
- Camshaft adjustment
- Synchronization of the ignition and injection sequence (recognition of ignition TDC).
Design
Hall sensor in plastic housing with 3-pole plug connection, distance from pulse wheel of 0.2 to 1.8 mm.
Function
The camshaft positions are detected by the camshaft Hall sensor, which detects the position of the pulse wheels at the front on the camshafts. The
camshaft position can already be detected when the engine is stationary by the electronics for the Hall sensor. This results in an improvement in the
exhaust levels because the optimal injected quantity of fuel can be assigned to each cylinder immediately when the engine is started (quick-start
function).
Four signals are generated per rotation of the camshaft whereby the signal switches between about 5 V ("HIGH") and 0 volt ("LOW"). If an opening in
the pulse wheel is opposite the sensor, the signal is approx. 5 V.
The signals are used to control and diagnose the camshaft adjustment, to synchronize the crankshaft and camshaft position (detection of ignition TDC
cylinder 1) and for emergency starting of the engine when the crankshaft Hall sensor is faulty.
The stated angle at the pulse wheels must be doubled to maintain the crank angle.
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
AR15.10-P-2000VA Remove/Install Camshaft Hall Sensor
Steps 1 - 10
Hydraulic Fluid Reservoir
Position Sensor
Special Tools
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
GF07.04-P-6230V Component Description For The Position Sensor Tumble Flap
Location
The position sensors are located at the rear on the intake manifold over the tumble flap shafts.
Task
To diagnose the tumble flap switchover, the position sensors detect the mechanical limit positions of the shafts. The swivel range of the tumble flaps
between completely swiveled in or out is approx. 56°.
Design
The position sensors function according to the Hall principle.
Function
Two cylindrical magnets with different polarities are attached to each tumble flap shaft.
After swinging out the tumble flaps a cylindrical magnet is located at the Hall sensor and the position sensor interconnects. The signal at the ME-SFI
[ME] control unit is about 0 V (tumble flaps actuated).
If the tumble flaps swing back then the other poled cylindrical magnet is on the Hall sensor is in the rest position. The position sensor opens and
interrupts the connection to ground. The signal at the ME-SFI [ME] control unit is now about 5 V (tumble flaps not actuated).
The position sensors must switch no later than approx. 5° before the respective limit position. For reasons of tolerance, they may also switch up to
approx. 16° before the limit position.
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
AR15.12-P-2133VA Remove/install crankshaft position sensor
Steps 1-7
Position sensor
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation
GF15.10-P-2100V Component Description For An Ignition Coil
Location
For each cylinder, a dedicated ignition coil is plugged directly onto the spark plugs.
Task
Supplying adequate ignition energy in all operating conditions for the particular ignition circuit.
The ignition output stages are integrated in the ignition coils.
Function
An output stage is located in each ignition coil for the primary circuit. The ME control unit actuated the ignition coil primary circuit between terminals
2 and 4. The current flow in the primary coil (L1) causes a magnetic field to form. The dwell angle control determines the operating time of the ignition
coil primary circuit and thus the magnetic saturation of the ferrous core of the ignition coil. The primary current flow is interrupted at the moment of
ignition timing point. The sudden collapse of the magnetic field generates the ignition voltage in the secondary coil (L2) which is fed directly to the
spark plugs.
The voltage supply of the ignition coils is protected at circuit 87 M1
A diode is integrated in each ignition coil for suppressing additional ignition sparks when the output stage is switched off.
Because of the diodes, it is not possible to measure the resistance in the secondary windings. For diagnosis of the ignition coils, the primary current is
measured. The capacitive tap is used to connect measuring equipment.
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair
AR15.12-P-2003VA Remove/Install Ignition Coils
Steps 1 - 8
Ignition Coil
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
GF15.12-P-4024V the Anti-Knock Control Function
GF15.12-P-4024V The Anti-Knock Control Function
The task of the anti-knock control AKC is to ensure knock-free operation of the engine with different fuels and in all operating conditions from idling
speed up to maximum engine speed. For this purpose, if uncontrolled combustion (knocking) occurs, the ignition angle at the knocking cylinders is
retarded. The anti-knock control (AKR) is integrated in the ME-SFI [ME] control unit.
Input signals:
- Motor speed (crankshaft Hall sensor)
- Camshaft position (camshaft Hall sensor)
- Recognition of knocking over 2 knocking sensors
- Engine temperature (coolant temperature sensor)
- Engine load (hot film mass air flow sensor)
- Accelerator pedal position (accelerator pedal sensor)
- Precontrol by means of automatic RON switch (internal)
- RON correction with STAR DIAGNOSIS.
Output signals:
- Ignition angle correction for specific cylinder to the map value calculated by the ME control unit
- Ignition angle emergency mode if fault identified.
The anti-knock control is active from a coolant temperature of 40 °C. If cylinder knocking is recognized above an engine load of about 40%, its ignition
angle is adjusted to retarded by about a 3.0° crank angle after the next ignition. If knocking continues to be detected, the ignition angle is continuously
retarded in steps of a 3° crank angle until the maximum retardation is reached (approx. a 10 -15° crank angle, depending on the engine speed). The
automatic RON switch also influences the maximum retarding of the ignition timing - the higher the selected RON stage, the less is the maximum
retarding of the ignition timing.
If knocking-free combustion exists, the retardation is reduced in steps of approx. 0.75° crank angle after a few ignitions (depending on the engine
speed) until the map value is achieved, or knocking occurs again.
Adaptation of anti-knock control
The adaptation of the anti-knock control is active from a coolant temperature of approx. 75 °C. Any corrections required to the ignition
angle because of knocking combustion are constantly detected for the specific cylinder and stored together with the relevant operating state of the
engine (engine load/speed range).
The stored adaptation value is taken into account in the output of the individual cylinder angles so that each cylinder is immediately operated with the
optimal ignition angle.
During abrupt acceleration, no values are stored for about 2 seconds in order to avoid any incorrect adaptation values.
Faults if knocking is detected
If no signals are received from the knock sensors, the ignition angle of all cylinders is retarded by as much as a 11° crank angle for safety reasons,
depending on engine speed and temperature. The antiknock control and the adaptation are deactivated and a fault is stored.
Automatic RON switch
In addition to the RON correction using STAR DIAGNOSIS, the antitemperature knock control features an automatic RON switch. This detects a
persistent high knocking tendency of the engine and assists the antithe knock control by means of an appropriate pre-control.
This is done by analyzing the stored adaptation values, the ignition angles of all the cylinders and the number of control interventions in certain engine
load and speed ranges. Depending on the threshold which has been exceeded, the RON value is adjusted by one or several stages. The value is retained
until the engine is switched off. After engine start, only the RON correction which is carried out by means of STAR DIAGNOSIS is at first active.
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
GF07.04-P-6030V Knock Sensor Component Description
GF07.04-P-6030V Knock Sensor Component Description
Location
The knock sensors are located at the top of the crankcase under the intake manifold.
Task
The knock sensors detect combustion knocks at excessively high vibrations at the crankcase. Anti-knock control thereby corrects the ignition timing for
each individual cylinder when the engine is warm.
Body
The knock sensors function according to the piezoceramic principle. The screened cables are connected directly to the knock sensors.
Function
Any vibrations which occur are converted with the aid of the piezoceramic into electrical signals.
Piezo-electric effect: If a mechanical force acts on a crystal, electrical voltages are produced.
The noise signal is modulated to a DC voltage from 0.13 to 4.7 V for transmission to the ME control unit.
Knock sensor signals may also indicate engine damage, e.g. increased engine noise resulting from a widened piston groove.
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
AR15.12-P-2184VA Removing/Installing Knock Sensors
Steps 1 - 8
Knock Sensors
Ignition Switch: Service and Repair
AR80.57-P-1000V Remove/install Electronic Ignition / Starter Switch Control Module
Steps 1 - 13
Special Tools

Spark Plug: Description and Operation
GF15.10-P-2000V Component Description For Spark Plugs
Location
In the cylinder head, each cylinder has a spark plug located in the center between the engine valves.
Task
The compressed fuel-air mixture is combusted by sparks between the electrodes according to the actuation from the ME control unit.
Design
In the manufacturer's specific type symbols, all the spark plug features are assigned (e. g. heat rating, shape of seating, thread, width across flats,
electrode material, spark position).
Function
The ignition voltage flows from the ignition lines of the directly plugged in ignition coils to the spark plugs and causes arcing in the air gap between the
central electrode and ground electrode.
Spark plug table, see IS, Group 15.

Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plugs
Bosch Platin .................................................................................................................................................................................................... Y 7 MPP 33

NGK ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... PLKR 6A
Gap ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Torque ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 - 22 ft lb (25 - 30 Nm)
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
AP15.10-P-1580VA Replace Spark Plugs
Steps 1 - 6
Spark Plugs
Special Tools
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction: Description and Operation
GF07.61-P-3004V ME Fuel Supply, Function

GF07.61-P-3004V ME Fuel Supply, Function
The fuel supply system must make available to the injection valves an adequate quantity of filtered fuel from the fuel tank, and at an adequate pressure
(injection pressure), in all operating conditions.
The fuel pump suctions the fuel in the fuel tank and delivers it through the fuel filter with fuel pressure controller to the injection valves at the fuel
distribution tube (single-line system). The pressure regulator regulates the fuel pressure in the process to approx. 3.8 bar.
Both fuel pressure reservoirs and the high-volume fuel distributor rail ensure that in the event of abrupt acceleration, sufficient fuel is available at all
injection valves.
The return line from the fuel pressure regulator supplies a suction jet pump which supports filling of the swirl pot in the fuel tank. The voltage supply
for the fuel pump is performed via the fuel pump relay.
The injection valves actuated by the ME-SFI [ME] control unit spray finely atomized fuel into the inlet ports.
Diagnosis
If the fuel pressure is too low, combustion misfires can occur which are stored in the fault memory. A cause for this can, for example, be a soiled fuel
filter.
Therefore check the delivery rate of the fuel pump at the feed point to the fuel manifold during combustion misfires. If combustion misfiring occurs at
one cylinder bank only, the respective fuel pressure memory may be the cause.
GF07.61-P-3015V ME-SFI Acceleration Enrichment, Function
GF07.61-P-3015V ME-SFI Acceleration Enrichment, Function
Dynamic enrichment prevents jerking when accelerating.
If the throttle valve is opened quickly, a short-term mixed adaptation takes place. An additional quantity of fuel is added to the engine by the ME
control unit in line with the performance map. The ignition angle is adjusted to "Early".
Fuel pressure fluctuations at the injection valves are prevented by the fuel distribution pipe by both the fuel pressure reservoir and the particular
volume.
Acceleration enrichment is dependent on:

- Load change rate (accelerator rate)
- Engine speed
- Engine load
- Intake manifold length and tumble flap position
- Camshaft position
- Correction programming with STAR DIAGNOSIS
GF07.61-P-3016V ME-SFI Part Load/Full Load Operation, Function

GF07.61-P-3016V ME-SFI Part Load/Full Load Operation, Function
Part load operation: When the engine is at operating temperature optimal emission levels and good fuel consumption are assured in combination with
the lambda control.
Full load operation: Maximum engine torque is produced at a pedal value of > 90 %. The injection time is extended accordingly for this purpose.
The particular quantity of fuel is metered to the engine in line with the performance map. The fuel quantity depends on:
- Intake air temperature (only in warming-up phase)
- Engine speed
- Engine load
- Closed-loop mixture control
- Intake manifold length
- Tumble flap position
- Camshaft position
- Ignition angle.
GF07.61-P-3018V the ME-SFI Safety Fuel Shutoff Function

GF07.61-P-3018V the ME-SFI Safety Fuel Shutoff Function
The safety fuel shutoff has the following tasks:

- In the event of mechanical faults at the throttle valve actuator, the engine speed is limited to approx. 1400 to 1800 rpm by cutting in and out the
fuel injection valves (strong surging engine running).
- If the TNA engine speed signal is missing, interrupts fuel pump actuation.
- When the airbags are activated (head-on collision), shuts off the fuel pump. To do this, the ME control unit receive a crash signal from the airbag
control unit. The fuel valves are actuated briefly to reduce the pressure in the fuel system.
GF07.61-P-3019V the ME-SFI Limiting Maximum Vehicle Speed Function
GF07.61-P-3019V The ME-SFI Limiting Maximum Vehicle Speed Function
In order to limit maximum vehicle speed on vehicles with a corresponding engine power output, the throttle valve is closed and the quantity of fuel
injected is reduced accordingly once a speed of 250 km/h is reached. In addition, the ignition angle is adjusted to "Late".
These measures ensure simple maximum speed limitation by reduction of the torque.
GF07.61-P-3022V ME-SFI Warming-Up Control, Function

GF07.61-P-3022V ME-SFI Warming-Up Control, Function
After start and post-start enrichment the fuel-air mixture is further enriched by the warming-up control as part of the fuel-air mixture precipitates on the
parts of the engine which are still cold. An additional quantity of fuel is added to the engine by the ME-SFI [ME] control unit in line with the
performance map. As soon as it is enabled, the Lambda control monitors the enrichment rate.
At close to idle operation, the enrichment rate is mainly dependent on the coolant temperature at start. At partial load, the air mass is decisive.
The camshaft position determines the exhaust gas recirculation rate via the duration of the valve overlap. As the hot exhaust gases warm up the
combustion chamber, the fuel vaporization changes and the enrichment rate must be tuned to match it.
The coolant is controlled by the three-disk thermostat in such a way that it is warmed as quickly as possible.
During warm-up, the ignition angles are determined from a particular performance characteristic.
The warming-up enrichment is dependent on:

- Engine speed
- Engine load
- Idle speed/part load operation
- Camshaft position
- Correction programming with STAR DIAGNOSIS
GF07.61-P-4009V ME-SFI Synchronization of Fuel Injection and Firing Order, Function

GF07.61-P-4009V ME-SFI Synchronization Of Fuel Injection And Firing Order, Function
When the engine is started, the injection sequence is defined on the basis of the firing order signals supplied by the crankshaft Hall sensor and the
camshaft Hall sensors To do this, ignition TDC must be detected by cylinder 1.
The synchronization of the injection and firing order is further processed by the ME control unit for actuating the ignition coils and the fuel injection
valves. In addition, it is required for the anti-knock control and for the fuel cutoff at individual cylinders.
If the camshaft Hall sensors are defective, a switchover to the next sensor will take place in a particular sequence. If there is no signal available then
ignition occurs after a 360° crank angle and injection occurs in order to allow an emergency start.
When the engine is shut down, coasting detection takes place, which also evaluates turning back of the engine shortly before the engine is stationary.
When the computer powers down, the position found is saved as ° crankshaft angle and used the next time the engine is started. If coasting detection
does not provide a result, or the shutdown engine has been moved, synchronization takes place.
GF07.61-P-4019V ME-SFI Deceleration Fuel Shutoff, Function

GF07.61-P-4019V ME-SFI Deceleration Fuel Shutoff, Function
Deceleration fuel shutoff has the following tasks:

- Increasing the braking power of the engine in the deceleration mode
- Reducing fuel consumption
- Improving exhaust emissions in the deceleration mode.
In the overrun mode, the ME control unit switches off the fuel injection valves depending on the coolant temperature and the gear engaged, if the
accelerator pedal is not operated (detected via the actual value signal from the accelerator pedal sensor). The fuel injection valves are switched on again
when the accelerator pedal is operated.
The deceleration fuel shutoff is suppressed at too high exhaust gas temperatures, because the high oxygen content in the exhaust during deceleration
fuel shutoff can lead to an increased oxidation of carbon monoxide and hydrocarbon (afterburning). This can result in additional heat (thermal reaction)
that can overheat the catalytic converters.
After the deceleration mode, the mixture is briefly enriched in order to eliminate the enriched oxygen in the three way catalytic converters resulting
from the deceleration mode. The valve overlap is also set to its minimum value by the camshaft adjustment. This ensures that an optimal conversion rate
is more rapidly achieved.
In order to prevent a sudden torque rise when combustion is reestablished after deceleration fuel shutoff, the ignition timing is briefly adjusted towards
"retarded".
The engine speed when combustion cuts in is dependent on the coolant temperature, the engine and transmission versions and with automatic
transmission, dependent on the drive position selected (via the CAN from the transmission control unit).
Deceleration fuel shutoff is blocked under the following conditions:

- with automatic transmission in selector lever position P or N
- with manual transmission with clutch pedal depressed.
GF07.61-P-4024V ME Fuel Reserve Signal, Function
GF07.61-P-4024V ME Fuel Reserve Signal, Function
This signal serves as supplemental information for the ME control unit for detection of combustion misfires through fuel starvation.
The information about the fuel level is transferred to the instrument cluster via CAN. From there, the information reaches the ME-SFI [ME] control unit
via CAN.
(USA)
If the fuel reserve warning light is flashing, the purge system has a gross leak (tank lid missing).
If the fuel tank is filled to less than approx. 1/4 or to more than 3/4, the leak test of the fuel system is suppressed. A test for major leakage is still
performed.
Idle Speed: Description and Operation
GF30.22-P-0003V ME-SFI Idle Speed Control, Function
The throttle valve actuator controls the idle speed by altering the position of the throttle valve. It is actuated by the ME-SFI control unit. To assist the
idle speed control, the ignition angle can be retarded by as much as 36° crank angle and advanced by as much as a 20° crank angle.
The ME control unit actuates the throttle valve motor in line with the input signals received at the ME control unit.
The throttle valve actuator controls the idle speed:

- At different engine loads, e.g. steering turned to full lock (power steering pump), drive position engaged, clutch pedal actuated, refrigerant
compressor engaged
- In the warming-up phase
- At undervoltage
- At different mixture composition e.g. through lambda control or fuel evaporation control system.
Heating-up speed
In order to warm up the catalytic converters more rapidly to operating temperature, the engine speed is increased in the idle speed range to 1100 up to
1300 rpm for about 20 seconds after each starting procedure at coolant temperatures of < 40 °C. Following this period, the idle speed is increased at a
coolant temperature < 70 °C for around 50 seconds by approx. 50 to 100/rpm. When a drive position is selected, this is immediately reduced.
Automatic transmission (AT)
When a drive position is engaged, a lower engine speed is controlled in order to reduce the creeping tendency of the vehicle.
The information "Drive position engaged/not engaged" is transmitted by the transmission control unit via the CAN data bus to the ME control unit.
AC compressor
To avoid engine speed dropping in the idle speed range when the AC compressor is engaged, the automatic air conditioning control system issues a
signal to the ME control unit via the CAN data bus which is adapted appropriately to the idle speed (increased).
When the air conditioning unit is switched on and the external temperature exceeds 35 °C, the idling speed is increased for the driving mode selected by
about 100 rpm when the switch-on threshold of about 900 rpm is exceeded. This increase is canceled again when the external temperature drops below
32 °C.
Undervoltage
If the engine control unit detects an undervoltage the idling speed is increased until the ignition is switched off for the driving mode selected by about
100 rpm.
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
AR30.12-P-1321V Remove/Install Accelerator Pedal
Steps 1 - 8
Accelerator Pedal
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
GF30.20-P-2010V Accelerator Pedal Sensor Component Description
Location
The accelerator pedal sensor is located at the top of the accelerator pedal module.
Task
Detects the accelerator pedal position and relays the corresponding voltage signals to the motor electronics control unit.
Replace accelerator pedal module always complete.

Function
The accelerator pedal sensor converts the mechanical operation input by the accelerator pedal into an electrical voltage corresponding to the accelerator
pedal position.
The accelerator pedal sensor operating on the Hall principle is integrated in the pedal lever shaft and consists of a shaft with a ring magnet. This rotates
in a printed circuit board with stator in the fixed Hall elements. This produces a change in the voltage.
The accelerator pedal sensor is supplied via pin 1 from the ME control unit with 5 V. Pin 3 and 6 are ground connections.
The information of the accelerator pedal position is transmitted to the motor electronics control unit in the form of two signals (pin 5 with signal 1 has
maximum approximately 4.8 V and pin 4 with signal 2 maximum approximately 2.4 V).
The supply voltage in the accelerator pedal sensor is halved for sensor 2.
Signal 1 ranges are defined as percentages of the supply voltage (approx. 5 V) as follows:
- up to 4 % the signal is too small via short-circuit to ground or via line interruption
- 4 to 9.4 % idle range
- 9.4 to 81 % partial-load range
- 81 to 96 % full load range
- above 96 % the signal is too high via short-circuit to positive.
Kick-down detection takes place via the accelerator pedal sensor, is signals 1 and 2 fall within full load range for a certain period.
If the brake pedal is operated, only the idle speed values from the accelerator pedal sensor are accepted. If necessary, the engine control unit will
generate substitute values. The signals from the accelerator pedal sensor are rejected over this time
In the event of an error at signal 1, a switchover to signal 2 takes place and emergency mode is activated.
Air Cleaner Housing: Service and Repair
AR09.10-P-1150VA Removing/Installing Air Cleaner Housing
Steps 1 - 6
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
AP09.10-P-0980V Replace Air Cleaner Element
Steps 1 - 6
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
GF07.07-P-6000V Hot Film MAF Sensor, Component Description
Location
The hot film mass air flow sensor is located behind the intake manifold between the air filter housing and the throttle valve actuator.
Task
The hot film MAF sensor detects the air mass supplied to the engine and the intake air temperature.
Design
A temperature-controlled resistor detects the air mass and an integral NTC resistor detects the intake air temperature.
The flow to the hot film sensors is even through the grid. The hot film MAF sensor has an oval housing and 4-pin (production start) or 5-pin plug
connector.
The electronics and the housing have undergone a number of modifications (please note part number).
Function
The electronic control in hot film mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the heating resistor [R(H)] by means of a variable voltage, so that its
temperature is 160 °C above the intake air temperature detected by the temperature resistor [R(L)].
The temperature of the heating resistor [R(H)] is detected by the sensor resistor [R(S)]. If a temperature change occurs as a result of an increased or
reduced air flow, the electronics adapts the voltage at the heating resistor [R(H)] until the temperature difference is again achieved.
This control voltage is used by the engine control unit as a measure for the metered air mass. The air mass is transmitted via a frequency signal (low
frequency for low air mass) to the ME control unit. Using STAR DIAGNOSIS, the cycle duration of the frequency signal can be read out in micro
seconds.
The intake air temperature is detected by an additional NTC resistor.
Hot film MAF sensors with the number A 273 094 08 48 and higher provide the engine control unit with an additional signal at a frequency ranging
between 17 and 21 Hz (44 to 54 ms). With this so called ratio-metric frequency signal, the engine control unit compensates for the temperature and
voltage influences at the air mass signal.
The engine control unit also detects the version of the hot film MAF sensor via the duty cycle.
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AR07.07-P-1453VA Remove/Install Hot Film Mass Air Flow Sensor
Steps 1 - 8
Fuel Cooler: Description and Operation
47-0005 Fuel Cooler
National versions (AUS),(J),(USA)
Example of fuel cooler fitted to engine
1, 2 Fuel return line

3, 4 Refrigerant return line
6 Outer pipe
7 Inner pipe
8 Insulating hose
9 AC compressor
75 Fuel cooler
A fuel cooler is installed to reduce the formation of vapour bubbles in the fuel system at high outside temperatures. The fuel cooler is located in the
refrigerant return line between evaporator and AC compressor. When the engine is running, the excess fuel in the fuel distributor flows back
pressureless through the fuel cooler into the fuel tank.
So long as the AC compressor is operating, heat is withdrawn from the fuel by the gaseous refrigerant which flows through the inner pipe of the fuel
cooler.
Example model 201 up to 08/85

Fuel cooler at left wheelhouse
1 Fuel return line from fuel distributor

2 Fuel return line to fuel tank
75 Fuel cooler
Example models 107, 126 on engines 116, 117

Fuel cooler at left wheelhouse
1 Fuel return line from fuel distributor

2 Fuel return line to fuel tank
3, 4 Refrigerant return line

6 Outer pipe
7 Inner pipe
8 Insulating hose
75 Fuel cooler
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair
AP47.20-P-0780V Replace Fuel Filter
AP47.20-P-0780V Replace Fuel Filter
Steps 1 - 13
Fuel Tank
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair
AR47.20-P-5510V Remove/Install Fuel Filter
AR47.20-P-5510V Remove/Install Fuel Filter
Steps 1 - 12
Fuel Tank
Fuel Injector: Description and Operation
GF07.03-P-6010V Component Description For Fuel Injection Valves
Location
The fuel injection valves are mounted between fuel distribution tube and cylinder heads.
Task
Spraying the fuel onto the injectors in the form a finely atomized spray
The diameter and number of the outlet holes (a) are adjusted to the fuel requirements of the engine.
Function
If solenoid winding is energized, the nozzle needle is raised by the solenoid armature about 0.1 mm against the force of the coil spring.
The fuel flows through an outlet opening and is sprayed onto the injectors in a finely atomized spray.
The supply voltage to the fuel injection valves is provided via fused terminal 87. Corresponding long electrical ground pulses from the ME control unit
facilitate actuation.
The fuel injection valves are actuated by the ME-SFI control unit, in other words one injection valve is assigned to each cylinder which meters the
quantity of fuel calculated for the cylinder.
In case of detected misfires, the actuation of the corresponding cylinder is interrupted.

Fuel Injector: Service and Repair
AR07.03-P-6520VA Removing/Installing Injectors (ME-SFI)
Steps 1 - 12
Fuel Pump: Description and Operation
GF47.20-P-2000V Fuel Pump, Component Description
GF47.20-P-2000V Fuel Pump, Component Description
Location
The fuel pump is located in the fuel delivery module in the fuel tank.
Location
The fuel pump is located under the fuel tank at the vehicle underfloor.
Task
The fuel pump supplies an adequate quantity of fuel to the fuel system at the required pressure in all driving states.
Function
The fuel pump draws the fuel from the swirl pot and drives it to the fuel filter with the integral fuel pressure regulator. While cornering when the fuel
level is low, the swirl pot prevents the fuel pump from drawing air.
The fuel pump is actuated via the fuel pump relay or the fuel pump control unit (engine 272.985). The voltage supply is fuse protected.
Fuel Pump: Description and Operation
GF07.61-P-3012V ME-SFI Fuel Pump Actuation, Function
GF07.61-P-3012V ME-SFI Fuel Pump Actuation, Function
The fuel pump is actuated over the fuel pump relay by a ground signal from the ME-SFI [ME] control unit.
If the power contact of the relay is closed, the in-tank fuel pump control unit is connected via "terminal 87" with "terminal 30" (B+). Terminal 30 is
protected by a 20 A fuse.
If the fuel pump does not run, first check the voltage supply to the ME-SFI [ME] control unit, then the fuel pump fuse and the fuel pump line terminals.
Fuel pump actuation has the following tasks:

- The fuel pump is actuated for complete filling for "ignition ON" for about 5 seconds. The engine must be started before the fuel pump is actuated
again. In order to achieve short starting times, ensuring full fuel flow is required, in particular following long shutoff times.
- In order to start the engine the fuel pump is actuated for a recognized starter recognition (terminal 50 Signal).
- For a running engine the fuel pump is actuated by the recognized engine speed signal.
- In the case of a detected front crash actuation of the fuel pump is interrupted.
Fuel Pump: Service and Repair
AR47.20-P-5710V Remove/Install Fuel Pump
Steps 1 - 8
Fuel Tank
Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair
AR07.52-P-5793V Remove/Install Fuel Pump Relay
Steps 1 - 6
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
AR07.03-P-1451VA Remove/Install Fuel Rail With Injectors (ME-SFI)
Steps 1 - 15
Control Unit
Engine Wiring Harness

Special Tools
Fuel Tank: Description and Operation
GF47.10-P-2000VA Component Description For the Fuel Tank
GF47.10-P-2000VA Component Description For The Fuel Tank
- MODEL 171 with ENGINE 272.942 /963 up to Model Year 8
75 Fuel tank
Location
The fuel tank is located at the front in the trunk above the rear axle.
45 Fuel filler neck, (United States of America) with ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery))
55/2 Fuel filter with fuel pressure regulator
55/2a Fuel pressure regulator
75 Fuel tank
B4 Fuel level sensor
M3 Fuel pump
Design
The fuel tank is made out of sheet steel and has a capacity of 70 liters.
A number of baffle plates prevent a gasoline smell.
Function
The fuel flows from the fuel pump over a fuel line to the fuel filter with fuel pressure regulator.
Excess fuel flows from the fuel pressure regulator back into the fuel feed module.
A suction jet pump is installed below to ensure that the fuel feed module is supplied with sufficient fuel. This is supplied with fuel from the return line.
The filtered fuel (with controlled fuel pressure) is passed on from the fuel pressure regulator via a fuel line to the engine (single line system).
The housing of the fuel delivery module serves as a swirl pot. While cornering with a low level of fuel in the fuel tank, it prevents the fuel pump from
drawing air.
A fuel strainer is installed at the feed point to the fuel pump (coarse filter).
The signal from the fuel level sensor is transmitted to the rear SAM control unit with fuse and relay module which passes on the signal over the CAN
data bus to the instrument cluster.
47-0010 Fuel Tank With Splash Bowl
47-0010 Fuel Tank With Splash Bowl
- Model 107 as of A 069 655 (approx. 05/87)
- Model 126 as of A 327 880 (approx. 03/87)
Sheet steel fuel tank
66 Fuel filter
67 Splash bowl
70/1 Return nozzle
79 Return line
A splash bowl (67) with fuel filter (66) is installed in the fuel tank. Its task is to reliably supply the engine with fuel when the fuel level in the tank is
low and during long cornering.
The fuel return jet flows along the return line (79) when the fuel pump is running at a high speed out of the return nozzle (70/1) into the splash bowl. In
so doing, it carries with it into the splash bowl the fuel located around the return jet.
The fuel level (h) is also retained in the splash bowl even if the fuel level in the tank drops below the height (h).
NOTE:
On vehicles with plastic fuel tank the splash bowl is integrated directly in the tank.
The function corresponds to the splash bowl in the sheet steel fuel tank.
Splash bowl with lid
As of 1989 as a phased implementation measure on all models and on model 201.034 (190E 2.3-16) as of vehicle ident end no. 117 955 a lid with an
approx. 20 mm dia. hole is fitted additionally to the splash bowl (67). This ensures that fuel is reliably supplied to the injection system even if there is
only a small quantity of fuel in the tank (reserve quantity) and during high lateral acceleration.
Vapour bubble filtering models 107, 126, 129
67 Splash bowl
67/1 Separating chamber
70 Return line
71 Riser line
An additional separating chamber (67/1) is created in the splash bowl (67).
The gas vapours contained in the fuel flowing back are separated from the fuel in the separating chamber (67/1) and led upward along the riser line
(71). This avoids fuel splashing noises.
47-0030 Fuel Tank Air Admission and Ventilation
47-0030 Fuel Tank Air Admission And Ventilation
A. All models
40 Filler cap
41 Seal
42 Closing clamp
43 Compression spring
44 Filler neck
Filler cap
The fuel evaporation gases can escape through the filler cap at an overpressure of 100-300 mbar (emergency ventilation, e. g. if vent line crimped or
vent valve faulty).
If the system is operating properly, a pressure of 30 - 50 mbar is produced in the fuel tank.
NOTE: As a phased implementation measure, the filler cap is provided with a plastic slide ring to facilitate operation. The filler cap (40) slides on this
ring with minimal friction and locks in both end positions.
Function of vent valve (51)
If a pressure of 30-50 mbar is exceeded in the fuel tank, the vent valve (4) opens and the fuel vapours flow to the active charcoal filter.
NOTE: The pressure in the fuel tank improves fuel supply and counteracts the formation of vapour bubbles.
Vent valve (51) open to active charcoal filter

Vent valve open if overpressure exists.

Ventilation to atmosphere (without fuel evaporation system).
2 Valve housing
3 Spring retainer
4 Vent valve
5 Valve plate
6 Air admission valve
7 Connection fitting
A Active charcoal filter connection
B Fuel tank connection
If a vacuum of 1-16 mbar is produced in the fuel tank, the air admission valve (6) opens. On vehicles fitted with fuel evaporation system, air is admitted
to the fuel tank through a cup seal on the left wheelhouse panel and through the active charcoal filter (see 47-0200).
Vent valve (51) open to fuel tank
B. Model 107
Function diagram fuel tank air admission and ventilation
50 Fuel tank
51 Vent valve
52 Active charcoal filter
52/1 Air admission cap
53 Regeneration valve
55 Fuel expansion tank
64 Pipes
64/1 Vent line
A separate fuel expansion tank (55) is positioned above the fuel tank. The fuel expansion tank (55) is connected to the fuel tank (50) by 5 pipes (64).
Depending on fuel level and fuel temperature in the tank, these pipes may act as overflow, discharge or vent lines.
The vent line (64/1) runs from the fuel expansion tank (55) through the tail floor panel to the vent valve (51).
Air is admitted to and released from the fuel tank through the air admission cap (52/1) of the active charcoal filter (52).
On vehicles without fuel evaporation system, air is admitted to the fuel tank and released from the tank by the vent valve (51) directly to atmosphere.
For function of fuel evaporation system see 47-0200.
C. Models 124, 126 and 201

Function diagram fuel tank air admission and ventilation
50 Fuel tank
51 Vent valve
52/2 Cup seal
54 Central pipe
54/1 Interruption vessels
64/1 Vent line
In the case of the sheet steel fuel tank, the ventilation system consists of a central pipe (54) with interruption vessels (54/1).
The interruption vessels prevent the fuel escaping along the vent line (64/1). The vent line (64/1) runs from the central pipe to the vent valve (51).
Air is admitted to and released from the fuel tank (50) via the cup seal (52/2) and the active charcoal filter (52).
On vehicles without fuel evaporation system, air is admitted to the fuel tank and released from the fuel tank by the vent valve (51) directly to
atmosphere.
Note regarding plastic fuel tank
The integrated air admission chamber above the plastic fuel tank replaces the central pipe and performs the air admission and release function.
D. Model 126 with ASR first version and special protection vehicles
Function diagram fuel tank air admission and release
50 Fuel tank
51 Vent valve
52/2 Cup seal
54 Central pipe
54/1 Interruption vessels
64 Vent line
On vehicles with ASR the active charcoal filter (52) is positioned below the rear floor. Air is admitted to the fuel tank (50) through the air-permeable
floor (arrows) of the active charcoal filter (52). The cup seal in the left front wheelhouse is discontinued. The line (A) runs to the regeneration valve.
E. Model 129
Function diagram fuel tank air admission and release, model 129
36 70°C thermo valve (black with white surround)

45 Throttle valve body
50 Fuel tank
51 Vent valve
52/3 Front, left side member
53 Regeneration valve
The vent line (64/1) runs from the fuel tank (50) through the vent valve (51) to the active charcoal filter (52).
Air is admitted from the front, left side member (52/3), air is released through the fuel evaporation system.
Location of components
Vent valve (51)
The vent valve (51) and the fuel return line (70) are only accessible if the exhaust has first of all been detached at the rubber rings (49-100) and the left
input shaft has been disconnected at the inner connection flange (35-620).
Active charcoal filter (52)
Positioned in front, left wheelhouse behind front wheel.

To perform repair work, remove inner fender, install (88-130).

64/1 Vent line
A Regeneration line
B To fuel tank
Fuel Tank: Procedures
AR47.10-P-4000V Empty Fuel Tank If Fuel Pump Is Faulty

AR47.10-P-4000V Empty Fuel Tank If Fuel Pump Is Faulty
Steps 1 - 16
Fuel Tank
Special Tools
AR47.10-P-4001V Draining and Filling Fuel Tank

AR47.10-P-4001V Draining and Filling Fuel Tank
Steps 1 - 4
Steps 5 - 18
Fuel Tank
Special Tools
OS47.10-P-0001-01A Disposing of Fuel Tanks

OS47.10-P-0001-01A Disposing Of Fuel Tanks
Before opening the fuel tank, empty completely, clean thoroughly and rinse out with a noncombustible fluid, e.g. with water, steam or an inert gas, e.g.
nitrogen, carbon dioxide.
Sheet metal fuel tanks

Open sheet metal fuel tanks with a chisel or metal saw by approx. 30X30 cm. Dispose of sheet metal ventilated fuel tanks as metal scrap.
Plastic fuel tanks
Open the plastic fuel tank using a suitable saw by approx. 30X30 cm.
In Germany the opened plastic fuel tank can be returned through the Mercedes Recycling System (MeRSy) as "other plastic parts" for recycling.
Operations not connected to MeRSy can dispose of similarly pretreated plastic fuel tanks along with the fraction of industrial refuse similar to
household waste.
Transport
Cut-open and ventilated end of life fuel tanks are not subject to the requirements of the Hazardous Goods Road Transport Regulations.
Fuel Tank: Removal and Replacement
AR47.10-P-4100V Remove/Install Fuel Tank
Steps 1 - 20
Fuel Tank
Special Tools
Fuel Tank Vent: Description and Operation
GF47.30-P-3100VA Vent Valve, Component Description
- MODEL 171 with ENGINE 272.942 /963
- except CODE (494) USA version up to Model Year 8
- MODEL 230 with ENGINE 272.966, 273.965
- except CODE (494) USA version up to Model Year 8
Shows model 171
76 Vent valve
Location
The vent valve is located at the underfloor under the fuel tank.
Task
Aerates and ventilates fuel tank, prevents overfuelling.
Design
Plastic housing with two hose fittings, integrated ventilation and air admission valve.
2 Valve body
3 Spring cup
4 Vent valve
5 Valve plate
6 Air admission valve
7 Connection
76 Vent valve
A Connection to activated charcoal canister
B Connection to fuel tank
Function
Fuel tank ventilation
The ventilation valve (4) opens at an overpressure of around 30 to 50 mbar.

The fuel vapors flow to the activated charcoal canister.
Fuel tank aeration
The air admission valve (6) opens at a vacuum of around 1 to 16 mbar in the fuel tank.
Air or fuel vapors are drawn in through the activated charcoal canister.
Refueling
The opening pressure of the vent valve (4) of approx. 30 up to 50 mbar is not achieved if the fuel tank cap is removed. The vent line to the activated
charcoal canister remains closed off. This ensures that the nozzle shuts off more rapidly and overfilling is prevented. By overfilling, the fuel can get into
the activated charcoal canister and can be suctioned by the engine.
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair
AR09.20-P-0080VA Removing/Installing the Air Duct Housing
Steps 1 - 11
Variable Induction Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Component Description For The Position Sensor Tumble Flap
Location
The position sensors are located at the rear on the intake manifold over the tumble flap shafts.
Task
To diagnose the tumble flap switchover, the position sensors detect the mechanical limit positions of the shafts. The swivel range of the tumble flaps
between completely swiveled in or out is approx. 56 degree.
Design
The position sensors function according to the Hall principle.
Function
Two cylindrical magnets with different polarities are attached to each tumble flap shaft.
After swinging out the tumble flaps a cylindrical magnet is located at the Hall sensor and the position sensor interconnects. The signal at the ME-SFI
[ME] control unit is about 0 V (tumble flaps actuated).
If the tumble flaps swing back then the other poled cylindrical magnet is on the Hall sensor is in the rest position. The position sensor opens and
interrupts the connection to ground. The signal at the ME-SFI [ME] control unit is now about 5 V (tumble flaps not actuated).
The position sensors must switch no later than approx. 5 degree before the respective limit position. For reasons of tolerance, they may also switch up
to approx. 16 degree before the limit position.
Variable Induction Position Sensor: Service and Repair
AR09.20-P-1995V Removing/Installing the Tumble Flap Position Sensor on Intake Manifold
Steps 1 - 7
Intake Manifold
Variable Induction System: Description and Operation
GF07.61-P-3028V Intake Manifold Switchover, Function
GF07.61-P-3028V Intake Manifold Switchover, Function
With the intake manifold switchover, switching between a long or a short intake route is possible. For this purpose, a longitudinal switch flap is located
in the intake manifold for each cylinder. The longitudinal switch flaps for each cylinder bank are actuated by an aneroid capsule and a flap shaft. Both
aneroid capsules are connected by a vacuum line.
The variable intake manifold switchover valve is connected in series in the vacuum line to the aneroid capsules.
Short intake route (without actuation)
The variable intake manifold switchover valve is de-energized and the aneroid capsules are ventilated. Without actuation, the length switch flaps by
spring force and free up the short intake route.
Long intake route
If the variable intake manifold switchover valve is actuated by a ground signal from the ME control unit, vacuum pressure from the vacuum memory
enters the aneroid capsules. The flap shafts are operated and the length switch flaps close.
Under the following conditions, the long intake route is selected:

- Engine load more than approx. 50%.
- Engine speed lower than 3500 rpm
Only an intake manifold switchover aneroid capsule is installed for engine 273. The two flap shafts are combined in the intake manifold.
Variable Induction System: Description and Operation
GF09.20-P-6001V Component Description For the Variable Intake Manifold Switchover Valve
GF09.20-P-6001V Component Description For The Variable Intake Manifold Switchover Valve
Location
The variable intake manifold switchover valve is mounted at the front of the variable intake manifold.
Task
Pressurize intake manifold switchover aneroid capsules with vacuum or admitting air.
Design
Electromagnetic switchover valve in the plastic housing, coil resistance approx. 30 ohms. Ventilation via cap.
Function
The variable intake manifold switchover valve is actuated on the earth side by the engine control unit through its own output stage. The voltage is
supplied through circuit 87.
A valve plate operated by a coil armature shifts between atmosphere and vacuum storage.
Variable Induction Control Valve: Description and Operation
GF09.20-P-6001V Component Description For the Variable Intake Manifold Switchover Valve
Component Description For The Variable Intake Manifold Switchover Valve
Location
Task
Pressurize intake manifold switchover aneroid capsules with vacuum or admitting air.
Design
Electromagnetic switchover valve in the plastic housing, coil resistance approx. 30 t. Ventilation via cap.
Function
The variable intake manifold switchover valve is actuated on the earth side by the engine control unit through its own output stage.
The voltage is supplied through circuit 87.
A valve plate operated by a coil armature shifts between atmosphere and vacuum storage.
Variable Induction Control Valve: Description and Operation
GF07.05-P-6030V Component Description For the Intake Manifold Tumble Flap Switchover Valve
GF07.05-P-6030V Component Description For The Intake Manifold Tumble Flap Switchover Valve
Location
Task
Pressurize tumble flap switchover aneroid capsule with vacuum or admitting air.
Function
Voltage is supplied from terminal 87. Coil resistance is approx. 30 ohms. The switchover valve is actuated at the ground side by the engine control unit
through its own output stage.
A valve plate actuated by the coil armature switches between the atmospheric memory (ventilation via cap/flap??) and the vacuum memory.
Variable Induction Control Valve: Service and Repair
AR09.20-P-1993VA Remove/Install Resonance Flap Switchover Valve At the Intake Manifold
AR09.20-P-1993VA Remove/install the resonance flap switchover valve at the intake manifold
Steps 1-10
Variable Induction Control Valve: Service and Repair
AR09.20-P-1994V Remove/Install Tumble Flap Switchover Valve At the Intake Manifold
AR09.20-P-1994V Remove/install the tumble flap switchover valve at the intake manifold
Steps 1-10
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
GF54.21-P-4105SK Upper Control Panel Control Unit, Location/Task/Design/Function
GF54.21-P-4105SK Upper Control Panel Control Unit, Location/task/design/function
- MODEL 171.4 up to Model Year 8
N72/1 Upper control panel control unit

GF54.21-P-4109SK Driver-Side SAM Control Unit With Fuse And Relay Module,
Location/Task/Design
GF54.21-P-4109SK Driver-side SAM Control Unit With Fuse And Relay Module, Location/task/design
N10/1 Driver-side SAM control unit with fuse and relay module
GF54.21-P-4130SK Rear SAM Control Unit With Fuse And Relay Module, Location/Task
GF54.21-P-4130SK Rear SAM Control Unit With Fuse And Relay Module, Location/task
1 Control unit plate

N10/2 Rear SAM control unit with fuse and relay module
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
AR54.21-P-1258V Remove/Install SAM Control Unit With Fuse and Relay Box In Trunk
AR54.21-P-1258V Removing and Installing SAM Control Unit With Fuse and Relay Box In Trunk
Modification Notes
Steps 1 - 11
Control Units

Body Control Module: Service and Repair
AR54.21-P-1260V Remove SAM Control Unit With Fuse and Relay Box, Left Front
AR54.21-P-1260V Remove SAM Control Unit With Fuse and Relay Box, Left Front
Steps 1.1 - 9
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
AH07.61-P-0002-02V ME-SFI Vehicle Features
AH07.61-P-0002-02V ME-SFI Vehicle Features
Comparison of engines 272, 273 with engines 112, 113 (except AMG)
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
GF07.61-P-6000V ME-SFI [ME] Control Unit, Component Description
GF07.61-P-6000V ME-SFI [ME] Control Unit, Component Description
Location
The ME 9.7 control unit is located on the intake manifold supporting the engine.
Task
Controls in line with the input signals the functions of:

- Ignition system/fuel injection system
- Electronic accelerator/cruise control/idle speed control
- Diagnosis/fault storage
- Drive authorization system/immobilizer
Design
Connection is achieved on the engine-side and on-board via two couplings interlocked via slide valves. Cooling fins on the upper side provide the
necessary rejection of heat. Vibrations are suppressed by rubber brackets.
Function
Control of fuel injection system
The ME control unit actuates the fuel injection valves separately corresponding to the firing order (sequentially) according to the input signals and the
performance maps stored in the ME control unit. The ME-SFI control unit calculates the opening times (injection times) of the fuel injection valves.
Control of ignition system
The ME-SFI [ME] control unit actuates the ignition system according to the input signals and performance maps stored in the ME-SFI [ME] control
unit. The ME-SFI control unit calculates the ignition angle values and controls the anti-knock control (AKC).
Control of idle speed control
The throttle valve actuator is actuated on the basis of the input signals and the performance maps stored in the ME control unit.
Control of cruise control
The ME control unit operates the throttle valve actuator for the cruise control function on the basis of the input signals and the position of the cruise
control switch.
Additional cruise control functions include variable speed limiter and Distronic.
Diagnosis/DTC memory
The ME-SFI control unit checks its inputs and outputs for plausibility and recognizes possible faults. The following faults can be distinguished:
- Faults present all the time
- Loose contact faults that have occurred while driving
The faults are erased in the ME-SFI control unit after circuit 30 is interrupted.
Drive authorization system/immobilizer
The ME-SFI control unit is always equipped with an immobilizer. When the vehicle is locked, the drive authorization system control unit transmits
information over the CAN data bus to the ME-SFI control unit, which thereupon interlocks the engine management system (fuel injection system). The
engine can be started (start enable) only when the vehicle is unlocked with the authorized key again and the control unit of the drive authorization
system sends information to this effect to the ME-SFI [ME] control unit via the CAN data bus.
The ME control unit is functional only with a CAN data bus and the FBS 3 drive authorization system.
Engine speed signal
The ME control unit generates the short-circuit proof engine speed signal TNA from the signals supplied by the crankshaft position sensor, and outputs
them to other control units. 3 pulses are output per engine revolution.
Actuations with STAR DIAGNOSIS
Functions can be actuated specifically for diagnostic purposes. These are listed in a menu item.
Variant coding
For adapting the ME control unit to different vehicle versions and vehicle equipment by means of matching code numbers. Coding is performed with
STAR DIAGNOSIS. The variant coding can be used to code the following vehicle versions and equipment variants:
- Vehicle model
- National version
- Transmission version
- with or without TWC
Fuel consumption signal
The consumption signal is calculated from the injection times (e.g. 8 liters/hour) and is transmitted via CAN to the trip computer in the instrument
cluster.
Start recognition
The engine control unit is informed about the introduced starting procedure via the CAN message "circuit 50". This is necessary in order, for example,
to trigger the start quantity control, the starter control, the post-start enrichment and the ignition timing when starting.
Computer run-on
After the ignition is switched off, the ME-SFI control unit performs a delayed-off run during which certain data memories are updated (e.g. the DTC
memory). The run-on time with a warmed up engine is approx. 5 s, but may be extended to several minutes by various functions. After the fault
memory has been cleared, the run-on time must expire.
Various engine operating information is transmitted via the CAN databus from the ME control unit to the instrument cluster and to other control units
which are connected to the CAN databus.
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
AR07.08-P-7008VA Remove/Install Injection System Control Unit
Steps 1.1 - 13.1
Control Unit
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
GF30.20-P-3012V ME-SFI Electronic Accelerator, Function
GF30.20-P-3012V ME-SFI Electronic Accelerator, Function
The electronic accelerator function is integrated and controlled in the motor electronics control unit depending on the driver input and the operating
condition, the opening angle of the throttle valve.
Input signals for the electronic accelerator pedal:

- Accelerator pedal position
- Brake actuation (from ESP control unit)
- Cruise control operation (from ESP control unit)
- Engine torque requirements (via CAN)
- Gear ranges (over electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5)) (for automatic transmission 722.9)
- Clutch operating system (for manual transmission 716.6)
- Reverse travel (for manual transmission 716.6)
The position of the accelerator pedal and speed at which the position of the accelerator pedal changes are transmitted to the sensor located on the
accelerator pedal mechanically. The Hall sensor in the accelerator pedal sensor sends an appropriate voltage signal to the ME-SFI [ME] control unit.
The ME-SFI [ME] control unit analyzes the voltage signal and, depending on the performance map, activates the throttle valve actuator. The opening
angle of the throttle valve is altered appropriately by the actuator motor (M16/6m1) in the throttle valve actuator.
The opening angle is only determined by the accelerator pedal request if no limiting functions are active (e.g. idle request or a torque reduction).
The throttle valve actual value potentiometer (M16/6r1) reports the current throttle valve position back to the ME-SFI [ME] control unit.
Throttle valve damping
The throttle valve damping function closes the throttle valve up to the idle speed range with a time delay if the accelerator pedal is suddenly released. In
this way, the engine torque goes down slowly and the vehicle does not slow down with jerks.
Following input signals are processed:

- Change in the speed of the accelerator pedal position.
- Engine speed
- Throttle valve position
- Vehicle speed
Reversing
If the ME-SFI [ME] control unit recognizes a reverse travel, the throttle valve will be opened more slowly and the maximum opening angle limited to
about 50%. This function has the task of optimizing ride comfort and safety when reversing.
Adaptive accelerator pedal
The ME-SFI [ME] control unit evaluates how the accelerator pedal is being actuated and switches between characteristic curves. After a 50% pedal
travel, about 80% of the engine load is released for a sporty driver and 40% of the engine load is released for a quiet driver.
There is no further difference felt above a pedal travel of about 90%.
If, for example, the characteristic curve for a quiet driver is active after a long drive on the freeway then the accelerator pedal must be pressed down
unusually hard to obtain a higher acceleration level.
Additional functions of the electronic accelerator pedal:

- Cruise control (CC [TPM])
- Torque interface
- Emergency running
If the brake pedal is operated, this always means idle speed input.
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
GF30.20-P-4026V Electronic Accelerator Pedal Emergency Running Mode, Function
GF30.20-P-4026V Electronic Accelerator Pedal Emergency Running Mode, Function
The task of the emergency running consists of enabling a safe continuation of journey if interference occurs at the electronic accelerator.
Accelerator pedal sensor, emergency mode
If a Hall sensor fails, the system switches over to the second Hall sensor. The throttle valve opening is limited to approx. 60%. In addition, the throttle
valve opening rate is dynamically limited, in other words the throttle valve opens with a time delay.
If the result of the plausibility check is negative, or if both potentiometers are faulty, only the idle speed is then controlled.
Throttle valve actuator, emergency mode (electrical)
If a potentiometer fails, the system switches over to the second potentiometer. The signal from the hot film MAF sensor is used as an additional
comparative size.
If the plausibility check is negative or if both potentiometers are faulty, the throttle valve adopts a mechanical emergency running position (approx. 8
10°) which is fixed by the spring capsule in the throttle valve actuator (EPC malfunction indicator lamp comes on).
Throttle valve actuator, emergency mode (mechanical)
If the actuator motor is defective or there are other faults present the power supply to the throttle valve actuator will be shut off.
The throttle valve is resting against the mechanical stop (spring capsule) as a result of which the throttle valve opening is maintained constantly at
approx. 8 to 10°.
In neutral at engine speeds of > 1400/min, the fuel injection valves are deactivated and at engine speeds of < 1200 rpm actuated again.
While driving, depending on the engine load, engine speed is controlled by switching the cylinders on and off on the fuel side. The maximum engine
speed is approx. 1800 rpm and is fixed by the mechanical stop.
Faults detected by the accelerator pedal sensor and the throttle valve actuator are stored in the diagnostic trouble code memory and can be read out and
deleted with the STAR DIAGNOSIS.
Emergency mode is recognizable on a clearly surging engine running.

Electronic Throttle Actuator: Service and Repair
AR07.51-P-1401VA Remove/Install Throttle Valve Actuator
AR07.51-P-1401VA Remove/Install Throttle Valve Actuator
Steps 1 - 11
ME-SFI Fuel Injection And Ignition System

Electronic Throttle Actuator: Service and Repair
AR30.20-P-1262A Remove/Install Electronic Accelerator Actuator With Flap Connection
AR30.20-P-1262A Remove/Install Electronic Accelerator Actuator With Flap Connection
Shown On M112 Engine
Removing, installing
1 Remove cylinder head cover trim or air filter
NOTE: Removal: Remove air filter housing or cylinder head cover trim by lifting upwards from the cylinder head covers.
Installation: Moisten the retaining rubber on the cylinder head covers and the hot film mass air flow sensor seal in the air cleaner housing lightly
with lubricant.
2 Remove hot film mass air flow sensor together with air intake pipe
3 Remove crank case purge line (1/2)

4 Disconnect electrical connector (arrow)
NOTE: Pull catch backwards.
5 Remove electronic accelerator pedal actuator (M16/1)
NOTE: Undo screws (8/1).
CAUTION: Installation: Replace O-ring (8/2).
Refer to Electronic Accelerator Pedal Actuator below
6 Install in the reverse order
Electronic Accelerator Pedal Actuator

Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair
AR47.10-P-7000V Removing and Installing Fuel Level Sensor
Steps 1 - 6
Fuel Tank
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
GF07.04-P-6060V Pressure Sensor Component Description
Location
The pressure sensor is located at the top on the left cylinder head.
task
The pressure sensor detects the absolute pressure in the suction pipe.
The intake manifold pressure is used to detect the air mass when starting the engine. When the engine has started, the signal from the hot film MAF
sensor is monitored.
Function
The intake manifold pressure distorts a diaphragm which has an effect on the piezo resistor. This alters the resistance value of the piezo resistor and
influences the output voltage, which is used as information regarding the intake manifold for the ME control unit.
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
GF07.61-P-3025V O2 Sensor Heater Function
The purpose of the O2 sensor heater is to rapidly heat up the O2 sensors to their operating temperature while preventing damage to the sensor ceramic
as a result of controlled heating.
O 2 sensor downstream TWC (Lambda discrete sensor)
The sensor heater of the O2 sensors downstream of TWC is actuated via GND and pulsed by the ME control unit. The mean pulsed heating current is
approx. 400 mA in idle speed range. The current in the cold state is increased approximately by the factor 4. The sensor heater is switched off at coolant
temperatures below approx. 20 °C and at high engine speeds as a protection for the sensor ceramic.
O2 sensor upstream of TWC (broadband oxygen sensor)
The O2 sensors upstream of TWC are heated continuously during engine operation, to guarantee their function.
Temperature control and temperature measurement (by means of an internal resistance measurement) are performed by the ME control unit by means of
a special internal control electronics.
Voltage supply to the sensor heater takes place fused over the relay for circuit 87. Every sensor heater has its own short circuit-proof output stage with
diagnosis switching to ground in the engine control unit.
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair
AR07.52-P-5303VA Remove/Install Heated O2 Sensor
Modification Notes
Steps 1 - 5.1
Steps 6 - 10
O2 Sensor
Special Tools
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
GF54.30-P-5011V Component Description For The "CHECK ENGINE" Indicator Lamp
Location
The "CHECK ENGINE" indicator lamp is located in the instrument cluster.
Task
To indicate faults in the fuel injection system
Function
The indicator lamp is actuated by the instrument cluster via a CAN message from the engine control unit. To check the function it lights up with
ignition on ON and as of an engine speed of approx. 500 rpm for approx. 1 s. If there is no fault, the indicator lamp goes out
Information Bus: Description and Operation
GF54.00-P-0005VA CAN Data Bus, Function
GF54.00-P-0005VA CAN Data Bus, Function
CAN stands for "Controller Area Network". This is an electrical bus system for carrying data over two wires.
The tasks are:

- Data exchange between individual control units
- Readying sensor signals for several systems
- Reducing the number of electrical lines
- Improving the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
The CAN data bus consists of a special twisted two-core data line that connects all CAN subscribers (control units) in parallel.
The two lines of the data line must not be swapped (low level/high level). The motor electronics (N3/10) control unit is always a consumer with regard
to bus adaptation.
A 120 Ohms terminating resistor is therefore installed in the motor electronics control unit.
The data are transmitted digitally over the CAN databus at various intervals. The individual data blocks are defined in a data protocol and it is specified
which data are received or transmitted by a control unit. Each connected control unit is able to transmit or receive data (bidirectional bus).
The sum of the data blocks, the short break between the two transfer intervals and other properties of the CAN data bus are checked constantly.
Detected faults are stored and placed in the fault memory.
In the vehicle a distinction is made between the fast (500 kbit/s) engine compartment data bus and diagnostic CAN-data bus and the slower (83.3 kbit/s)
interior CAN data buses.
The new control unit must be coded when a control unit is replaced. This control unit coding takes place via a STAR DIAGNOSIS menu.
The international standardized network management "OSEK" ( Open systems and their Interfaces for Electronics in motor vehicles) is used for all
control units of the CAN data bus.
GF00.19-P-0001-02SK Overall Network (GVN), Networking of Components
GF00.19-P-0001-02SK Overall Network (GVN), Networking Of Components
Networking of Controller Area Network (data bus/CAN bus) (CAN)
A1 Instrument cluster
A2 Radio (with code (523) MB Audio 20 radio or code (535) Audio 20 CD radio, USA)
N2/7 Restraint systems control unit
N3/10 ME control unit
N15/3 ETC control unit (with transmission 722.6)
N15/5 Electronic selector lever module control unit (with transmission 722)
N18 HEAT control and operating unit (without code (580) Automatic air conditioning and without code (581) Comfort automatic air conditioning)
N22 AC control and operating unit (with code (580) Automatic air conditioning)
N22/7 Comfort AC control and operating unit (with code (581) Comfort automatic air conditioning)
N25/7 Front HS [SIH], AIRSCARF and steering wheel heater control unit (with code (403) AIRSCARF system, with code (443) Steering wheel
heater or with code (873) Right and left front seat heaters)
N32/1 Driver front seat adjustment control unit with memory (with code (275) Memory package (driver seat, steering column, mirrors))
N32/2 Passenger front seat adjustment control module with memory (with code (242) electrically adjustable passenger seat with memory)
N41/6 GPS box control unit (with code (529) HIGH Class Japan)
N47-5 ESP and BAS control unit
N52 Power soft top control unit
N62 PTS control unit (with code (220) Parktronic system (PTS))
N69/1 Left door control unit
N69/2 Right door control unit
N70 Overhead control panel control unit
N71 Headlamp range adjustment control unit (with code (614) Bi-xenon headlamp unit)
N73 EIS [EZS] control unit
N80 Steering column module
N93 Central gateway control unit
N93/1 Audio gateway control unit (with code (525) MB Audio 50 APS radio, with code (527) COMAND APS (with navigation system), with code
(529) HIGH Class Japan or with code (530) COMAND APS USA (with navigation system))
N123/4 Emergency call system control unit (with code (359) TELE AID emergency call system)
Y3/8n4 Fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (with transmission 722.9)
CAN-B Controller Area Network bus class B (interior compartment) (CAN-B)
CAN-C Controller Area Network bus, class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C)
CAN-D Controller Area Network bus class D (diagnosis) (CAN-D)
MOST Media Oriented System Transport (MOST)
Networking of MOST with code (523) MB Audio 20 radio or with code (535) Audio 20 CD radio, USA
A2 Radio
A2/6 CD player with changer (in glove box) (for code (819) 6-disk CD changer)
N87/5 SDAR control unit (only with code (536) SIRIUS satellite radio)
N123/1UPCI (Universal Portable CTEL Interface) control unit (for code (388) portable CTEL Universal Portable CTEL Interface system, for code
(386) preinstallation for portable CTEL Universal Portable CTEL Interface system or for code (359) TELE AID emergency call system,
low-cost)
CAN B Controller area network bus class B (interior compartment) (CAN B)
Networking of MOST with code (525) MB Audio 50 APS radio
A2/56 Radio and navigation unit
N93/1 Audio gateway control unit
N123/1UPCI (Universal Portable CTEL Interface) control unit (for code (388) portable CTEL Universal Portable CTEL Interface system, for code
low-cost)
CAN B Controller area network bus class B (interior compartment) (CAN B)
Networking of MOST
with code (527) COMAND APS (with navigation system), with code (529) HIGH Class Japan or with code (530) COMAND APS USA (with
navigation system))
A35/1 Hands-free system control unit (with (J))
A35/11Voice control system control unit (not (J))
A40/3 COMAND operating, display and controller unit
N41/1 Navigation processor (except (J))
N87/5 SDAR control unit (with code (536) SIRIUS satellite radio)
N93/1 Audio gateway control unit
N123/1UPCI (Universal Portable CTEL Interface) control unit(for code (388) portable CTEL Universal Portable CTEL Interface system, for code
low-cost)
CAN-B Controller Area Network bus class B (interior compartment) (CAN-B)
GF00.19-P-0001SK Overall Network (GVN) Function
GF00.19-P-0001SK Overall Network (GVN) Function
- MODELup to Model
171.4 Year 8
A1 Instrument cluster
A2 Radio (with code (523) MB Audio 20 radio or code (535) Audio 20 CD radio, USA)
A2/56 Radio and navigation unit (for code (525) MB Audio 50 APS radio)
A35/1 Hands-free system control unit (with code (529) HIGH Class Japan)
A35/11 Voice control system control unit (with code (527) COMAND APS with single DVD drive (with navigation system) or with code (530)
COMAND APS USA (with navigation system))
A40/3 COMAND operating, display and controller unit (with code (527) COMAND APS with single DVD drive (with navigation system), with
code (529) HIGH Class Japan) or with code (530) COMAND APS USA (with navigation system))
N2/7 Restraint systems control unit
N3/10 ME control unit
N15/3 ETC control unit (with transmission 722.6)
N15/5 Electronic selector lever module control unit (with transmission 722)
N18 HEAT control and operating unit (without code (580) Automatic air conditioning and without code (581) Comfort automatic air conditioning)
N22 AC control and operating unit (with code (580) Automatic air conditioning)
N22/7 Comfort AC control and operating unit (with code (581) Comfort automatic air conditioning)
N25/7 Front HS [SIH], AIRSCARF and steering wheel heater control unit (with code (403) AIRSCARF system, with code (443) Steering wheel
heater or with code (873) Right and left front seat heaters)
N32/1 Driver front seat adjustment control unit with memory (with code (275) Memory package (driver seat, steering column, mirrors))
N32/2 Passenger-side front seat adjustment control unit with memory (with code (242) Electrically adjustable front passenger seat with memory)
N41/1 Navigation processor (with code (527) COMAND APS with single DVD drive (with navigation system) or with code (530) COMAND APS
USA (with navigation system))
N47-5 ESP and BAS control unit
N52 Power soft top control unit
N62 PTS control unit (with code (220) Parktronic system (PTS))
N69/1 Left door control unit
N69/2 Right door control unit
N70 Overhead control panel control unit
N71 Headlamp range adjustment control unit (with code (614) Bi-xenon headlamp unit)
N73 EIS [EZS] control unit
N80 Steering column module
N41/6 GPS box control unit (with code (529) HIGH Class Japan)
N87/5 SDAR control unit (with code (536) (SIRIUS satellite radio)
N93 Central gateway control unit
N93/1 Audio gateway control unit (with code (525) MB Audio 50 APS radio, with code (527) COMAND APS (with navigation system), with code
(529) HIGH Class Japan or with code (530) COMAND APS USA (with navigation system))
N123/1 Universal Portable CTEL Interface (UPCI [UHI]) control unit (with code (388) Telephone "Handy", UPCI system, with code (386)
Preinstallation for telephone "Handy", UPCI system or with code (359) TELE AID emergency call system)
N123/4 Emergency call system control unit (with code (359) TELE AID emergency call system)
Y3/8n4 Fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (with transmission 722.9)
Overall network
4 data bus systems are involved in the networking:

- Controller Area Network bus class B (interior compartment) (CAN-B)
- Controller Area Network bus, class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C)
- Controller Area Network bus class D (diagnosis) (CAN-D)
- Media Oriented System Transport (MOST)
The deployment areas differ as follows:

- MOST is an optical data bus system. Here, data are transferred via a fiber optic cable to the connected information, navigation and
communications systems.
- The CAN-B is responsible for data transfers in the vehicle interior. It controls the different systems that can be operated by the driver or the front
passenger (e.g. power windows, interior air conditioning). The CAN-B operates at a transfer rate of 83.3 kbits/s.
- The CAN-C is responsible for data transfers in the engine compartment for the propulsion and chassis systems. The CAN-C operates at a transfer
rate of 500 kbits/s.
- CAN-D is responsible for the data transfer to STAR DIAGNOSIS. The CAN-D operates at a transfer rate of 500 kbits/s. Depending on the
national version, a control unit for navigation or emergency call system is connected additionally.
The MOST interconnects the following control units:

- Radio
- CD player with changer (in glove compartment)
- Radio and navigation unit
- Hands-free system control unit
- Voice control system control unit
- COMAND operating, display and controller unit
- Navigation processor
- SDAR control unit
- Audio gateway control unit
- Universal Portable CTEL Interface (UPCI [UHI]) control unit
The CAN-B interconnects the following control units:

- Instrument cluster
- Radio
- Radio and navigation unit
- COMAND operating, display and controller unit
- Restraint systems control unit
- Driver-side SAM control unit with fuse and relay module
- Rear SAM control unit with fuse and relay module
- HEAT [HAU] control and operating unit
- AAC [KLA] control and operating unit
- Comfort AAC control and operating unit
- Front SH [SIH], AIRSCARF and steering wheel heater control unit
- Driver front seat adjustment control unit with memory
- Front passenger front seat adjustment control unit with memory
- Power soft top control unit
- PTS control unit
- Left door control unit
- Right door control unit
- Overhead control panel control unit
- Upper control panel control unit
- EIS [EZS] control unit
- Steering column module
- Central gateway control unit
- Audio gateway control unit
The CAN-C interconnects the following control units:

- Instrument cluster
- ME-SFI [ME] control unit (located at side next to air filter for engine 271, and on the engine for engine 272 and 113)
- EGS control unit
- Electronic selector lever module control unit
- ESP and BAS control unit
- Headlamp range adjustment control unit
- EIS [EZS] control unit
- Steering column module
- Central gateway control unit
- Fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit
CAN-D interconnects the following control units:

- GPS box control unit
- Emergency call system control unit
- STAR DIAGNOSIS (external tester)
Interfaces between the data bus systems (gateways):

- The EIS [EZS] control unit or the central gateway control unit forms the interface between CAN-B, CAN-C, and CAN-D.
Although the instrument cluster and the steering column module are also connected to CAN-B and CAN-C, they do not form any interface. They
transmit the data that are needed to the respective data bus depending on what needs to be done.
- The radio or the radio and navigation unit or COMAND operating, display and controller unit or the audio gateway control unit forms the
interface between CAN-B and MOST.
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
PE00.19-U-2200TA CAN Bus - Engine

- Connector X63/4
Component Locations: Component Locations photographs can be found via their component names at the vehicle level. See: Locations/Component
Locations
PE00.19-U-2300TA CAN Bus - Interior Compartment
- CAN voltage distributor (X30/6)
Locations
PE00.19-U-2300TB CAN Bus - Interior Compartment
Locations
PE54.21-U-2124TA Central Gateway Control Module
- Control module N93
Locations
PE82.00-U-2710TA MOST Bus
Locations
Vehicle: Specifications
Alternator
BE15.40-P-1000-01I Check values for alternator
Modification notes
Check values for alternator


Battery
BE54.10-P-1000-01A Test Values For Battery, Voltage Supply
Modification Notes
Test And Adjustment Values For The Battery

Test And Adjustment Values For The Battery
Accelerator Pedal
BA30.20-P-1000-03A Accelerator Pedal
Accelerator Pedal
Air Bag Systems

BA91.60-P-1000-01A Airbag
Airbag
Alignment Specs
Vehicle Alignment
Vehicle Level
Front Axle
Except sport suspension (code 486), except AMG
+11 mm (±8)
+2.7° (±1.3°)
Permissible difference in vehicle level between right and left side of vehicle
When checking .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1°
When calibrating with Star Diagnosis ........................................................................................................................................................ 0.5°
With sports suspension (code 486) or AMG

-1 mm (±8)
+0.8° (±1.3°)
When checking .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1°
Rear Axle
Standard
+17 mm (±8)
+1.7° (±0.8°)
When checking .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1°
With sports suspension

+7 mm (±8)
+0.7° (±0.8°)
When checking .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1°
Front Camber (at vehicle level)

+1.1° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+1.5° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+1.9° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+2.3° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+2.7° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°29' ±20'
+3.1° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°29' ±20'
+3.5° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°25' ±20'
+3.9° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°25' ±20'
+4.3° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°24' ±20'
Maximum left to right deviation ........................................................................................................................................................................ 24'

-0.8° ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
-0.4° ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+0.0° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+0.4° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+0.8° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+1.2° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+1.6° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+2.0° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
+2.4° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±20'
Maximum left to right deviation ........................................................................................................................................................................ 24'
Front Caster
Measure heights of front and rear axles, then consult table for the caster data
VA = front axle
HA = Rear axle
Tolerance ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... ±30'
Maximum deviation between left and right ............................................................................................................................................................. 30'
Front Axle Toe ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0°12' ±10'
Toe-out on turns with inner wheel steered through 20°

Except sport suspension (code 486), except AMG ...................................................................................................................................... 1°54' ±30'
With sports suspension (code 486) or AMG ................................................................................................................................................ 2°00' ±30'
Rear Camber (at vehicle level)

+0.9° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°18' ±30'
+1.3° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°12' ±30'
+1.7° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°07' ±30'
+2.1° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°03' ±30'
+2.5° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°00' ±30'
Max deviation .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30'

-0.1° ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°30' ±30'
+0.3° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°25' ±30'
+0.7° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°20' ±30'
+1.1° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°15' ±30'
+1.5° ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... -1°10' ±30'
Max deviation .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30'
Overall toe-in at rear axle .................................................................................................................................................................................. 0°33' ±15'

Maximum deviation between left and right ............................................................................................................................................................. 30'
BE33.20-P-1000-01A Test Specifications For Wheel Location, Wheel Hub

BE33.20-P-1000-01A Test specifications for wheel location, wheel hub
Modification Notes
Test Specifications For Wheel Location, Wheel Hub



BE40.20-P-1000-07A Front Axle Toe

BE40.20-P-1000-07A Front axle toe
- except CPDE (P99) Special model "AMG Black Series" [model 230]
Modification Notes
Front Axle Toe Check Values

Front Axle Toe Check Values
BE40.20-P-1000-08A Toe-Out on Turns

BE40.20-P-1000-08A Toe-out on turns
Modification Notes
Test Values For Toe-out On Turns



BE40.20-P-1000-20A Caster
BE40.20-P-1000-20A Caster
Check And Adjustment Values For Caster

Check And Adjustment Values For Caster
BE40.30-P-1000-05B Test Values For Distance and Comparison Measurements on Rear Axle
BE40.30-P-1000-05B Test values for distance and comparison measurements on rear axle
Modification Notes
Test Values For Distance And Comparison Measurements On Rear Axle

BE40.30-P-1000-06D Test Values For Distance and Comparison Measurement on Front Axle
BE40.30-P-1000-06D Test values for distance and comparison measurement on front axle
Modification Notes
Test Values For Distance And Comparison Measurement On Front Axle
BE40.30-P-1000-05B Test Values For Distance and Comparison Measurements on Rear Axle
BE40.30-P-1000-05B Test values for distance and comparison measurements on rear axle
Modification Notes

BE40.30-P-1000-06D Test Values For Distance and Comparison Measurement on Front Axle
BE40.30-P-1000-06D Test values for distance and comparison measurement on front axle
Modification Notes
Test Values For Distance And Comparison Measurement On Front Axle
Determining Caster Value

AR40.20-P-0322-03V Check Caster and Assign to Tabular Value
Caster Test And Adjustment Specifications
Caster test and adjustment specifications
Caster angle tolerance range: ±30'
The ride-height readings are displayed by the electronic clinometer in decimal degrees [°].
Procedure:
1 Measure heights of front and rear axles, then consult the table for the caster data.
Example: Front ride height 2.7°

+ rear ride height 1.7°
= Caster 10.41°
Front axle at front tide height

Rear axle suspension at rear tide height
Test Values For Distance/Comparison Measurement on Front Axle

Test Values for Distance And Comparative Measurements on Front Axle
Dimension
V1................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4 mm
V2................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4 mm
V3................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 mm
V5...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1295 (±3) mm
V6................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 mm
V8........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 860 (±2) mm
V9........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 840 (±2) mm
V10................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3 mm
Test Values For Distance/Comparison Measurement on Rear Axle

Test Values - Distance And Comparative Measurement - Front Axle
Dim.
H2................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 mm
H5................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 mm
H6...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1083 (±2) mm
H7........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 809 (±2) mm
H9................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 mm
Antitheft and Alarm Systems
BA80.50-P-1000-01A Anti-Theft Alarm System
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Oil Pan
Drain Plug, Trans Oil Pan

Torque Converter Test Values
Housing
Transmission, Oil Cooler
Torque Converter
Driveshaft
Engine Suspension, Engine Mount, Engine Supports
Engine Suspension, Engine Mount, Engine Supports
AR27.19-P-0200V Oil Pan, Automatic Transmission

- with TRANSMISSION 722.6
Oil pan, automatic transmission
Fluid Pan, A/T

Oil pan, automatic transmission
Axle Shaft Assembly

AR35.30-P-0661-01P Boot cap on joint ring removal and installation
- with rear axle set
Modification Notes
Rear Axle Shaft, Plugged In Shafts
Remove boot cap

1 Using protective jaw pads, clamp rear halfshaft into vice.

2 Using a hand coping saw, saw cup seal (37i) radially in the groove on the press-in edge so that a notch arises.
Avoid damaging the joint ring (37c).
3 Use a screwdriver to lift the notched area.
4 Starting at the standing away end, unscrew cup seal (37i) using suitable pliers until it is possible to lift the cup seal (37i) off the joint ring (37c).
When unscrewing the cup seal (37i) ensure that the rear axle shaft does not fall out of the joint ring (37c) before the parts have match marks
placed.
5 Remove hose clamps (37k).

6 Pull boot (37l) with cup seal (37i) off joint ring (37c) and slide away on the rear axle shaft.
When replacing both boots (37l) the opposite boot (37l) can be slid over the rear axle shaft
Install boot cap.
7 Replace O-ring on joint ring (37c).
To facilitate assembly of the cup seal (37i), rub O-ring with spirit.
Do not grease or oil the O-ring, as this might cause the cap seal (37i) to turn on the joint ring (37c).
8 Mount cup seal (37i) with hose clamp (37k) and slide on as far as the end stop on the joint ring (37c). If necessary, drive fully home by tapping
gently with a plastic mallet.
Slide on cup seal (37i) carefully otherwise the O-ring will be damaged.
9 By four blows on the circumference, offset by 90 degrees respectively, fix cup seal (37i) in place in the circumferential groove of the joint ring
(37c).
10 By means of even blows with a suitable hammer drive cup seal (37i) into the circumferential groove of the joint ring (37c).
Ensure that the boot cap (37i) seats properly.

11 By positioning a drift ([diameter]4 mm) and applying even blows with the hammer, reposition the cup seal (37i) in the groove.
12 Measure size of joint housing.
The quantity of grease required depends on the size of the joint housing. Using a vernier caliper determine diameter "A" on the outside of ball
joint and diameter "B" on the inside of the ball joint.
For measuring points, see arrows. For quantity of grease, see Table.
13 Fill joint with new grease

14 Slide boot (37l) onto cup seal (37i).
Ensure that the ridge (arrow) on the boot (37l) is resting between the ridges on the boot cap (37i).
After the boot (37l) is slid on, no grooves on the rear halfshaft should be visible at the end with the smaller diameter, this indicates that the ridge
(37l) on the boot is in the first groove.
15 Install hose clamps (37k).
Ensure that dimension (a), measured on the inside, is not exceeded or fallen below.
BA61.10-P-1000-01A Frame Floor

BA61.10-P-1000-01A Frame Floor
Frame Floor
BA61.40-P-1000-01D Underbody Protection

BA61.40-P-1000-01D Underbody Protection
- with CODE (481) Underride guard [models 171, 207, 212, 216, 221, 204]
- with CODE (430) Offroad package [model 204]
Underbody Protection
BA62.30-P-1000-01A Cross Member And Front Reinforcement

BA62.30-P-1000-01A Cross Member And Front Reinforcement
Modification Notes
Crossmember And Front Reinforcement
BA62.30-P-1000-04A Radiator Support

BA62.30-P-1000-04A Radiator Support
Radiator Support
BA64.20-P-1000-01A Rear
BA64.20-P-1000-01A Rear
Rear End
BA67.20-P-1000-02A Rear Window

BA67.20-P-1000-02A Rear Window
Modification Notes
Rear Window
BA67.30-P-1000-01B Side Windows

BA67.30-P-1000-01B Side Windows
Modification Notes
Side Windows
BA67.39-P-1000-01A Side Window Electrical System

BA67.39-P-1000-01A Side Window Electrical System
Side Window Electrical System
BA77.30-P-1000-01B Soft Top

BA77.30-P-1000-01B Soft Top
Modification Notes
Soft Top
BA77.33-P-1000-01A Soft Top Mechanical Components

BA77.33-P-1000-01A Soft Top Mechanical Components
Soft Top - Mechanical System
BA77.37-P-1000-01A Soft Top Hydraulic System

BA77.37-P-1000-01A Soft Top Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Convertible Top

Hydraulic Convertible Top
Front Door
BA72.10-P-1000-01AB Front Door
Modification Notes
Front Door
Front Fender
BA88.10-P-1000-01B Fenders
Fender
Fender
Hood
BA88.40-P-1000-01A Engine Hood
Modification Notes
Engine Hood
Engine Hood
Interior Moulding / Trim

BA68.74-P-1000-01A Partition Wall
- with CODE (Z19) S600 Pullman Guard state sedan [model 221]
Partition Wall
Mirrors
BA88.70-P-1000-01A Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirror
Roll Bar
BA91.50-P-1000-01A Rollover Bar Mechanical System
Roll Bar Mechanism
Seats
BA91.10-P-1000-01A Front Seats
Modification Notes
Front Seats
Trunk / Liftgate
BA88.50-P-1000-01A Trunk Lid
Modification Notes
Trunk Lid (Part 1)

Trunk Lid (Part 2)
Trunk Lid (Part 1)

Trunk Lid (Part 2)

Trunk Lid (Part 1)

Trunk Lid (Part 2)
BE42.10-P-1000-05C Test Values For Brake Pad In Front Sliding Caliper

Test Values For Brake Pad In Front Sliding Caliper




BE42.10-P-1000-06E Test Values For Brake Pad In Front Fixed Caliper

Modification Notes
Test Values For Brake Pad In Front Fixed Caliper




BE42.10-P-1000-07C Test Values For Brake Pad In Rear Fixed Caliper

Modification Notes
Test Values For Brake Pad In Rear Fixed Caliper

BE42.20-P-1000-01A Test Values For Parking Brake

BE42.20-P-1000-01A Test Values For Parking Brake
Test Values For Parking Brake
BE42.20-P-1000-01C Adjustment Values For Parking Brake

BE42.20-P-1000-01C Adjustment Values For Parking Brake
Adjustment Values For Parking Brake


Parking Brake Adjustment Values

BE42.10-P-1000-05H Check Values For Front Brake Pad

BE42.10-P-1000-05H Check values for front brake pad
Check Values For Front Brake Pad



BE42.10-P-1000-15G Check Values For Rear Brake Pad

BE42.10-P-1000-15G Check values for rear brake pad
Check Values For Rear Brake Pad

BE42.20-P-1000-01C Parking Brake

BE42.20-P-1000-01C Parking brake









Modification Notes




Modification Notes

BE42.10-P-1000-05H Check Values For Front Brake Pad

BE42.10-P-1000-05H Check values for front brake pad



BE42.10-P-1000-15G Check Values For Rear Brake Pad

BE42.10-P-1000-15G Check values for rear brake pad

BE42.10-P-1000-08D Test Values For Front Brake Disks

BE42.10-P-1000-08D Test values for front brake disks
Modification Notes
Test Values For Front Brake Disks





BE42.10-P-1000-09D Test Values For Rear Brake Disks

BE42.10-P-1000-09D Test values for rear brake disks
Modification Notes
Test Values For Rear Brake Disks




BE42.20-P-1000-01A Parking Brake

BE42.20-P-1000-01A Parking Brake
BE42.20-P-1000-01C Parking Brake

BE42.20-P-1000-01C Parking brake




Vacuum Brake Booster

BE43.10-P-1000-01A Pneumatic brake booster test specifications
Modification Notes
Pneumatic Brake Booster Test Specifications





Pressure Plate
System Specifications
BE20.10-P-1000-02C Coolant thermostat
Test values for coolant thermostat
Fan Shroud
Fan shroud
Water Pump
BE35.20-P-1000-01A Test Values For Rear-Axle Halfshaft Flange

BE35.20-P-1000-01A Test values for rear-axle halfshaft flange
Test values for rear-axle halfshaft flange

BE35.31-P-1000-02G Test Values For Friction Torque of Rear Axle

BE35.31-P-1000-02G Test values for friction torque of rear axle
- Rear axle center assembly dia. 198
Test values for friction torque of rear axle differential

Test values for friction torque of rear axle differential
BE35.31-P-1000-02G Test Values For Friction Torque of Rear Axle Differential

BE35.31-P-1000-02G Test values for friction torque of rear axle differential
- with CODE (450) Taxi version
Test Values For Friction Torque Of Rear Axle Differential
BE35.31-P-1000-03C Test Values For Rear Axle Differential

BE35.31-P-1000-03C Test values for rear axle differential
Test values for rear axle differential
Test values for rear axle differential
BE35.31-P-1000-04F Test Values For Rear Axle Housing Expansion

BE35.31-P-1000-04F Test values for rear axle housing expansion
Test values for friction torque of rear axle center assembly
Test values for friction torque of rear axle center assembly
BE41.10-P-1000-01A Propeller Shaft

BE41.10-P-1000-01A Propeller shaft
Modification Notes
Check Values For Propeller Shaft Inclination Angle





BE41.10-P-1000-02E Test Values For Propeller Shaft Centering Sleeve

BE41.10-P-1000-02E Test values for propeller shaft centering sleeve
Test Values For Propeller Shaft Centering Sleeve

BA01.30-P-1000-01O Cylinder Head

Modification notes
Cylinder Head
BA01.40-P-1000-01G Crankcase, Timing Case Cover, End Cover

BA01.45-P-1000-01M Oil Pan

BA01.45-P-1000-01M Oil Pan
Oil Pan
Belt Pulley/Vibration Damper Center Bolt

Replace center bolt.
Flywheel, driven plate, vibration damper, starter ring gear
BE01.00-P-1000-01B Compression Pressure

Modification
BE01.00-P-1000-02Z Cylinder Leaktightness

Cylinder Leaktightness
BE01.30-P-1000-04B Cylinder Head/Cylinder Head Bolts

Cylinder Head/cylinder Head Bolts





BE01.40-P-1000-01I Test Values For Cylinder Bore

Test Values For Cylinder Bore
Test Values For Cylinder Bore
Camshaft Bearing Cap Bolts

Connecting Rod
Connecting rod
Coolant Pump Bolts
Crankshaft Main Bearing
Cylinder Head Bolts

Check cylinder head bolts and replace if required.
Cylinder head
Exhaust Manifold Nuts
Exhaust manifold
Flywheel/Drive Plate Bolts
Oil Pump
Oil pump
AH01.30-P-1000-05A Information on Cylinder Head Contact Surface

AH01.30-P-1000-05A Information on cylinder head contact surface
The cylinder head contact surface should only be machined if there is mechanical damage.
It should not be machined (by face grinding) if the contact surface of the cylinder head is uneven (warped) in the longitudinal and transverse
directions.
When the cylinder head is mounted again, surface warping will be evened out when the cylinder head bolts are tightened.
Stock removal from the cylinder head and cylinder crankcase of an engine should together be no more than 0.3 mm.
If the cylinder head contact surface is machined, the valve seats must be reset.


Modification Notes
Modification notes
Cylinder head
reverse order.
M272


Camshaft Bearing
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket

Camshaft, Engine
BE05.20-P-1000-02L Timing
Modification notes
Timing
Timing
Timing


BE01.40-P-1000-01I Test values for cylinder bore
Crankshaft Main Bearings

Piston Specifications
Connecting Rod
Check values for connecting rod bolts
Connecting rod
Cylinder Bore Specifications
Check values for cylinder bore



Connecting rod
Shown on engine 272
AR03.10-P-6111-06VA Install and Gauge Connecting Rod Bearings
AR03.10-P-7021-02VA Assigning A Standard Size Piston to A Cylinder Bore



(x) Pistons marked with x must only be installed in cylinder bores marked with x(x).
Shown on engine 272
Cylinder bore diameters are specified in two tolerances. The cylinder bore diameters are differentiated from each other by the identification x or (x)
Modification Notes
Modification notes

Special Tools



color).

bearing caps (6).


BE03.20-P-1000-04E Test Specifications For Crankshaft Bearing Clearance
BE03.20-P-1000-04E Test specifications for crankshaft bearing clearance
Modification notes


Connecting Rod
Connecting rod
AR03.10-P-6111-06VA Install and Gauge Connecting Rod Bearings


Connecting Rod
Connecting rod


Connecting rod
Shown on engine 272
BE03.10-P-1000-03A Test Data For Conrod Bolts
BE03.10-P-1000-03A Test data for conrod bolts
Test data for conrod bolts

Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket

Modification Notes
Modification notes
Special Tools



color).

bearing caps (6).


BE03.20-P-1000-04E Test Specifications For Crankshaft Bearing Clearance
BE03.20-P-1000-04E Test specifications for crankshaft bearing clearance
Modification notes



Modification Notes
Modification notes
Special Tools



color).

bearing caps (6).


Cylinder Liner
BE01.40-P-1000-01I Test values for cylinder bore
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley

Piston Ring, Engine

BE03.10-P-1000-05D Check values for piston rings
Modification notes

Piston Specifications
AR03.10-P-7021-02VA Assigning A Standard Size Piston to A Cylinder Bore




(x) Pistons marked with x must only be installed in cylinder bores marked with x(x).
Shown on engine 272
Cylinder bore diameters are specified in two tolerances. The cylinder bore diameters are differentiated from each other by the identification x or (x)
BE03.10-P-1000-02D Check Values For Pistons
BE03.10-P-1000-02D Check values for pistons
Check values for pistons



Modification notes
Cylinder Head



BE01.30-P-1000-04B Cylinder head/cylinder head bolts







Cylinder Head Bolts

Check cylinder head bolts and replace if required.

Cylinder head
Camshaft Bearing Cap Bolts
Camshaft Sprocket Bolts
Exhaust Manifold Nuts
Exhaust manifold

Modification Notes
Modification notes
Cylinder head
reverse order.
M272
Valve Clearance
These engines are equipped with hydraulic lash adjusters. No adjustment is required.
Engine Mount
Engine mounts, engine supports
Engine Oil Pressure

BE18.00-P-1000-01B Oil pressure

Oil Pan
Oil pan
Bottom Part of Oil Pan
Oil pan
AR01.45-P-7500-06VA Bolt Plan For Oil Pan

AR01.45-P-7500-06VA Bolt plan for oil pan

Oil Pump, Engine
Oil pump
Timing Chain Tensioner to Timing Case

Bolt, Front Cover to Cylinder Head
Cylinder head
Cylinder Head Bolt on Timing Case
Cylinder head
Bolt, Timing Case Cover to Cylinder Crankcase

Timing Chain Tensioner

Bolt, Front Cover to Cylinder Head
Cylinder head
Cylinder Head Bolt on Timing Case
Cylinder head
Bolt, Timing Case Cover to Cylinder Crankcase


Exhaust Manifold
Exhaust manifold
AR01.00-P-1300-03HA Firing Order

AR01.00-P-1300-03HA Firing order
Engine 137, 275, 285

Flex Plate
Flywheel
Fuel Tank
BA47.10-P-1000-01B Fuel Tank
Modification Notes
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank
Headlamp Alignment Sensor

BA82.10-P-1000-01A Front Axle Level Sensor
- with CODE (614) Bi-xenon headlamp unit
Front Axle Level Sensor

Front Axle Level Sensor
BA83.30-P-1000-01D Air Conditioning
Air conditioning system

Air Conditioning System
Compressor HVAC
BA83.55-P-1000-01M Refrigerant Compressor
Refrigerant Compressor
Seat Belt Systems

BA91.40-P-1000-01A Seat Belts/Emergency Tensioning Retractors
Seat Belts/Emergency Tensioning Retractors
Spark Plug Chart

Spark Plugs
Bosch Platin .................................................................................................................................................................................................... Y 7 MPP 33

NGK ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... PLKR 6A
Torque ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 - 22 ft lb (25 - 30 Nm)
Spark Plug Gap

BE15.10-P-1000-01A Spark plugs
Test values of spark plugs
BE46.00-P-1000-01A Test values for steering
Test Values For Steering
BE46.10-P-1000-01D Test Values For Steering Shaft

BE46.10-P-1000-01D Test values for steering shaft
Test Values For Steering Shaft
BE46.10-P-1000-03B Test Values For Jacket Tube

BE46.10-P-1000-03B Test values for jacket tube
Test Values For Jacket Tube
Steering Gear
BE46.20-P-1000-01C Test values for steering gear
Test Values For Steering Gear
Wheel Hub
BE33.20-P-1000-01A Test specifications for wheel location, wheel hub
Modification Notes



BE40.10-P-1000-01A Wheels, tires
Modification notes
Wheels, tires
Tires
Modification Notes
Wheels, Tires
Tightening Specifications
Wheel Bolt Torque Specification ............................................................................................................................................................................... 110 Nm
Tightening Sequence
Tightening Sequence
Lug Nut Torque Patterns
IMPORTANT
Check all parts, including rims, lug studs, lug nuts, and mating surfaces of hubs and tire rims for rust, damage, or dirt. Clean mating surfaces with a wire
brush to remove any foreign material. Replace any damaged parts as needed. Careless installation of tire/rim assemblies in a vehicle is a major cause of
tire installation problems. Proper installation, including fastener torque, is essential to economical, safe and trouble free service. Use only the proper
sizes and types of fasteners for safe and proper service.
Tighten the fasteners a quarter turn at a time using the tightening sequence diagram as a guide. This is very important to prevent misalignment of the
wheel. Continue tightening the fasteners in sequence until the fasteners are tightened to the proper torque.
CAUTION: Improper torque or tightening sequence can cause distortion, fatigue cracks, or alignment problems. After driving the vehicle for a short
distance, recheck the wheel fastener torque. Parts will usually seat naturally, reducing the torque on the fasteners. Retorque all fasteners to the proper
torque.
Wheels
Modification Notes
Wheels, Tires
Windows
BA72.29-P-1000-01A Electrical System - Side Doors
Electric System - Side Doors
Electric Side Doors
BA82.30-P-1000-01A Windshield Wiper

BA82.30-P-1000-01A Windshield Wiper
Modification Notes
Windshield Wiper
Windshield Wiper
BE82.30-P-1000-01E Adjustment Values For Windshield Wiper

BE82.30-P-1000-01E Adjustment Values For Windshield Wiper
Modification Notes
Wiper Arm Test And Adjustment Values

Wiper Arm Test And Adjustment Values
BE82.35-P-1000-01A Windshield Washer System

BE82.35-P-1000-01A Windshield Washer System
Modification Notes
Test And Adjustment Values For Windshield Washer System

BE01.00-P-1000-01B Compression pressure
Modification notes
Compression pressure

272 Engine
BE01.00-P-100002Z Cylinder Leak Tightness

BE01.00-P-1000-02Z Cylinder leak tightness
Cylinder leaktightness
Power Brake Assist

BE43.10-P-1000-01A Pneumatic brake booster test specifications
Modification Notes





Power Steering Pump

BE46.30-P-1000-01C Power steering pump test specifications
Power Steering Pump Test Specifications
Radiator Cap
BE20.30-P-1000-01A Test values for cooling system cap
Cap of radiator or expansion reservoir
Cap for radiator or expansion reservoir

Cap for radiator or expansion reservoir
Diagnosis
Diagnosis using the HHT
Activation applications
Diagnosis
Diagnosis using the HHT

Activation applications
Activation functions
Activation functions
Additional information to the actual value screens
Compression Testing
Compression can be tested as an input using the HHT.
A mechanical problem may be present if the difference in engine speed is > 8 rpm for engines 104/112/113, and > 5 rpm for engine 111.
Any engine speed difference will not present itself in the same manner in all engines, so no conclusions can be drawn concerning the affected
cylinder.
If the engine speed difference is greater than the set value, perform a compression/cylinder leakage test to determine the affected cylinder.
Compression testing
Cylinder balance test

The cylinder balance test must be performed at idle. If the misfire recognition shutoff threshold is exceeded, a fault will be stored and at the same
time the fault count will increases. After repairs, clear the diagnostic memory.
Cylinder balance test
Ignition circuit shutoff

Ignition circuit shutoff can only be performed on Motor 113.
Ignition circuit shutoff
Radiator Cooling Fan

Fan shroud
Thermostat, Engine Cooling
Check values for coolant thermostat
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Capacities ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10.4 qts (9.8 liters)
Fluid - A/T
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Capacities ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10.4 qts (9.8 liters)
Brake Fluid
Brake Fluid
Fluid Type ................................................................................................................................................................................. MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
MB Part No. ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 000 989 08 07 01
Capacity ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.5 qts (0.5 liters)
Coolant
Coolant
Capacity ............................................................................................................................................................................. approx. 11.2 qts (10.2 liters)
Rear Axle
Capacity 1.2 qts (1.1 liters)
Type: Hypoid Gear Oil SAE 85w-90

MB Part No. 001 989 17 03 10
Fluid - Differential
Differential Fluid ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.2 Qts (1.1 liters)
Engine Oil
Engine Oil
Capacity
With Oil Filter ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8.5 qts (8.0 liters)
Fuel Tank
BF47.10-P-1000-01A Fuel Tank Capacity
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank
Manual Transmission Fluid
Type MB Manual Transmission Oil

MB Part No. 001 989 26 03 10
Fluid - M/T
Manual Transmission Fluid
Capacity .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.6 qts (1.5 liters)

Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
Capacity approx. 1.1 qts (1.0 liters)
Type MB Power Steering Fluid

MB Part No. BQ 1320001
Pentosin CHF 11S
Refrigerant
BF83.00-P-1000-01A Air Conditioning/automatic Air Conditioning
Air conditioning system/automatic air conditioning

Air Conditioning System/automatic Air Conditioning


Refrigerant Oil
BF83.55-P-1000-01A Refrigerant Compressor
Wheel Bearing
Wheel bearings
Capacity ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.1 oz (60 g) each
Type ................................................................................................................... MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing Grease 001 989 23 51 10
High temperature roller bearing grease (NLGI Class 2)

Wiper and Washer Systems
BF82.35-P-1000-01D Windshield Washer System
Windshield Washer System Filling Capacity
BB00.40-P-0236-12A Automatic Transmission Fluids (ATF, Sheet 236.12)

Type
Aral Getriebeoel ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ATF M12
Fuchs ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Titan ATF 3353
Mobil ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ATF 3353
Shell ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ATF 3353
MB 236.12 ATF 3353 ................................................................................................................................................................................... A001 989 45 03

BB00.40-p-0236-14A Automatic Transmission Fluids (ATF, Sheet 236.14)
- For transmission 722.7 in model 168, only automatic transmission fluid according to Sheet 236.10 is approved!
- 5-speed automatic transmission 722.6

- 7-speed automatic transmission 722.9 in combination with engine 629 without production limitation
- 7-speed automatic transmission 722.9 up to production data 18.6.2010 except vehicles with engine 629
Recognizable on white overflow pipe and round forming on oil pan.
Fuchs ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Titan ATF 4134

Fuchs ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Titan EG ATF 134
MB 236.14 ATF NAG2VSport .................................................................................................................................................................... A 001 989 68 03
Mercedes-Benz Automatic transmission oil sheet ....................................................................................................................................................... 236.14
Mercedes-Benz transmission oil sheet ......................................................................................................................................................................... 236.14
Mobil ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ATF 134
Shell .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ATF 134

Type
Fuchs ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Titan ATF 3353
Mobil ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ATF 3353
Shell ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ATF 3353
MB 236.12 ATF 3353 ................................................................................................................................................................................... A001 989 45 03

BB00.40-p-0236-14A Automatic Transmission Fluids (ATF, Sheet 236.14)
- For transmission 722.7 in model 168, only automatic transmission fluid according to Sheet 236.10 is approved!
- 5-speed automatic transmission 722.6

- 7-speed automatic transmission 722.9 in combination with engine 629 without production limitation
- 7-speed automatic transmission 722.9 up to production data 18.6.2010 except vehicles with engine 629
Recognizable on white overflow pipe and round forming on oil pan.
Fuchs ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Titan ATF 4134

Fuchs ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Titan EG ATF 134
MB 236.14 ATF NAG2VSport .................................................................................................................................................................... A 001 989 68 03
Mercedes-Benz Automatic transmission oil sheet ....................................................................................................................................................... 236.14
Mercedes-Benz transmission oil sheet ......................................................................................................................................................................... 236.14
Mobil ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ATF 134
Shell .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ATF 134
Brake Fluid
Brake Fluid
Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................................................. MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)

MB Part No. ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 000 989 08 07 01
BB00.40-P-0325-00A Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agents (Sheet 325.0 )
BB00.40-P-0325-00A Anticorrosion/antifreeze agents (Sheet 325.0)
Calculation of the antifreeze quantity to be refilled with a concentration that is too low (specified: 50 vol.%)
BB00.40-P-0310-01A Coolant Specifications

Coolant specifications
5. Overview
Which coolant additive, what change interval for which engines?
Coolant Type
Coolant
Type MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
MB Pat No. BQ 1 03 0002
(Meets 325.0 specification)
Diesel Emissions Fluid
BB00.40-P-0352-01A Approved NOx Reducing agent AUS32 ("ADBlue")
All products that comply with ISO 22241-1 standard are approved.
Rear Axle
Rear Axle
Type: Hypoid Gear Oil SAE 85w-90

MB Part No. 001 989 17 03 10
BB00.40-P-0235-00A Hypoid Gear Oils (SAE 90, 85W-90)

MB 235.0 hypoid gear oil ............................................................................................................................................................................ A 000 989 28 03
BB00.40-P-0235-07A Universal Hypoid Gear Oils

BB00.40-P-0235-07A Universal hypoid gear oils
The following are not valid for model 163 vehicles/major assemblies
Fuchs Titan Sintopoid FE ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 75w-85
MB 235.7 FE-hypoid gear oil .......................................................................................................................................................................... 001 989 33 03
Mobilube FE ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 75w-85
Use the following hypoid gear oils only for model 163
MB 235.7 Universal hypoid gear oil ................................................................................................................................................................ 001 989 17 03

MB 235.0 hypoid gear oil ............................................................................................................................................................................ A 000 989 28 03
BB00.40-P-0235-07A Universal Hypoid Gear Oils

BB00.40-P-0235-07A Universal hypoid gear oils
The following are not valid for model 163 vehicles/major assemblies
Fuchs Titan Sintopoid FE ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 75w-85
MB 235.7 FE-hypoid gear oil .......................................................................................................................................................................... 001 989 33 03
Mobilube FE ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 75w-85
Use the following hypoid gear oils only for model 163
MB 235.7 Universal hypoid gear oil ................................................................................................................................................................ 001 989 17 03
Engine Oil
Engine oil
For Vehicles with Mercedes-Benz Maintenance System - U.S. Vehicles as of Model Year 2005
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use on MB 229.5 or MB229.51 approved synthetic motor oil for all vehicles equipped with the Mercedes-Benz
Maintenance System. Conventional petroleum based oils must not be used for vehicles equipped with the Mercedes-Benz Maintenance System.
If the engine oil does not meet the above mentioned standard, engine damage is possible, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Use of any oil additives is not recommended by Mercedes-Benz USA and may result in damage to the engine which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
U.S. Vehicles Model Year 2005 to the Present Engine Oils
MB-Approved Sythetic Engine Oil

Mobil 1 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0w-40
Mobil 1 Formula M ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5w-40
Castrol Syntec European Formula* .............................................................................................................................................................................. 0w-30
Pennzoil Platinum European Formula Ultra* ............................................................................................................................................................... 5w-30
ELF Excellium 229.5* .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5w-30
Mobil 1 ESP Formula M*++ (Diesel only) .................................................................................................................................................................. 5w-40
Valvoline Synpower MST*++ (Diesel only) ................................................................................................................................................................ 5w-30
ELF Solaris LSX*++ (Diesel only) .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5w-30
++As of model year 2007 diesel engines must only use 229.51 approved engine oil
229.51 is only approved for diesel engines
*Not approved for use in AMG engines
229.5 or 229.51 engine oils must be used in conjunctions with fleece oil filter in vehicles with Mercedes-Benz Maintenance System (as of MY2005).
Using other oil filters may lead to engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
MB Sheet numbers are printed on the outside of oil containers
Approved engine oil viscosity in relation to temperature
Below -13°F/-25°C to Above +86°F/+30°C ................................................................................................................................................ 0W-30, 0W-40.
Above -13°F/-25°C to Above +86°F/+30°C .................................................................................................................................... 5W-30, 5W-40, 5W-50
Above -4°F/-20°C to Above +86°F/+30°C ................................................................................................................. 10W-30, 10W-40, 10W-50, 10W-60
Above +5°F/-15°C to Above +86°F/+30°C ............................................................................................................................... 15W-30, 15W-40, 15W-50
Above +23°F/-5°C to Above +86°F/+30°C .............................................................................................................................................. 20W-40, 20W-50
Fuel
Fuel
Premium unleaded gasoline: Minimum Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)

BB00.40-P-0235-10A Gear Oils (Sheet 235.10)
Type
Gear oil ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... MB 317
MB 235.10 manual gear oil ..................................................................................................................................................................... A 001 989 26 03 10
Fluid - M/T
Type
Gear oil ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... MB 317
MB 235.10 manual gear oil ..................................................................................................................................................................... A 001 989 26 03 10
BB00.40-P-0345-00A Hydraulic Fluids (Specification 345.0)

BB00.40-P-0345-00A Hydraulic fluids (specification 345.0)
MB 345.0 Hydraulic Fluid ............................................................................................................................................. A 001 989 24 03 10 (BQ 132 0001)

Pentosin .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... CHF 11S
BB00.40-P-0236-03A Steering Gear Oils (ATF)

BB00.40-P-0236-03A Steering gear oils (ATF)
MB236.3 steering gear oil ............................................................................................................................................................................ A 000 989 88 03

Fuchs ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Titan PSF
Gulf .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ATF MX
Liqui Moly ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Lenkgetriebe oil 3100
Megol .............................................................................................................................................................................................. Lenkgetriebeoel Stability
Refrigerant
Refrigerant Type
Type ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... R134a
Refrigerant Oil
Refrigerant Oil
Type.................................................................................................................................................................................. PAG / Part No. 001 989 0803

Type
Fuchs ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Titan ATF 3353
Mobil ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ATF 3353
Shell ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ATF 3353
MB 236.12 ATF 3353 ................................................................................................................................................................................... A001 989 45 03

Agip ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ Rotra HY DB Synth

BP .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Energear MBT
Castrol ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Syntrans-AT
463 with tranfer case 750.654

Esso Gear Oil ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ GP-D 80W

Mobilube ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... GX-A80W
Valvoline HP Gear oil ............................................................................................................................................................................................ GL-4 80w
Mercesed Benz transmission oil sheet ........................................................................................................................................................................... 235.1
463 with transfer case 750.65 except 750.654

Type
Fuchs ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Titan ATF 3353
Mobil ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ATF 3353
Shell ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ATF 3353
MB 236.12 ATF 3353 ................................................................................................................................................................................... A001 989 45 03

Agip ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ Rotra HY DB Synth

BP .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Energear MBT
Castrol ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Syntrans-AT
463 with tranfer case 750.654

Esso Gear Oil ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ GP-D 80W

Mobilube ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... GX-A80W
Valvoline HP Gear oil ............................................................................................................................................................................................ GL-4 80w
Mercesed Benz transmission oil sheet ........................................................................................................................................................................... 235.1
463 with transfer case 750.65 except 750.654

Wheel Bearing
Wheel bearings
Capacity ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.1 oz (60 g) each
Type ................................................................................................................... MB High Temperature Antifriction Bearing Grease 001 989 23 51 10
High temperature roller bearing grease (NLGI Class 2)

Vehicle: Diagram Information and Instructions
Color Codes
Color coding
BK = black
BN = brown
BU = blue
GN = green
GY = grey
PK = pink
RD = red
TR = natural color
VT = violet
WH = white
YE = yellow
Abbreviations and Option Codes OV00.01-U-1001-27A

Abbreviations and Option Codes OV00.01-U-1001-27A
4MATIC - AIR
AJC (ARA) - BN
BPC - CODE
COM - EDR
EDS - FSA-
FUG - IND
INTERV - ME-SFI (ME)

MFC - PEC (PMS)

PISI (PLA) - RDS

REST - SN2
SOV - TRAP
TRIP (RRE) - YE
Signal/Circuit Designations OV00.01-U-1001-28FA

(+) Plus
(-) Minus
15 Switched Plus
15R Switched Plus, in ignition positions 1, 2 & 3
15X Switched Plus, in ignition position 2
30 Battery voltage, Plus (permanent plus)
30z Terminal 30 1.input
31 Return line to battery minus or ground, direct
31b Return line to battery minus or ground via switch or relay, switched minus
49 Flasher unit input
49a Flasher unit output
49L Left turn signal lamp
49R Right turn signal lamp
50 Starter control (direct)
53 Wiper motor input ( +)
53b Wiper motor shunt winding
54 Stop lamp
55 Fog lamp
56 Head lamp light
56a High beam and high beam indicator light
56b Low beam
58 Side marker lamp, tail lamp, license plate lamp and instrument lighting
58d Adjustable instrument panel/switch lighting
58L Left parking light
58R Right parking light
61 Generator charge indicator lamp
85 Winding end minus or ground
86 Winding start
87 Input
87a First output (NC contact side)
87b Second output
87c Third output
87ME1 87 motor electronics 1
87ME2 87 motor electronics 2
AB Airbag
AB F+ Driver airbag plus
AB F- Driver airbag minus
AB1, BF Airbag 1, front passenger
AB1, FA Airbag 1, driver
AB2, BF Airbag 2, front passenger
AB2, FA Airbag 2, driver
ACSE Automatic child seat recognition
AL (-) Exit lamp ground
AL (+) Exit lamp voltage supply
AM Amplitude modulation
AM/FM Amplitude modulation/frequency modulation
Ant. Antenna
ART Distronic
ASK Drive pawl switch
ASK (-) Drive pawl switch, minus
B Video signal, blue
BBV Brake lining wear indicator
BFS Brake fluid switch
BL (+) Turn signal lamp, plus
BL (-) Turn signal lamp, minus
BLS Stop lamp switch normally open contact
BS Stop lamp switch normally closed contact
CAN-BH CAN interior compartment bus high
CAN-BL CAN interior compartment bus low
CAN-CH CAN engine compartment bus high
CAN-CL CAN engine compartment bus low
CL Central locking
Crash Crash signal
D+ Shift-up touch control
D- Shift-down touch control
D2B IN D2 bus input
D2B OUT D2 bus output
Data + Serial interface, plus
Data - Serial interface, minus
DF HL Left rear rotational speed
DF HR Right rear rotational speed
DF VL Left front rotational speed
DF VR Right front rotational speed
DFA VL Left front rotational speed output
DFA VR Right front rotational speed output
DG +5V Pressure sensor +5V
DG Sig. Pressure sensor, signal

DGM Pressure sensor, ground
Diag. Diagnosis
FH Power window
FH H One-touch up feature
FH HL Left rear power window
FH HR Right rear power window
FH T One-touch down feature
FH VL Left front power window
FH VR Right front power window
FL Rear lamp
FM Frequency modulation
FSB Parking brake
G Video signal, green
GND Shield
GS Emergency tensioning retractor
GS, BF Passenger emergency tensioning retractor
GS, FA Driver emergency tensioning retractor
GS, HL Left rear emergency tensioning retractor
GS, HR Right rear emergency tensioning retractor
H (+) Hall sensor power supply
H (-) Hall sensor, ground
H 1 Sig. Hall sensor 1 signal
H 2 Sig. Hall sensor 2 signal
H Sig.1 Hall sensor signal 1
H Sig.2 Hall sensor signal 2
HAL 1 Left rear axle 1
HAL 2 Left rear axle 2
HAL V Left rear axle power supply
HAR 1 Right rear axle 1
HAR 2 Right rear axle 2
HAR V Right rear axle power supply
HDF Remote trunk release
HH (+) Rear Hall sensor power supply
HH (-) Rear Hall sensor, ground
HHS Rear window defroster
HKL Backrest cushion heater element
HKS Seat cushion heater element
HL Left rear wheel antenna
HR Right rear wheel antenna
HTR (+) Sensor heater, positive
HTR (-) Sensor heater, negative
HV (+) Height adjustment Hall sensor power supply
HV (-) Height adjustment Hall sensor ground
IR (+) Infrared receiver, positive
IR (-) Infrared receiver, negative
IR-Daten Infrared receiver, data
K Diagnosis, K-bus
K (+) Head restraint Hall sensor power supply
KI-SI Child safety lock for rear power windows
LL L Left reading lamp
LL R Right reading lamp
Lsp. + Loudspeaker power supply
Lsp. - Loudspeaker ground
MHH (+) Rear height adjustment motor power supply
MHH (-) Rear height adjustment motor ground
MHV (+) Front height adjustment motor power supply
MHV (-) Front height adjustment motor ground
Mikr. + Microphone power supply
Mikr. - Microphone ground
MK (-) Head restraint motor ground
MSKT (+) Seat cushion length adjustment motor power supply
MSKT (-) Seat cushion length adjustment motor ground
Mute Mute
MVZ (+) Forward/back adjustment motor power supply
MVZ (-) Forward/back adjustment motor ground
NF Audio frequency
NF-L Left audio frequency
NF-R Right audio frequency
NHL Left rear level valve
NHRNSP Right rear level valve
NSL Rear fog lamp
NVL Left front level valve
NVR Right front level valve
02S (+) Oxygen sensor, positive
02S (-) Oxygen sensor, negative
P-Sig. Selector lever position "P" signal
R Video signal, red
R/P-S (+) RIP lockout solenoid, negative
R/P-S (-) R/P lockout solenoid, positive
RBCAN H CAN bus communication high
RBCAN L CAN bus communication low
RFL Back-up lamp
RR Spare wheel antenna
RV Automatic transmission control valve
S10 Rear sensor 10
S2 Front sensor 1
S3 Front sensor 2
S4 Front sensor 4
S5 Front sensor 5
S6 Front sensor 6
S7 Rear sensor 7
S8 Rear sensor 8
S9 Rear sensor 9
SA 1 Automatic dimming inside rearview mirror 1
SA 2 Automatic dimming inside rearview mirror 2
SB, HL Left rear side airbag
SB, HR Right rear side airbag
SB, VL Left front side airbag
SB, VR Right front side airbag
SBS Side airbag, window airbag sensor
SH (+) Rear sensor power supply
SH (+) Rearview mirror defroster, positive
SH (-) Rearview mirror defroster, negative
SH (-) Rear sensor ground
SHD Sliding/pop-up roof
Sig. Signal
SKT (+) Seat cushion length Hall sensor power supply
SKT (-) Seat cushion length Hall sensor ground
SP1M Set value potentiometer 1, ground
SP1S Set value potentiometer 1, slide contact
SP2M Set value potentiometer 2, ground
SP2S Set value potentiometer 2, slide contact
Start Circuit 50, release
SV Automatic transmission control valve
SV (+) Front sensors power supply
SV (-) Front sensors ground
SYNC Synchronization signal
TNA Engine speed outlet signal
TV1 Video channel 1
TV2 Video channel 2
TV3 Video channel 3
TV4 Video channel 4
U Power supply
USP1 Set value potentiometer 1 power supply
USP2 Set value potentiometer 2 power supply
V (-) Valve, negative
VAL 1 Left front axle 1
VAL 2 Left front axle 2
VAL V Left front axle power supply
VAR 1 Right front axle 1
VAR 2 Right front axle 2
VAR U Right front axle power supply
VFE + Power supply for DTR sensor positive
VFE - Power supply for DTR sensor negative
VL Left front wheel antenna
VR Right front wheel antenna
VSS VL Left front speed signal
VSS VR Rig ht front speed signal
VZ (+) Hall sensor power supply
VZ (-) Hall sensor ground
W H (+) Front warning element power supply
W H (-) Ground, front warning element
W H (Data) Signal, front warning element
W V (+) Rear warning element power supply
W V (-) Ground, rear warning element
WV (Data) Signal, rear warning element
Wake up D2 bus switch-on signal
WB, L Left window airbag
WB, R Right window airbag
ZF Intermediate frequency
ZF-Ant. Intermediate frequency antenna
ZZH Closing assist
ZZH-V Closing assist valve
Vehicle: Electrical Diagrams
Electrical Diagrams
PE82.85-U-2101TA Cockpit Management and Data System (COMMAND) Control Module
- with CODE (352) COMAND operating and display system
- Control module A40/3
Locations
PE82.85-P-2056TB Electrical Function Diagram For COMAND Voice Control
Electrical Function Diagram For COMAND Voice Control PE82.85-P-2056TB
- with CODE (527) COMAND APS with single DVD drive (with navigation)
- with CODE (498) Japan version
Function Diagram (Part 1)

Component Description/Coordinates, A8/1 To 4

Component Locations: Component Location photographs can be found via their component names at the vehicle level. See: Locations/Component
Locations
PE82.85-P-2061TB Electrical Function Diagram For Route Guidance By Voice Output (COMAND),
Function
Electrical function diagram for route guidance by voice output (COMAND), function PE82.85-P-2061TB


Component Description/Coordinates, 1 To S111

Component Description/Coordinates, S111s1 To U500
Locations
PE82.85-P-2062TB Electrical Function Diagram For Position Finding and Navigation (COMAND),
Function
Electrical Function Diagram For Position Finding And Navigation (COMAND), Function PE82.85-P-2062TB


Component Description/Coordinates, 1 To N40/3

Component Description/Coordinates, N47-5 To U500
Locations
PE82.85-P-2064TB Electrical Function Diagram For Video Mode, Function
Electrical Function Diagram For Video Mode, Function PE82.85-P-2064TB

Locations
Electrical Diagrams
PE42.45-U-2101TA Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Control Module

- Control module N47-5
Locations
Function Diagrams
PE42.45-U-2050TA Function Diagram For Electrical System of Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
- with CODE (472) Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Locations
Wheel Speed Sensor
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Vehicle Speed Sensor diagrams.
PE80.50-U-2050TB Function Schematic For Anti-Theft Alarm (ATA) Electrical System
PE80.50-U-2050TB Function Schematic For Anti-Theft Alarm (ATA) Electrical System
Locations
PE80.50-U-2051TA Function Schematic For Panic Alarm Electrical System
PE80.50-U-2051TA Function Schematic For Panic Alarm Electrical System
Locations
PE80.57-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Drive Authorization System (DAS) Electrical System
PE80.57-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Drive Authorization System (DAS) Electrical System
Locations
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
For information regarding diagrams for this system, please refer to Transmission Control Systems diagrams. See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
PE54.21-U-2107TA Overhead Control Panel (OCP) Control Module
PE54.21-U-2107TA Overhead Control Panel (OCP) Control Module
Locations
PE54.21-U-2108TA SAM Control Module With Rear Fuse and Relay Module (N10/2)
PE54.21-U-2108TA SAM Control Module With Rear Fuse and Relay Module
- Sheet 1
Locations
PE54.21-U-2108TB SAM Control Module With Rear Fuse and Relay Module (N10/2)
PE54.21-U-2108TB SAM Control Module With Rear Fuse and Relay Module
- Sheet 2
Locations
PE54.21-U-2109TA Driver-Side SAM Control Module With Fuse and Relay Module
PE54.21-U-2109TA Driver-Side SAM Control Module With Fuse and Relay Module
- Sheet 1
Locations
PE54.21-U-2109TB Driver-Side SAM Control Module With Fuse and Relay Module
PE54.21-U-2109TB Driver-Side SAM Control Module With Fuse and Relay Module
- Sheet 2
Locations
PE54.21-U-2109TC Driver-Side SAM Control Module With Fuse and Relay Module
PE54.21-U-2109TC Driver-Side SAM Control Module With Fuse and Relay Module
- Sheet 3
Locations
PE54.21-U-2119TA Upper Control Panel (UCP) Control Module
PE54.21-U-2119TA Upper Control Panel (UCP) Control Module
- Control module N72/1
Locations
Cellular Phone
PE82.70-U-2101TA Cellular Telephone (CTEL) Control Module
- with CODE (388) Telephone "Handy", UPCI system
Locations
Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems
Electrical Function Schematic For PARKTRONIC PE54.65-P-2053TA
- with CODE (220) PARKTRONIC


Component Description/Coordinates, A1 To 13
Locations
Electrical Diagrams
PE77.39-U-2101TA Vario Roof Control Module
Locations
Function Diagrams
PE77.39-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Vario Roof Electrical System
Locations
PE72.29-U-2101TA Door Control Module (DCM) Front Left
PE72.29-U-2101TA Door Control Module (DCM) Front Left
Locations
PE72.29-U-2102TA Door Control Module (DCM) Front Right
PE72.29-U-2102TA Door Control Module (DCM) Front Right
Locations
Emergency Contact Button
For wiring diagrams for this system please refer to Cellular Phone diagrams. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Cellular
Phone/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
Emergency Contact Module
PE82.95-U-2101TB Emergency Call System Control Module
- with CODE (359) TELE AID emergency call system
Locations
Garage Door Opener Transmitter
PE68.05-U-2050TA Function Diagram of Electrical System of Garage Door Opener
- with CODE (231a) Garage door opener
Locations
Heated Glass Element
PE67.29-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Heated Rear Window Electrical System
Locations
PE83.25-U-2101TA Automatic Heater (Heat) Control Module
PE83.25-U-2101TA Automatic Heater (Heat) Control Module
Locations
PE83.40-U-2101TA Automatic Air Conditioning (AAC) Control Module
PE83.40-U-2101TA Automatic Air Conditioning (AAC) Control Module
- with CODE (581) Comfort automatic air conditioning
Locations
Function Diagrams
PE83.40-U-2050TA Function Diagram, Electrics, Interior Climate Control
- with CODE (581) Comfort automatic air conditioning
Locations
Blower Motor
For information regarding diagrams of this component, Please refer to Heating and Air Conditioning diagrams See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
Compressor HVAC
For information regarding diagrams of this component, Please refer to Heating and Air Conditioning diagrams See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
Control Assembly, HVAC
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Heating and Air Conditioning diagrams. See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Diagrams
Electrical Diagrams
PE54.30-U-2101TA Instrument Cluster (IC) Control Module
- Control module A1
Locations
Function Diagrams
PE54.30-U-2051TA Instrument cluster (IC) control module
Locations
Cigarette Lighter
Cigarette Lighter wiring is included in the Interior Lights diagrams. See: Lighting and Horns/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
Fuel Gauge
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators diagrams. See: Instrument
Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
Fuel Gauge Sender
Instrument Cluster / Carrier
Outside Temperature Display
Speedometer Head
Tachometer
Temperature Sensor (Gauge)
PE54.35-U-2050TA Function Diagram of Fanfare Horn System (FAN) Electrical System
PE54.35-U-2050TA Function Diagram of Fanfare Horn System (FAN) Electrical System
Locations
PE82.10-U-2051TA Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
PE82.10-U-2051TA Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
- Low beam, High beam, daytime running lamps, auto on/off headlamps
Locations
PE82.10-U-2051TB Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
PE82.10-U-2051TB Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
- Turn signal lamp
Locations
PE82.10-U-2051TC Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
PE82.10-U-2051TC Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
- Standing lamps, parking lamps, license plate illumination
Locations
PE82.10-U-2051TD Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
PE82.10-U-2051TD Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
- Front fog lamps, rear fog lamps, backup lamps
Locations
PE82.10-U-2051TE Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
PE82.10-U-2051TE Electrical System Function Diagram For Exterior Lights
- Cornering lamps
Locations
PE82.20-U-2050TA Electrical System Function Diagram For Interior Lights
PE82.20-U-2050TA Electrical System Function Diagram For Interior Lights
- Footwell lamps, entrance and exit lamps
Locations
Backup Lamp
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Lighting and Horns diagrams. See: Lighting and Horns/Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams
Brake Lamp
Diagrams
Center Mounted Brake Lamp
Diagrams
Courtesy Lamp
Diagrams
Daytime Running Lamp
Diagrams
Dome Lamp
Diagrams
Fog/Driving Lamp
Diagrams
Hazard Warning Lamps
Diagrams
System Diagram
Diagrams
Headlamp Control Module
Diagrams
Horn
Diagrams
License Plate Lamp
Diagrams
Marker Lamp
Diagrams
Parking Lamp
Diagrams
Tail Lamp
Diagrams
Turn Signals
Diagrams
Vanity Lamp
Diagrams
PE80.20-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Central Locking (Cl) Electrical System
PE80.20-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Central Locking (Cl) Electrical System
Locations
PE80.45-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Convenience Closing System Electrical System
PE80.45-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Convenience Closing System Electrical System
Locations
PE88.79-P-2054TA Electrical Function Schematic For Passenger-Side Outside Mirror Park Position
Electrical Function Schematic For Passenger-side Outside Mirror Park Position PE88.79-P-2054TA
- with CODE (275) Memory package (driver seat, steering column, mirrors)
- except CODE (494) USA version


Component Description/Coordinates, 1 To S50/1
Locations
PE88.79-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Mirror Adjustment Electrical System
PE88.79-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Mirror Adjustment Electrical System
mirror adjustment with memory and parking aid

Locations
PE88.79-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For Mirror Glass Adjustment
PE88.79-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For Mirror Glass Adjustment
Locations
PE88.79-U-2055TA Electrical Function Diagram For Mirror Heater
PE88.79-U-2055TA Electrical Function Diagram For Mirror Heater
Locations
PE88.79-U-2056TA Electrical Function Schematic For Automatic Dimming Mirror
PE88.79-U-2056TA Electrical Function Schematic For Automatic Dimming Mirror
Locations
PE88.79-U-2057TA Electrical Function Schematic For Folding Outside Mirrors
PE88.79-U-2057TA Electrical Function Schematic For Folding Outside Mirrors
Locations
PE82.61-U-2101TA Auto Pilot System (APS) Control Module
PE82.61-U-2101TA Auto Pilot System (APS) Control Module
with CODE (525) MB Audio 50 APS radio

Locations
PE82.85-U-2005TA Wiring Diagram Navigation System
PE82.85-U-2005TA Navigation System
Locations
PE82.61-P-2055TA Electrical Function Diagram For Voice Control (APS), Function
Electrical Function Diagram For Voice Control (APS), Function PE82.61-P-2055TA
- with CODE (511) Audio 50 APS with DVD changer


Locations
PE82.85-U-2064TA Electrical Function Schematic For Video Mode, Function
PE82.85-U-2064TA Electrical Function Schematic For Video Mode, Function
- with CODE (512) COMAND APS with DVD changer
Locations
PE07.61-U-2101TC ME-SFI Fuel Injection and Ignition System Control Module
PE07.61-U-2101TC ME-SFI Fuel Injection and Ignition System Control Module
- Sheet 1
Locations
PE07.61-U-2101TD ME-SFI Fuel Injection and Ignition System Control Module
PE07.61-U-2101TD ME-SFI Fuel Injection and Ignition System Control Module
- Sheet 2
Locations
PE07.61-U-2050TB Function Diagram of Electrical System For ME Engine Control
PE07.61-U-2050TB Function Diagram of Electrical System For ME Engine Control
Locations
PE07.61-U-2752TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Engine Start
PE07.61-U-2752TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Engine Start
Locations
PE07.61-U-2754TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Idle Speed Control
PE07.61-U-2754TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Idle Speed Control
Locations
PE07.61-U-2755TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Alternator Interface
PE07.61-U-2755TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Alternator Interface
Locations
PE07.61-U-2756TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Ignition ON
PE07.61-U-2756TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Ignition ON
Locations
PE07.61-U-2757TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Maximum Engine Speed Limitation
PE07.61-U-2757TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Maximum Engine Speed Limitation
Locations
PE07.61-U-2762TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Safety Fuel Shutoff
PE07.61-U-2762TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Safety Fuel Shutoff
Locations
PE07.61-U-2763TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Two-Sensor Control
PE07.61-U-2763TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Two-Sensor Control
Locations
PE07.61-U-2766TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Oxygen Sensor Heater
PE07.61-U-2766TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Oxygen Sensor Heater
Locations
PE07.61-U-2770TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Smooth Running Evaluation
PE07.61-U-2770TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Smooth Running Evaluation
Locations
PE07.61-U-2771TA Electrical Function Diagram For Synchronization of ME Injection and Firing
Order
PE07.61-U-2771TA Electrical Function Diagram For Synchronization of ME Injection and Firing Order
Locations
PE07.61-U-2772TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Deceleration Fuel Shutoff
PE07.61-U-2772TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Deceleration Fuel Shutoff
Locations
PE07.61-U-2773TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Camshaft Adjustment
PE07.61-U-2773TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Camshaft Adjustment
Locations
PE07.61-U-2774TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Lambda Control
PE07.61-U-2774TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Lambda Control
Locations
PE07.61-U-2775TA Electrical Function Diagram For Me Transmission Shift Delay
PE07.61-U-2775TA Electrical Function Diagram For Me Transmission Shift Delay
Locations
PE07.61-U-2777TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Overheating/Knock Protection Function
PE07.61-U-2777TA Electrical Function Diagram For ME Overheating/Knock Protection Function
Locations
PE07.61-U-2779TA Electrical Function Diagram For Maximum Speed Limitation
PE07.61-U-2779TA Electrical Function Diagram For Maximum Speed Limitation
Locations
PE07.61-U-2781TA Electrical Function Diagram For Intake Manifold Switchover
PE07.61-U-2781TA Electrical Function Diagram For Intake Manifold Switchover
Locations
PE07.61-U-2782TA Electrical Function Schematic For Correction Programming
PE07.61-U-2782TA Electrical Function Schematic For Correction Programming
Locations
PE07.61-U-2783TA Electrical Function Schematic For Engine Torque Requirements
PE07.61-U-2783TA Electrical Function Schematic For Engine Torque Requirements
Locations
PE07.61-U-2785TA Electrical Function Schematic For Tumble Flap Switchover
PE07.61-U-2785TA Electrical Function Schematic For Tumble Flap Switchover
Locations
PE07.61-U-2786TA Electrical Function Schematic For Knock Control
PE07.61-U-2786TA Electrical Function Schematic For Knock Control
Locations
PE07.61-U-2787TA Electrical Function Schematic For Stating, the Post-Start Phase and Warm-Up
Enrichment
PE07.61-U-2787TA Electrical Function Schematic For Stating, the Post-Start Phase and Warm-Up Enrichment
Locations
PE07.61-U-2788TA Electrical Function Schematic For Injection Control
PE07.61-U-2788TA Electrical Function Schematic For Injection Control
Locations
PE07.61-U-2789TA Electrical Function Schematic For Ignition OFF
PE07.61-U-2789TA Electrical Function Schematic For Ignition Off
Locations
PE07.61-U-2790TA Electrical Function Schematic For Power Steering Pump Pressure Regulator
Valve Actuation
PE07.61-U-2790TA Electrical Function Schematic For Power Steering Pump Pressure Regulator Valve Actuation
Locations
PE07.61-U-2791TA Electrical Function Schematic For Heat Management
PE07.61-U-2791TA Electrical Function Schematic For Heat Management
Locations
PE30.20-U-2050TA Electrical Function Diagram For Electronic Accelerator Pedal
PE30.20-U-2050TA Electrical Function Diagram For Electronic Accelerator Pedal
Locations
PE30.20-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For Electronic Accelerator Pedal Limphome Mode
PE30.20-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For Electronic Accelerator Pedal Limphome Mode
Component Description/Coordinates, B37 To 2
Locations
System Diagram
For information regarding diagrams of this system, Please refer to Powertrain Management diagrams See: Powertrain Management/Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams
Data Link Connector
PE54.22-U-2000TA Data Link Connector/Diagnostic Socket
- Data link connector (X11/4)
Locations
Engine Control Module
For information regarding diagrams for this system, please refer to Powertrain Management diagrams. See: Powertrain
Management/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
- Connector X63/4
Locations
Locations
Locations
Locations
Locations
PE14.30-U-2050TA Electrical Function Schematic For Secondary Air Injection
PE14.30-U-2050TA Electrical Function Schematic For Secondary Air Injection
Locations
PE47.30-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For System Purging With Leak Test
PE47.30-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For System Purging With Leak Test
Locations
PE47.30-U-2052TA Electrical Function Schematic For Purge Control
PE47.30-U-2052TA Electrical Function Schematic For Purge Control
Locations
PE49.10-U-2050TA Electrical Function Diagram For Catalytic Converter Efficiency Monitoring
PE49.10-U-2050TA Electrical Function Diagram For Catalytic Converter Efficiency Monitoring
Locations
System Diagram
For information regarding diagrams of this system, Please refer to Powertrain Management diagrams See: Powertrain Management/Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams
Fuel Pump
PE47.20-U-2100TA Fuel Pump
Locations
Ignition System
PE15.12-U-2050TA Electrical Function Diagram For Ignition System
Locations
PE82.60-U-2101TB Radio (RD) Control Module
PE82.60-U-2101TB Radio (RD) Control Module
- Control module A2 (Audio 20)
Locations
PE82.60-U-2102TA Audio Gateway Control Unit
PE82.60-U-2102TA Audio Gateway Control Unit
Locations
PE82.60-U-2301TA Satellite Digital Audio Radio (SDAR) System Control Unit
PE82.60-U-2301TA Satellite Digital Audio Radio (SDAR) System Control Unit
Locations
PE82.60-U-2303TA High-Definition Tuner Control Unit
PE82.60-U-2303TA High-Definition Tuner Control Unit

- with CODE (517) HD Radio
Locations
PE82.60-P-2057TA Electrical Function Schematic For Digital Audio Broadcasting, Function
Electrical Function Schematic For Digital Audio Broadcasting, Function PE82.60-P-2057TA
- with CODE (537) Digital radio
- with CODE (833) Great Britain version


Component Description/Coordinates, 1 To H4/34

Component Description/Coordinates, H4/34 To U500
Locations
PE82.60-P-2058TD Electrical Function Diagram For Audio Mode, Function
Electrical Function Diagram For Audio Mode, Function PE82.60-P-2058TD

Component Description/Coordinates, 1 To U500
Locations
PE82.60-P-2059TD Electrical Function Diagram For Volume/Sound Settings, Function
Electrical Function Diagram For Volume/Sound Settings, Function PE82.60-P-2059TD

Component Description/Coordinates, 1 To U500

Locations
CD Changer
PE82.64-U-2101TA CD Changer (CDC) Control Module
- with CODE (819) CD changer
Locations
PE91.60-U-2101TA Airbag Control Module With Integrated Emergency Call System
PE91.60-U-2101TA Airbag Control Module With Integrated Emergency Call System
- with CODE (292) Left and right front sidebag ARMADA airbag
Locations
PE91.60-U-2102TA Weight Sensing System (WSS) Control Unit
PE91.60-U-2102TA Weight Sensing System (WSS) Control Unit
Locations
PE91.60-U-2050TA Function Diagram, Electrical System, ARMADA Airbag
PE91.60-U-2050TA Function Diagram, Electrical System, ARMADA Airbag
- with CODE (292) Left and right front sidebag ARMADA airbag
Locations
PE91.60-U-2053TA Electrical Function Schematic For Deployment of Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
PE91.60-U-2053TA Electrical Function Schematic For Deployment of Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Locations
Air Bag Control Module
For diagrams for this component please refer to Restraint Systems diagrams. See: Restraints and Safety Systems/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag
Seat Belt Control Module
Seat Occupant Sensor
PE91.29-U-2101TA Left Front Seat Control Module
PE91.29-U-2101TA Left Front Seat Control Module
Locations
PE91.29-U-2102TA Right Front Seat Control Module
PE91.29-U-2102TA Right Front Seat Control Module
Locations
PE91.30-U-2102TA Seat Heating and Seat Ventilation Control Module
PE91.30-U-2102TA Seat Heating and Seat Ventilation Control Module
- with CODE (873) Heated left and right front seats
- with AIRSCARF and steering wheel heater
Locations
PE91.29-U-2050TA Function Diagram, Electrical System, Seat Adjustment (ESV)
PE91.29-U-2050TA Function Diagram, Electrical System, Seat Adjustment (ESV)
- Seat adjustment with memory
Locations
PE91.29-U-2050TB Function Diagram, Electrical System, Seat Adjustment (ESV)
PE91.29-U-2050TB Function Diagram, Electrical System, Seat Adjustment (ESV)
- with CODE (242) Electrically adjustable front passanger seat with memory
Locations
PE91.29-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For Lumbar Support Adjustment
PE91.29-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For Lumbar Support Adjustment
Locations
PE91.30-U-2050TA Function Diagram, Electrical System, Heated Seats (HS)
PE91.30-U-2050TA Function Diagram, Electrical System, Heated Seats (HS)
- with CODE (873) heated left and right front seats
Locations
PE91.30-U-2051TA Function Diagram, Electrical System, AIRSCARF
PE91.30-U-2051TA Function Diagram, Electrical System, AIRSCARF
Locations
Seat Temperature Element
For diagrams for this system please refer to Seats. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
System Diagram
PE15.00-U-2050TA Electrical Function Diagram For Starter, Alternator, Battery
Locations
PE00.19-U-2600TA Solder Joints/Z Connector Sleeves
PE00.19-U-2600TA Solder Joints/Z Connector Sleeves
- Z6/8, Z7/35z1, Z7/35z2, Z7/35z3, Z7/38z2, Z7/38z1, Z7/36z2, Z7/36z1, Z7/36z3
Locations
PE00.19-U-2710TA Wiring Diagram of Circuit 30 Wiring
Wiring Diagram Of Circuit 30 Wiring PE00.19-U-2710TA
Wiring Diagram
Component Description/Coordinates, A2/56 To Z7/40
Locations
PE00.19-U-2722TA Wiring Diagram of Circuit 15R Wiring
Wiring Diagram Of Circuit 15R Wiring PE00.19-U-2722TA
Wiring Diagram
Component Description/Coordinates, B31 To Z3/31
Locations
PE00.19-U-2740TA Wiring Diagram of Circuit 87 Wiring
Wiring Diagram Of Circuit 87 Wiring PE00.19-U-2740TA
Wiring Diagram (Part 1)



Component Description/Coordinates, B2/5 To Z7/38
Locations
PE00.19-U-2800TA Ground Wiring
PE00.19-U-2800TA Ground Wiring
- W6, W7, W9, W12, W16/3, W16/4, W29/1
- Connector sleeves Z6/1, Z6/48z2, Z6/92, Z51/15
- Sheet 1
Locations
PE00.19-U-2800TB Ground Wiring
PE00.19-U-2800TB Ground Wiring

- W29/2, W32/2, W29/10
- Connector sleeve Z51/7
- Sheet 2
Locations
PE00.19-U-2800TC Ground Wiring
PE00.19-U-2800TC Ground Wiring
- W18, W19, W26
- Connector sleeve Z53/8, Z53/9
- Sheet 3
Locations
PE54.15-U-2501TA Interior Fuse Box (F34)
PE54.15-U-2501TA Interior Fuse Box (F34)
- Sheet 1
Locations
PE54.15-U-2501TB Interior Fuse Box (F34)
PE54.15-U-2501TB Interior Fuse Box (F34)
- Sheet 2
Locations
PE54.15-U-2502TA Front Backup Fuse Box (F32)
PE54.15-U-2502TA Front Backup Fuse Box (F32)
Locations
PE54.18-U-2300TA Connector Separate Points
PE54.18-U-2300TA Connector Separate Points
- X25, X26/25, X28/30, X39/48
Locations
Fuse
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Power and Ground Distribution diagrams. See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
Fuse Block
For information regarding diagrams of this component, Please refer to Power and Ground Distribution diagrams See: Power and Ground
Power Distribution Module
PE54.10-U-2054TA Electrical Function Schematic For on-Board Electrical System Power Supply, Function
Component Description/Coordinates, A1 To 4
Locations
Relay Box
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Power and Ground Distribution diagrams. See: Power and Ground
Alternator
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Starting and Charging diagrams. See: Starting and
Charging/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
System Diagram
PE15.30-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For Starter Control
Locations
Ignition Switch
PE54.21-U-2104TA Electronic Ignition Switch (EIS) Control Module
Locations
System Diagram
PE46.50-U-2050TA Electrical Function Schematic For Speed-Sensitive Power Steering (PML)
- with CODE (213) Speed-sensative power steering
Locations
PE46.15-U-2050TA Function Diagram of Electrical System For Steering Column Adjustment
PE46.15-U-2050TA Function Diagram of Electrical System For Steering Column Adjustment
- Steering column adjustment with memory
Locations
PE46.15-U-2051TA Electrical Function Schematic For Steering Column Easy Entry/Exit Adjustment
PE46.15-U-2051TA Electrical Function Schematic For Steering Column Easy Entry/Exit Adjustment
Locations
Steering Column Control Module
PE46.10-U-2101TA Steering Column Module Control Unit
Locations
Steering Wheel Heater Control Module
Function Schematic Of Electrical System For Steering Wheel Heater PE46.11-P-2050TB
- with CODE (443) Steering wheel heater
Function Diagram
Locations
Tire Monitoring System
PE40.15-U-2051TA Electrical Function Diagram For Tire Pressure Loss Warning (RDW)
- with CODE (477) Tire Pressure loss warning
Locations
PE27.19-U-2101TB Wiring Diagram Electronic Transmission Control (ETC) Control Module
Wiring Diagram Electronic Transmission Control (ETC) Control Module PE27.19-U-2101TB
- with CODE (427) 7-speed automatic transmission
- Control unit Y3/8
Wiring Diagram
Component Description/Coordinates, N10/1 To Z51/8
Locations
PE27.19-U-2102TA Electronic Selector Module Control Module
PE27.19-U-2102TA Electronic Selector Module Control Module
- with CODE (423) Automatic five-speed transmission (NAG)
Locations
PE27.19-U-2103TA Fully Integrated Transmission Control Control Unit
PE27.19-U-2103TA Fully Integrated Transmission Control Control Unit
- Control unit Y3/8
Locations
Electrical Function Schematic For Shift Operation PE27.19-P-2057TA
Electrical Function Schematic For Shift Operation PE27.19-P-2057TA

Component Description/Coordinates, 1 To Y3/6y6
Locations
Electrical Function Schematic For Shift-lock PE27.19-P-2059TA
Electrical Function Schematic For Shift-lock PE27.19-P-2059TA
Function Diagram
Component Description/Coordinates, A7/7s1 To 5
Locations
Electrical Function Schematic For Shift-lock PE27.19-P-2059TB
Electrical Function Schematic For Shift-lock PE27.19-P-2059TB
Function Diagram
Component Description/Coordinates, A7/7s1 To 5
Locations
PE27.19-U-2050TB Function Diagram of Electrical System For Electronic Transmission Control
(ETC)
PE27.19-U-2050TB Function Diagram of Electrical System For Electronic Transmission Control (ETC)
Locations
PE27.19-U-2057TB Electrical Function Schematic For Gearshift
PE27.19-U-2057TB Electrical Function Schematic For Gearshift

Locations
PE27.19-U-2059TB Electrical Function Schematic For Shift Lock
PE27.19-U-2059TB Electrical Function Schematic For Shift Lock
Locations
Voice Activation System
PE82.70-U-2102TA Voice Control System (VCS) Control Module
Locations
Windows
PE72.29-U-2050TA Function Schematic For Power Window Electrical System
Locations
PE82.15-U-2050TA Electrical System Function Diagram For Headlamp Cleaning System (HCS)
PE82.15-U-2050TA Electrical System Function Diagram For Headlamp Cleaning System (HCS)
- with CODE (600) Headlamp cleaning system
Locations
PE82.30-P-2053TA Electrical Function Schematic For Automatic Speed Reduction
Electrical Function Schematic For Automatic Speed Reduction PE82.30-P-2053TA
- except CODE (494) USA version
Function Diagram
Component Description/Coordinates, 1 To S4
Locations
PE82.30-U-2050TA Electrical System Function Diagram For Windshield Wiper
PE82.30-U-2050TA Electrical System Function Diagram For Windshield Wiper
Locations
Computers and Control Systems: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
AD00.00-P-2000-04A Connect STAR DIAGNOSIS and read out fault memory
1 Connect STAR DIAGNOSIS (0100) to diagnostic socket, on the data link connector (X11/4) or on the data link connector (1.3) (X11/22).
2 Switch on ignition.
3 Start the Diagnosis Assistance System.
4 In the "Model" menu, select the sub menu "Other model series".
5 Go through the instructions on the screen:
^ Enter the control unit version
^ Read out fault memory and erase
^ Readout actual values
^ Perform actuations
^ Adaptation of control units
6 Disconnect STAR DIAGNOSIS (0100).
Stored faults which may be caused by disconnecting cables or by simulation during testing operations must be deleted in the diagnostic trouble
code memory following completion of the operations.
Computers and Control Systems: Mode 6 Data
Technical Service Bulletins
All Technical Service Bulletins:

Number Date Name
P-83_00-70D Apr 09 A/C - A/C Lamp Flashing/A/C Inoperative
P-91_30-182 Jan 09 A/C - Airscarf Blower Motor Noises
P-83_25-76C Sep 07 A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative/DTC 09460 Set
P-83_55-87B Nov 07 A/C - Compressor/Drive Belt Noise
S-83_00-161 Apr 08 A/C - Control Module/Control Functions/Diagnostics
P-83_00-97A Sep 07 A/C - Fluorescent Dye Leak Testing
S-83_00-135 Mar 12 A/C - HVAC - Foam Cleaner Information and Work Procedure
S-83_30-134A Oct 11 A/C - Musty/Moldy Odor Complaints, Cleaning Procedure
S-83_30-74P Jun 09 A/C - Musty/Moldy Odor Issues
LI83-00_P-047480 Jul 09 A/C - No Or Insufficient Cooling Output
S-83_55-118 Mar 09 A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
S-83_00-115 Mar 08 A/C - Unpleasant Odor From Air Conditioning Vents
S-83_55-87F Mar 09 A/C - Various Compressor Noise With A/C ON
S-83_00-133 Jul 11 A/C System - Update Of Vehicle System Technology Guide
LI27-00_P-047119 Jun 09 A/T - 722.9, Delayed Reverse Engagement
LI27-57_P-053496 Apr 12 A/T - Auxiliary Oil Pump, Test For DTC P0944
S-27_00-120A Apr 11 A/T - Diag. Verification For Valve Body/Conductor Plate
S-27_19-82D Mar 09 A/T - Electro-Hydraulic Control Module ID/Ordering
S-27_19-118A Jul 11 A/T - Electrohydraulic Control Unit ID & Ordering
S-27_56-83 Oct 06 A/T - Filter Part Number/Replacement Information
P-27_00-47F Jan 08 A/T - Fluid Leaks at The Electrical Connector
LI27-60_P-051470 Mar 11 A/T - Hard 2-3 Upshift Or Slips, No 3rd Gear/DTC's Stored
LI27-00_P-049253 Apr 10 A/T - Hard Converter Lock-Up/Hard 1-2 Shift
S-27_60-61J Nov 08 A/T - Harsh 1-2/3-2 And 2-1 Shifts
LI27-50_P-049281 Apr 10 A/T - Harsh Engagement From Park To Drive
P-27_60-88A Jan 07 A/T - Limp Home Mode/Codes 2502/2505/P0894/P2711
S-27_50-59G May 09 A/T - Limp Home Mode/DTCs 2200/2201/2767/2768
S-27_00-102B Dec 08 A/T - Limp Home Mode/Multiple Codes Stored
P-27_50-59B Jan 08 A/T - Limp Home Mode/Various Codes Set
P-27_00-102A Jan 08 A/T - Multiple DTC's Set/Limp Home Mode
P-27_35-52A Mar 07 A/T - No Power Output From A/T
S-00_40-89C Dec 11 A/T - Operating Fluid Specification Changes
P-27_60-64A Mar 07 A/T - Selection Range Sensor Learning Not Possible
LI27-50_P-049710 Apr 12 A/T - Switches To Limp Home Mode And One Or More DTC's Stored
S-27_00-101 Aug 07 A/T - Throttle/Brake Pedal Application Precaution
P-27_60-75 May 06 A/T - Unsuccessful ECU Initial Start Up
P-27_00-95 Mar 07 A/T Controls - Limp Home Mode/Harsh Engagement
P-27_60-63 Nov 05 A/T Controls - Limp Home Mode/Multiple DTC's Set
P-27_60-92 Feb 07 A/T Controls - TCM 6-5 Downshift Adaptive Value Info.
S-03_30-11 Jan 09 A/T, M/T - Flywheel/Flexplate Replacement Information
LI28-10_P-051935 May 11 A/T/Drivetrain - Oil Leak At Seam Between A/T And Transfer Case
P-42_45-88 Jan 08 ABS/TCS - Cruise Control Message Displayed/DTR Lamp ON
S-61_10-06 Oct 09 ABS/TCS - Yaw Rate Sensor Fastener Update
S-27_19-118A Jun 10 AT - Electrohydraulic Control Unit Order Notes Update
S-68_05-47A Dec 08 Accessories - Can't Program Garage Door Opener
P-91_60-96 Dec 05 Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC's 9103/9123 Set
P-91_60-109 Apr 06 Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set
P-80_57-24B Jan 08 Anti-Theft System - DAS3 Diagnostic Information
LI80-57_P-0469352 Oct 09 Antitheft System - DAS3 Diagnosis/Replacement Info.
LI82-85_P-049066 Mar 10 Audio 50/COMAND APS - Theft Protection Active Displayed
LI82-60_P-0479903 Mar 10 Audio Sys. - iPod(R)/iPhone(R) Will Not Charge
P-82_64-607 Feb 08 Audio System - CD Player Inop/Skips/Won't Accept CD's
S-82_60-690 May 09 Audio System - Copy Protected CD Information
LI82-62_P-047989 Sep 09 Audio System - Intermittent Vibration Noise From Woofer
P-82_70-492 Mar 06 Audio System - Poor Audio Quality When Using Cell Phone
P-82_85-673 Mar 09 Audio System - Poor Radio Reception/Interference
S-80_57-56 Sep 10 Audio System - Radio Interruption Information
LI82-60_P-046896 Jul 09 Audio System - Satellite Radio Unavailable
S-82_60-629A Jan 09 Audio System - Various iPod(R) Concerns

Number Date Name
S-82_85-544A Feb 09 Audio System - Various iPod(R) Malfunctions

S-82_00-701 Jan 12 Audio/COMAND(R) - Repair Of Wiring Harnesses
S-01_30-31B Feb 10 BULLETIN OBSOLETE - REFER TO BULLETIN S-01_30-23B
P-77_30-72 Nov 08 Body - Creaking Noises From The C-Pillar Trim
P-72_10-64 Jun 06 Body - Front Window Creaking Noise When Operating
P-68_30-61 Nov 06 Body - Fuel Tank Cover Noise
P-77_30-49 Jan 07 Body - Hard Top to A-Pillar Seal Collapsed
S-67_00-20 Aug 06 Body - Laminated Glass Chip/Crack Repair Information
S-88_30-87 Oct 11 Body - License Plate Bracket Omission
P-68_30-46A Oct 08 Body - Luggage Compartment Partition Wall Is Loose
P-88_70-77 Sep 08 Body - Mirrors Are Noisy When Extending/Retracting
S-67_00-25 Feb 09 Body - New Window Glazing Adhesive Repair Kit
P-77_33-55A Sep 08 Body - Noises From The Sunroof Pivot Area
P-98_10-19 Oct 07 Body - Paint Damage on Trunk Lid
P-97_00-03 Jul 07 Body - Replacement Sheet Metal With Seam Sealer
P-77_33-40 Mar 06 Body - Roof Seals Noisy on Rough Roads
P-00_45-85 Jun 07 Body - Structural Adhesive Availability
P-77_33-74 Jan 09 Body - Vario Roof Contour Gauge Modification
P-77_33-45 Sep 06 Body - Vario Roof(R) Cracking Noises During Operation
P-77_33-47 Sep 06 Body - Water Enters Trunk With Vario Roof(R) Open
P-77_30-48 Jan 07 Body - Water Leaking Into Trunk
P-77_33-63 Jul 08 Body - Water Leaks at Side of Vario Roof
LI77-37_P-048796 Feb 10 Body - When Operating Vario Roof Trunk Lid Won't Close
P-72_10-51B Apr 08 Body - Wind Noise/Water Leaks Between Door/Quarter Glass
S-67_10-27 Jul 09 Body - Windshield/Window Glass Bonding System
P-88_70-48B May 08 Body/Lighting - Moisture in Mirror Turn Signals
S-42_10-109 Jun 09 Brakes - Brake Component Corrosion Information
S-42_10-117 Sep 11 Brakes - Brake Lining Instructions
S-42_10-110 Jun 09 Brakes - Brake Pad Paste Usage
S-42_10-111 Jun 09 Brakes - Caliper Bolt Replacement Information
P-42_10-79 Sep 07 Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Squeal
P-43_10-02A Jan 07 Brakes - Squeal/Whistle When Releasing Brake Pedal
P-42_10-51E Feb 06 Brakes - Squealing/Grinding Noises From Front Brakes
P-43_10-04 Oct 07 Brakes - Whistle/Click/Thud Noise From Footwell Area
P-42_30-118 Dec 11 Brakes/Traction Control - Handling Multipole Rings
LI82-85_P-048914 Feb 10 COMAND(R) - 'Drive Unavailable, Temp. Too High' Message
LI82-85_P-048983 Feb 10 COMAND(R) - Freezes When Using The 'TEL' Key
P-82_60-382C May 09 COMAND(R) - Various Audio/Navigation Malfunctions
LI82-85_P-048031 Sep 09 COMAND(R) - Various Radio Display/Navigation Problems
LI82-85_P-0480912 Oct 09 COMAND(R) System - System Starts Then Switches OFF
2005100013A May 06 Campaign - A/T Control Module Reprogramming
2006110002D Feb 07 Campaign - ECU Software Update For Hard Start Condition
2008070002A Aug 08 Campaign - Engine V-Belt Guide Pulley Replacement
200611005B Dec 06 Campaign - Install Software for Navigation System
2006110005C Aug 08 Campaign - Navigation System Disc Update
2006110001 Nov 06 Campaign - Power Steering Hose Routing
S-82_70-686A May 09 Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R)/Cell Phone Diagnostic Tool
P-82_95-479 Dec 05 Cell Phone - Call Cannot Connect/DTC D662 Set
P-82_70-475 Nov 05 Cell Phone - Calls Cut Off/Dropped
S-82_70-475A Mar 09 Cell Phone - Calls Dropped Or Cut Off
P-82_95-494 Mar 06 Cell Phone - Digital TeleAid(R) Calls Won't Connect
P-82_70-416B Oct 05 Cell Phone - Installation and Setup
P-82_95-476 Nov 05 Cell Phone - TeleAid Mod. Replacement Requirements
P-82_95-500 Apr 06 Cell Phone - TeleAid(R) Call Will Not Connect
S-82_70-666 Nov 08 Cell Phone - iPhone(R) Address Book Not Loading
LI82-70_P-047462 Aug 09 Cell Phone - iPhone(R) Music Won't Mute During Call
P-15_40-60 Nov 06 Charging System - Returning Alternators & Regulators
S-15_40-58B Jul 11 Charging System - Voltage Regulator, Inspection/Testing

Number Date Name
S-00_45-94 Aug 10 Chemicals/Lubrication - Multi-Grade Metal Grease Info.

LI58-40_P-048049 Sep 09 Computer/Control System - DAS/XD Software Update
LI58-40_P-048527 Nov 09 Computer/Controls - DAS/XD 2009-10-05-1274
LI58-40_P-048528 Nov 09 Computer/Controls - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-10-05-1271
LI58-40_P-048663 Dec 09 Computer/Controls - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-11-18-1311
LI58-40_P-048666 Dec 09 Computer/Controls - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-11-27-1321
LI58-40_P-048052 Sep 09 Computer/Controls - Software Update
LI58-40_P-049268 Mar 10 Computer/Controls - XD/DAS Add-On 2009-11-27-1321
LI58-40_P-048526 Nov 09 Computers/Control - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-09-28-1266
LI58-40_P-048530 Nov 09 Computers/Control - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-10-09-1280
LI58-40_P-048775 Jan 10 Computers/Controls - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-11-27-1321
S-07_00-84A Nov 08 Computers/Controls - ME 9.7 Control Unit Software Info.
S-54_21-246 Jul 11 Computers/Controls - Module Programming Precautions
S-07_04-88 Jul 11 Cooling System - MIL ON/DTC P2060 Diagnosis
P-58_20-142 Jan 06 Cruise Control - Radar Sensor Adapter
S-35_00-08 Mar 09 Drivetrain - Axle Mount Service Guidelines
P-33_20-030 Jul 07 Drivetrain - Front Axle Grinding Noise Diagnosis
P-35_30-03 Nov 07 Drivetrain - Rear Axle Surface Corrosion
P-42_45-60C Oct 07 ESP System - ESP Message Displayed on Cluster
P-42_45-61A Nov 06 Electrical - 'ESP Visit Workshop' Message Displayed
S-54_21-234A Oct 10 Electrical - Aftermarket Tampering Malfunctions
S-54_10-213 Jan 09 Electrical - Battery Maintenance Information
S-54_10-243 Jul 11 Electrical - Battery Test & Inspection Information
P-54_18-98A May 07 Electrical - Connector Repair Information
S-54_00-238 Mar 11 Electrical - Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention
S-54_35-193A Nov 08 Electrical - Horn Replacement Information
P-82_20-527 Sep 06 Electrical - Overhead Console Functions Inoperative
P-46_10-27A Mar 07 Electrical - Steering Wheel Buttons Non-Functional
S-54_10-162 Apr 06 Electrical - Voltage Drop Testing at The Fuses
S-14_30-15F Mar 09 Emissions - Multiple Codes Set/MIL ON
LI47-30_P-049162 Mar 10 Emissions - Variable DTC's/Driveability Concerns
S-09_10-30 Dec 08 Engine - Air Filter Replacement Precautions
P-18_00-17E Jun 06 Engine - Approved Engine Oil Availability
S-01_20-32A Jan 12 Engine - Cylinder Head Cover Leak Information
S-01_00-27 May 09 Engine - Cylinder Wall Inspection
S-13_22-01E Oct 08 Engine - Grinding/Howling/Whining Noises
S-18-00-37D Oct 08 Engine - Low Oil Level Symptom Diagnostics
S-18_00-37F Jun 09 Engine - Low Oil Level Symptoms/Diagnostics
S-00_30-08H Oct 08 Engine - MIL ON/Multiple Camshaft Codes Set
S-01_30-28A Mar 10 Engine - Misfire Or Oil Consumption Service Guidelines
S-03_30-08J Jun 09 Engine - Multiple DTC's Set/MIL ON
LI01-30_P-048997 Mar 10 Engine - Oil Leaks At Back Of Engine
LI01-45_P-047548 Aug 09 Engine - Oil Level Message General Information
LI13-20_P-049041 Mar 10 Engine - Squeaking Noises From The Belt Drive
S-01_10-29A Sep 09 Engine - Surface Cleaning Recommendations/Precautions
S-00_00-80F Oct 08 Engine - Test For Increased Oil Consumption
S-54_21-244A Jul 11 Engine Control - Engine Control Module (N3/10) Flashing
S-07_08-43B Mar 06 Engine Controls - CVN Redocumentation Process
P-27_60-80A Aug 07 Engine Controls - Code 061B After Reprogramming
S-07_61-89A Jul 11 Engine Controls - Engine Control Module (N3/10) Flashing
P-54_21-202 Aug 08 Engine Controls - Engine Squeal On Acceleration
S-54_21-215 Feb 09 Engine Controls - Engine Won't Start When Hot
P-27_60-66 Dec 05 Engine Controls - Incorrect Software Loaded
P-07_00-57D Nov 06 Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1089 Stored in Memory
S-49_00-12A Oct 08 Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple O2 Sensor DTC's Set
P-07_61-78 Sep 07 Engine Controls - Mil ON/DTC P0217 Stored in Memory

Number Date Name
S-07_61-72A Nov 08 Engine Controls - Misfire Diagnostic Information

S-07_61-59A Nov 09 Engine Controls - Multiple DTC Troubleshooting
S-07_04-87 Jul 11 Engine Controls - PremAir(R) Sensor R & I Instructions
P-01_10-17 Jun 07 Engine/Steering - ECO Harness Replacement Information
P-82_00-260B Jan 07 Entertainment System - CD's or DVD's Won't Eject
S-49_10-11 May 08 Exhaust System - Exhaust Pipe Chrome Tip Care
P-47_10-57 May 10 Fuel System - Modified Fuel Tank/Replacement Info.
S-47_00-61 Sep 11 Fuel System - Use Of E10 Fuel
S-68_05-74 Apr 08 Garage Door Opener - Range Too Short/Can't Program
P-54_30-177 Sep 06 Instruments - 'Set Cruise Control' Message Not Displayed
P-54_30-141A Feb 06 Instruments - Cluster SCN Coding
P-54_30-73B Dec 07 Instruments - Displaying Vehicle Voltage Instructions
P-54_30-171 May 06 Instruments - Inaccurate Outside Temperature Readings
P-54_30-179 Nov 06 Instruments - Menus Not Displayed After Coding
P-68_20-43A Nov 05 Interior - Console Lid Cannot Be Opened
LI68-10_P-048394 Nov 09 Interior - Cup Holder Noise On Uneven Road Surfaces
P-72_18-35B Oct 07 Interior - Dirty/Spotted Plastic Interior Trim Parts
P-72_00-40 Apr 05 Interior - Door Panel Damaged by Seat Belt Latch Plate
S-68_00-81 Jan 10 Interior - Floor Mat Safety Information
LI91-30_P-0483452 Dec 09 Interior - Heated Seats Inoperative
S-68_30-75 Apr 08 Interior - Interior Damage From Scent Dispensers
P-68_30-81 Apr 11 Interior - Leather Surface Appearance Information
P-91_10-145B Jun 09 Interior - Noise From Power Seat During Movement
P-68_10-69 Nov 07 Interior - Replacement Glove Box Modification
S-91_00-37 Jul 07 Interior - Seat Noise Complaints
P-80_57-38B May 07 Interior - Seat Position Wrong Using Easy Entry/Exit
S-91_18-151 Mar 08 Interior - Seats are Dirty/Stained
P-62_30-10 Jun 10 Interior - Simplified Instrument Panel Supports
P-91_30-146 Mar 08 Interior, A/C Heated Seats Inoperative
LI91-30_P-0483451 Nov 09 Interior, A/C - Heated Seats Inoperative
P-80_35-50 Apr 08 Keyless Entry - Inoperative/Range Too Short
P-80_35-43 Nov 07 Keyless Entry - LED on Transmitter Key Not Functioning
S-80_00-53 Jan 09 Keyless Entry - Various Malfunctions
S-82_30-634 Sep 08 Lighting - Auto Lamps/Rain Sensor Malfunctions
LI82-10_P-047936 Sep 09 Lighting - Automatic Lights Switch OFF Too Late
LI82-10_P-045451 Oct 09 Lighting - Exterior Light Bulb Replacement
S-82_10-698 Feb 11 Lighting - Uprated H7 Bulbs
S-82_10-680 May 09 Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Brightness Explanation
P-29_10-02 Apr 08 M/T - Clutch Pedal Cracking/Squeaking When Operated
P-29_10-03 Oct 08 M/T - Clutch Pedal Slow To Return To Upper Position
P-26_50-02A Jun 08 M/T - Hard To Engage 1st or Reverse/Shifter Sticking
P-91_10-125 Oct 06 Memory Systems - Easy Entry/Exit Feature Inoperative
S-91_10-125C Dec 08 Memory Systems - Easy Entry/Exit Feature Is Inoperative
P-82_85-524C Nov 08 Navigation System - DVD Not Recognized
P-82_62-325E Oct 05 Navigation System - Screen Blank/No Audio/DTC D117
S-98_30-22 Feb 08 Paint - Adhesive Residue Removal
S-98_00-28 Aug 10 Paint - Clearcoat With Higher Scratch Resistance
S-98_00-13S Jun 10 Paint/Body - MBUSA Approved Refinishing Products Update
S-54_65-252 Feb 12 Parking Assist - Malfunction and Fault Scenarios
S-54_65-251 Feb 12 Parking Assist - Parktronic Sensor Return Policy
P-54_65-86A Sep 08 Parking Assist System - Erroneous Activation
S-46_30-40B Nov 08 Power Steering - Fluid Filling/Bleeding Precautions
2009060005A Feb 12 Recall - ECM Update For EVAP Diagnostics
2008070001A Oct 09 Recall - ECM Update For Various Issues
S-91_60-193 Jun 10 Restraints - Air Bag Durability And Reliability
S-91_60-195A Jan 12 Restraints - Repair And Diag. Of Airbag Wiring Harnesses
P-91_60-78D Nov 06 Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC's 9103/9123 Stored
S-91_40-130A Mar 09 Restraints - Seat Belts Don't Retract Properly

Number Date Name
LI82-60_P-0468964 Mar 10 Satellite Radio - 'Device Unavailable' Displayed

P-82_85-507A Oct 06 Satellite Radio - Limited Channel 184 or Lower
S-46_25-70A Aug 11 Steering - Approved Hydraulic Fluids
P-46_30-40A Nov 07 Steering - Flow Noises/Fluid Foaming After Repairs
P-46_20-16E Feb 09 Steering - Leaks At Steering Gear/Hose Junction
P-46_20-10C Dec 07 Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack
P-46_00-44 Jul 06 Steering - Pentosin CHF 11S(R) Power Steering Fluid
S-46_25-37A Mar 08 Steering - Power Steering Diagnostic Tips
S-46_50-34A Feb 09 Steering - Speed Sensitive Steering Malfunctions/DTC's
P-46_20-57A Nov 07 Steering - Steering Gear Apparent Leakage Information
S-46_30-21B May 09 Steering, A/C - Grinding/Gushing Noises
S-32_25-83 Sep 11 Suspension - Assembly Of Suspension Struts And Shocks
LI33-15_P-0474712 Jan 10 Suspension - Front Axle Area Noise When Maneuvering
LI32-20_P-047411 Jul 09 Suspension - Front End Squeaking/Grunting Noise
P-33_10-11C Feb 09 Suspension - Rumbling Noises On Bumps/Rough Roads
S-32_25-19E Jun 08 Suspension - Shock/Strut Replace Guidelines
P-32_25-19D Oct 07 Suspension - Shock/Strut Replacement Guidelines
S-32_25-82B Dec 11 Suspension - Strut/Shock Absorber Replacement Guidelines
LI40-15_P-046651 Sep 09 TPMS System - Tire Pressure Monitor Inop./DTC 5581
P-42_45-86 Jan 08 Tire Monitor - Tire Pressure Monitoring Inactive Message
P-40_15-67 Apr 09 Tire Monitor System - 'Inoperative' Message Displayed
S-40_15-65 Jan 09 Tire Monitor System - Steel Valve Stem Cap Precautions
S-27_19-121 Aug 11 Transmission Controls - Control Module Flashing Info.
S-18_00-17G Sep 08 Vehicle - Approved Service Products On WIS
S-00_20-91 Jul 09 Vehicle - Maintenance Systems Overview
S-40_10-66 Feb 09 Wheels - Approved Alloy Wheel Cleaning Product
S-40_10-72 May 11 Wheels - Checking Components For Bolted Wheel Connection
S-40_10-18A Feb 08 Wheels - Recommendation Against Chroming Alloy Wheels
S-40_10-69 Mar 09 Wheels/Tires - Alloy Wheel Radial Crack Information
S-40_10-60 May 08 Wheels/Tires - Nitrogen Usage Recommendations
P-82_30-366C Mar 07 Wipers/Washers - Wipers Chattering/Noisy
S-82_35-621A Jun 09 Wipers/Washers - Wiping Quality Maintenance
Vehicle: All Technical Service Bulletins
Technical Service Bulletin # P-77_30-72 Date: 081119
Body - Creaking Noises From The C-Pillar Trim

Date: November 19, 2008
Order No.: P-B-77.30/72
Supersedes:
Group: 77
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/458/473
Noise from Area of C-Pillar
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of creaking noises on rough roads from area of C-pillar trim, the trim can move against the
mounting flange and may cause a creaking noise. The creaking noises can be localized by placing a flat hand on the inside of the C-pillar while driving
on rough roads or driving slowly over a curb. Perform the procedure below to resolve.
1. Remove trim (Figure 1, item 2) on C-pillar. Refer to WIS document AR77.50-P-6763V.
2. Thinly coat mounting flange (Figure 1, item 2) for trim on C-pillar with lubricating paste, part number A001 989 46 51.
3. Reinstall trim
Parts Information
NOTE:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair. This information has been generated on
November 19, 2008. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Trim panel - c-pillar right upper section retract roof, replace (77-6764)
Lubricate mounting flange (77-0000)
Technical Service Bulletin # LI28-10_P-051935 Date: 110525
A/T/Drivetrain - Oil Leak At Seam Between A/T And Transfer Case

Oil leakage at transfer case of automatic transmission 722.96x
Topic number LI28.10-P-051935
Version 1
Design group 28.10 Complete transfer case
Date 05-25-2011
Validity Veh. with transmission model 722.96x
Reason for change
Complaint:
Oil leakage at the seam between the automatic transmission and the transfer case housing.
Attachments
Leakage can occur all around the entire seam.
Cause:
Leakage due to the sealant applied during production.
Remedy:
Sealing with black sealant (Loctite 5970) only if there is definite droplet formation in the vicinity of the seam or in the vicinity of the propeller shaft to
the front axle transmission.
If the problem is a "sweating" leak, sealing must not be carried out, as this is a normal phenomenon inherent in the design of oil-filled systems.
In accordance with the WIS instructions in the attachment, disassemble the transfer case housing and seal it using black sealant A003 989 98 20 10
(Loctite 5970).
The documents are also valid for model series 212 as this model series is fitted with the same automatic transmission and transfer case. A corresponding
WIS document for model series 212 is currently being prepared.
Symptoms
Parts
WIS-Reference
Attachments
A/T - Hard 2-3 Upshift Or Slips, No 3rd Gear/DTC's Stored

Uncomfortable Upshift 2-3
Version 1
Design group 27.60 gearshift, control
Date 03-23-2011
Validity All models with transmission 722.9
Reason for change
Complaint:
Hard shift operation 2-3 upshift or transmission slips (3rd gear may not be reached)
Fault codes P2502, 2505, 0894, 2711 can be entered.
Cause:
K1 piston damaged (adaptation data of shift operation 2-3 on positive/negative end stop, +20/-20 and/or +2000/-2000).
Remedy:
If the complaint can only be reproduced for the upshift from gear 2 to gear 3 or if the 3rd gear cannot be reached, there is a defect in the K1 piston.
1. Replace complete multidisk clutch Ki as per EPC.

2. Then readapt the vehicle.
Symptoms
Works Units
A/T - Auxiliary Oil Pump, Test For DTC P0944

Auxiliary oil pump - test for fault code P0944
Version 1
Design group 27.57 Oil Pump
Date 04-05-2012
Validity NAG2 FE* with auxiliary oil pump
Reason for change
Complaint:
Attachment
ECO start/stop inoperative, fault code P0944 in transmission control unit.
Cause:
The check valve in torque converter housing may be damaged. Leakage between torque converter housing and auxiliary oil pump.
May affect transmissions with transmission sequence numbers starting with -07-xxx xxx.
Remedy:
Access via fault code P0944; and perform there the following test according to the instructions:
Check the check valve in the torque converter housing (in pressure duct) for damage (see pictures in attachment).
If the check valve is damaged, the torque converter housing and the auxiliary oil pump (component M42) must be replaced. When removing/installing
the automatic transmission auxiliary oil pump, observe AR 27.30-P-0651EL.
Important note:
After the test/repair, check and correct the oil level in the transmission.
If no damage is found on the check valve, but a torque converter housing with object number 212 271 0401 is installed and the transmission sequence
number is lower than 3.491.853, then please create a TIPS/PTSS case.
If the fault code is no longer present, perform the following test steps.
Step 1: Check connector and fuse of auxiliary oil pump
Step 2: Check supply voltage
Step 3: Check CAN lines
Step 4: Check VGS software and update if necessary, then continue with step 5
Step 5: Visual inspection of check valve; the valve is located in the torque converter housing (see pictures in attachment)
If the check valve is damaged, the torque converter housing and the auxiliary oil pump (component M42) must be replaced.
Step 6: Replace auxiliary oil pump
If one step resolves the problem, it is not necessary to continue with the remaining test steps. Exception: After step 4 always perform step 5.
Symptoms
Control Unit/Fault Code
Work Units
Attachment
A/T - Switches To Limp Home Mode And One Or More DTC's Stored
Automatic transmission limp-home mode, fault codes 0717, 0718, 0722, 0723, 2200, 2201, 2204, 2205, 2206, 2207, 2767, 2768
Version 1
Design group 27.50 Gear assembly
Date 04-03-2012
Validity Automatic transmission 722.9, it is not possible to repair the EHS (VGS) in AMG vehicles
Reason for change
Complaint:
Automatic transmission 722.9 switches to limp-home while driving (gearshifts no longer possible) and/or one or more of the following fault codes are
stored or current:
For vehicles with VGS1
2200, 2201, 2204, 2205, 2206, 2207
For vehicles with VGS2 or VGS3
0717, 0718, 0722, 0723, 2767, 2768
Cause:
Rpm sensor fault
Remedy:
Process the speed sensor fault codes completely using the DAS/Xentry guided test (possible as of DVD 01/2011 and add-on 1740). This may or may
not entail a replacement of the EHS.
In the case of hardware replacement (when SDS instructs to do so, see attachment) the adaptation data of the old transmission control unit is read out in
the DAS/Xentry guided test and transferred to the new control unit after the repair. Subsequently, the transmission control unit, which is bolted onto the
electrohydraulic controller unit (EHS), may only be replaced using the EHS repair kit (A000 270 17 00). In other cases SDS will provide alternate
instructions.
See also the Akubis direct film: "Replacement of "fully integrated transmission control" (VGS) controller unit at electro-hydraulic controller unit (EHS)
on automatic transmission 722.9"
The VGS Control Unit (Control Module) only is to be replaced for VGS2 and VGS3 Control Unit versions with these fault codes, when SDS instructs
to do so. VGS Control Unit is available as EHS Repair Kit (A000 270 17 00) Complete valve body "Electrohydraulic Controller Unit (EHS)"
replacement is necessary for VGS1 Control Unit versions when SDS instructs to do so. Control Unit Version is identified from the Transmission
Control Unit Log.
Note in Cases where hardware replacement is specified:
This procedure differs from a complete valve body replacement as the adaptation data, coding and valve body calibration data are transferred from the
old VGS Control Unit to the new VGS control unit. This data from the old VGS Control Unit is stored in the Star Diagnosis unit by processing one of
the above codes. The same Star Diagnosis System unit MUST be used to process the fault code and perform initial startup of the new VGS Control
Unit. Failure to do so will result in the necessary data not being transferred and improper transmission functionality after VGS Control Unit
replacement.
1. Process the speed sensor fault code completely by following the instructions in DAS/Xentry related to the fault code. Note: During the
replacement of the VGS Control Unit, it is imperative that the position of the solenoid valves are noted and re-installed in their original positions.
Failure to do so will cause a mismatch in the calibration data to respective solenoid valve(s) and subsequent shifting complaints.
2. Replace the VGS Control Unit per WIS instructions For the initial road test following VGS Control Unit replacement the vehicle must be driven
gently for the first several shifts in each gear since it will be necessary to bleed the air from the valve body. Until the air is bleed out, irregular
shifting will be noticed momentarily and will clear up with subsequent shift processes. Because the adaptation data is transferred from the
original VGS Control Unit, performing subsequent shift adaptations is not necessary.
Note:
It is not possible to repair the EHS (VGS) in AMG vehicles
Symptoms
Parts
Work Units
WIS-References
Technical Service Bulletin # S-83_00-135 Date: 120302
A/C - HVAC - Foam Cleaner Information and Work Procedure

Date: March 2, 2012
Order No.: S-B-83.00/135
Group: 83
SUBJECT: MY-All, Models All
Mercedes-Benz HVAC-Foam Cleaner - Work Procedure
NOTE:
This procedure is not approved for vehicles covered under warranty. Refer to LI83.00-P-051588 for details on which vehicles can be cleaned under
warranty using Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept disinfectant cleaner (S-B-83.30/134). Additionally, the combination filter is a maintenance item and is not
covered under warranty.
Procedure
1. Start the engine with the A/C ON, temperature set to coldest setting, inlet set for outside air (not recirculate) and blower set for high speed.
Note:
The A/C must be run for at least 15 minutes to get condensation to build on the evaporator. This will adequately wet evaporator and promote the
product's ability to clean.
2. Locate the evaporator core case and blower assembly by removing any covers below the instrument panel on the passenger's side that may cover the
case.
3. Remove the cabin air filter and close off the empty filter cavity with the filter block off plate
^ For models where the filter bock off plate is integrated with the filter media (as with model 204/212). Remove the filter media, leaving the bare
block off plate, which can be reinstalled for the cleaning procedure (Figure 1).
4. On vehicles with an activated charcoal filter, remove these filters as well.
5. Drill a 3/16" hole in an accessible location between the evaporator core case & blower assembly, depending on your vehicle model. Use a drill stop
set at the thickness of the case to prevent plunging into case too deep.
Warning!
Follow the diagrams for a given vehicle model series, otherwise damage to the evaporator may occur.
^ Only drill through the case skin and gently probe inside with a dull instrument for any obstructions that the nozzle may encounter. If needed, use the
supplied plug and find another spot to drill.
6. Shake the disinfectant product can and with the hose attached to the can push the nozzle into position & rotate so the pointer faces the evaporator
core (Figure 2).
7. With the blower still on, start dispensing the foam in short bursts. As the case fills with foam, airflow will decrease from the vents. Pause for the
blower to push the foam through the core. (If the fan starts to squeak, stop dispensing while the blower catches up). As airflow resumes, continue with
short bursts of foam. If the system is overloaded by dispensing the foam too quickly, foam can escape from components under the dashboard.
NOTE:
Do not allow the foam to drip to any electronic components. Intercept any escaping foam with a towel.
To prevent possible staining, do not allow any foam to blow out of vents onto seating or other interior materials.
8. Continue with this application method until the can is empty then shut the system off completely.
9. After a minimum 10-minute wait, turn the blower on LOW to MEDIUM for 2 minutes to push excess foam out of the core.
10. Check that the drain is flowing freely under the vehicle. If there is no drainage, the drain is clogged. A clogged drain must be cleared. Condensation
will rinse out any remaining cleaner residue and contaminants.
11. Reinstall new cabin filters and activated charcoal (if equipped).
NOTE:
It is required that you replace the cabin filter after treatment. It is recommended that you replace the activated charcoal filters (if equipped).
Additional instructions for this procedure will be available via Learning & Performance:
VILT Course Code:X0001F-US.TTA (starting in second quarter 2012).
Parts Information
Parking Assist - Malfunction and Fault Scenarios

Date: February 7, 2012
Order No.: S-B-54.65/252
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models 163, 164, 166, 170, 171, 172, 197, 202, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220, 221, 230, 231, 240, 245, 251,
463 with Code 220 Parktronic system (PTS); Code 230 Advanced Parking Guidance; Code 235 Active Park Assist
Parktronic Malfunctions and Faults
This is an overview of Parktronic malfunction and fault scenarios, respectively.
Malfunction Scenario 1
Malfunctions are indicated with double red (4 LEDs) warning elements and no warning tone (Figure 1).
An entry is not saved in fault memory.
Malfunctions can be triggered by external ultrasonic signals:
^ Compressed air
^ Drier blower for a washer system
^ Rail vehicles
^ Brake squeal on vehicle or a nearby vehicle
Or through:
^ Soiling of sensors with ice or snow
^ License plate brackets
Fault Scenario 2
Faults are indicated in the Parktronic warning elements with double red (4 LEDs) with warning tone (Figure 1) (see arrows).
An entry is saved in fault memory.
The sensor function is automatically checked while driving at between 22-37 mph. If a fault occurs when driving, then this is issued at a speed less than
9 mph with double red lights and warning tone.
The following applies to both scenarios:
If a malfunction or a fault is present for more than 2 seconds, the display in the warning elements goes out and the PARKTRONIC OFF button in the
UCP lights up in red.
Diagnosis
To fix issues that cannot be clearly located via fault codes in fault memory, check for correct and central installation (Figure 3) (C) or for any damage
caused by stone chipping (Figure 2) (A) (B).
The decoupling ring must be centered and custom fit when installed (Figure 3) (C) and Figure 4 (C). Refer also to S-B-54.651251 Parktronic Sensor
Return Policy.
Parking Assist - Parktronic Sensor Return Policy

Order No.: S-B-54.65/251
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
MY-All, All Models with Code 220 Parktronic system (PTS); Code EZ8; Code 230 Advanced Parking Guidance; Code 235 Active Park Assist; Code
EZ8 Parktronic system (PTS)
Parktronic Sensor Return Policy
Do not replace any Parktronic sensor under warranty that has (Figure 1) (A) (B) parking dents, stone chipping, or the like on the diaphragm cup-the
painted part of the senor.
In addition, perform a control log or quick test before replacing any sensor without external damage.
Mark the installation position (Figure 2) on the returned sensor and include the following when returning any Parktronic control unit, Parktronic sensor,
or Parktronic warning indicator under warranty:
^ Part return slip (ARS) (for residual market operations a return delivery document is also required)
^ Control Unit Log

Technical Service Bulletin # 2009060005A Date: 120201
Recall - ECM Update For EVAP Diagnostics

FILE:
SERVICE: GROUP 00 OF SERVICE INFORMATION BINDER
PARTS: GROUP I OF INFORMATION - PARTS & ACCESSORIES BINDER
Campaign No. 2009060005, February 2012
Revision Date Purpose

A 02/10/2012 Inclusion of model 211 revision to Warranty information
- 08/072009 Initial release
TO: ALL MERCEDES-BENZ CENTERS
SUBJECT: Models 164, 171, 203, 209, 211, 251

Model Years 2005 - 2007
Software Calibration Number (SCN) Coding Engine Control Module
This Recall Campaign has been initiated because Daimler AG (DAG), the manufacturer of Mercedes-Benz vehicles, has determined that between May,
2006 and June, 2007, due to a software error, the vehicles fuel tank leak diagnosis system may have been inadvertently deactivated during a visit to the
workshop. This may cause the affected vehicles to fail to meet the statutory requirements for Inspection/Maintenance (emissions inspection). Dealers
will re-code the Software Calibration Number (SCN) - Engine Control Module to correct this situation.
Attached is a sample copy of a letter which owners of the affected vehicles will receive.
Prior to performing this Recall Campaign:
Please check VMI to determine if the vehicle is involved in the Campaign and if it has been previously repaired.
Please review the entire Recall Campaign bulletin and follow the repair procedure exactly as described.
Please note that Recall and Service Campaigns do not expire and may also be performed on a vehicle with a vehicle status indicator.
Approximately 20,947 vehicles are involved.
Procedure
Note:
^ Use DAS/XENTRY 11/11 with all associated patches or higher.
^ Follow the steps exactly as described in DAS/XENTRY.
^ Connect battery charger (battery voltage >12.5V).
1. Connect Star Diagnosis to vehicle.
2. Follow the DAS path below to SCN code Engine control module:
Control units/Drive/ME 9.7/Control unit adaptations/Variant coding/SCN coding 3, Fill out Repair Label and affix on underside of hood next to
existing emissions labels (as shown in Figure 1).
Note:
^ Ensure the surface is clean prior to affixing the label.
^ Use a ball point pen to fill in the label; do not use a marker or felt tip pen.
^ The label is being mailed to dealers prior to the launch of this Recall Campaign. Additional labels are available as literature through NetStar free
of charge (order# P-BQ-AEM-LBL)
^ Campaign is now complete except for California dealers.
^ California dealers only, please proceed to next step.

4. California dealers only: Print Proof of Correction form shown above and fill out as shown in Figure 2.
Note:
The Proof of Correction form can also be found on STAR TekInfo under the "Warranty Information > Other Forms" heading.
^ Scan form and keep a copy for dealer records.
^ Hand the form to customer or place in glove box.
Warranty Information
NOTE REGARDING CUSTOMER REIMBURSEMENT
Reimbursement to customers for repairs performed prior to this recall:
If the customer already paid to have this recall campaign condition repaired and provides adequate documentation to support their claim of a
non-warranty repair of this item they may be eligible to receive reimbursement.
Requests for reimbursement may include parts labor fees and taxes. Reimbursement is limited to the amount the repair of a non illuminating check
engine malfunction indicator lamp (MIL would have cost if completed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer under this campaign.
Submit a warranty claim utilizing Damage Code 54952468 as a sublet utilizing the sublet code of "SUB". Sublet repairs require dealer text as stated in
the Warranty Policies and Procedures Manual. Repair date should be the date that the customer paid for the repair.
Note:
Please note the claim submitted for customer reimbursement will not close the campaign (if still open). If the customer is still in possession of the
vehicle with an open campaign please arrange to close the campaign in the usual manner as described in this bulletin.
Technical Service Bulletin # S-91_60-195A Date: 120118
Restraints - Repair And Diag. Of Airbag Wiring Harnesses

Date: January 18, 2012
Order No: S-B-91.60/195a
Supercedes: S-B-91.60/195, January 6, 2012
Group: 91
Revision a: Parts information removed. Reference EPC-net for relevant parts.
Repair and Diagnosis of Airbag Wiring Harness
When a driver airbag, front-passenger airbag, sidebag or windowbag or an emergency tensioning retractor is triggered, the coupling melts from the gas
generator heat and becomes unusable. Up until now, repair on airbag wiring harnesses was not permitted due to safety reasons and had to be partly or
completely replaced depending on type. As always follow most current part numbers and corresponding information in EPC before ordering.
NOTE:
The part numbers for the solder connector are available in the EPC under the DG (design group) ...\54\019. The "Repairing wiring harness using solder
connectors" document is to be observed.
Follow WIS AR54.18-P-0600A Repair supplemental restraint system (SRS) squib wiring harness for Models:
Model 124, 126, 129, 140, 163, 164, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 197, 202, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220, 221, 230,
240, 245, 246, 251, 414, 461, 463.
Follow WIS AR54.18-P-0600SLR Repair supplemental restraint system (SRS) squib wiring harness for Model: 199.
Audio/COMAND(R) - Repair Of Wiring Harnesses

Order No.: S-B-82.00/701
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models All
Repair of Damaged Audio/COMAND Wiring Harnesses
If audio/COMAND theft results in cable damage the wiring harness can be repaired or ordered separately.
An order and replacement of a complete interior wiring harness for the "frame-floor system" is not required.
Repair of "Non"-Antenna Lines and "Normal Copper" Lines
All "non" antenna or video lines and optical fibers ("normal copper" lines) can be repaired in line with WIS repair methods: AR00.19-P-0001A Repair
wiring harness as per specified repair method (Models 124, 126, 129, 140, 163, 164, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 197, 202, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209,
210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220, 221, 230, 240, 245, 246, 251,461,463) and AR00.19-P-0100A General repair methods for wiring harness
(Models 124, 126, 129, 140, 163, 164, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 197, 199, 202, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220,
221, 230, 240, 245, 246, 251, 461, 463).
Depending on the model series involved, the wiring harnesses may be represented in different design groups.
Antenna Lines
Generally all antenna lines can be ordered individually or as modules through EPC by checking:
^ Qualified entry through vehicle identification number (VIN)
^ Select design group:
- ...54/410
- ...54/545
- .../82/310 (ascending)
Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) Lines:
All LVDS lines (video line from COMAND to central display) can be ordered individually.
Depending on the model series involved, the LVDS lines may be represented in different design groups.
The LVDS lines are located in the following design groups:
^ .../54/410... "Cockpit wiring harness"

^ .../54/545... "Frame>floor system"
^ .../82/310... (ascending)
MOST (Media Oriented System Transport) optical fiber:
All MOST optical fibers can be ordered individually. MOST optical fibers are located in design group:
../54/545..."Frame>floor system"Technical Service Bulletin # S-01_20-32A Date: 120103
Engine - Cylinder Head Cover Leak Information

Order No.: S-B-01.20/32a
Supersedes: S-B-01.20/32, April 2, 2010
Group: 01
Revision a: Star Diagnosis video information and revised text.
SUBJECT:
All Models with M272 and M273 Engines Cylinder Head Cover Leaks
Field inspections of suspected cylinder head cover oil leaks, have revealed that unnecessary resealing is being performed where the cylinder head cover
is not the root cause of the leak.
In cases of customer complaints of oil leakage, it is essential to determine the actual source. A proper remedy should be applied to avoid repeat repairs
and unnecessary workshop visits (refer to other publications on the subject). For your convenience, a video has been created which outlines the proper
procedure to help identify the source of engine oil leaks. The video is available as of the 11/2011 Star Diagnosis release and can be accessed through
the following path:
SDmedia--> Symptoms/Topics--> Engine--> AR - Localize oil leaks on major assemblies [Model Passenger cars]
The new generation of Mercedes-Benz engines have chemical sealers (sometimes referred to as "formed-in-place gaskets") applied to sealing surfaces
by robots during the engine assembly process. This engine sealing technique called the RTV (Room Temperature Vulcanizing) uses the silicone rubber
compound. This precise and uniform application of silicone at the factory insures proper adhesion and a leak tight connection that very rarely leaks.
During necessary engine resealing repairs, care must be taken in preparing surfaces and applying silicone compound. Do not clean surfaces with any
abrasive materials or sharp tools. Only approved Loctite cleaning spray must be used when prepping engine surfaces (refer to published documentation
on the subject, such as bulletin S-B-01.10129(x)).
Only 1 millimeter (+/- 0.2 mm) thick silicone bead should be applied uniformly to one side of sealing surfaces on a precise pattern (refer to Figure 1 and
2 and / or WIS doc AH01.30-P-1000-08V). A small amount of oil should be applied to camshaft bearings. Sealing surfaces must be assembled within
10 minutes of sealant application.Technical Service Bulletin # S-32_25-82B Date: 111221
Suspension - Strut/Shock Absorber Replacement Guidelines

Date December 21, 2011
Order No. S-B-32.25/82b
Supersedes S-B-32.25/82a dated Dec. 22 2010

Group. 32
Revision History
b 12/21/11 All new text and added models.

a 12/22/10 Minor changes to last paragraph.
SUBJECT: MY-All, Models 124, 129, 140, 163, 164, 166, 169, 170, 171, 172, 201, 202, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219,
220, 221, 230, 240, 245, 251, 463
Shock Absorber Replacement
General Information on Shock Absorber Variants
Do not replace both shock absorbers AIRmatic, ABC, ADS or adjustable suspension strut if only one is defective. Only a component that has been
diagnosed to be faulty (damper or suspension strut) may be replaced!
Noise Inspection
Reason for the noise should be determined by driving each side of the vehicle in turn over appropriate road surfacing or if possible by swapping over
the left and right component (damper or suspension strut). Before any replacement is made loosen and re4orque the corresponding damper/suspension
strut first and check whether this resolves the noise complaint.
Front
On the front suspension struts or dampers this need only be carried out on the top bearing mounting.
Rear
Both the upper and the lower attachments for the rear suspension struts or dampers must be loosened and then tightened again to the specified torque
with the vehicle in its ready-to-drive condition (i.e. the vehicle must be standing on its wheels).
Section 2: Special considerations for different damping variants
1) Air suspension struts and dampers (Model 164, 166, 211, 212, 219, 220, 221 240, 251)
ADS suspension strut (Model 129, 210, 140)
Adjusting damper (Model 204, 207, 231)
Since it can be assumed that a new shock absorber installed in a high-mileage vehicle would not harmonize with the used shock absorber and thus
impair ride comfort or vehicle dynamics, we recommend replacing these parts in pairs after the component has traveled at least 80,000 km.
2) ABC suspension struts (Model 215, 216, 220, 221, 230) In contrast to the air Or ADS suspension struts or conventional dampers, ABC suspension
struts must not be replaced in pairs at higher mileages (more than 80,000 km). The vehicle body dampening is performed by active actuation of the
plungers. These work wear-free! Passive wheel damping by the shock absorber integrated in the suspension strut plays a subordinate role.
3a) Conventional dampers (Model 164, 166, 168, 169, 171, 203, 204, 207, 209, 211, 212, 218, 219, 230, 245, 246, 251) Since it can be assumed that a
new shock absorber installed in a high-mileage vehicle would not harmonize with the used shock absorber and thus impair ride comfort or vehicle
dynamics, we recommend replacing these parts in pairs after the component has traveled at least 80,000 km.
3b) Conventional dampers (Model 124, 129, 140, 163, 170, 201, 202, 208, 210, 461, 463) On these models diverse shock absorber variants are
standardized in the parts sector.
If dampers with new standardized part numbers are installed for replacement, then conventional dampers must be replaced in pairs!
In the event of any complaints on parts that have already been replaced in pairs, then the procedure as described in 3a should be followed.
Section 3: Deviating procedure
Information on additional deviating specifications for technical modifications is available in EPC and TIPS The current documentation in advanced
systems such as TIPS and EPC must always be followed! At this moment in time, we would like to draw your attention to the special considerations for
models 204, 207 and 212.
Technical Service Bulletin # S-00_40-89C Date: 111221
A/T - Operating Fluid Specification Changes

Date December 21, 2011
Order No: S-B-00.40/89c
Supersedes S-B-00.40/89b September 1, 2011
Group: 00
Revision C: Added exception note.
SUBJECT: MY - All, Models All with Transmission 722.6 or 722.9
Operating Fluid Specification Changes for Automatic Transmission
5-speed automatic transmission 722.6
Only use the transmission oils outlined in specification for operating fluids sheet 236.14.
See WIS document: BB.00.40-p-0236-14a.
MB part number - A001 989 68 03 10
7-speed automatic transmission 722.9 up to transmission production date June 21, 2010
Only use the transmission oils outlined in specification sheet 236.14
See WIS document: BB.00.40-p-0236-14a.
MB part number - A001 989 68 03 10
7-speed automatic transmission 722.9 after transmission production date June 21, 2010
Only use the transmission oils outlined in specification sheet 236.15
See WIS document: BB.00.40-p-0236-15.
MB part number - A001 989 78 03 09
Note:
The 2 different variants of 722.9 transmission oil are not compatible with one another and can not be mixed. The later oil can be identified by its blue
color as opposed to the former oil which is red in color.
Exception Note 1: Transmissions electrohydraulic controller units and torque converters made available through the parts department are checked at
the production plant with FE AT-134 only. This is why these parts may exhibit traces of FE ATF-134, In this case the transmission controller unit and
torque converter must not be cleaned. The transmission can be filled with the corresponding gear oil (as per this SI) immediately after it has been
installed.
Exception Note 2: Transmission 722.6, 722.9 up to transmission component serial number 2834526 may not be filled with FE~ATF 134.
Transmissions constructed after the June 21, 2010 transition can be visually identified by the following characteristics:
1. The oil pan has a noticeable change in the 4 dimples (pictured below).
2. The oil pan is 5mm deeper
3. The overflow pipe (inside the oil pan) is Green rather than black or white as on the earlier construction transmissions.
Xentry DAS version 05/2010 together with add-on 1476 displays a reference to the specified gear oil before reading out the transmission oil
temperature.
This information must be observed when filling the transmission.

Brakes/Traction Control - Handling Multipole Rings

Date: December 19, 2011
Order No.: P-B-42.30/118
Group: 42
SUBJECT: Models 129, 140, 170, 171, 172, 202, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220, 221, 230, 231
Handling Multipole Rings
When repairing and maintaining operations on the rear axle, ensure that there is no mechanical and magnetic damage to the multipole rings on the
external ball joint of the drive shafts, and that all work conducted is performed in accordance with the WIS documentation specifications.
To avoid magnetic damage to the multipole rings everyone who comes into direct contact with the components must familiarize themselves with the
following specifications for handling multipole rings. This applies to the following components:
^ Drive shaft
^ Steering knuckle/wheel bearing
^ Spring control arm
^ Transverse control arm
^ Cross strut
^ Torque strut
^ Thrust arm
^ Camber strut
^ Shock absorber
^ Spring
Note the following precautions when handling these magnetic multipole rings:
^ Do not bring into contact with external magnetic fields (Figure 1) (a).
^ Avoid damaging rubber-lined encoder track (Figure 1) (b).
^ Avoid soiling parts (Figure 1) (c)
^ Do not bring into contact with metal shavings (Figure 1) (d).
Installation instructions for multipole rings are in WIS document AR42.30-P-0715A Remove/Install Pulse Ring.
Replace the complete drive shaft if multipole ring is damaged or defective.Technical Service Bulletin # S-88_30-87 Date: 111028
Body - License Plate Bracket Omission

Date October 28, 2011
Order No. S-B-88.30/87
Group: 88
SUBJECT: MY-All, Models 164, 166, 171, 172, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220, 221, 230, 240, 245, 251
License Plate Bracket Omission
Do not use additional license plate brackets (advertising panels) on the front bumper The pointed shape of the front bumper creates tension and deforms
license plate brackets and license plate adapters.
Where there are no customer complaints about vehicles on which a license plate bracket has already been attached, the bracket can remain on the
vehicle. In the event of PARKTRONIC complaints or malfunctions the bracket must be removed.
A/C - Musty/Moldy Odor Complaints, Cleaning Procedure

Date: October 20, 2011
Supersedes: S-B-83.30/134, August 18, 2011
Group: 83
SUBJECT: MY-All, Models 164, 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230 and 251
Air Conditioning Musty/Moldy Odor Complaints Cleaning Procedure
Under certain environmental conditions, typically in a hot and humid climate, the vehicle may emit a musty/moldy odor from the air conditioning
system. This may be more noticeable when starting the vehicle due to residual condensation on the evaporator and on the interior surface of the heater
box.
Note:
For the following model series 204, 172, 166, 212, 207, 218, 164 as of A407859, 251 as of A083326, 216 as of A012332, 221 as of A174161, equipped
with recirculated air filtering and biocide-coated evaporator.
In these vehicle models the evaporator can be ruled out as the cause of the odor. Cleaning the evaporator is not an appropriate remedial measure.
Therefore MBUSA does not recognize the cleaning of the evaporator under warranty. The procedure if completed on these models can only be billed as
customer pay.
For additional information related to odor from the air conditioning system, also refer to:
^ L183.00-P-051588 in Xentry TIPS
^ Diagnosis tree "Odor" from the Technology Guide "Vehicle Climate Control - Troubleshooting - Function - Design - Operation". (The Technology
Guide - Vehicle Climate Control - Troubleshooting - Function - Design - Operation is available in pdf format in SDmedia SDS).
This bulletin describes the air conditioning evaporator and interior cleaning procedure for musty/moldy odor using Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept and the
A.C system "ultrasonic atomizer". Refer to WIS document AR83.30-P-5556A for information. For the best lasting results, follow the instructions
provided below.
1. Remove all filters installed in the air conditioning system. The following filter may be fitted: Pollen filter, dust filer, combination filter or active
charcoal filter. Filters are not warrantable items and are to be replaced as per maintenance recommendations and requirements.
2. Clean evaporator with Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept as per WIS document AR83.30-P-5555T. Contra Sept is applied using a spray gun attached to a
long probe. It is imperative to have as much of the evaporator sprayed with the cleaner by moving the probe in / out and up / down inside the case. It
may be necessary to bend the probe in order to gain access. The cleaner is applied and allowed to dry. Refer to Figure 1a for spraying angle
recommendation.
Note:
After cleaning the evaporator, a second treatment has to be conducted. After completion of section A (Contrasept), refer to section B (Wynns).
A. ContraSept Cleaning Procedure:
Caution!
Wear safety glasses and respiratory protection when spraying cleaner.
^ Spray the evaporator at a 90° angle.
^ Move up and down, left and right to reach all areas of the evaporator.
^ Do not rotate the probe to reach other areas of the evaporator. This will change the spraying angle and the cleaning effect will diminish.
Warning!
Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum air pressure as stated on the label affixed to the pressure cup (Figure 1b). Excessive air
pressure could cause the canister to explode and potentially cause personal injury. The recommended pressure to clean the evaporator effectively is 120
psi.
To reduce the possibility of this condition reoccurring, advise the owner to operate the blower at a higher speed, especially during humid conditions.
For vehicles with a REST function, it also helps to use this feature during humid conditions when parking the car.
Additional Procedures - Model 203 / 209
1. Equipped with ACC climate system Option Code 580 - It is necessary to drill a 15 mm hole in the climate housing to access the evaporator with the
spray probe. The location for drilling the hole is described in WIS document AR83.30-P-5555-01A and Figure 1, A1 and B1.
2. A white foam block may be mounted to the housing between the blower motor and the main section of the case, see (Figure 2). On these housings,
there is an alternate location of the hole as shown in Figure 1, A2 and B2.
3. Bend the shorter of the two probes (Figure 3). Move the probe up and down as well as side to side to ensure the entire evaporator is sprayed with the
cleaner. Plug hole after cleaning with seal plug A110 987 10 44 64.
4. Using the instructions below check the "REHEAT" setting. It should be set to "Anti-icing". Control Units -> Body -> EIS -> Control unit adaptations
-> Read coding and change if necessary -> Climate control -> Standard setting: Climate control -> REHEAT mode ~ Change From: "Standard" to:
"Anti-icing protection"
5. Should a customer report on the air conditioning system emitting a musty/moldy odor from the vents within three months after using the
Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept product as described above, a Biocide coated evaporator can be installed on 203 vehicles (production up to VIN A731367
and F634899) and on 209 vehicles (production up VIN F144090 and T042953). The Biocide coated evaporators were phased into production on these
vehicles past the VINs indicated above. Be sure to thoroughly clean the inside of the heater box and make sure the drain tubes are not clogged before
reassembling the system.
Additional Procedures - Model 211
1. Using the instructions below, check the "REHEAT" setting. It should be set to "Fixed value". Control Units -> Air Conditioning -> C-AAC, AAC ->
Control unit adaptations -> Read coding and change if necessary -> Workshop coding -> Evaporator-Control (REHEAT mode) -> Change From
Humidity-dependent (SERIES)" To: "Fixed value"
2. In case of customer reports that the air conditioning system is emitting a musty/moldy odor from the vents within three months after using the
Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept product as described above, a new slanted heater box bottom which allows the condensation to drain better and a coated
evaporator entered production as of VIN A675828 and X171590. In this case, these parts can be installed in earlier vehicles. Be sure to thoroughly
clean the inside of the heater box and make sure the drain tubes are not clogged before reassembling the system.
Procedure for 164 and 251
Caution!
Wear safety glasses and respiratory protection when drilling hole and spraying cleaner.
1. Clean the evaporator with Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept as per WIS document AR83.30-P-5555T and the additional information in this document.
2. To clean the driver side of the evaporator, the spray probe is inserted into the hole for the evaporator temperature sensor as described in WIS
document AR83.30-P-5555T, Step 4.1.
3. To clean the passenger side of the evaporator, the spray probe is inserted into a 15 mm hole that needs to be drilled in the climate housing as
described in Steps 4 through 6.
4. Remove the cover below the instrument panel on the passenger side and fold carpet down. Refer to WIS document AR68.10-P-1520GZ (164) or
AR68.10-P-1520RT (251).
5. Location of hole is shown in Figures 4 and 5. The hole should be centered in the triangular shaped section of the climate housing as shown in Figure
5.
6. Drill a 15 mm hole in small increments using a mechanical drill stop to limit how far the drill bit penetrates the climate housing. A collar type drill
stop, a piece of rubber hose or tape can be used as the drill stop.
Warning!
The drill bit cannot be allowed to penetrate the housing more than 13 mm or damage to the evaporator could occur. When the drill bit breaks through
the housing it has a tendency to pull inward.
7. Bending of the probe may be required to be able to spray all parts of the evaporator. Move the probe up and down as well as side to side to ensure the
entire evaporator is sprayed with the cleaner.
8. Follow the remainder of instructions in WIS document AR83.30-P-5555T. Reassemble vehicle in reverse order. Do not replace any filter back into
the system!
Warning!
Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum air pressure stated on the label affixed to the pressure cup (Figure 3). Excessive air pressure
could cause the canister to explode and potentially cause personal injury.
B. Wynns Treatment
1. Warm up vehicle with air conditioning switched off for a minimum of 30 minutes in order to dry out the climate housing and ducts. Set the climate
control to the following settings:
Blower speed 2-3
Heat to maximum
Recirculation activated
Air distribution to the footwell
All doors, windows and sliding roof closed
Note:
AC compressor does not turn off immediately when the AC Off is selected at the control module. In order to ensure the compressor is off, use the
following instructions:
Select AC Off
Select Climate System Off
Select Climate System On. The AC compressor will now be off.
2. Remove all filters installed in the climate system. This could include dust, activated charcoal or combination filters.
3. Close the recirculation flap for cleaning using SDS.
For 171, 211, 219, 216, 221, 164 and 251 models follow path: Control Units -> Air Conditioning -> C-AAC, AAC -> Actuations -> Closing air
recirculation flap for cleaning -> Select recirculation.
For 203 and 209 models, follow path: Functions performed by more than one control unit -> Body -> Climate control -> Climate control -> C-AAC
-> Actuations
The system will come out of recirculation when SDS is disconnected from the vehicle.
Note:
This menu item is not available in SDS for all vehicles. On these vehicles, recirculation must be manually selected on the control module.
4. Place the Wynn's(R) AIRCOMATIC(TM) Ultrasonic Cleaning System in the passenger footwell. Insert the hose in the luggage net and orient the end
of the hose to insure the output from the device is sucked into the footwell vents.
5. Start engine, AC off, press recirculation button, select lowest blower speed and set the temperature(s) to minimum.
Note:
The compressor must not be running.
6. Install one container of Wynn's(R) AIRCO~CLEAN(TM) in the Wynn's system.
7. Plug in the Wynn's system and check that it is running.
8. Close all doors and windows.
9. When the fog stops coming out of the Wynn's(R) system (after approximately 20 minutes), the dispersion process has been completed.
10. When the cleaning procedure is finished, switch engine off, turn off the Wynn's(R) system and leave windows and doors closed for approximately 1
hour.
11. Open doors and trunk lid/tailgate.
12. Open the air recirculation flap again if the automatic recirculation function has been deactivated by coding, and set the recirculated air function to
"unimited" again.
13. Restart engine, switch on A/C, select the highest blower speed and set the temperature(s) to minimum.
14. Allow system to run for about 10 minutes. The cleaning process is now complete.
15. After cleaning, install new filters.
To reduce the possibility for this condition to reoccur, advise the owner to operate the blower at a higher speed, especially during humid conditions. For
vehicles with a REST function, it also helps to use this feature during humid conditions when parking the car.
Parts Information
Fuel System - Use Of E10 Fuel

Date: September 20, 2011
Order No: S-B-47.00/61

Group: 47
SUBJECT: MY-All, Models All with Spark Ignition Engine
Use of E10 Fuel
All Mercedes-Benz vehicles and Maybach, and AMG with spark-ignition engines can be run on E10 fuel.
Exceptions are all models produced at the factory without a controlled 3-way catalytic converter or models equipped with a carburetor. These are
generally older than 25 years.
The following table lists all models that may not be operated with a bioethanol admixture of more than 5%.
These models must always be run on gasoline of the grade "Premium or Super Plus sulfur-free as per DIN EN228 (2208 - 2011) or E DIN 51626-1 and
other ISO or ASTM standards" or a comparable quality with the special designation Contains up to 5% bioethanol".
Note:
Mercedes-Benz and Maybach vehicles may only be filled with standard fuel qualities (DIN/EN specification). The octane number recommendation
(RON) for the particular engine type or age of the vehicle must be taken into consideration.
Note:
Grades to use are identified on gasoline pumps as: Contains up to 5% "bioethanol". The RON grade that is available as an E5 is at the discretion of the
fuel provider.
Brakes - Brake Lining Instructions

date: September 20, 2011
Order No: S-B-42.10/117
Group: 42
Brake Lining Installation Instructions
For product safety reasons, deliver A 203 005 25 99 installation instructions along with any over-the-counter sale of brake linings. The invoice should
reflect that this was done.
Suspension - Assembly Of Suspension Struts And Shocks
Order No.: S-B-32.25/83
Group: 32
Assembly of Suspension Struts and Shock Absorbers
The correct procedure for installing and removing or disassembling/assembling shock absorbers and struts is described below.
1. Damper tube
2. Piston rod
a. Friction marks on sealing piston
b. Without friction marks on sealing piston
Procedure
1. When releasing or tightening the nut on the piston rod (Figure 1) (2) a impact wrench/driver must not be used because the piston rod (Figure 1) (2)
will also turn and by doing so it may cause friction marks (arrow) in the damper tube (Figure 1) (1) and on the sealing piston (Figure 1) (a).
2. When releasing and tightening, the piston rod must be counter held at the upper end using a suitable tool. See WIS document:
Disassembling/assembling suspension struts AR32.25-P-1018*.
3. Turning with the impact wrench/driver creates chips, which are deposited in the sealing piston and damage the piston rod sealing. In this instance, the
damper sealing capability is no longer sustained.
Transmission Controls - Control Module Flashing Info.

Date: August 24, 2011
Order No.: S-B-27.19/121
Supersedes
Group: 27
Transmission Control Module Flashing
Do not flash the transmission control module, unless specifically instructed to do so in a technical document, such as a LI, Service Bulletin, Campaign,
or Diagnostic Tree; or the SDS Diagnostic System indicates to do so.
Failure to adhere to this policy will result in rejected warranty claim or a debit.
Steering - Approved Hydraulic Fluids

Supersedes: S-B-46.25/70, January 19, 2010
Group: 46
Revision a: Models 172, 197, 240 Added. Supersedes P-MAY-B-46.25171 as now consolidated.
SUBJECT: MY-All, Models 124, 129, 140, 163, 164, 170,171,172,197,199, 202, 203, 204, 207, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 240,
251, 463
Approved Hydraulic Fluids for Steering Systems
Only use the following approved fluids in the event of hydraulic steering system repairs:
Hydraulic fluid A according to sheet 236.3; hydraulic fluid B according to sheet 345.0; and hydraulic fluid C according to sheet 344.0 (see Parts
Information above).
PARTS INFORMATION
A/C System - Update Of Vehicle System Technology Guide

Date: July 26, 2011
Order No.: S-B-83.00/133
Group: 83
SUBJECT: MY-All, Models 164,171, 203, 204, 207, 209, 211, 212, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251
Update of Vehicle A/C System Technology Guide

The Vehicle A/C System Technology Guide, Version 4 is available on Star Diagnosis SDmedia as of the 05-06/2011 DVD using Xentry diagnosis and
has been updated with the addition of models 212, 207, and 221.095/195.
The guide presents an overall picture for Mercedes-Benz vehicle A/C systems. All known fault profiles and control topics are summarized and
illustrated.
Engine Control - Engine Control Module (N3/10) Flashing

Date: July 20, 2011
Order No.: S-B-07.61/89a, S-B-54.21/244a
Supersedes: S-B-7.61/89, S-B-54.21/244, July 8, 2011
Group: 07, 54
Revision a: Revised with SDS instruction.
Engine Control Module (N3/10) Flashing
Do not flash the engine control module (N3/10), unless specifically instructed to do so in a technical document, such as a LI, Service Bulletin,
Campaign, or Diagnostic Tree; or the SDS Diagnostic System indicates to do so.
Failure to adhere to this policy will result in rejected warranty claim or a debit. Unnecessary flashing could have an adverse effect on vehicle
functionality.
Engine Controls - Engine Control Module (N3/10) Flashing

Date: July 20, 2011
Order No.: S-B-07.61/89a, S-B-54.21/244a
Supersedes S-B-07.61/89, S-B-54.21/244, July 8, 2011
Group: 07, 54
Revision a: Revised with SDS instruction.
Engine Control Module (N3/10) Flashing
Do not flash the engine control module (N3/10), unless specifically instructed to do so in a technical document, such as a LI, Service Bulletin,
Campaign, or Diagnostic Tree; or the SDS Diagnostic System indicates to do so.
Failure to adhere to this policy will result in rejected warranty claim or a debit. Unnecessary flashing could have an adverse effect on vehicle
functionality.
Computers/Controls - Module Programming Precautions

Date: July 19, 2011
Order No.: S-B-54.21/246
Group: 54
Programming Control Units
Before programming control units, make sure that the latest software release is on the diagnostic system! The available add-ons must always be installed
before starting any control unit programming!
Cooling System - MIL ON/DTC P2060 Diagnosis

Date: July 2011
Order No.: S-B-07.04/88
Supersedes:
Group: 07
SUBJECT: All Passenger and Light Truck Models Equipped with Engine M272 and PremAir Sensor B11/15
Check Engine Light On (DTC 2060) -> PremAir Sensor B11/15 - Diagnosis
Note:
The information provided below only pertains to DTC's 2060 or P256809 regardless of code description.
In cases of a customer complaint of a CEL and either DTC 2060 or P256809 are current and or stored in the ME ECU, please perform the following
diagnosis and provide the following information to the Dealer Technical Support (DTS) group in the form of an on-line DTS case. Once all required
information has been entered and attached to the case, then call the DTS hotline for further work instructions.
1. Print-out and or save a copy of the initial short test, fault code freeze frame data via the ME DTC menu, and a ME ECU log.
2. Insure that the vehicle has not been in an accident.
3. Insure that the correct radiator is installed (PZEV radiator = black catalytic coating).
4. Insure the radiator is not damaged or obstructed.
5. Perform a function test of the premair sensor (code must be present). If the test does not pass, then erase the code and perform a function test via the
guided test menu. In the event the function test is performed on a hybrid model, then monitor if the function test is inconclusive (i.e. there are no test
result data at the conclusion of the test [numerical or graph]). Print and or save both before and after test results (code/no code).
Note:
If there is no guided test menu, then contact the SDS helpdesk for assistance.
6. Check glycol/water mixture.
7. Check the ground circuit of the premair sensor via a DVOM first and then visually (ground stud must be clean).
8. Check pin bushing tension of premair sensor connector.
9. Check premair sensor installation as outlined in S-B-07.04/87.
Note:
If the premair sensor detaches from the radiator without breaking and or damaging the sensor tip, then the sensor is not properly installed. If the sensor
tip does break off, then the sensor was properly installed.
The on-line DTS case notes should include the following information:
^ Repair attempts to date = ?
^ Internal ME software version currently installed = VC?
^ Accident damage related = yes/no
^ Correct radiator installed = yes/no
^ Obstructions of radiator noted = yes/no

^ PremAir function test result with code present = pass/failed
^ PremAir function test result with code erased = pass/failed
^ Resistance test of premair sensor ground circuit = ? ohms
^ PremAir sensor ground stud condition = clean/not clean
^ Pin bushing tension of premair sensor connector = loose/tight
^ Coolant/Antifreeze - water ratio measured at = ? degrees
^ PremAir sensor properly bonded in place = yes/no
The following SDS data should be attached to the on-line DTS case:
^ Initial short test
^ Freeze frame data via the DTC fault menu
^ ME ECU log
^ Premair function test result (numerical data and graph)

Technical Service Bulletin # S-15_40-58B Date: 110701
Charging System - Voltage Regulator, Inspection/Testing

Date: July 2011
Order No.: S-B-15.40/58b
Supersedes: S-B-15.40/58a (5/2007), S-B-15.40/58, P-B-15.40/56, T-B-15.40/57
Group: 15
SUBJECT
Test and Inspection of Charging System Regulator
Revision History
B 07/2011 Added Model 240
A 03/07 Addition of models 164.122/822/871, 211.022,251.122,230, 463, and warranty coding information
- 05/05 Initial issue
During testing of returned alternators (that were replaced under warranty) it has been determined that many alternators are being replaced when only the
(replaceable) regulators are found to not be functioning. Therefore, in the event a charging system test determines the need to replace a nonfunctioning
regulator; replace the regulator (independently from alternator).
Note:
Regulators installed on water cooled alternators and those installed on model 199 alternators are not replaceable.
For regulator test and inspection instructions refer to Subject A.
A. Test and inspection of charging system regulators
1. Refer to Subject B for charging system testing instructions.
2. For instructions on replacing nonfunctioning regulators for models:
^ 163 refer to Subject C
^ 203 4Matic, 211 4Matic, 215, 220, 463 refer to Subject D
^ 203/208/209/211/219/230 refer to Subject E (does not include 4Matic models).
^ 129/164/170/171/202/210/221/251, and models not listed above (that are included in this Bulletin) refer to WIS group: 15.40.
Note:
(when referring to WIS instructions for replacing regulator)
Ensure non functioning regulator is inspected (refer to Subject F, step 3) prior to replacing.
Ensure circuit 30 systems are reinitialized and fault codes are erased (refer to refer to Subject F, steps 8 and 9).
3. After removing a regulator that has been tested and found to be not functioning, it must be visually inspected (refer to Subject F, step 3) to determine
the condition of the alternator bearing.
B. Alternator Diagnosis
Some of the engines in the above model vehicles are equipped with alternators which communicate with the ME or CDI engine control via an interface.
This has resulted in changes to both system diagnosis and testing the alternator. A distinction is made between a conventional alternator with terminal
61 without an interface and alternators with a BSS or LIN interface. This section of bulletin describes the different alternator types and diagnostic
abilities via STAR Diagnosis.
Alternator Types
1. "CONVENTIONAL" alternator not linked to the engine control module (ECM)
^ No form of communication between the alternator and engine control module
^ Engine control module cannot assist during the alternator test
^ Testing not possible with STAR Diagnosis, only with a traditional Volt-Ampere-Tester
2. "BSS" alternator linked to the engine control module per BSS
^ BSS = Bit Synchronous Interface, communication is one-way from engine control module to alternator.
^ Testing possible via engine control module and STAR Diagnosis.
3. "LIN" alternator linked to the engine control module per LIN
^ LIN = Local Interconnect Network, communication is two-way between engine control module and alternator.
^ Testing possible via engine control module and STAR Diagnosis
Note:
Alternators with a BSS or LIN interface have greatly enhanced diagnosis capabilities. BSS or LIN interfaces allow these alternators to be tested with
STAR Diagnosis and without the use of an external tester. STAR Diagnosis detects whether a BSS interface or an LIN interface is present when
communicating with the engine control module.
The following is an overview of the engine model designations with their corresponding alternators:
Current overview of engines on which the alternator test can be carried out with STAR Diagnosis as of the approval date stated:
The test step is listed as "Alternator Diagnosis" in STAR Diagnosis and can be found in the following locations:
^ CDI engine control module under "Actuations"
^ ME engine control module under Complete list of guided tests, and as of STAR Diagnosis-DVD 01/2006 also under "Actuations".
Note:
The following notes should be adhered to when testing an alternator with STAR Diagnosis
^ The test prerequisites for the alternator test are listed in the DAS and must be observed. The test itself is arranged as a test sequence and is
menu-assisted.
^ During the process it should be noted in particular that the upper limit value of the regulation voltage can now be up to 15 Volts. Refer to the current
documents in the workshop literature for the valid specified values.
^ Future engine model designations will also be equipped with these interfaces and this document will be updated to reflect these additions as this
occurs.
^ All alternators which do not have a BSS or LIN interface cannot be checked with STAR Diagnosis. For this generation alternator, continue to test
with traditional Volt-Ampere-Tester. Refer to the current documents in WIS group 15.40 for the valid specified values.
^ The specified values have been updated for charging current and regulation voltage for all alternators.
C. REMOVE REGULATOR WITH ALTERNATOR FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT MODEL 163
Remove alternator from vehicle (refer to WIS: AR15.40-P-5032GH) then proceed to Subject F, Inspect and Replace Regulator.
D. REMOVE REGULATOR WITH ALTERNATOR IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT MODELS 203 4Matic, 211 4MATIC/215/220/463
Note:
^ Model 463: Proceed to step 1.
^ Models 203 4Matic/211 4Matic/215/220:

Proceed to step 2
1. Model 463:
^ Disconnect battery ground cable from battery terminal.

^ Remove right air intake duct (arrow, Figure 1).
^ Remove front section of upper engine cover (A, Figure 1).
^ Remove engine fan refer to WIS: AR20.40-P-5660C.
^ Remove engine belt from alternator pulley (do not remove belt from vehicle) refer to WIS: AR13.22-P-1202B
Note (regarding above WIS instructions):
When removing engine belt from alternator pulley, do not remove fan shroud.
^ Remove upper alternator mounting bolt (B, Figure 2).
^ Loosen lower alternator mounting bolt (A, Figure 2) from mounting bracket (arrow).
^ Disconnect circuit 61 harness connector (arrow, Figure 3) from regulator.
^ Remove circuit 30 terminal cover (A)
^ Remove nut (arrow, Figure 4) then remove circuit 30 harness connector (A) from terminal stud.
^ Remove lower alternator bolt (A, Figure 2) from mounting bracket.
^ Remove alternator (B, Figure 4) from mounting brackets.
Note:
Do not remove alternator (B) from engine compartment.

^ Position alternator (A, Figure 5) with regulator facing up and pulley facing down. Regulator will be replaced with alternator in engine
compartment (proceed to Subject F).
2. Models 203 4Matic/211 4Matic/215/220:
^ Disconnect battery ground cable from battery terminal.
^ Remove right air intake duct (arrow, Figure 6).
^ Remove front section of upper engine cover (A, Figure 6).
^ Models 215/220 AMG (supercharged) only:
^ Remove supercharger belt from vehicle refer to WIS: AR13.21-P-1202RVK.

^ Remove cap (arrow, Figure 7) on idler pulley (A).
^ Remove idler pulley bolt (arrow, Figure 8) and idler pulley (A).
Installation Note:
When reinstalling, torque bolt (A) to 68 Nm.
^ Remove engine belt from alternator pulley (do not remove belt from vehicle) refer to WIS: Group 13.22
^ Model 203 4Matic/211 4Matic only: Unclip heater hose (A, Figure 9) from mounting clip (arrow).
^ Disconnect circuit 61 harness connector (arrow, Figure 10) from regulator.
^ Raise vehicle on vehicle lift then remove lower (center) engine cover.
^ Remove circuit 30 terminal cover (A, Figure 10).
^ Remove nut (arrow, Figure 11) then remove circuit 30 harness connector (A) from terminal stud on alternator (B).
^ Loosen upper alternator mounting bolt (B, Figure 12).
^ Remove lower alternator mounting bolt (A), then remove upper alternator mounting bolt (B).
^ Remove alternator from mounting brackets.
Note:
Do not remove alternator from engine compartment.
^ Position alternator (A, Figure 13) with regulator facing up and pulley facing down. REGULATOR WILL BE REPLACED WITH
ALTERNATOR IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT (proceed to Subject F).
Note:
Coolant hose (Figure 12) is repositioned for clearance. Return hose to installed position after reinstallation.
E. REMOVE REGULATOR WITH ALTERNATOR BOLTED TO ENGINE MODELS 203/208/209/211/219/230
Note:
Subject E does not apply to 4Matic models.
1. Disconnect battery ground cable from battery terminal.
2. Raise vehicle.
3. Remove lower engine cover:
^ Models 211/219/230: Remove lower middle engine cover.
^ Models 203/ 208/ 209: Remove (single) lower engine cover.

4. Disconnect circuit 61 connector (arrow, Figure 14) from regulator.
5. Remove circuit 30 cover (A, Figure 14) from terminal.
6. Remove nut (arrow, Figure 15) then remove circuit 30 harness connector (A) from terminal stud on alternator (B).
7. Replace regulator with alternator bolted to engine (proceed to Subject F).
F. INSPECT AND REPLACE REGULATOR
Note:
Regulator replacement procedure below applies to Bosch alternators. For regulator replacement procedure on alternators from other manufacturers refer
to WIS group: 15.40.
Note (when refering to WIS instructions for replacing regulator):
^ Ensure malfunctioning regulator is inspected (refer to step 3 of this section) prior to replacing.
^ Ensure circuit 30 systems are reinitialized and fault codes are erased (refer to steps 8 and 9 of this section).
1. Remove the two nuts (1, Figure 16, 17) from studs and one Philips head screw (2); remove the plastic cover from the rear of the alternator.
Note:
Observe which nut is removed from either stud.
2. Remove three Philips head screws (2, 3, Figure 17); remove voltage regulator (1) from the alternator.
3. Inspect wear shape (arrow, Figure 18) of carbon brushes:
If brushes have worn at an angle (arrow), alternator bearing damage is indicated and the alternator must be replaced. If brushes wear is normal,
continue with regulator replacement.
Note:
Minimum regulator brush dimension (A, Figure 19) = 5 mm.
4. Install new voltage regulator (1, Figure 20) and torque Philips head screws to:
^ (2) = 2.0-2.4 Nm
^ (3) = 1.0-1.4Nm
Caution!:
Ensure the carbon brushes (arrows, Figure 21) are not damaged during the installation procedure.
5. Install the plastic cover on the back of the generator and torque the Philips head screw (2, Figure 16) to: 2.2 - 2.6 Nm and the two nuts (1, Figure 16)
as follows:
^ On long stud: 29.0 - 32.0 Nm
^ On short stud: 11.0 - 13.0 Nm
6. Reinstall the alternator in reverse order
7. Reinstall components in reverse order.
8. Reconnect battery cable to negative battery terminal, reinitialize vehicle systems (e.g., steering angle sensor, power windows etc.); refer to WIS:
AR00.19-P-0200P.
9. Connect SDS and erase any faults that may have been stored.
Note:
Refer EPC for replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair.
In Case of Warranty
Engine Controls - PremAir(R) Sensor R & I Instructions

Date: July 2011
Order No.: S-B-07.04/87
Supersedes:
Group: 07
SUBJECT: All Passenger and Light Truck Models Equipped with Engine M272 and PremAir Sensor B11/15
PremAir Sensor Removal and Installation Instructions
The below provided premair sensor removal and installation instruction is to be performed in the event the PZEV coated radiator requires replacement
or a sensor fault has been determined in conjunction with S-B-07.04/88.
Note:
Read through the entire work instruction before proceeding. Any damage caused to a radiator in the process of removing and or installing the premair
sensor will result in a claim debit.
Note:
Review WIS documents when performing repairs (AR07.04-P-5004GZH refers to PremAir sensor - follow this bulletin to perform PremAir sensor
removal and installation). Refer to SDS guided tests and other publications for additional information.
PremAir Sensor Repair Instructions - Removal/Installation
1. Remove the radiator from the vehicle as outlined in WIS, and place it on a flat level surface.
2. Place a suitable plastic door panel tool (flat wedge) between the B11/15 PremAir sensor and the radiator (Figure 1).
3. Insert an instrument cluster hook (or a similar type tool) under one of the locking tabs.
4. Simultaneously pull up on the locking tab and gently pry up on the sensor with the wedge just enough to where the locking tab is no longer locked in
place.
5. While holding slight pressure on the door panel tool unlatch the adjacent locking tab with the instrument cluster hook.
6. Firmly take hold of the sensor and detach it from the radiator.
Note:
Do not use the door panel tool to pry the sensor away from the radiator, or use a tool other than a small hook such as the instrument cluster tool
otherwise irreparable damage could occur to the radiator (as shown in Figure 2).
7. Carefully clean the mounting plate on the radiator to accommodate the new PremAir sensor (Figure 3 & 4). If the original sensor tip broke off during
disassembly (see figure 2), and the existing radiator is to be used, then it is essential to shave off the remainder of the sensor tip flush with the mounting
plate.
Note:
Refrain from removing any metal from the mounting plate as this could prevent the PremAir sensor from locking firmly into place.
8. Start by filling in one of the mounting holes with Loctite 4204 P/N A009 989 09 71 (or Sikaflex 260 sealing adhesive P/N A 003 989 95 20 10 -
check availability).
9. Then apply a thin film of adhesive across the entire mounting bracket surface.
10. Install the PremAir sensor/tip and allow the adhesive to cure for 12 hours before installing the radiator into the vehicle. The PremAir sensor must be
securely locked onto the radiator (Figure 5).
Note:
When either installing a new sensor on a replacement radiator or on an existing radiator, it is essential to perform the bonding process with the radiator
placed on a flat level surface.
In the event one of the mounting holes is occupied, then it is necessary to install the premair sensor in the adjacent hole by turning it 180 degrees. In this
case insure that the sensor harness is not pinched and or under tension after installing the radiator. In the event both mounting holes are occupied from
prior repairs, then the radiator must be replaced. DO NOT drill out the old sensor tip.
Note:
Always refer to EPC for latest parts information.
Parts Information
Electrical - Battery Test & Inspection Information

Date: July 8, 2011
Order No.: S-B-54.10/243
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models 163, 164, 170, 171, 203, 204, 208, 209, 211, 212, 215,216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 240, 251, 463
Battery Test and Inspection
Since April 2006 the following procedure is the battery warranty process. The battery test sheet is discontinued.
Procedure
1. When testing the battery, the battery test devices "Midtronics EXP717" or "Midtronics MCR717" (Version 2.0)" must be used. For additional
information including application of Midtronics test equipment see: AR54.10-P-1129**.
2. Only the new operation items should be used for test work on the battery:
3. On the repair order please include the following information in the technician's story: Terminal Stamp, Battery Part Number (being removed from the
car) and the Midtronics Test Code. The Midtronics printout should be stored in a tamperproof manner with the repair documents. To ensure that the
Midtronics printout can be assigned at any given time to the repair documents, the Midtronics printout must bear the test date and the vehicle
identification number.
4. When preparing the warranty or goodwill claim, the repair order data mentioned in "Step 3" (battery data and Midtronics test code) should be entered
in the beginning of the claim text field.
5. When testing the alternator (15 5010 or 15 5015) record battery data and Midtronics test code after any negative Midtronics findings. Again, any
warranty claims should include the battery data and Midtronics test code in the beginning of the claim text field.
6. Any submitted claim with incomplete or implausible data will be rejected.

A/T - Electrohydraulic Control Unit ID & Ordering

Date: July 1, 2011
Group: 27
Revision History
a 7/1/10 Procedure 2-3 ordering notes modified
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Transmission 722.9 in Models
164, 171, 203, 204, 207, 209, 211, 212, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, 463
Ordering Notes for Electrohydraulic Control Unit

The following information clarifies how to determine the correct electrohydraulic control units.
A. Procedure 1a
1. Diagnosis on the vehicle is possible:
2. To determine the correct EHS part number, the currently installed EHS should first be read out with the Star diagnosis.
a. Xentry Diagnostics:
^ via the path "Control units view" - "Current quick test" - "Fully integrated transmission control" - "EHS part number".
^ Ordering the new EHS with this read out part number.
b. DAS:
^ "Quick test" > "EGS > electronic transmission control serial number".
^ Ordering the new EHS with this read out serial number.
B. Procedure 1b
Diagnosis on the vehicle is no longer possible, as the control unit no longer responds. Therefore, the number must be read off directly by the EHS and
the ordering process is started with this number.
C. Procedure 2
1. Read out part number A 220 270 14 06
2. This part number was replaced by A 220 270 13 06 or by A 220 270 18 06, depending on the vehicle model range.
For this the following must be observed for correct ordering:
Model 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230 with transmission 722.901
A 220 270 14 06 replaced by
A 220 270 31 06
Model 209 with transmission 722.902 and engine 642.910 up to 5/31/2007

A 220 270 29 06
Model 209 with transmission 722.902 and engine 642.910 as of 6/1/2007
A 220 270 32 06
Model 164, 251 with transmission 722.901
A 220 270 27 06
A 220 270 27 06
Model 171, 209, 211, 219 and 230.471 with transmission 722.904
A 220 270 27 06
Model 221 with transmission 722.906
A 220 270 27 06
A 220 270 27 06
D. Procedure 3
1. Read out the part number A 220 270 12 06
2. For this the following must be observed for correct ordering:
^ Model 219.356, 171.456 with transmission 722.906 up to and including model year 2005 (code 805)
A 220 270 12 06.

^ For all other baumusters/model designations (except 219.356, 171.456) order with the read off part number A 220 270 12 06
A 220 270 31 06
Technical Service Bulletin # S-98_00-13S Date: 100621
Paint/Body - MBUSA Approved Refinishing Products Update

Date: June 21, 2010
Order No: S-B-98.00/13S
Supercedes: S-B-98/00/13R, March 2010
Group: 98
Revision S: Edits to Glasurit Products
Subject: MY-All, Models All, MBUSA Approved Refinishing Products
Glasurit and R-M (BASF), Spies Hecker, Standox, and Global (PPG) paint products are currently approved as refinishing products for Mercedes-Benz
vehicles.
MBUSA approved refinishing products from Glasurit, R-M, Spies Hecker, Standox, and Global are listed.
General Information can be obtained by contacting the supplier directly at the corporate headquarters listed above or by contacting your local
distributor.
MBUSA requires that only approved paint refinishing products and procedures be used on any warranty repair work. Documentation regarding this
must be submitted. Do not submit warranty claims to MBUSA for any repairs on refinished areas.
Wheels - Checking Components For Bolted Wheel Connection

Date: May 19, 2011
Order No.: S-B-40.10/72
Group: 40
Checking Components for Bolted Wheel Connection
Incorrect installation of and/or incorrect contact surface cleaning methods of bolted wheel connections can lead to the loosening of the wheel-and-tire
assembly, which can result in injury to people, property, or the environment.
To avoid this the wheel-and-tire assembly must be fitted following all operation steps that follow.
Procedure
A. Cleaning
1. Remove lubricants and soiling, such as oil, grease or sand from the following components:
^ Contact surfaces
^ Joints and centering on disk wheel
^ Wheel hub
^ Wheel flange
^ Brake disk
^ Brake drum
^ Spherical caps on disk wheel
^ Thread and radius seat of wheel bolts
^ Thread for wheel bolts and in wheel hub or wheel flange
2. Remove corrosion with a wire brush or emery cloth.
3. Clean any contaminated threads. Remove all corrosion and dirt from corroded threads using tap. There must be no damaged or missing threads. Any
dirt left in the thread prevents reaching specific torque value. The cleaned contact surface should look like Figure 4.
B. Inspecting
1. Check the following for damage:
^ Contact surface, joints and center on disk wheel
^ Wheel hub
^ Wheel flange
^ Brake disk or brake drum
^ Spherical caps for deformity and rim flanges on disk wheel
^ Threads and radius seat of wheel bolts
^ Thread for wheel bolts in wheel hub or wheel flange
2. Replace wheel bolt or wheel flange if thread is damaged. Replace disk wheel, wheel flange, brake disk or brake drum if damaged.
3. Check radius seats of wheel bolt for signs of damage, scoring marks and material deposits. Replace any wheel bolts that are damaged, scored, or have
material deposits. Any remaining sizing marks or material deposits will prevent reaching specific torque value.
4. Apply corrosion protection. Apply a thin coating of long-life grease as corrosion protection to the marked area of the center hole guides (see arrow,
Figure 7) on the wheel hub, wheel flange, and wheel contact surface. Do not apply grease or any other lubricant to the threads of wheel bolts, wheel
hubs, wheel flanges, or wheel studs.
A/T - Diag. Verification For Valve Body/Conductor Plate

Date: April 29, 2011
Supersedes: S-B-27.00/120
Group: 27
Revision History
a 4/29/11 Clarification on Title and Parts order

processing process
- 4/8/11 Initial issue
SUBJECT: All Models Equipped with 722.9 NAG2 (7G-Tronic) Transmission
All Warrantable Model Years
Diagnostic Verification for Valve Body/Conductor Plate Replacement Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC will begin Diagnostic Verification for 722.9 NAG2
Transmission Valve Body/Conductor Plate replacements starting on Monday, April 18, 2011. MBUSA has posted a Diagnostic Verification form for
transmission replacements which can be found on: NetStar -> Service -> STAR -> TekInfo -> Diagnostic Verification Proj. -> NAG2 Valve
Body/Conductor Plate
Under this program, replacement of the Model Year 2004 through present Model Year 722.9 (NAG2) Transmission Valve Body/Conductor Plate will
require verification that a replacement is necessary prior to replacement in accordance with the program terms summarized below.
^ The technician shall conduct an accurate assessment and complete documentation of the problem by submitting a Diagnostioc verification request
through NetStar -> Service -> STAR TekInfo -> Diagnostic Verification Proj. -> NAG2 Valve Body/Conductor Plate.
^ Upon completion of the form, click on the "submit" button to send the form to Dealer Technical Support(DTS). A Diagnostic Verification case
number will be displayed upon submission. Supporting documentation (e.g. Short Test, Control Unit Log, Freeze Frame Data & pictures of damaged
parts where appropriate) must then be sent to [email protected] with the case number in the subject line as a reference. Once the form
and supporting documentation are received, the case will be reviewed. After review, you will be notified via e-mail (to the address listed on the form)
if the diagnosis is verified. Warranty Services Group will also be updated when the diagnosis is verified.
^ Once a diagnosis is verified, the replacement part order will be processed automatically via Paragon Replacement can then be performed. Warranty
claim can then be submitted. When the claimed part is submitted, the claims processing system will validate that verification has been obtained.
Failure to submit the required paperwork with the claim will result in automatic debiting. Returning a claimed part without a Diagnostic Verification
will result in automatic debiting of the claim.
^ If the QEC inspection does not confirm the diagnosis as stated in the Diagnostic Verification case, the warranty claim is subject to debit.
Please refer to the Electronic Parts Catalog (EPC) to specify parts accordingly and refer to Paragon to check availability of the specified parts. If you
have any questions with specification or availability, contact the PAC.
Interior - Leather Surface Appearance Information

Order No: P-B-68.30/81
Group: 68
SUBJECT: MY-All, Models 171, 211, 212
Leather Surface Appearance
The above models and their leather interior have been designed with a surface "cloud design" for a more natural appearance. The leather is not soiled or
flawed and is not a reason for customer complaint.
Electrical - Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention

Date: March 23, 2011
Order No: S-B-54.00/238
Group: 54
SUBJECT: MY-All, All Models
Preventing Damage to Electronic Components Due to Electrostatic Discharge
Warning!
Every contact and each physical separation of material or any movement of solid substance, fluids or particulate loaded gases can generate electrostatic
charges. Plastic generally produces the highest electrostatic charge.
The following electronic components listed as an example can be damaged by ESD:
- Airbag components
- Control units, in particular their bus connections: Control Area Network (data bus/CAN bus) (CAN), local interconnect network (LIN), etc.
- Sensors
- Antenna amplifier
- Receivers and displays (Radio, TV, GPS, telephone, etc.)
- Multifunction antenna assembly
Safety precautions:
- Avoidance of contact with electrostatic chargeable materials such as PE, PVC, Styrofoam.
- Use only original packaging or specially labeled and defined packaging and transport materials.
- Electronic components which have been removed must be put down on an ESD workplace. (Example: when swapping the painted cover from one
multifunction antenna to another, this must be performed on an ESD table mat (000 589 52 98 000).
- Touch connectors on electronic components and wiring harness on the housing only. Do not touch the pins and contacts!
- Electronic components must be installed before they are connected so that potential equalization with the body can take place.
Returning electronic components in warranty and goodwill cases:
When returning electronic components it is absolutely essential to observe the procedure and safety precautions listed in WIS doc.
AH54.00-P-0001-01A. Electrostatic charge or discharge means the original fault can be falsified or overlaid. This can lead to distorted faults symptoms
in the case of the fault analysis of the component concerned.
Lighting - Uprated H7 Bulbs

Order No.: S-B-82.10/698
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models 163, 164, 170, 171, 202, 203, 204, 207, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, 463
Uprated H7 Bulbs
The new uprated H7 bulbs are available. They have approximately 80% more light and approximately 30% more road surface illumination for high
beams compared with standard H7 bulbs. Due to the brightness difference between a standard H7 bulb and an uprated H7 bulb, bulbs must be fitted in
pairs when installing for the first-time; i.e., left and right headlamp. If an uprated bulb fails, replace as a pair as it is likely that (as an example); if a left
headlamp fails, the right may follow.
The new bulbs can be recognized by their chrome-plated lamp cap, and they can be installed into all H7 halogen headlamps. The set with part number A
000 998 00 07 contains two uprated bulbs.
The standard H7 bulb N 400809 000007 will still be available.
PARTS INFORMATION
Electrical - Aftermarket Tampering Malfunctions

Supersedes: S-B-54.21/234, dated July 27, 2010
Group: 54
Revision History
a 10/22/10 Additional devices and pictures added.
SUBJECT: MY- All, Models All
Malfunctions Due to Other-Make Installations
Recent attempts manipulating vehicle mileage through the use of third party electronic devices installed on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are being reported.
There are several CAN manipulation devices on the market. Be particularly aware of two devices which are installed in tandem with the instrument
cluster or the EIS (Figure 1) and a circuit board which can be installed directly within the EIS (Figure 2).
If vehicle electronics malfunction, control units display implausible mileage readings, or malfunctions lack corresponding default entries; check the
vehicle for non-factory hardware. These are often installed in the interior wiring harness of the vehicle. Another example would be the TV enable
module for the COMAND APS NTG2 in Figure 3.
Possible malfunctions are:

^ Random unlocking or locking of the vehicle while driving
^ Temporary or continuous hazard warning system activation
^ Sudden mileage increase in the IC
If there is evidence that the vehicle has been tampered with (mileage altering device, aftermarket installation etc) please provide as much supporting
documents (pictures, test results, etc.) and send an email with the supporting documents to the Warranty Services Group and request that the vehicle be
put on warranty status.
Warranty will determine the correct status to be applied (usually status 8 which requires AOM review before any repairs are performed), file the
supporting documentation and add notes into our vehicle master system.
Any vehicle with a warranty status will have an alert box pop up when VMI is run to inform the dealer of this status.
Any malfunctions or subsequent damage to other parts due to the installation of foreign parts are not covered by Warranty. The repair costs should be
charged to the customer.
Chemicals/Lubrication - Multi-Grade Metal Grease Info.

Order No.: S-B-00.45/94
Group: 00
SUBJECT: MY- All, Models All
Multi-Grade Metal Grease
The multi-grade grease for metals, part # A 002 989 07 51 from the noise damping service kit A 000 580 03 50 must not come in contact with plastic
parts, otherwise the plastic can set and break.
A/T Controls - Limp Home Mode/Multiple DTC's Set

Order No.: P-B-27.60/63
Supersedes:
Group: 27
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456
Model 203.052/054/056
Model 209.356/456
Model 211.056/256
Model Year 2006
Equipped with 722.9 Transmission and M272 Engine
Transmission Switches to Limp Home Model Codes P1629, P1632, P1633, P1634 or P1636
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the transmission switching to limp home mode with one or more of the following fault
codes: P1629, P1632, P1633, P1634, P1636, this may be caused by battery under voltage (example: during the starting procedure).
Note:
This is only applicable to vehicles with the following transmission software versions: 0014485410, 0014486910, 0014488310, 0014488410 and
0014488510.
Contrary to the remedy specified in Star Diagnosis for these fault codes, it is not necessary to replace the electro hydraulic control unit when the above
specified software versions are installed. The following repair solution should be performed.
1. Reprogram transmission control unit with Star Diagnosis DVD 9/2005 or later
2. Perform SCN coding
3. Erase fault memory
Note:
In Case of WarrantyTechnical Service Bulletin # P-82_62-325E Date: 051024
Navigation System - Screen Blank/No Audio/DTC D117

Order No.: P-B-82.62/325e
Supersedes: P-B-82.62/325d dated Oct. 21, 2004
Group: 82
Revision: Technical Content and Applicable Models Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 211.026/056/065/070/076/082/083/087/256/265/276/282/283/287, MY 03 and Later
Model 171.454/456/473, MY 05 and Later
Model 219.375/376, MY 06 and Later
All with Option Code 810 Sound System
Audio Missing After Navigation Announcement, Display Comes Up Dark at System Start-up and Audio Not Available, DTC D117 Stored in Audio
Gateway (AGW)
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the head unit display is dark and there is no audio at system start up (however a circuit
30 reset will temporarily remedy this condition), or Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) D117 is stored in the AGW and all Telematics components are not
listed by running a quick test, the AGW's software must be updated to 08/05 using Star Diagnosis 10/05 or newer per the below procedure. The
software is needed for AGW part number A211 870 15 89 (Hardware Number A211 827 20 62) or earlier.
Note:
Connect a battery charger turn the ignition and all consumers OFF
Connect DAS and navigate through the following menus: Control Units -> Information and communication -> Audio, video, navigation and telematics
-> AGW - Audio Gateway (MOST network management, diagnosis gateway, radio tuner) -> Control unit adaptations -> Control module programming
-> Determination of new control unit software and subsequent control unit programming -> Follow the steps as guided by DAS to complete the
software update.
After the update is complete, remove the key from the ignition and allow MOST and CAN to go to sleep by waiting about 5 minutes without pressing
any buttons or opening the doors. Use DAS to check the Audio Gateway's software to be 08/05.
As of Software Version 23/04 the conditions below are remedied
^ Entertainment audio source missing from the right channel after a navigation announcement Only in vehicles equipped with navigation system
^ Auto-Store search does not store stations
^ Temporary no audio during start-up
Note:
If the software was not successful or was aborted by it's self, follow the recommended DAS guidelines. It may be required to retry the software
update more than once.
In Case of Warranty, use the table.

Technical Service Bulletin # P-82_70-416B Date: 051001
Cell Phone - Installation and Setup

Date: October 2005
Order No.: P-I-82.70/416B
Supersedes: P-I-82.70/416A
Group: 82
Update:
Step 2, Section K; Step 1, second check, Section M,
SUBJECT:
MODEL 171.454/456/473 MODEL YEAR 2005-2006
CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
We are interested in your comments and suggestions-please e-mail them to: [email protected]
WARNING
Do not disconnect the negative battery cable. Extensive reprogramming requirements will otherwise be necessary. Wiring harnesses will therefore
be electrically active.
Severe vehicle damage, personal injury, or death from electrical shock could result. Exercise extreme caution while executing these installation
instructions. Keep the ignition and radio powered OFF through the final test.
Notes on MOST optical fibers
^ Optical fibers damage easily-handle optical fibers with care to prevent cuts, nicks, abrasions, and crushing.
^ Optical fiber "ring configurations" must form a closed loop to function (i.e. couple the input of a component with the output of the preceding
component).
^ Identify MOST optical fibers by their orange, semi-rigid insulation.
^ Electromagnetic interference (EMI) from bundled vehicle electrical harnesses does not affect optical fibers.
NOTICE!
Incorrect installation of connectors can result in damaged, bent pins. Damaged, bent pins will result in component malfunction or failure. Inspect
connectors before and after installation.
A. Preparing for the installation

1. Read these installation instructions in their entirety before beginning.
2. Unpack and compare the installation kit contents against the Parts Information list-Section N.
3. Place the operating guides and customer accessories in the glove box or appropriate storage or stowage compartment.
4. Remove the bottom, center trunk paneling, and dismount the equipment carrier.
^ Refer to WIS document AR68.30-P-4810V, "Remove/install center trunk paneling"
5. Lay down the equipment carrier on its backside to expose the attached components on its front (Figure 1).
Note:
If the vehicle is equipped with the CAR NAVIGATION processor, carefully cut the wire tie securing the equipment carrier to the CAR
NAVIGATION compartment.
B. Locating and identifying the cables

1. On the right side of the equipment carrier, carefully cut the wire ties bundling the telephone cables to the wiring harness running along the Tele
Aid control module, and then separate and lay out (Figure 2) the cable connectors for easier identification.
2. On the right side of the equipment carrier, disconnect the Tele Aid leads (A and B, Figure 3) from one another and identify the:
^ Tele Aid FAKRA female, white connector (A, Figure 3)
^ Main antenna FAKRA male, white connector (B, Figure 3)
3. On the right side of the equipment carrier, identify the:
^ Telephone FAKRA female, black connector (C, Figure 3)

^ Antenna switch 2-pin power supply connector (D, Figure 3)
^ Linear compensator 4-pin power supply connector (E, Figure 3)
4. On the right side of the equipment carrier, identify the:
^ MHI power supply connector (A, Figure 4)
^ MHI microphone array connector (B, Figure 4)
5. Along the bottom, center of the equipment carrier, find the coupled antenna leads (A and B, Figure 5) and carefully cut the wire tie (Arrow,
Figure 5) to release them.
6. Disconnect the antenna connectors (A and B, Figure 5) from one another and identify the:
^ Antenna FAKRA female, black connector (A, Figure 5)
^ Antenna FAKRA male, black connector (B, Figure 5)
7. On the right side of the equipment carrier, find the:
^ Tele Aid microphone connector (A, Figure 6) and connected jumper (B, Figure 6) with black and white looped wires
8. Disconnect the jumper (B, Figure 6) with black and white looped wires from the Tele Aid microphone connector (A, Figure 6) and discard the
jumper.
Note:
Voice Control System (VCS) is not an option, therefore neatly organize and wire tie the VCS power supply and microphone array cables
along wiring harness of the equipment carrier.
C. Mounting the MHI control module and antenna switch to the bracket
1. Mount the MHI control module to the threaded studs on the bracket front with four 8 mm nuts (Figure 7).
Note:
The MHI control module will mount to the bracket threaded studs only one way (i.e. there is no way to incorrectly mount the MHI control
module to the bracket).
2. Mount the antenna switch to the pre-tapped screw holes in the bracket front-right of the mounted MHI control module-with two Phillips head
machine screws (Figure 8).
D. Mounting the linear compensator to the bracket

1. Mount the linear compensator to the pre-tapped screw holes in the bracket for the linear compensator with four Phillips head machine screws
(Figure 9).
Note:
Align the connector receptacles of the linear compensator with the bracket end with the two mounting tabs (Figure 9).
E. Configuring the MOST optical fiber ring
NOTICE!
Improper handing of optical fibers can damage the fibers. Damaged optical fibers can cause component malfunction. Handle optical fibers
with care to prevent cuts, nicks, abrasions, and crushing.
1. Find the MOST adapter cable (Figure 10) for the MHI control module in the kit.
> COMMAND equipped vehicles without satellite radio:
2. Find the MOST coupling (A, Figure 11) in the optical fiber routed to the CAR NAVIGATION processor wire tied to the bottom, right of the
equipment carrier.
3. Carefully cut the wire tie (B, Figure 11) securing the MOST optical fibers to the equipment carrier.
4. Disassemble the MOST coupling and carefully remove the fiber end (Arrow, Figure 11).
5. Install the MOST adapter cable:

a. Insert the fiber end (B, Figure 10) of the MOST adapter cable into the vacant chamber (A, Figure 12) of the disassembled coupling and
reassemble the coupling.
b. Insert the fiber end removed from the coupling (Arrow, Figure 11) into the vacant chamber (C, Figure 10) of the MOST adapter connector
(B, Figure 12).
> Satellite radio equipped vehicles:
2. Find the MOST optical fiber routed to the satellite radio, disassemble the MOST coupling, and remove the fiber end.
a. Insert the fiber end (B, Figure 10) of the MOST adapter cable into the vacant chamber of the disassembled coupling (A, Figure 13) and
reassemble the coupling.
b. Insert the fiber end removed from the coupling into the vacant chamber (C, Figure 10) of the MOST adapter connector (B, Figure 13).
> AUDIO 20 equipped vehicles:
2. Find the MOST coupling (A, Figure 14) in the looped optical fiber taped to the bottom, right of the equipment carrier.
3. Remove the tape (B, Figure 14) to free up the MOST optical fiber.
4. Disassemble the MOST coupling and carefully remove the fiber end (Arrow, Figure 14).
a. Insert the fiber end (B, Figure 10) of the MOST adapter cable into the vacant chamber (A, Figure 14) of the disassembled MOST coupling
and reassemble the coupling.
b. Insert the fiber end removed of the MOST coupling (Arrow, Figure 14) into the vacant chamber (C, Figure 10) of the MOST adapter
connector.
F. Installing the MHI control module/antenna switch bracket assembly and connecting the MHI control module and antenna switch
1. Loosen the four E8 inverted Torx screws securing the Tele Aid control module to the right side of the equipment carrier.
2. Slide the screw slots in the bottom of the bracket for the MHI control module and antenna switch over the screws loosened in step 1, slide the
bracket assembly forward until it hits the screws, and then tighten the screws to secure the bracket assembly (Figure 15).
3. Connect the MOST adapter connector to the MHI control module (A, Figure 16).
4. Connect the MHI power supply connector to the MHI control module (B, Figure 16).
5. Connect the MHI microphone array connector (C, Figure 16) to the Tele Aid microphone connector (D, Figure 16).
6. Organize and wire tie loose cabling.

7. Connect the telephone FAKRA female, black connector to the antenna switch jack labeled BOOSTER" (A, Figure 17).
8. Connect the Tele Aid FAKRA female, white connector to the antenna switch jack labeled LCT" (B, Figure 17).
9. Connect the main antenna FAKRA male, white connector to the antenna switch jack labeled "ANTENNA" (C, Figure 17).
10. Connect the 2-pin power supply connector to the antenna switch (D, Figure 17).
G. Installing the linear compensator bracket assembly and connecting the linear compensator
1. Mount the linear compensator/bracket assembly to the three threaded studs (Figure 18) on the equipment carrier-left of the mounted MHI/antenna
switch bracket assembly-with three 8 mm nuts.
2. Connect the FAKRA antenna female connector to the linear compensator jack labeled "ANTENNA" (A, Figure 19).
3. Connect the FAKRA antenna male connector to the linear compensator jack labeled "PORTABLE" (B, Figure 19).
4. Connect the 4-pin power supply connector to the linear compensator (C, Figure 19).
5. Organize and wire tie loose cabling (Figure 20) and remount the equipment carrier.
^ Refer to WIS document AR68.30-P-4810V, "Remove/install center trunk paneling"
H. Installing the cradle contact plate and telephone cradle

1. Open the lower compartment of the center console and remove the four T8 Torx screws (Figure 21) from the upper compartment underside to
release the false floor.
2. At the bottom of the upper compartment of the center console, open the compartment cover (Figure 22) for the contact plate female FAKRA and
power supply connectors.
3. Lift out the false floor from the upper compartment of the center console (Figure 23).
4. Remove the knockout (Arrows, Figure 23) from the false floor by pressing it out from underneath.
NOTICE!
Excessive force will crack or break plastic. Applying excessive force while removing the knockout can crack or break the plastic false floor.
Do not apply excessive force when removing the false floor knockout.
5. Find the kit-included contact plate (A, Figure 24) and identify the FAKRA antenna male connector (B, Figure 24) and the power supply male
connector (C, Figure 24).
6. Feed the contact plate leads through the knockout hole from the false floor top side (Figure 25).
7. Snap the contact plate (A, Figure 26) into the false floor by firmly pressing down from the top side until it audibly engages.
8. Route the contact plate leads through the cable manager (B, Figure 26) on the false floor underside.
9. Feed the male FAKRA and power supply connectors of the contact plate through the hole (C, Figure 26) inside the upper compartment, to the
housing for the female FAKRA and power supply connectors at the outside bottom of the upper compartment.
Note:
The wiring harness for the Tele Aid/Roadside Assistance button assembly runs through the hole in the upper compartment.
10. Remove the female FAKRA and power supply connectors from the clips in the compartment at the bottom of the upper compartment of the
center console.
11. Connect the male FAKRA connector (A, Figure 27) of the contact plate to the female FAKRA connector (B, Figure 27).
12. Connect the male power supply connector (C, Figure 27) from the contact plate to the female power supply connector (D, Figure 27).
13. Reinstall the coupled connectors into their respective clips in the compartment and close the compartment cover for the FAKRA and power
supply connectors.
14. Reinstall the false floor with mounted contact plate (Figure 28) with the previously removed four T8 Torx screws.
15. Attach the cradle-according to telephone type-to the contact plate by placing it atop and slightly behind the contact plate and then sliding it
forward until it audibly engages.
16. Insert the telephone into the cradle.
I. Installing the fuse at the rear SAM control unit with fuse and relay module
1. On the left side of the equipment carrier, find the rear SAM control unit with fuse and relay module and insert the 7.5 amp fuse in slot # 3 (Figure
29).
J. Installing the microphone array
1. Install the microphone array.
Refer to WIS document AR82.70-P-8969V, Remove/install hands-free system microphone"
K. Version coding
1. Connect Star Diagnosis to the vehicle.

2. Set the MOST ring configuration to match Figure 30 via path:
Control units > Information and communication > Audio, video, navigation and telematics > AGW - Audio Gateway > Retrofitting of MOST
components or iPod > Retrofitting of MOST components > F2: Restart of optical ring> F2: Actual configuration > Verify that the configuration
of the MOST components matches Figure 30 > F2: To continue > F3: Yes, to write the current actual configuration to MOST master> F2: Erase
fault memory
Note:
The MOST ring configuration in Figure 30 is an example of a configuration including all components. Some installations will not include all
the components shown in the example. If a component is not present, connect the preceding component to the component following the one
not present.
NOTICE!
Match the MOST ring configuration to Figure 30. Failure to match the MOST ring configuration to Figure 30 will result in erroneous system
operation and/or intermittent malfunctioning of some or all components. DO NOT alter the configuration in Figure 30 to match the vehicle
configuration.
3. Set the Tele Aid control module to recognize presence of the telephone via path:
Control units > Information and communication > Audio, video, navigation and telematics > TELE-AID > Control unit adaptations > Model
series, telephone adapter for portable CTEL (UHI) > Set "Model series" to R171, Set "Telephone adapter" to FITTED, press F5 > F3:
Yes/Coding > F2 to confirm the coding was carried out
4. Set the instrument cluster in accordance with STAR Bulletin P-B-54.30/141, "Instrument Cluster SCN Coding for Component Replacement of
Dealer Installed Accessories" to recognize presence of the cellular telephone control module.
5. Check the DTC memory of all installed components and the head unit. Investigate and identify any present DTCs. Once identified, correct the
source of the DTCs and clear the DTC memory.
Note:
Powering up the newly installed system prior to version coding will set errors in the MOST ring configuration. Ignore these errors during the
initial DTC check. If the DTCs return after clearing, a configuration error is present. Locate and correct the error.
6. Confirm no new DTCs are present in the MOST system group.

L. MOST ring configuration
M. Final assembly and function test
1. Verify proper telephone operation per the following checklist:
^ Handset dialing is functioning correctly-Use an active telephone to dial a valid telephone number. Listen for a dial tone and ring.
^ Head unit dialing is functioning correctly-Use an active telephone to dial a valid telephone number. Listen for a dial tone and ring over the
vehicle audio system and then end the call via the steering wheel controls.
^ Handset incoming/outgoing call audio is clear-Use an active telephone to dial a telephone number, connect and either speak to a live person
or leave a voicemail message.
^ Hands-free incoming/outgoing audio is clear-Use an active telephone to dial a telephone number, connect and either speak to a live person or
leave a voicemail message.
^ Automatic memory download is functioning-Connect the telephone to the vehicle and wait 3 minutes for the download to complete. After 3
minutes, check several random phonebook locations and match the received and dialed call list to the telephone's list. (It may be necessary to
store a test number in the telephone handset for this feature to operate. Stored numbers should be available for dialing from the head unit after
automatic download.)
^ Signal strength-Note the telephone signal strength before and after connected to the vehicle. The signal strength should stay constant or
increase when the telephone is connected to the vehicle. If the signal strength decreases, a problem exists.
2. Reinstall the bottom, center trunk paneling.
^ Refer to WIS document AR68.30-P-4810V, Remove/install center trunk paneling"

N. Parts Information
Cell Phone - Calls Cut Off/Dropped

Order No.: P-B-82.70/475
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
All Model 129, 170, 171, 199, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215,220 and 230 Telephone Calls Being Cut Off or Dropped
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles for telephone calls being dropped or disconnected even with adequate signal strength,
please read the below information on possible causes.
1. Dead Zones - Depending on the location and the respective network provider, 100% network coverage may not be present. Network coverage can
vary at the same location depending on the network provider. When crossing from an area with network coverage to an area without network
coverage, reception may drop to zero and the call may be cut off, even though the phone or head unit may still continue to show signal strength.
There are many things that can diminish "dead zones" and weather is a large contributor.
2. Switching Cells - While driving, the telephone transfers from network cell to the next network cell. Sometimes switching between cellular towers
can also cause calls to be dropped. This can be fixed by the customer's service provider (Verizon, Sprint, Alltel, Cingular, T-Mobile, etc.). If
customers experience dropped calls on a regular basis along the same route, they should take note of the cross streets or address and contact their
service provider and describe where the drops are taking place and time of day.
3. Cells Operating at Full Capacity - While dnving, the telephone transfers from network cell to the next network cell. Each cell can only process a
maximum number of calls. If the vehicle with an active call transfers to a cell operating at full capacity, the cell cannot handle the call and it will
be dropped. The call is cut off even though the head unit and/or telephone may be showing full signal strength and anywhere from 1 to 5 bars.
These are network problems and not related to the vehicle; replacing components will NOT resolve the complaint.
Cell Phone - TeleAid Mod. Replacement Requirements

Order No.: P-B-82.95/476
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
Model 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220 and 230 As of Model Year 2005
Digital TeleAid Control Units
In the above model vehicles when replacing a Digital TeleAid unit, it is very important that ATX be notified of the unit replacement. If ATX is not
notified of the unit replacement, the customer calls will be stopped at the pre-activation line and not be routed correctly to an operator. This occurs
because ATX does not recognize the unit as being active. Please follow the steps below when replacing a TeleAid control module.
1. Verify need for TeleAid module replacement.
2. De-provision the original unit using DAS by following path: Select model --> Control Units --> Information and communication --> Audio,
video, Navigation, and telematics --> TeleAid --> Control unit adaptations --> Deactivation of TeleAid --> F5 --> Fax deactivation form to ATX
3. Fill out and fax form to ATX (DTA De-provision/Replacement Confirmation Form). The form can be found on NetStar --> Service --> STAR
Teklnfo --> EDAC --> Digital Tele Aid Diagnostic Guide --> "Customer Complaints".
4. Provision the new unit by pressing the "I" button.

Cell Phone - Call Cannot Connect/DTC D662 Set

Order No.: P-B-82.95/479
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220 and 230 Model Year 2005 and Newer
Digital TeleAid Control Unit - Code D662
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the TeleAid cannot connect a call, COMAND / SOS visit workshop appears in the
instrument cluster, and/or Diagnostic Trouble Code D662 is current and stored in the digital TeleAid control unit (DIA), replace the unit with the
number listed below to resolve.
Parts Information
Note:
In Case of Warranty
Interior - Door Panel Damaged by Seat Belt Latch Plate

Date: April 5, 2005
Order No.: P-B-72.00/40
Supersedes:
Group: 72
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Model 199.376
Model 203.054/056/076/087/092
Model 209.356/375/376/456/475/476
Model 215.374/375/376/379
Model 230.474/475/476/479
Model Year 2006 or Later
Door or Interior Door Panel Damaged by Seat Belt Latch Plate
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the door or interior door panel has been damaged by closing the door on the seat belt
latch plate or the seat belt has been damaged by the door, this is not covered by warranty. The Operator's Manual for the above models specifically
states the following.
Note:
Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism. This
can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or cause damage to the door and/or door trim panel. Such damage is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/DTC's 9103/9123 Set

Order No.: P-B-91.60/96
Supersedes:
Group: 91
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, Up to VIN A081917 SRS Light Illuminated
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the SRS light being illuminated accompanied by either of the diagnostic fault codes
listed below, perform the following procedure. Replacement of the contact spiral is not necessary.
Fault Codes:
DTC 9103- the resistance value in the ignition circuit containing component R12113 is too high
DTC 9123- the resistance value in the ignition circuit containing component R12/14 is too high
1. Remove the clock spring contact. Refer to WIS document AR46. 10-P-0200V.
2. Remove the Electronic Ignition Switch (EIS). Refer to WIS document AR80.57-P-1000V.
Note:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected. If this step is omitted, other faults may be introduced into the vehicle when cutting the SCM
harness.
3. Unclip N80 connector from jacket tube by pushing on lock tabs (Figure 1). Pull harness to Steering Column Module (SCM), out through opening
for Electronic Ignition Switch (EIS) (Figure 2).
4. Make note of pin locations and wire colors. On the SCM connector, cut the 0.50 sq.mm wires connected to Airbag pins 3, 4, 5, 6, CAN pins 10,
11, 12, 13, and the 0.75 sq.mm wires connected to Circuit 30 and 31 pins 8 and 9, 60 mm from the terminal ends.
Note:
Reference WEB ETM document PE46.10-U-2101TA to confirm pin locations and wire colors.
5. Cut the repair wire 75 mm from each terminal end. One repair wire makes two pigtails. There are two different size repair wires. Part no. A001
540 87 05 is 0.50 sq.mm and part no. A001 540 88 05 is 0.75 sq.mm.
6. Strip approximately 15 mm of insulation from the repair wires and the SCM harness wires. Twist the 15 mm stripped ends of the repair wire and
SCM harness wires.
7. Using solder connector (A002 546 13 41) solder the repair wires (A001 5408705) onto the four Airbag wires, pins 3, 4, 5, 6 and the four CAN
wires pins, 10, 11 12, 13 in accordance with the specified repair method in WIS document AR00.19-P-0100A.
8. Using solder connector (A002 546 13 41) solder the repair wires (A001 540 88 05) onto the two wires for circuits 30 and 31 (pins 8 and 9) in
accordance with the specified repair method in WIS document AR00.19-P-0100A.
9. Remove the lock on the SCM socket connector (Figure 3). Depress the lock tab on the terminal and remove one cut wire terminal at a time. Install
the appropriate repaired wire into the correct position in the socket connector.
Note:
Ensure during the reassembly of the SCM connector that all terminals are reinstalled in their correct positions. Continue the twist for CAN wires
connecting to pins 10, 11, 12, and 13. Reference WEB ETM document PE46.10-U-2101TA to confirm pin locations and wire colors.
10. Insulate the solder connectors and the repaired harness with fabric tape.
11. Reassemble the vehicle in the reverse order.

Note:
Replacement of the contact spiral is not necessary. New connectors can be identified with an "S" marking (Figure 4).
Parts Information
Note:
In Case of WarrantyTechnical Service Bulletin # P-27_60-66 Date: 051219
Engine Controls - Incorrect Software Loaded

Order No.: P-B-27.60/66
Supersedes:
Group: 27
SUBJECT:
When installing DAS 11/05 on Compact 2 and Compact 3, the SDflash directory was incorrectly loaded onto the hard drive. This may cause older
software to be flashed into the control unit.
The installation of the 2005-11-22-0489 patch fixes the SDflash directory and restores normal flashing function. This information was not contained on
the 'Pink Note' that was enclosed with the 2005-11-22-0489 patch.
Please ensure that the patch (2005-11-22-0489) has been loaded onto DAS 11/05 before you flash any control module. If the patch (2005-11-22-0489)
has not been loaded and you must flash a control unit, please ensure that DAS 11/05 DVD is in the DVD Drive and that you select flash from the DVD
Media and not the hard drive.
Note:
This action is critical to ensure that the latest SW application is found and properly flashed to the ECU.
Technical Service Bulletin # P-68_20-43A Date: 051110
Interior - Console Lid Cannot Be Opened

Order No.: P-B-68.20/43a
Supersedes: P-B-68.20143 dated November 3, 2005
Group: 68
Revision: Step 3 Revised
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Center Armrest/Storage Compartment Cover Cannot Be Opened
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the center armrest/storage compartment cover cannot be opened, do not replace any
parts. Perform the following to resolve.
1. The side buttons (Figure 1 circle) are jammed and the hinge pin (Figure 2, circle) at the rear of the cover does not engage correctly.
2. Push down on the rear edge of the center armrest/storage compartment cover (Figure 3, arrows) so the hinge pin can engage correctly.
3. Cut a chamfer into both sockets for the hinge pins with a commercially available 450 countersink tool (Figures 4, 5 and 6). Dimension A is 2.5
mm.
Note:
The customer should be informed that the rear hinge pin must be fully engaged when the center armrest/storage compartment cover is opened to
either side. To ensure this, the center armrest/storage compartment cover must be closed with increased force and increased momentum.
Note:
In Case of WarrantyTechnical Service Bulletin # P-54_30-141A Date: 060201
Instruments - Cluster SCN Coding

Date: February 2005

Supersedes:
Group: 54
Revision: Updated Model Information
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Model 221.171
All Model Years
Instrument Cluster SCN Coding for Component Replacement or Dealer Installed Accessories:
A. Introduction
B. Process Overview
C. Determine Vehicle Data for SCN Coding
D. Generate SCN Codes
I. Print Out Method
II. CD-Burn Method
E. Perform SCN Coding
I. Print Out Method
II. CD-Burn Method
NOTE:
In Case of Warranty
A. Introduction
SCN Coding is required on Model 171 and 221 in order to replace the instrument cluster or to install certain accessories at the Dealer (i.e. Navigation,
CTEL). This bulletin provides instructions on performing the SCN Coding for the instrument cluster. It is designed for ease of use and is similar to the
SCN Coding instructions of other control units.
Because of the length of the Coding String, this bulletin also includes instructions on transferring the SCN Code to the vehicle via a new method. This
new method involves burning the SCN Code onto a CD-R, and then inserting the CD-R into your STAR Diagnosis System (SDS). The SCN Code
would then be transferred into the vehicle automatically. However, you will still be able to enter the SCN Code manually via the keyboard should you
choose to.
NOTE:
For installation or use of the Online SCN Coding Application, obtaining User ID and password for Online SCN Coding Application, or
troubleshooting questions on the Online SCN Coding Application, please refer to S-B-07.61/38f
B. Process Overview
The SCN Coding Process specified in this Service Bulletin is divided into three parts:
^ Determining Vehicle Data for SCN Coding-

In order to obtain an SCN Code you must have the full VIN of the vehicle as well as the correct part number, and the Check Digit [1] for the
component that you wish to obtain an SCN Code for. Information can be obtained by STAR Diagnosis using the "Determine Vehicle Data for
SCN Coding" screen.
^ Generate SCN Code for Dealer Fit Accessories Using SA Codes-

This procedure can only be performed after a User ID and Password have been obtained and the Online SCN Coding Application has been
downloaded. Using the information from the previous step, and the SA Code for the specific accessory, the Online SCN Coding Application
will generate the SCN Codes. At this point, you have the option of printing out the codes, or burning them onto a CD.
NOTE:
For installation or use of the Online SCN Coding Application, obtaining User ID and password for Online SCN Coding Application, or
troubleshooting questions on the Online SCN Coding Application, please refer to S-B-07.61/38f
^ Perform SCN Coding via Print Out Method or CD-Burn Method-

This procedure will allow you to input the SCN Codes received into the vehicle.
^ Print Out Method- In this process, you receive a print out of the SCN Codes, and you manually enter them into the SDS.
^ CD-Burn Method- In this process, you burn the SCN Codes onto a CD, and after inserting the CD into the SDS, the SCN Codes are
automatically transferred.
Once the SCN Coding process is complete, you will be able to release the vehicle.
C. Determine Vehicle Data For SCN Coding
1. Follow menu path: Control Units / Information and Communication / IC - Instrument Cluster / Control Unit Adaptations / SCN Coding
2. Select "Offline (FDOK, Fax, Office)," Press "F3" (Figure 1)

3. Select "Determine vehicle data for SCN Coding,"
Press "F3" (Figure 2)
4. Confirm VIN. Press "F3" (Figure 3)

5. Print out vehicle data for SCN Coding by pressing "F11" (Figure 4)
6. Generate and retrieve SCN Code. Refer to section "D" in this document for instructions on generating SCN Codes.
NOTE:
For installation or use of the Online SCN Coding Application, obtaining User ID and password for Online SCN Coding, or troubleshooting
questions on the Online SCN Coding Application, please refer to S-B-07.61/38f
D. Generate SCN Codes
1. Click on "Coding" button on the top of the window (Figure 5).

2. Enter data into required fields (Figure 6).

(A) Enter VIN into "FINNIN" window.
(B) Enter PKW in the "Category" box.
(C) Click on "Other control unit."
(D) Enter SA Codes in the "Plus SA codes" window ONLY IF you are installing a Dealer installed accessory.
(E) Click on the button "F2 Enter Control Unit Data."
Note:
-For ALL model years, the SA Code needs to be entered and coded only once when the accessory is installed for the first time.
-For model year 2005 only, add the SA Code if you are performing an Instrument Cluster replacement.
-Starting with Model Year 2006, do not attempt to add a SA Code if you are only performing an Instrument Cluster replacement.
The SA Codes for each Dealer installed accessory is as follows:
^ SA Code for Navigation: 530
^ SA Code for CTEL: 386
Note:
Refer to Instructions P-1-82.70/416B(CTEL: Model 171), P-1-82.70/481(CTEL: Model 221), & P-1-82.85/43 1 (Navigation: Model 171) for Dealer
accessory installation procedure.
(F) Enter the Part Number/MBobject Number of the control unit (Figure 7).
(G) Enter the Check Digit [1] (Figure 7).
Note:
Check Digit [1] must be entered in capital letters and do not include any dashes (-).
3. Generate SCN Coding Information.
(H) Click "F3 Query" button (Figure 7).
Note:
If you see the following message (Figure 7a) pop-up after pressing the "F3 Query" button (Step 3), this means that the SA Code that you have
entered has already been reflected in the vehicle record. Because the SA Code is already in the vehicle record, it cannot be entered in again. Please
delete the SA Code that was entered (Figure 6, Arrow D) and Click the "F3 Query" button again to generate the SCN Code. The SCN Code will be
generated and it will reflect the Dealer Fit Accessory that has been installed into the vehicle.
4. Display SCN Coding Information. (Figure 8)
(I) Click the "OK" button.
(J) SCN Coding Information will then be displayed.
I. Print Out Method
(K) If you are SCN coding via Print Out Method, click on "F11 Print" to print the information, and continue onto section "E".
II. CD-Burn Method
(L) If you are SCN coding via CD-Burn Method, insert the CD into the CD Burner, then click on "F7 Start burning program". Your designated
burning program will start. Proceed to step 5.
Note:
If you are starting the CD burning process for the first time on the computer, DO NOT click on "F7 Start burning program". Please have your
IT personnel set up the burning software configuration.
Note for IT: Burning Software Configuration: Select "F6 Select burning software". Then a window will open asking for you to select the
preferred burning software. Search through the drive until you select the program (Ex. Nero.exe or Roxie.exe) of your choice. Click on "Save".
The technician may now continue with step 4(L). To change the preferred burning software at anytime, repeat this procedure.
5. Burning the SCN Coding information.
(M) Look for the files in the following directory of your computer (Figure 9).
C:\userdata\csd\writefil\create\flashfil\Pkw\XXX.XXX\VIN Number
Note:
The XXX.XXX is the 4th through 9th characters of the VIN.
Example: For Vin 4JGBB86EX6A00283, the directory will be:
C:\userdata\csd\writefil\create\flashfil\Pkw\BB8.6EX\4JGBB86EX6A00283\
(N) Only burn the two files located in the specified VIN directory (Figure 9).
(O) After the CD is burned, return to the SDS with the CD, and continue with section "E".
Frequently Asked Questions about the CD Burning Method
What CD's can be used?
You are able to use a CD-Recordable (CD-R) Compact Disc.
What should my computer have?
Your computer should already be available to operate the Online SCN Coding Application as per S-B-07.61/38f.
Your computer should also have a CD-R/CD-RW drive with a CD burning application (Ex. Nero or Roxio).
I burned the CD and went back to the SDS machine, but it does not recognize the CD. Now what?
What probably happened was either the CD was defective or the CD was not burned properly. Discard the defective CD and try burning the CD again
after generating the SCN Codes.
Can I reuse the CD for another vehicle?
No. The CD is for one vehicle only. Once the SCN Coding is performed on the specified vehicle, the CD should be destroyed and disposed of.
E. Perform SCN Coding
1. Select "Perform Offline SCN Coding", Press "F3" (Figure 10).
2. A. If you are SCN Coding via Print Out Method, press "F4" (Figure 11) and continue to sub-category "1" of this section.
B. If you are SCN coding via CD-Burn Method, insert the CD in the SDS, then press "F3" (Figure 11) and continue on to sub-category "II" of
this section.
I. Print Out Method
1. Input SCN Code, Coding string, and Check digit [2] manually, then Press "F3" (Figure 12)
NOTE:
Please be sure to input all of the characters of the SCN Code that you have retrieved including any sets of zeros (00). In some cases you will not
have enough characters to fill all of the empty fields; in this case you must leave these fields empty.
2. The SCN Coding process is now complete when this documentation page appears (Figure 13). Press "F11" to get a printout for your records.
NOTE:
The SCN Coding process is complete at this stage and the vehicle can be released.
II. CD-Burn Method
1. If the CD is being read properly, you will see the following screen (Figure 14). Continue to carry out Coding by pressing "F3". Proceed to step 3.
2. If the CD is NOT being read properly, you will see the following screen (Figure 15). Ensure that the CD is in the SDS, and press "F3" to retry the
procedure (Figure 15).
NOTE:
If the CD-Burn method is not successful, you are alternatively able to press "F4" to return to the main screen and follow the steps on performing the
SCN Coding via print out method.
3. The SCN Coding process is now complete when this documentation page appears (Figure 16). Press "F11" to get a printout for your records.
Remove the CD from the SDS.
NOTE:
After use, the CD must be destroyed. Do not attempt to use the same CD for another vehicle.
NOTE:
The SCN Coding process is complete at this stage and the vehicle can be released.Technical Service Bulletin # P-58_20-142 Date:
060122
Cruise Control - Radar Sensor Adapter

Date: January 2006
Order No.: P-B-58.20/142
Supersedes:
Group: 58
SUBJECT:
Modification Kit (MBUSA Special Tool: 900 589 21 21 00)
Consisting of Spacer Ring and 90° Vacuum Connector
(Update to the Distronic Adjustment Device; MBUSA Special Tool: 900 589 07 21 00)
As of Model Year 2006, passenger car models are fitted with a new style Distronic radar module. This means that there are now two variants of the
radar sensor (types ARS 200 and 210) which need to be accommodated by the Distronic Adjustment Device; MBUSA Special Tool Number 900 589
07 21 00.
The housing dimension of the new module is different. The distance between the antenna lens surface and the reference surfaces of the radar module
Housing is reduced. This is due to the new antenna lens surface now being flat instead of curved. This created the situation where the distance between
the Antenna lens surface and the suction membrane of the Distronic Adjustment Device is too large and the necessary suction vacuum can no longer be
produced.
To create the necessary suction vacuum, a spacer ring (part number OJV-065) is fitted over the antenna lens surface. This allows the Distronic
Adjustment Device to be positioned in the usual way and the necessary suction vacuum can be produced on the antenna lens surface (see figures
shown).
Application Hint:
apply a thin layer of anticorrosion grease to the 0-ring seal for an airtight fit.
Vacuum Connection Fitting Modification:
The vacuum connection of the optical adjustment device needs to be modified to accommodate a 90° (right angle) fitting. Perform the modification as
follows:
- Remove existing brass, barbed fitting & washer (item 1 on figure shown) from optical adjustment device.
- Assemble the various components from the modification kit in the sequence shown.
washer > spacer fitting > washer> 90° fitting > washer> banjo bolt
maximum torque for the banjo bolt = 4Nm
- Reattach brass, barbed fitting and washer.
maximum torque for the brass, barbed fitting = 4Nm
Reference Information
Special Tools
Special Tool Information
Technical Service Bulletin # P-42_10-51E Date: 060216
Brakes - Squealing/Grinding Noises From Front Brakes

Supersedes: P-B-42.10/51d dated Dec 5, 2005
Group: 42
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Model 171.456
Model 203.065/076
Model 209.376/476, up to Vehicle Production 06/2004

Model 209.375/475
Model 211.056, up to Vehicle Production 08/2005
Model 211.070
Model 215.375/376/378
Model 219.375
Model 220.067/170/175/176/178
Model 230.475 Front Brake Squealing / Grinding Noise
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of a squealing or grinding noise from the front brakes, even when the brakes are not
applied, perform the following.
Warning!
It is imperative that on models equipped with SBC-Sensotronic Brake Control (211, 219 and 230), that the SBC brake system be deactivated before
commencing any maintenance or repair work. Reference WIS document AS42.46-Z-0001-01A.
1. Inspect the front brake discs and pressure retaining springs for contact. If contact exists, replace the brake pad pressure retaining spring(s) with
modified parts (Figure 1) after checking the brake lining per Step 2, and installing piston dampers per Step 4.
Note:
The squealing/grinding noise when the brakes are not applied is the result of the pressure retaining spring slipping out of position and scraping on
the face of the brake disc. Each time the brakes are applied, the play within the brake caliper guide channel causes the brake pads to move a short
distance in the circumferential direction of the brake disc. This movement is then transmitted to the two retaining pins, which consequently rotate a
small amount during each brake application. This rotation is then transmitted to the pressure retaining spring, which can cause it to dislodge from its
original position. The revised pressure retaining springs incorporate retainer tabs (Figure 1 red circles).
2. Check the version of the brake lining by comparing the designation imprinted on the backing plate (Figure 2), with that listed within the parts
information table. Replace brake pads if necessary and install the correct version for the respective vehicle as notated within the parts information
table after the installation of piston dampers per Step 4. Reference the following WIS documents.
^ Model 171 - AR42.10-P-1600VA
^ Model 203/209 - AR42.10-P-1600PF (valid for 209 up to 4/23/04) or AR42.10-P-1600AC (valid for 209 as of 4/24/04)
^ Model 211/230 - AR42.10-P-1600R
^ Model 219 - AR42.10-P-1600TX
^ Model 215/220 AR42.10-P-01601 and AR42.10-P-01611
3. Remove front brake caliper. Reference the following WIS documents.
^ Model 171 - AR42.10-P-0070VA
^ Model 203/209 - AR42.10-P-0070P (valid for 209 up to 4/23/04) or AR42.10-P-0070AC
(valid for 209 as of 4/24/04)
^ Model 211/230 - AR42.10-P-0070R
^ Model 219 - AR42.10-P-0070TX
^ Model 215/220 - AR42.10-P-00701
Note:
It is not necessary to completely remove the front brake caliper. Only remove caliper to gain suitable access to the caliper pistons. Do not disconnect
brake hose from brake caliper. Brake hose must not be pulled or stretched. Fasten brake caliper to a suitable point in wheel house to relieve brake
hose of load and secure against falling.
4. Install piston dampers in the pistons of the front brake calipers. The piston damper must be inserted into the piston with the rounded part first.
5. Reinstall brake calipers, pads, and pressure retaining springs in reverse order.
Parts Information
In Case of WarrantyTechnical Service Bulletin # P-82_95-494 Date: 060320
Cell Phone - Digital TeleAid(R) Calls Won't Connect

Order No.: P-B-82.95/494
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
Model 171.456/473
Model 209.365/375/456/465/475
Model 211.026/056/065/070/082/083/087/282
Model 215.375
Model 219.375
Model 220.170/183
Model 230.475/479
Model Year 2005 and Later
Digital TeleAid Calls Will Not Connect
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the TeleAid not being able to connect a call, please follow the steps below.
1. Check to see if the VIN of the vehicle in question is located on the attached VIN list. For your reference, customer vehicles in the affected VIN
listing will be receiving the sample CAC correspondence.
2. If the VIN is located on the affached list, proceed to step four and follow the instructions.
3. If the VIN is not located on the list this DTB does not apply to this vehicle, please follow normal troubleshooting steps found on the failure tree
located on STAR TekInfo --> EDAC.
4. Using STAR Diagnosis read out and record SID by following the path: Control units --> Information and Communication --> Audio, Video,
Navigation, Telematics --> Tele-AID --> Control unit Version control unit Tele-AID.
5. Using STAR Diagnosis deactivate the DTA by following these path: Control units--> Information and Communication --> Audio, Video,
Navigation, Telematics --> Tele-AID --> Control Unit Adaptations --> Deactivation of Digital Tele-AID --> F5 --> YES --> Send the
reactivation form to ATX.
6. Once ATX has responded (may take approximately 30 minutes) and confirmed that the vehicle is ready to be programmed, drive the vehicle and
perform a 3 button press (simultaneously hold the SOS, "I", and wrench buttons for 5 seconds).
7. After 5 seconds all three buttons will begin to flash, the audio will be muted, and the Verizon programming message ("Welcome to over the air
programming, please hold while your phone is being programmed.") will be heard through the vehicle's speakers. After this message is heard the
unit programming has begun and will take approximately 3-5 minutes to complete. After the programming is complete the buttons will stop
flashing and the audio will be heard through the vehicle's speakers.
Note:
If the programming message is not heard or programming does not begin, this means the vehicle is not located in a Verizon area and will need to be
programmed manually using STAR Diagnosis. Continue with the steps for Manual Programming.
8. Once the programming (automatic using 3 button press or manual using STAR Diagnosis) is complete, press the "I" button to perform a
provisioning call with ATX. When the ATX operator answers, identify who you are and from which dealer stating you would like to provision
the TeleAid. After the provisioning call, the update is complete and the vehicle can be returned to the customer.
Note:
If ATX states the provisioning was not successful, the vehicle will need to be provisioned manually using STAR Diagnosis. Follow the steps below
for manual provisioning.
Manual Programming
1. Using STAR Diagnosis, program the control unit by following the path: Control units --> Information and Communication --> Audio, Video,
Navigation, Telematics --> Tele-AID --> Control Unit Adaptations --> Activation of Tele-AID and registration with ATX --> F3 for yes --> F4
for manual programming --> Enter the SID that was recorded in step 4 and the MIN and MDN contained on the reactivation form received from
ATX.
2. Once the manual programming has been completed return to step 8.

Manual Provisioning
1. Using STAR Diagnosis, program the control unit by following the path: Control units --> Information and Communication --> Audio, Video,
Navigation, Telematics --> Tele-AID --> Initial startup --> Activation of Tele-AID and registration with ATX --> Yes --> Yes --> No --> F3.
Perform an acquaintance call with ATX to verify Tele-AID is functioning correctly
Note:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair
In Case of Warranty
Applicable VIN List

Owner Letter
Digital Tele Aid Unit Reactivation Request FormTechnical Service Bulletin # P-82_70-492 Date: 060323
Audio System - Poor Audio Quality When Using Cell Phone

Order No.: P-B-82.70/492
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220

Vehicles Not Equipped with Voice Control
Poor Audio Quality When Using Phone in Hands Free Mode
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles (not equipped with a voice control unit) for any hands free quality or poor understanding of
persons in vehicles, check the software version of the MHI control unit by following the steps below.
Checking MHI Software Version Using STAR Diagnosis: Navigate to the following menu: Control units --> Information and communication -->
Audio, video, navigation, telematics --> CTEL-mobile phone adapter with universal interface --> Control unit version
If the software version is not 31/05 or later, follow the procedure below to update the MHI control unit. If the software version is 31/05 or later, there
are no further updates as this is the most current hands free audio quality software.
Flashing the MHI Using STAR Diagnosis and the Cradle Programming Tool (Special Tool 203 589 06 63 00 released to all dealers January 30, 2006):
Navigate to the following menu and be sure to follow programming instructions provided by STAR Diagnosis.
Warning!
Do not disconnect the programming tool during flashing process. This will result in damage to the MHI control unit which will result in
replacement. If flashing fails or does not complete correctly and the MHI is not responding, attempt a hard reset of the MHI by removing the
electrical connector from the control unit.
Control units --> Information and communication --> Audio, video, navigation, telematics --> CTEL - mobile phone adapter with universal interface
--> Troubleshoot by means of complaint or symptoms --> Any hands-free quality complaints, example poor line quality --> Check software status and
update software as required --> If the software needs to be updated, press F2 and follow the instructions.
Note:
After flashing the MHI, it may be necessary to perform control unit adaptations. If STAR Diagnosis prompts for a control unit adaptation, navigate
to the following menu: Control unit adaptations --> Microphones ~ Select the appropriate microphone configuration
Model 171 - Equipped with three microphones
Models 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220 - Equipped with either four microphone configuration (Figure 1, circles) or new two microphone configuration
(Figure 2, circles)
Note:
New core kit (BQ 682 0965) contains the updated MHI control unit.
Note:
In Case of Warranty
Cell Phone - TeleAid(R) Call Will Not Connect

Date: April 3, 2006
Order No.: P-B-82.95/500
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
Model 171.453/454/456
Model 203.052/054/056/076/087/092
Model 209.356/375/376/456/475/476
Model 211.026/056/070/076/083/087/256/276/283/287
Model 215.374/375/376/379
Model 219.375/376
Model 220.067/170/174/175/176/179/183/184
Model 221.171
Model 230.474/475/476/479
TeleAid Call Not Connecting Due to Network Issues
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that TeleAid calls cannot connect, please refer to the process information below to
determine if the issue is related to a network issue or vehicle issue.
Effective immediately, DO NOT contact Verizon directly.
1. Customer brings vehicle to a workshop with a TeleAid issue.
2. Dealer follows normal troubleshooting process as outlined in EDAC diagnostic tree located on - StarTekInfo --> EDAC --> Diagnostic Guides
--> Digital Tele Aid Diagnostic Guide.
3. If it is determined that the vehicle is properly functioning and a network issue may exist, fill out the network issue form located in the diagnostic
tree and fax to the number listed on the form.
4. When a completed form is received by MBUSA, a trouble ticket will be opened with Verizon and the dealer will be contacted either with a
confirmation that a network issue does exist or with a request for further information and/or diagnostic action.
Any future changes to the current process will be subsequently communicated.

Air Bag System - SRS Lamp ON/Multiple DTC's Set

Order No.: P-B-91.60/109
Supersedes:
Group: 91
SUBJECT:
All Model 140, 170, 171, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 219, 220 and 230 Vehicles Equipped with Baby Smart(TM) Airbag Deactivation System
SRS Lamp Illuminated/DTC 9021, 9027, B1315 and/or 28
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles with the SRS warning lamp illuminated and any of the above DTCs stored, please make
note of the fault tracing information shown. To properly diagnose this issue, please follow the SRS fault tree in Star Diagnosis (SDS). This fault tree
can be found in a quick test by selecting the stored DTC. If no faults are found, the cause could be a memory card with a transponder chip has been
placed on the passenger seat. Company ID cards, notebook computers, PDAs, and other electronic equipment may contain such memory cards that
cause interference with the Baby Smart(TM) transponder. This interference can be interpreted as a fault by the SRS control unit. This condition may be
difficult to duplicate in the workshop. Please alert the customer not to place items containing memory cards on the passenger seat. Replacement of
components will not remedy the situation.
Note:
The interference from electronic components is an outside influence and not a manufacturing defect and therefore cannot be claimed under
warranty.
Engine Controls - CVN Redocumentation Process

Date: March 2006
Order No.: S-B-07.08/43b, 27.00/41b
Supersedes: S-B-07.08/43a, 27.00/41a
Group: 07
Revision: This bulletin contains a revision to the illustrations
SUBJECT:
All Models as of Model Year 2005 (Except E320 CDI)
CVN Redocumentation Process, Model Year 2005 Vehicles:
A. Introduction
B. Process Overview
C. SCN Coding and CVN Generation
D. CVN Redocumentation - Primary Process
E. CVN Redocumentation - Back-up Process
A. Introduction
As of model year 2005, a new coding method is required in the event an engine control module or transmission control module is replaced or
flashed.
The applicable emission regulations require that all codeable (emission-relevant) electronic control modules have a Calibration Verification
Number (CVN) which uniquely identifies the control module version installed in the vehicle.
The Calibration Verification Number (CVN) is an 8 character long string and is accompanied by 8 character long check digit. The Calibration
Verification Number CVN is automatically generated by the engine or transmission control module after it has been replaced or flashed and has
been subsequently SCN Coded.
Once the Calibration Verification Number (CVN) has been generated, it then must be reported back to DaimlerChrysler in a process called
"Redocumentation". The "Redocumentation" of the CVN and check digit is performed via the same Office application currently used to generate
SCN Codes. This "Redocumentation" process has been created to ensure the proper reporting of each control module version so that
DaimlerChrysler can maintain proper records as well as report the data to the Federal Government.
NOTE:
For information on how to access the SCN Coding Office Application please refer to S-B-07.61/38h.
B. Process Overview
The CVN Redocumentation Process specified in this Service Bulletin is divided into three parts: SCN Coding and CVN Generation, CVN
Redocumentation - Primary Process, and CVN Redocumentation - Back-Up Process.
SCN Coding and CVN Generation-
In order to generate a CVN, the control unit must first be SCN Coded. The SCN Coding process is outlined within this Service Bulletin in Section
C. After SCN Coding, the control unit will automatically generate the CVN and Check Digit [3] which then must be redocumented using the
procedure outlined in Section D.
NOTE:
Failure to redocument the CVN immediately after SCN Coding (using the CVN Redocumentation - Primary Process outlined in Section D)
will result in a pop-up message on the STAR Diagnosis System screen noting that there are vehicles that have not had their CVN
redocumented. In addition to the pop-up message, a screen will be displayed showing the VIN and pertinent information of the vehicles that
have not had their CVN redocumented. This pop-up message and vehicle record screen will be displayed every time the DAS application is
used until the CVN that have not been redocumented are redocumented.
CVN Redocumentation - Primary Process -
This process will allow the user to simply print out the CVN and Check Digit [3] and redocument them utilizing the familiar SCN Coding Office
Application. Once the CVN and Check Digit [3] have been redocumented, the SCN Coding Office Application will generate a Release Code and
Check Digit [4] to confirm to the user that the redocumentation was successful. This Release Code and Check Digit [4] then must be input into
the STAR Diagnosis System in order to prove that redocumentation has successfully occurred.
NOTE:
For information on how to access the SCN Coding Office Application please refer to S-B07.61/38h.
CVN Redocumentation - Back-Up Process -
NOTE:
This process should only be used if it was not possible to redocument the CVN and Check Digit [3] at the time of SCN Coding.
In order to properly redocument, the VIN, CVN and Check Digit [3] must be determined as outlined in Section E. Once the VIN, CVN and
Check Digit [3] have been obtained the user then must perform the Redocumentation utilizing the familiar SCN Coding Office Application. After
the CVN and Check Digit [3] have been redocumented, the SCN Coding Office Application will generate a Release Code and Check Digit [4] to
confirm to the user that the Redocumentation was successful. This Release Code and Check Digit [4] then must be input into the STAR Diagnosis
System in order to prove that Redocumentation has successfully occurred.
NOTE:
Failure to input the Release Code and Check Digit [4] into the STAR Diagnosis System will result in a pop-up message on the STAR
Diagnosis screen noting that there are vehicles that have not had their CVN redocumented. In addition to the pop-up message, a screen will be
displayed showing the VIN and pertinent information of the vehicles that have not had their CVN redocumented. This pop-up message and
vehicle records screen will be displayed every time the DAS application is used until the CVN that have not been redocumented are
redocumented.
C. SCN Coding And CVN Generation
1. Determine vehicle data for SCN Coding (Figure 1)

2. Print out vehicle data for SCN Coding by pressing "F11" (Figure 2)
3. Retrieve SCN Code
NOTE:
For instructions on retrieving an SCN Code using the Office SCN Coding Application please refer to S-B-07.61/38h.
4. Perform SCN Coding - Select 'Perform SCN Coding', Press 'F3'. (Figure 3)
5. Input SCN Code, then Press 'F3' (Figure 4)
NOTE:
Please be sure to input all of the characters of the SCN Code that you have retrieved including any sets of zeros (00).
6. Switch ignition 'Off/On' as instructed. (Figure 5)
7. The Control Module will be reset. (Figure 6)

8. After the SCN Coding process, the CVN is automatically read out of the ECM. The calculation of the CVN may take up to 180 seconds. (Figure
7)
9. The CVN and Check Digit [3] are displayed on the SDS Screen. Press 'F11 to print out the CVN and Check Digit [3]. (Figure 8)
10. The CVN must now be redocumented.
NOTE:
If the CVN is to be redocumented at this time please proceed to Section D.
[CVN Redocumentation - Primary procedure]
NOTE:
If the CVN is to be redocumented at a later date please proceed to Section E.
[CVN Redocumentation - Back-up procedure]
NOTE:
The SCN Coding process is complete at this stage and the vehicle can be released.
NOTE:
If the ME Control unit has been replaced, drive authorization may need to be performed.
D. CVN Redocumentation - Primary Procedure
Using the CVN and Check Digit [3] from the sheet printed in Section C, Step 9,
1. Input the CVN and Check Digit [3] into the respective fields in the SCN Coding Office Application. (Figure 9)
NOTE:
For information on how to access the SCN Coding Office Application please refer to S-B-07.61/38h
2. Press 'F5 CVN Redocument' Button, Release Code and Check Digit [4] will be created.
3. Click the 'OK' Button. The Release Code and Check Digit [4] will be displayed. (Figure 10)
4. Press 'F11 Print' Button to Print the Release Code and Check Digit [4]. (Figure 10)
5. Enter the Release Code and Check Digit [4] into the respective areas on the SDS Screen, Press 'F3' to complete the redocumentation. (Figure 11)
E. CVN Redocumentation - Back-Up Process
The Back-up Process should only be used when it is not possible to redocument the CVN and Check Digit [3] at the time of SCN Coding.
1. Select 'Cars', Press 'F3' (Figure 12)
2. A message will be displayed noting that at least one CVN from at least one vehicle has not been redocumented. (Figure 13)
The CVN and respective vehicles that have not been redocumented will be displayed. For each of the entries displayed you must redocument the
CVN and Check Digit [3] to 'unlock' and clear the entry from the screen.
3. Press 'F11' button to print a record of all CVN/vehicles that must be redocumented. (Figure 14)
Redocument CVN and Check Digit [3] using SCN Coding Office Application
NOTE:
For information on how to access the SCN Coding Office Application please refer to S-B-07.61/38h
4. Using the CVN and Check Digit [3] from the sheet printed in Section E, Step 3, input the CVN and Check Digit [3] into the respective fields in
the SCN Coding Office Application. (Figure 15)
5. Press 'F5 CVN Redocument' Button, Release Code and Check Digit [4] will be created.
6. Click the 'OK' Button. The Release Code and Check Digit [4] will be displayed. (Figure 16)
7. Press 'F11 Print' Button to Print the Release Code and Check Digit [4]. (Figure 16)
You must now select the CVN/vehicle record that you wish to 'unlock' and clear.
8. Select the CVN/vehicle record that you wish to clear by highlighting, then press 'F9' (Figure 17)
9. Enter the Release Code and Check Digit [4] for the respective VIN, Press 'F3' (Figure 18)
Once all vehicles have had their CVN and Check Digit [3] redocumented and their records 'unlocked' and cleared with the Release Code and
Check Digit [4], the redocumentation process is complete. (Figure 19)
NOTE:
In case of warranty, use the table.
Electrical - Voltage Drop Testing at The Fuses

Order No.: S-B-54.10/162
Supersedes:
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
Model 164, 171, 199, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251 -
Quiescent Current Test Via Voltage Drop at the Fuses
This bulletin is for rapidly pinpointing closed-circuit systems responsible for voltage drop. It involves disconnecting fuses or CAN-distributors and
measuring the voltage drop directly at the fuse.
Measuring Voltage Drop:
1. Testing must be done on the installed fuse of the circuit 30 system (control module) using a suitable multimeter (e.g. Fluke 189) in the microvolt
range.
2. For an accurate measurement, use appropriately sized pointed probes (Figure 1) to ensure sufficient contact with the opening in the fuse's plastic
housing.
NOTE:
Use probes from the electrical connection set (part no. W 220 589 00 99 00).
The quiescent current can be computed via Ohm's law from the measured voltage value and the internal resistance of the fuse measured.
Example calculation with a 30-A fuse

Fuse Internal resistance
Special Tools
Body - Roof Seals Noisy on Rough Roads

Order No.: P-B-77.33/40
Supersedes:
Group: 77
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
A. Roof Seals Noisy When Driving on Rough Roads
B. Rear of Vano Roof Rattles When Driving
C. Front of Vano Roof Knocking Noise on Rough Roads, up to VIN F073286
Condition A - If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the roof seals are noisy when driving on rough roads, either the coating
on the seals is worn or the seals are dirty and/or dry. Before attempting any adjustments to the roof mechanism or replacing the seals, proceed as
follows.
1. Move roof to an intermediate position to gain access to the roof seals.
2. Caution! To help avoid possible personal injury or vehicle damage, secure root according to WIS document AR77.50-P-3000-01V.
3. Clean all seals which come in contact with the painted metal areas of the roof and body and the upper edges of the side glass using a clean, soft
cloth and the window cleaning agent listed below.
4. With another clean, soft cloth, apply the special sliding compound, antifriction oil listed below to the area of the roof seals which contact the
painted metal areas of the roof and body and the upper edges of the side glass.
5. Remove support tool (W230 589 04 63 00) according to WIS document AR77.50-P-3000-01V.
6. Actuate roof through the full opening and closing cycle several times.
7. Close roof.
Condition B - If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding a raffle noise from the Vano Roof when driving, the mounting bolt
for the eccentric lug may have worked loose. To resolve, perform the following.
1. Remove eccentric (Figure 1, Pos. 1).
2. Drill a 6.2 mm diameter hole in control arm (Figure 2, Pos. 2). Remove burrs and apply primer to bare metal areas.
3. Reinstall eccentric (Figure 1 Pos. 1), apply locking compound to bolt and tighten bolt to 10 Nm.
4. Adjust eccentric, refer to WIS Document AR77.33-P-3475V.
Condition C - If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding a knocking noise from the front of the Vano Roof when driving on
rough roads, the adjustment of the front latch must be checked and adjusted if necessary. To resolve, perform the following.
1. Test drive the vehicle on a rough road to insure the knocking noise can be heard.
2. If knocking noise is audible, stop the vehicle and open the Vano Roof just until the trunk lid no longer exerts pressure on the seals below the rear
window and at the base of the C-pillars.
Caution!
Do not place fingers or hands in gap between roof and body.
3. Drive vehicle again and check if noise is no longer present.
4. If no longer present, lubricate the roof seals as described in Condition A.
5. If the noise is still present, the adjustment of the front latches must be checked.
6. The locking hook (Figure 3, Pos. 2) must be in the center (Figure 3, Pos. 3) of the catch (Figure 3, Pos. 1) when the Vano Roof is locked.
7. If the locking hook is too low and contacts the catch, this may cause the knocking noise when driving on rough roads.
8. In this case, add shims at the inner mounting point of the catch until the locking hook is in the center.
9. If the adjustment does not correct the noise complaint, replace only the latch, reference WIS Document AR77.33-P-3400V.
10. Apply lubricant paste along the entire length of the catch pin.
11. Open and close the roof several times, then remove the excess lubricant paste.
Special Tools
Note:
This special tool should already be in every dealer's inventory. It was released and automatically delivered to all dealers in February 2002.
Parts Information
In Case of Warranty
Body - Front Window Creaking Noise When Operating

Date: June 15, 2006
Order No.: P-B-72.10/64
Supersedes:
Group: 72
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, Up to VIN F129549
Front Window Makes Creaking Noise When Operating
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding a creaking noise when operating the front window, the compensating spring in
the window lifter mechanism may not be sufficiently greased.
1. Lower affected window approximately 10 cm (4 inches) to create a gap between the spring coils for the grease.
2. Remove interior door trim panel. Refer to WIS Document AR72.10-P-1000V.
3. Remove the water shield on the front, rear and bottom edges and tape open.
4. Grease compensating spring (Figures 1 and 2, circles) with a little grease using your finger.
5. Reinstall the water shield.
6. Actuate window a few times to confirm creaking noise is no longer present
7. Reinstall interior door trim panel. Refer to WIS Document AR72.10-P-1000V.
Parts Information
In Case of WarrantyTechnical Service Bulletin # 2005100013A Date: 060501
Campaign - A/T Control Module Reprogramming

Campaign No. 2005100013, May 2006
FILE:
PARTS: GROUP I OF INFORMATION _ PARTS & ACCESSORIES BINDER
Revision History
SUBJECT:
MODELS 171/203/209/211 WITH M272, MODEL YEAR 2006 FLASH TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
This Service Campaign has been initiated because DCAG has determined that on the affected vehicles (see VIN range) installing a modified version of
software into the automatic transmission (722.9) control module using DAS version 09/05 or higher will improve the shifting characteristic of the
transmission.
In the interest of customer satisfaction, MBUSA requests that this service campaign be performed on affected MY 2006 vehicles in your inventory, as
indicated in VMI. An affected vehicle should not be retailed until it has been properly repaired. If any of these vehicles have been retailed, please
contact the customer to install this update.
Prior to performing this Service Campaign:
^ Please check VMI to insure the vehicle is involved and to determine if the vehicle has been previously repaired.
^ Please review the entire Service Campaign bulletin.
Approximately 2714 vehicles are affected.
Effective Serial Number Range
Procedure
Note:
Prior to starting the procedure, ensure that DAS Version 09105 or higher is being used.
1. Connect battery charger; ensure battery voltage is above 12.5 V.
CAUTION!
When connecting battery charger, ensure all accessories are switched off.
2. Connect Star Diagnosis.
3. Flash transmission control unit software from hard drive via DAS: Select Vehicle/Control units/Drive/Transmission/Control unit
adaptations/Control module programming/Flash from hard disk; follow on-screen instructions.
Note:
The DAS steps must be followed exactly as described.
4. Read out and erase fault memory.
5. Perform SCN coding; refer to latest versions of S-B-58.00/144 for Online SCN coding or S-B-07.61/38 for Office SCN coding.
6. Check and erase fault codes and event memory.
Note:
^ The following allowable labor operation should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair:
A/T - Unsuccessful ECU Initial Start Up

Date: May 26, 2006
Order No.: P-B-27.60/75
Supersedes:
Group: 27
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Model 203.052/054/056
Model 209.356/375/456/475
Model 211.056/070/256
Model 215.375
Model 219.375
Model 220.170/175
Model 221.171
Model 230.475
Equipped with 7G-Tronic Transmission (NAG2)
After Replacement of Electro-Hydraulic Control Unit or Automatic Transmission 722.9, ECU Initial Start-up Unsuccessful
After replacing an electro-hydraulic control unit or a complete automatic transmission 722.9, termination or error messages may occur while performing
initial start-up with Star Diagnosis.
Initial start up cannot be carried out completely. This is due to a concern with Star Diagnosis Version 04/2006. As a result Star Diagnosis Version
04/2006 must be installed together with add-on 2006-04-20-0558, in order to perform initial start-up.
Body - Laminated Glass Chip/Crack Repair Information

Date: August, 2006
Order No.: S-B-67.00120
Supersedes: MBNA 67/2 May 1990
Group: 67
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Model All, MY All
Damage to laminated glass due to chips or cracks
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of damage to any laminated glass due to chips or cracks which is not covered by the new
car warranty, this (in most cases) can now be satisfactorily and economically repaired using the NOVUS glass repair method. NOVUS invented
windshield repair and has perfected many of the procedures during the past 30 years. NOVUS glass repair is approved by DCAG and recommended by
MBUSA for use in repairs whenever possible.
Only the exterior surface of laminated glass should be repaired. Humidity or water must be totally removed before the glass repair process is started.
Whenever possible use either clear packaging tape or NOVUS "Keep Clean Patches" to cover the damage before rain or washing the vehicle. If this has
not been done, in most cases, it will still be possible to successfully repair the damage. Cracks up to 6 inches in length that radiate from the impact point
are also repairable.
An impact spot from the initial damage will remain visible after a successful repair. The larger the initial spot, the more it will be visible to the customer
after the repair. NOVUS uses a special polish to restore the shine to the repair, thus reducing visibility of the repair.
Additional information on glass repair and finding your nearest NOVUS repair franchisee can be found at their web site: www.Novusglass.com.
Engine - Approved Engine Oil Availability

Date: June 1, 2006
Supersedes: P-B-18.00/17d dated April 13, 2006
Group: 18
Revision History

e 6/1/06 Applicable Models and Content Updated
d 4/13/06 Applicable Models and Content Updated
C 12/9/04 Content Updated
b 7/21/04 Content Updated
a 7/31/02 Content Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456
Model 203.052/054/056/092/087
Model 209.356/375/456/475
Model 211.026/056/070/083/087/256/283/287
Model 215.375/376
Model 219.375
Model 220.067/170/175/176/179/183/184
Model 221.171/176
Model 230.475/476/479
Equipped With FSS / FSS+ or MB Maintenance System

Additional Approved MB 229.5 or MB 229.51 Service Products
Note:
For Information Only and as an update of the Factory Service Product booklet. Vehicles with MB Maintenance System can use MB229.5 or
MB229.51 engine oils; vehicles with FSS or FSS+ can use MB229.3 or MB229.5 or MB229.51 engine oils.
The approved MB229.51 engine oil will be available in the US as of the date shown.
Steering - Pentosin CHF 11S(R) Power Steering Fluid

Date: July 21, 2006
Order No.: P-B-46.00/44
Supersedes:
Group: 46
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 221 and 230 Power Steering Fluid - Pentosin CHF 11S
All of the above mentioned model vehicles must use power steering fluid Pentosin CHF 11S (MB part no. BQ 1320001).
Note: Model 210 which is equipped with rack-and-pinion steering gear and older models equipped with re-circulating ball steering gear box (e.g., 124,
129, 170, 140, 202 and 208) must use MB power steering fluid MB pin BQ 1460001 or approved Dexron III ATF.
Parts InformationTechnical Service Bulletin # P-54_30-171 Date: 060524
Instruments - Inaccurate Outside Temperature Readings

Date: May 24, 2006
Order No.: P-B-54.30/171
Supersedes:
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, Up to VIN F113288
Outside Temperature Sensor Inaccurate
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the outside temperature in the instrument cluster multifunction display differing from
actual temperature by at least 10°Fahrenheit, this may be caused by the outside temperature sensor becoming disengaged or not being engaged
correctly. Perform the following to resolve.
1. Engage outside temperature sensor in cavity as per WIS document AR54.30-P-6341V.
2. Reinforce with a cable tie (Figure 1).
WARNING
Over tightening the cable tie on the outside temperature sensor may cause the cavity or sensor to crack.
Parts Information
Note:

Electrical - Overhead Console Functions Inoperative

Order No.: P-B-82.20/527
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
All Functions of the Overhead Control Panel Not Functioning
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding all functions of the overhead control panel (interior illumination, rain/light
sensor, Vario Roof) not functioning, this may be due to a software error in the overhead control panel (OCP) with Q level Q1. The condition may be
corrected after the CAN bus goes to sleep, however this condition may reoccur at some later time. If only the first version spare part number is available
(A171 820 14 01 or A171 820 15 01), replace the OCP only with a level Q2 part, refer to WIS document AR82.20-P-1000V. If the newer version spare
part number is available (A171 820 20 01 or A171 820 21 01), any Q level is okay.
Parts InformationTechnical Service Bulletin # S-27_56-83 Date: 061024
A/T - Filter Part Number/Replacement Information

Date: October 2006
Order No.: S-B-27.56/83
Supersedes:
Group: 27
SUBJECT:
MODEL 164, 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251 with TRANSMISSION 722.9
Replacement of Transmission Oil Filter
Please note that should it be necessary to install a new oil filter (e.g. at an oil change or in the event of severe contamination), only the oil filter with the
part number A 221 277 00 95 must be used.
The following needs to be observed due to the revised dimensions:
Oil pans without bevels (Figure 1 with bevel for reference) and pipes (black), as well as a grid magnet and the oil pan gasket, must be replaced by new
parts in order to be able to install the new filter.
Oil pan with bevel: A 221 270 09 12

Overflow pipe (white): A 251 271 00 97 2
Magnets: A 000 988 01 52 Oil
pan gasket: A 220 271 01 80
722.9 transmissions with a serial number of 024198 or vehicle production of 02/04 or later, have the beveled oil pan. Unnecessary replacements of a
beveled oil pan will result in warranty claim rejection or debiting. Additionally, updates of the aforementioned components can only be performed
during repairs/services which require access to these components.
This bulletin has been created and maintained in accordance with MBUSA-SLP S423QH001, Document and Data Control, and MBUSA-SLP
S424HH001, Control of Records.
Observe positioning of the 2 magnets (Figure 2).
With the oil pan with bevel and pipe (white), the new filter can be installed. If it is necessary to use magnets, only new magnets may be used.
If the grid magnet (A 220 271 00 98) is installed, it must be replaced by 2 magnets A 000 988 01 52. Observe positioning of the 2 magnets (Figure 2).
1. - Magnet (A 000 988 01 52)
If 6 magnets (round or rectangular) are installed, 4 must be removed and the other 2 positioned as in Figure 3 and 4.
2. - Magnet, round
3. - Magnet, rectangular
Body - Water Enters Trunk With Vario Roof(R) Open

Order No.: P-B-77.30/47
Supersedes:
Group: 77
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Water Entry in Trunk When Vario Roof Is Open
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding water entry on the trunk partition and/or side panel (Figure 1, Pos. 1) when the
Vario Roof is open, this may be due to missing sealing plug(s) (Figure 1, Pos. 4) in the upper C-pillar seal(s) (Figure 1, Pos. 2). It is not necessary to
replace the seal. Both seal plugs are included in the sealing plug parts kit available as a separate part and the seal plugs can be glued in place per the
below procedure.
1. Move Vario Roof to assembly position.
2. Glue seal plug (Figure 1, Pos. 4) in opening of outer hose profile (Figure 1, Pos. 5).
3. Allow adhesive to flash off for 20 minutes before the Vario Roof is closed for the first time.
4. Remove support and close Vario Roof.
Note:
This is a non-time repair and is claimable under Group 77.
Parts InformationTechnical Service Bulletin # P-82_30-366C Date: 070301

Wipers/Washers - Wipers Chattering/Noisy

Date: March 1, 2007
Order No.: P-B-82.30/366c
Supersedes: P-B-82.30/366b dated Jan. 10, 2006
Group: 82
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Passenger Models
Adjusting Wiper Arms
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of wipers chattering / noisy, proceed as follows.
1. Inspect wiper blades / inserts for wear and replace as needed.

2. Thoroughly clean the windshield.
3. Verify use of correct washer fluid.
4. Check washer nozzle adjustment.
5. If noises persist, proceed with steps 6 and 7.
6. Check the wiper arm angle adjustment and record values per the applicable model WIS document.
7. If required, adjust wiper arm angle.
Note:
Due to the natural aging process and wear, wiper blades should be replaced twice a year preferably in Spring and Fall (refer to Operator's Manual).
Note:
Warranty claims for wiper blades / wiper blade inserts that are worn or damaged due to environmentally influenced reasons, abuse or physical
damage will not be accepted.
Note:
Special Tool (W211 589 02 21 00) was automatically shipped to all MB dealers as of June 2004.
Note:
Refer to Netstar message "Windshield Wiper Blades / Wiper Blade
Inserts" dated January 20, 2006.
Note:
In Case of Warranty
Instruments - 'Set Cruise Control' Message Not Displayed

Order No.: P-B-54.30/177
Supersedes:
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
Model 171.456 with SA code 805
Set Cruise Control Speed Not Displayed in Instrument Cluster Multifunction Display
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the set cruise control speed not being displayed in the status line of the lower instrument
cluster malfunction display, this may be caused by the software in the instrument cluster. The software does not support the function for displaying the
set cruise control speed. Instrument clusters with the following MB software object numbers do not support this function.
A171 442 00 00
A171 442 00 21
A171 442 01 21
A171 442 02 21
The MB software object number can be checked using STAR Diagnosis, navigate to the following menu: Control units -> Information &
Communication -> Instrument cluster -> control unit version
Do not replace parts for this condition. This is normal functionality of those instrument clusters. Technical Service Bulletin # P-82_85-507A
Date: 061016
Satellite Radio - Limited Channel 184 or Lower

Supersedes: P-B-82.85/507 dated June 15, 2006
Group: 82
Revision History
a 10/16/06 Remedy Available

SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, As of Model Year 2005
Model203.040/052/054/056/061/064/076/081/084/087/092/261/264/281
/284/740/764, As of Model Year 2006
Model 209.356/365/375/376/456/465/475/476, As of Model Year 2005
Equipped with Satellite Radio Receiver
Audio 20 Head Unit Cannot Tune to Any Satellite Radio Channel Higher Than 184
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the Audio 20 (entry) model head unit not able to tune to any channel higher than 184 in
vehicles equipped with Satellite Radio (SDAR), the head unit must be replaced according to the vehicle model listed below.
NOTE:
Any unnecessary replacement of an SDAR Control Module or a Head Unit will be debited accordingly.
Body - Vario Roof(R) Cracking Noises During Operation

Order No.: P-B-77.33/45
Supersedes:
Group: 77
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Cracking Noise from Pivot 1 on Vario Roof Frame
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding a cracking noise from the Vario Roof frame when driving on rough roads or
when standing near the C-pillar area after actuating the roof, this may be due to the shim and safety clip binding against the rough surface coating on the
frame. After the roof is actuated and completes the cycle, the pressure in the hydraulic system slowly decreases and roof frame settles in to its normal
location. It is during this final motion that the noise can most clearly be heard. To resolve, perform the below procedure.
1. Lower Vario Roof and leave trunk lid open and the rear shelf in the vertical position.
2. Remove safety clip (Figure 1, Pos. 1) and shims (Figure 1, Pos. 2) from Vario Roof frame control arm (Figure 1, Pos. 4).
3. Clean contact surfaces of safety clamp, shims and roof frame with Degreaser.
4. Apply lubricant to safety clamp, shims and roof frame where these parts contact each other.
5. Push control arm (Figure 1, Pos. 4) slightly inward and apply lubricant to pin (Figure 1, Pos. 3).
6. Reinstall shims (Figure 1, Pos. 2) and safety clip (Figure 1, Pos. 1).
7. Cycle roof several times while to insure noise is no longer present. Stand near C-pillar immediately after roof completes the opening and closing
cycles to best hear the cracking noise.
Note:
This repair is non-time claimable under Group 77.
Memory Systems - Easy Entry/Exit Feature Inoperative

Order No.: P-B-91.10/125
Supersedes:
Group: 91
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, with Code 275
Model 203.040/054/056/061/064/065/076/087/092/261/264/281/284/740/747/764, with Code 275
Model 209.356/365/375/376/456/465/475/476
Model 211.026/056/065/070/076/083/087/256/265/276/282/283/287
Model 219.375/376
Model 230.474/475/476/479
Easy Entry/Exit Feature for Seat Position Not Functioning
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding the easy entry/exit feature for the seat position not functioning, this may be due to
prior replacement of the instrument cluster (A1) on vehicles up to Model Year 2004. This can be corrected by installing one of the following seat ECU
(N32/1 or N32/2) part numbers and programming the ECU with SDS release 09/06 or newer.
NOTE:
On the above listed vehicles as of model year 2005, this feature has been discontinued in production and can not be retrofitted.
Models 171 and 219

Control units with the part numbers shown should only be programmed and coded with SDS release 09/2006 or later.
Model 203 without Central Gateway (CGW or N93)
Control units with the following part numbers are to be replaced with A211 870 46 26 and then programmed and coded with SDS release 09/2006 or
later. Control units with part number A211 870 46 26 should only be programmed and coded with SDS release 09/2006 or later.
Model 203 with Central Gateway (CGW or N93) and Model 211
later.
Control units with the following part numbers should only be programmed and coded with SDS release 09/2006 or later.
Model 209
later.
Model 230
Control units with the following part numbers are to be replaced with either A230 820 60 26 or A230 820 61 26 and then programmed and coded with
SDS release 09/2006 or later.
Parts Information
Body - Hard Top to A-Pillar Seal Collapsed

Order No.: P-B-77.30/49
Supersedes:
Group: 77
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Seal Between Top of A-Pillar and Roof Panel Collapsed
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the seal between the top of the A-pillar and the roof panel has collapsed (Figure 1, Pos.
1), this may be due to insufficient return force within the seal. It is not necessary to replace the seal. Special clips have been developed to resolve this
issue.
1. Move Vario Roof to assembly position, refer to WIS document AR77.50-P-3000-01V.

2. Remove hose glued into windshield frame seal and Vario Roof front section.
3. Insert long clip into windshield frame seal. Insert clip along channel (Figure 1, Pos. 5) and observe insertion depth of 30 mm (Figure 1, Pos. 8
and A) to insure the water drain hole (Figure 1, Pos. 7) is not blocked.
4. Insert short clip into Vario Roof front section seal (Figure 1, Pos. 3) approximately 3 mm deeper than the front edge of the seal.
5. Remove support and close Vario Roof, refer to WIS document AR77.50-P-3000-01V.
6. With the door windows open, align the junction between the seals. If necessary, use a hot air blower to warm the seals as an aid to aligning the
seals.
7. Close the door windows and check that the windows enter the roof seals correctly, correct window adjustment if necessary referring to WIS
document AR72.10-P-1950V.
8. Perform rain test to check for leaks.
Parts Information
NOTE:
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Seal between top of A-pillar and roof panel collapsed, repair (77-0000)
NOTE:
All work to complete and check the repair is inclusive of the non-time op code. Technical Service Bulletin # P-43_10-02A Date: 070116
Brakes - Squeal/Whistle When Releasing Brake Pedal

Supersedes: P-B-43.10/02 dated May 30, 2006
Group: 43
Revision History

a 1/16/07 Applicable Models, Series Production Dates and Part Numbers Updated
SUBJECT:
Model171.454/456/473, Up to Series Production 11/2006
Model203.040/052/054/056/061/064/065/076/081/084/087/09
Up to Series Production 11/2006
Model209.356/365/375/376/456/465/475/476, Up to Series Production 11/2006
Squealing / Whistling Noise When Releasing Brake Pedal
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of a squealing or whistling noise emanating from the brake pedal area after releasing the
brake pedal, replace the brake booster with a revised part. Reference WIS document AR43.10-P-0350V (Model171) or AR43.10-P-0350P (Model203
and 209).
The whistling noise within the brake booster is the result of air flowing between the operating chamber and vacuum chamber of the booster, caused by
increased tolerances. The increased tolerances cause air to flow over an internal edge within the booster creating vortices. These vortices can produce a
sound which may be perceived as a whistle.
NOTE:
When ordering parts please ensure to add an index 28 to the part number. For models 203 and 209 the revised part will have a Q-status of Q7 or
higher. For model 171 the revised part will have a Q-status of Q3 or higher.
Charging System - Returning Alternators & Regulators

Order No.: P-B-15.40/60
Supersedes:
Group: 15
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456
Model 203.052/054/056/087/092/740
Model 209.356/372/456/472
Model 211.022/026/056/072/087/090/256/287
Model 215.376/379
Model 216.371/376
Model 219.372
Model 220.176/179
Model 221.171/176/179
Model 230.471/476/479
Returning Alternators and Regulators Equipped with BSS or LIN Communication
For the above model vehicles when replacing any alternator regulators and/or alternators covered under warranty, the returned part to the QEC must be
accompanied by the Control Unit Log and Alternator Test (obtained by using SDS per below instructions). Any claims submitted without this
documentation will be debited back to the dealer. No other documentation will be accepted or required.
Control Unit Log - Using Star Diagnosis 04/05 or newer access the Control Unit Log menu via SDS menu path: Control Units -> Drive -> Motor
electronics -> Control Unit Log -> Generation of Control Unit Log.
Alternator Test - Using Star Diagnosis 04/05 or newer access the Control Unit Log menu via SDS menu path: Control Units -> Drive -> Motor
electronics -> Actuations or Complete list of guided tests -> Alternator diagnosis
NOTE:
- For both documents when filling out the Customer Complaint section, please include as much detail as possible.
- For a complete description of alternator types refer to DTB P-B-15.40/56 dated Jan. 31, 2006.
- All parts will be tested. Alternators found to be working properly will be debited back to the dealer. Technical Service Bulletin #
P-07_00-57D Date: 061113
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1089 Stored in Memory

Order No.: P-B-07.00/57d
Supersedes: P-B-07.00/57c dated June 21, 2006
Group: 07
Revision History
d 11/13/06 Applicable Models Updated

c 6/21/06 Applicable Models / Software Version Updated
b 3/8/06 Paragraph 2 Updated
a 1/30/06 Warranty Information Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456
Model 203.052/054/056/076/087/092
Model 209.356/376/456/476
Model 211.056/087/256/287
Model 221.171
Model 230.471
Check Engine Light / Engine Control Module Software Update
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles with check engine light activated and Diagnostic Code P1089 (fuel minor leak). Perform
leak tests as per guidelines in SDS.
If no leak is found, update engine control module software with DAS version 05/06 (or later DAS Release).
NOTE:
After the software flash, perform SCN coding. Refer to Star TekInfo Document S-B-07.61/38i dated July 24, 2006 or S-B-58.00/144b dated July
24, 2006 for procedure. Technical Service Bulletin # 2006110002D Date: 070202
Campaign - ECU Software Update For Hard Start Condition

Campaign No. 2006110002, February 2007
FILE:
Revision History
D 02/02/07 Addition of 4,696 affected vehicles including new model 203.087

C 01/12/07 Update to warranty information repair 3
B 12/16/06 Update to work instructions
A 12/08/06 Update to work instructions and warranty information
SUBJECT:
MODEL 171, MODEL YEAR 2005-2007 MODEL 203, MODEL YEAR 2006-2007 MODELS 209, 211, MODEL YEAR 2006
CHECK ENGINE CONTROL MODULE SOFTWARE VERSION AND UPDATE IF NECESSARY (272 ENGINE)
This Service Campaign has been initiated because DCAG has determined that on the affected vehicles (see VIN range) the software for the engine
control unit needs to be upgraded to correct a potential malfunction which could lead to an incorrect fuel/air mixture at low ambient temperatures.
Under certain conditions, this can have a negative effect on starting the engine.
Please review the Effective Serial Number chart located on the following page.
Included is a sample copy of a letter which owners of the affected vehicles will receive.

- Please check VMI to insure the vehicle is involved and to determine if the vehicle has been previously repaired.
- Please review the entire Service Campaign bulletin.
Approximately 67,471 vehicles are affected.
NOTE:
Every vehicle in the VIN range may not be included in the campaign. VMI must always be checked before performing campaigns to verify that the
campaign is required on a specific vehicle. VMI always overrides the bulletin in reference to a specific vehicle's inclusion in a particular campaign.
Please also note that Recall and Service Campaigns do not expire and may also be performed on a vehicle with a vehicle status indicator.
Procedure
A. CHECK VERSION OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE SOFTWARE
Note - Prior to starting the procedure ensure to:

- Use DAS version 10/2006 with all Add On's or 11/2006 with all Add On's (including 2006-12-11-0665.)
- Follow the steps exactly as described in DAS
- Connect battery charger
1. Connect Star Diagnosis.

2. Check version of engine control module software.
- Follow the DAS path "Control units/ Drive/ ME 9.7- Motor electronics 9.7/ Control unit version."
3. Perform one of the following:

- Model280 in model series 171, 203: If software version is M272_KE_VC7/ VC8/ VC9, proceed to Subject B.
- Model350 in model series 171, 203, 209, 211: If software version is M272_KE_VC6/ VC7, proceed to Subject B.
- If software version is not one of the above versions: Disconnect Star Diagnosis; this campaign has been completed.
B. INSTALL ENGINE CONTROL MODULE SOFTWARE;

VEHICLES WITH M272_KE_VC6: ALSO INSTALL TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE SOFTWARE
1. Install engine control module software.

- Follow the DAS path "Control unit adaptations/ Control unit programming" and on-screen instructions.
NOTE: If the "No newer control module software was found" message appears when attempting to flash the control module, proceed to step
3 (vehicles with M272_KE_VC6 only) or step 4 (all other vehicles).
2. Perform SCN coding of engine control module.

- Follow the DAS path "Initial startup" and on-screen instructions.
3. Vehicles with M272_KE_VC6 only: Install and code transmission control module software.
- Install: Follow the DAS path "Control unit adaptations/ Control unit programming" and on-screen instructions.
- SCN coding: Follow the DAS path "Initial startup" and on-screen instructions.
NOTE: If the "No newer control module software was found" message appears when attempting to flash the control module, proceed to step
4.
4. Disconnect Star Diagnosis.
NOTE:
- In rare instances when flashing the ME9.7 the flash can fail due to network communications traffic on the Engine CAN, leaving the ME9.7 in
'Bootloader mode' If this flash failure occurs, simply pull the fuse(s) for the ESP Control Module and restart the ME9.7 Flash. Removing the
fuse(s) stops the communication of the ESP Control Module and therefore reduces the communications traffic.
- The following allowable labor operation should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair:
Repair 1 (Check only)
Operation: Battery Charger, Connect (with SDS Connected) (02-5058)

Star Diagnosis System (SDS), Connect & Disconnect (02-4762)
Engine Control Unit Software, Check (with DAS Connected) (02-5388)
Repair 2 (Check and install engine control module software)

Engine Control Unit Software, Check (with DAS Connected) (02-5388)
Engine Control Unit Software, Install (after Check) (02-5389)
Control Unit (with SDS Connected), Code (02-5382)
Repair 3 (Check and install engine and transmission control module software - vehicles with M272_KE_VC6 only)

Engine Control Unit Software, Check (with DAS Connected) (02-5388
Engine Control Unit Software, Install (after Check) (02-5389)
Control Unit (with SDS Connected), Code (02-5382)
Transmission Control Unit Software, Install (with DAS Connected) (02-5505)
Control Unit (with SDS Connected), Code (02-5382) Technical Service Bulletin # P-27_60-92 Date: 070209
A/T Controls - TCM 6-5 Downshift Adaptive Value Info.

Order No.: P-B-27.60/92
Supersedes:
Group: 27
SUBJECT:
All Passenger Vehicles with 722.9 (7G-Tronic) Transmission Adaptation Values of the 6-5 Downshift Close to the Negative Limit
In vehicles equipped with the 722.9 (7G-Tronic) transmission, when evaluating the adaptation data in the transmission electronic control module, if it is
noticed that the cycles of the adaptation data of K1 are very far into the negative range on the 6-5 downshift this alone is not cause for a technical repair
if no complaint exists.
Only if the adaptation data of K1 is also at the limit value for the 2-3 shift is there an indication that a technical malfunction exists. For further
information about K1 replacement, refer to Star TekInfo DTB P-B-27.60/88a.
If other complaints exist regarding shift quality, a complete evaluation must be carried out as per the EDAC 722.9 diagnosis tree. Technical Service
Bulletin # P-42_45-61A Date: 061115
Electrical - 'ESP Visit Workshop' Message Displayed

Group: 42
Revision History
a 11/15/06 Additional Part Number Added

SUBJECT:
Model 170.447/449/465/466
Model 202.022/023/024/028/029/033
Model 208.365/370/374/465/470/474
Model 210.020/025/055/065/070/072/074/082/083/265/282
All Model Years
ESP Visit Workshop Displayed in Instrument Cluster
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the message "ESP Visit Workshop" displayed within the instrument cluster and the
following stored fault code listed below, replace the stop lamp switch with a revised part. Reference WIS document AR42.10-P-0040A.
- C1200-S9/1 (Stop Lamp Switch) Plausibility
NOTE:
Refer to EPC for correct model application.
Parts Information
This bulletin has been created and maintained in accordance with MBUSA-SLP S423QH001, Document and Data Control, and MBUSA-SLP
S424HH001, Control of Quality Records. Technical Service Bulletin # P-91_60-78D Date: 061122
Restraints - SRS Lamp ON/DTC's 9103/9123 Stored

Supersedes: P-B-91.60/78c dated Jan. 17, 2006
Group: 91
Revision History

d 11/22/06 Work Instruction and Parts Information Updated
c 1/17/06 Process, Part No. Description and Damage Code Updated
b 12/28/05 VIN Number Corrected
a 12/19/05 Document Order No. Revised
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
SRS Light Illuminated
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the SRS light being illuminated accompanied by either of the diagnostic fault codes
listed below, perform the following procedure. Replacement of the contact spiral is not necessary.
Fault Codes:
1. Remove the clock spring contact. Refer to WIS document AR46.10-P-0200V.
NOTE:
The battery ground cable must be disconnected. If this step is omitted, other faults may be introduced into the vehicle when cutting the SCM
harness.
2. Remove the cover from center console. Refer to WIS document AR68.20-P-2350V.
3. Remove control and operating unit for climate unit. Refer to WIS document AR83.40-P-6350V.
4. Remove COMAND unit. Refer to WIS document AR82.85-P-1000V.
5. Cover fiber optic cable terminal. Refer to WIS document AR82.95-P-0005-01A.
6. Unclip SCM connector from jacket tube by pushing on lock tabs (Figure 1).
7. Pull SCM harness out through opening for center console (Figure 2).
Release lock tab on both sides of connector to remove from bracket
Pull SCM harness out through center console
8. The SCM repair harness is color coded to match the car side of the harness. Pins 1, 8 and 12 of the repair harness SCM connector are brown
wires. Pins 8 and 12 of the car harness SCM connector are brown wires. Pins 8 and 12 cannot be interchanged. There is no wire in terminal 1 of
the car harness SCM connector.
NOTE:
Reference WEB ETM document PE46.10-U-2101TA to confirm pin locations and wire colors.
9. Cutting Procedure, First Time Repair: Locate the brown wire (0.5 BN) connected to terminal 12 of the SCM connector of the vehicle harness and
cut it 30 mm from the end of the connector. Locate the brown wire (0.5 BN) connected to terminal 12 of the SCM connector of the repair harness
and cut it 45 mm from the end of the connector.
10. Cutting Procedure, Previous Repair: If the SCM connector has been previously repaired using individual repair wires as described in DTB P-B
91.60/78c, remove the insulating tape of the repaired harness. Locate the brown (0.5 BN) wire connected to pin 12 of the SCM connector of the
vehicle harness. Cut the wire at the solder connector so that the white pigtail and solder connector are completely removed.
11. Locate the brown wire (0.5 BN) connected to terminal 12 of the SCM connector of the repair harness and cut to the length of the removed pigtail
and solder connector, plus an additional 15 mm for the new solder connector splice.
NOTE:
The new repair harness needs to be spliced directly to the vehicle harness using new solder connectors.
Soldering Procedure:
12. Slip solder connector (A002 546 13 41) onto the cut wire. Strip approximately 15mm of insulation from the repair harness wire and the SCM
harness wire. Braid the 15mm stripped ends of the repair wires and SCM harness wires (Figure 3).
13. Solder the wires in accordance with the specified repair method in WIS document AR54.18-P-01006A see (Figure 4).
Heat solder connector with Hot Air Gun WE58.40Z1007-03A set to 400 degree C until soldering ring has dissolved
14. Repeat procedure for the remaining wires.
NOTE:
The brown (0.75 BN) wire in terminal 1 and the orange (1.0 OR) wire in terminal 2 of the repair harness SCM connector will not be used.
Cut the wires and insulate with fabric tape.
15. Insulate the solder connectors and the repaired harness with fabric tape.
16. Reassemble the vehicle in reverse order.
NOTE:
Replacement of the contact spiral is not necessary. The mounting bolt for the steering wheel must always be replaced.
Parts Information
NOTE:
In Case of Warranty
Operation:
Short test, perform (54-1011)
Airbag line to steering column module, replace (02-4859) Technical Service Bulletin # P-77_30-48 Date: 070122
Body - Water Leaking Into Trunk

Order No.: P-B-77.30/48
Supersedes:
Group: 77
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Water Enters Trunk from Joint Between Base of Rear Windshield and Base of C-Pillar
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding water entering the trunk from the joint between the base of the rear windshield
and the base of the C-pillar (Figure 1, arrows), this may be caused by the seal being not optimally positioned in this area. This can be corrected by
installing an extra pad in this area.
To resolve, perform the following.

1. Remove trunk partition panel, refer to WIS document AR68.50-P-3000V.

2. Move Vario Roof into assembly position, refer to WIS document AR77.50-P-3000-01V.
3. Roughen seal surface in the indicated area (Figure 2, Pos. 3) with sand paper.
4. Apply adhesive to the roughened area (Figure 2, Pos. 3).
5. Remove foil from sealing pad (Figure 2, Pos. 4) and apply to the roughened area along the edge of the rear window frame (Figure 2, Pos. 5).
6. Allow adhesive to flash off for 20 minutes before the Vario Roof is closed for the first time.
7. Remove support and close Vario Roof, refer to WIS document AR68.50-P-3000V.
8. Reinstall trunk partition panel, refer to WIS document AR68.50-P-3000V.
Parts Information
NOTE:
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Water enters trunk from joint between base of rear windshield & base of C-pillar (77-0000)
All work to check for leaks, repair and recheck is all inclusive of the non-time op code. Technical Service Bulletin # 2006110001 Date:
061101
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Routing

Order No.: T-B-46.10/48
Supersedes:
Group: 46
SUBJECT:
Model 164.175/186, Up to VIN A063690
Model 251.165/175, Up to VIN A008835
Steering Wheel Multifunction Buttons Nonfunctional
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of non functional Multifunction Steering Wheel Buttons, the horn plate may need to be
replaced. Amine deposits on the horn plate from the steering wheel foam may cause the horn plate to short circuit and stop functioning. Replacements
horn plates, which are only available on the steering wheel spare part assembly, have protective paintwork to prevent any deposits from forming.
Replace the entire steering wheel assembly as per WIS instructions AR46.10-P-0100GZ. For replacement steering wheel part number, refer to EPC for
correct part number per chassis.Technical Service Bulletin # P-27_60-88A Date: 070116
A/T - Limp Home Mode/Codes 2502/2505/P0894/P2711

Supersedes: P-B-27.60/88 dated Nov. 27, 2006
Group: 27
Revision History
a 1/16/07 Technical Content Revised

SUBJECT:
All Passenger Models Equipped with 722.9 Transmission (7G-Tronic) Fault Codes 2502, 2505, P0894 or P2711
If you receive reports in the above model vehicles of the automatic transmission being in limp-home mode or having no power transfer from the
transmission together with fault codes 2502, 2505 or P0894, P2711, these codes must be processed according to the vehicle symptoms. First, attempts
must be made to reproduce the problem.
If the above fault codes are stored in connection with shift quality complaints, please proceed according to the Diagnostic Tree posted on Star TekInfo
-> EDAC -> Diagnostic Guide for 722.9 NAG 2 (7G-Tronic) Transmission.
If the fault codes are stored together with loss of power transfer, proceed with the below solutions per the respective possible cause.
Cause 1: K1 piston is damaged (adaptation data for the 2-3 shift may be at the positive limit).
Solution 1: If the complaint can only be reproduced for the 2-3 upshift or if third gear can not be reached, there is a defect of the K1 piston.
- Replace the complete multi-disc clutch K1 as per the parts list.
- Reset the adaptation data.
Cause 2: Tolerance in the electrohydraulic control unit (valve body) may not be optimal.
Solution 2: If the K1 multi-disc clutch is not responsible for the concern, replace the electrohydraulic control unit (valve body) and perform initial
startup.
NOTE:
When diagnostic events lead to a transmission or valve body replacement, please refer to DTB P-B-27.00/38d for the proper completion of the
WSG pre-authorization requirements.
Parts InformationTechnical Service Bulletin # P-82_00-260B Date: 070131
Entertainment System - CD's or DVD's Won't Eject

Order No.: P-B-82.00/260b
Supersedes: P-B-82.00/260a dated August 25, 2004
Group: 82
Revision History
b 1/31/07 Applicable Models Updated

a 8/25/04 Content Updated
SUBJECT:
All Passenger Model Vehicles
Model Year 2000 through Current Model Year
CDs and DVDs May Not Be Ejected

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that are equipped with COMAND with CD/DVD drives, CD changer, as well as navigation
processors with a single slot having the below symptoms, please review the possible causes listed below.
Symptoms
1. CDs / DVDs are not always pulled into the player, a light push may need to be applied.
2. CDs / DVDs are not always ejected by the player.
3. If the CD / DVD is forced in, it may not be possible to eject the disk.
4. CD / DVD player does not play the disk even if inserted correctly.
Causes
1. The disk is too thick, does not satisfy the specification thickness tolerance range of 1.1 - 1.5 mm.
2. CDs / DVDs with self-adhesive labels that may become delaminated from the disk in whole or in part due to length expansion of the material
used which results in the disk being out of thickness tolerance.
3. CDs / DVDs with diameter of 8 cm with / without an adapter resulting the in the adapter blocking the pull / eject mechanism.
NOTE:
These causes constitute misuse of the CD / DVD player that are not covered under warranty. Technical Service Bulletin #
P-54_30-179 Date: 061127
Instruments - Menus Not Displayed After Coding

Order No.: P-B-54.30/179
Supersedes:
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Model 211.022/056/072/077/087/090/277/287, As of Model Year 2007 (SA code 807)
Model 219.372/377, As of Model Year 2007 (SA code 807)
Model 221.171/176/179/186
After SCN Coding Instrument Cluster Does Not Display Menus
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of missing menus (i.e. Navigation or Telephone menu) or odometer not displaying in the
instrument cluster after SCN coding, this may caused by the instrument cluster resetting improperly. To resolve, perform a instrument cluster reset via
Star Diagnosis path:
Control units -> information and communication -> instrument cluster -> actuations -> control module reset
NOTE:
As of SDS version 11/06, the issue is rectified for models 171, 211 and 219. As of SDS version 10/06, this issue is rectified for model 221.
Technical Service Bulletin # 200611005B Date: 061201
Campaign - Install Software for Navigation System

Campaign No. 2006110005, December 2006
FILE:
SERVICE:
GROUP 00 OF SERVICE INFORMATION BINDER
Revision History
B 12/01/06 Updates to work instructions

A 11/22/06 Update to Navigation DVD version checking procedure

SUBJECT:
MODELS 164, 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, X164
MODEL YEAR 2005-2007
INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Service Campaign has been initiated because DCAG has determined that certain affected vehicles (see VIN range on the following pages) may
have an earlier version navigation disc installed than that specified. This could in some cases lead to navigation directions based upon non updated map
data. Dealers will update the navigation disc in the affected vehicles as required.
Please review the Effective Serial Number chart located on the following pages, and if necessary, repair the subject vehicles during the vehicle's next
service.

- Please check VMI to insure the vehicle is involved and to determine if the vehicle has been previously repaired.
- Please review the entire Service Campaign bulletin.

NOTE:
Every vehicle in the VIN range may not be included in the campaign. VMI must always be checked before performing campaigns to verify that the
campaign is required on a specific vehicle. VMI always overrides the bulletin in reference to a specific vehicle's inclusion in a particular campaign.
Please also note that Recall and Service Campaigns do not expire and may also be performed on a vehicle with a vehicle status indicator.
Procedure
A. MODELS 171, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230: CHECK VERSION OF NAVIGATION DVD AND UPDATE NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF
NECESSARY
NOTE:
It is not necessary to connect Star Diagnosis to perform this procedure.
1. Check part number of Navigation DVD in vehicle.
NOTE:
On these models the Navigation module is located in the trunk.
- Press Eject button on Navigation module.

- Visually check part number on DVD label.
2. Perform one of the following.

- If part number is BQ 646 0216 (V 2006.1): Reinsert DVD into Navigation module; this campaign has been completed.
- If part number is not the above number: Proceed to next step to update Navigation system.
NOTE:
You must obtain Navigation DVD BQ 646 0216 (V 2006.1) by calling Navteq at 866 MB4 AMAP ( 866 624 2627). Navteq does not require the
VIN for these vehicles.
3. Start vehicle and keep it running for duration of update process.

4. Eject old Navigation DVD from module if present.
5. Use new Navigation DVD to update Navigation system.
- Insert new Navigation DVD into Navigation module.
NOTE:
The DVD is automatically detected and the update process starts.
- Shut off vehicle upon completion of the update process.
NOTE:
The Navigation DVD must remain inside the module from this point forward in order for the Navigation system to operate correctly.
6. Ensure navigation system is functioning correctly after update.
NOTE: The replaced Navigation DVD for the above models must be returned through the standard process.
B. MODELS 164, 203, 209, 251, X164: CHECK VERSION OF NAVIGATION DVD AND UPDATE NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF
NECESSARY
NOTE:
NOTE:
On these models the Navigation drive is located inside the head unit.
- Press Eject button on head unit to eject DVD from "Navigation" slot.
- Visually check part number on DVD label.

- If part number is BQ 646 0220 (V 2006.1): Reinsert DVD into Navigation drive; this campaign has been completed.
- If part number is not the above number: Proceed to next step to update Navigation system.
NOTE:
You must obtain Navigation DVD BQ 646 0220 (V 2006.1) by calling Navteq at 866 MB4 AMAP ( 866 624 2627). Navteq does not require the
VIN for these vehicles.

4. Eject old Navigation DVD from drive if present.
- Insert new Navigation DVD into Navigation drive.
NOTE:
- Shut off vehicle upon completion of the update process.
NOTE: The Navigation DVD must remain inside the drive from this point forward in order for the Navigation system to operate correctly.
NOTE:
The replaced Navigation DVD for the above models must be returned through the standard process.
C. UPDATE NAVIGATION SYSTEM (MODEL 221 ONLY)
NOTE:
You must obtain the correct DVD per VIN by filling out the form and either fax to Navteq at: 888 329 4223 or scan and email at:
[email protected]. For reliability, we encourage you to fax in the form. The DVD will be sequentially numbered according to the VIN you
provide in the form. If you have more than one vehicle listed in the campaign in your dealership, please submit multiple VINS in a single form,
Navteq will mail you one DVD per VIN entered.
NOTE:
Prior to starting procedure ensure to:
- Connect battery charger
- Turn off ignition and all electrical consumers
- Turn ignition key to second position
- Follow the order of steps exactly as outlined below
1. Power on head unit.
CAUTION:
Ensure that slot #1 in the DVD changer is empty prior to inserting the Navigation DVD.
2. Press Button 1 of the DVD changer (A, Figure 1) and insert the Navigation DVD (part number A 221 827 30 59 (v 3.0)) into the changer (B).
3. Press COMAND controller to confirm the "Disc Drive Audio Format Unknown" message.
4. Press COMAND controller to confirm the "Proceed with Update" message.
NOTE:
The update process takes approximately 30 minutes to complete. The technician is not required to be present during the process and may
perform other tasks while the process is running. The update process run time is not included in the labor time paid under this Service
Campaign.
5. Press COMAND controller to acknowledge completion of update process.

6. Press Button 1 to eject Navigation DVD and place it in DVD case.
NOTE:
This Navigation DVD is property of MBUSA; it must remain with the vehicle/customer after the update process has been completed.
Reproduction is prohibited!
Parts Information
NOTE:
- Please be aware that only the part number(s) referenced in the Campaign Bulletin is approved for use to repair the vehicle. Repairs performed
using any other part(s) will not have been performed in accordance with the campaign. Accordingly, warranty claims submitted with reference to
an improper part number(s) will be denied.
- The following allowable labor operation should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair:
Repair 1 (All models except 221 - Check only)
Operation: Navigation-DVD, Check/Update if Necessary (02-5539)
Repair 2 (All models except 221 - Check and update)
Operation: Navigation-DVD, Check/Update if Necessary (02-5539)

Repair 3 (Model 221)
Operation: Battery Charger, Connect (02-5058)

Map Software for Navigation System, Update (02-5540) Technical Service Bulletin # P-68_30-61 Date: 061127
Body - Fuel Tank Cover Noise

Order No.: P-B-68.30/61
Supersedes:
Group: 68
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Fuel Tank Cover Noise
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding noise from the area of the fuel tank cover in the trunk, this may be due to
looseness in the trim panel due to the square nuts settling after assembly. Additionally, a gap may be present between the partition wall and the
longitudinal frame rail (Figure 1, arrow).
1. Remove center trunk trim panel, refer to WIS document AR68.30-P-4810V.

2. If a gap is present between the partition wall and the longitudinal frame rail, use washers as a shim to fill this gap.
3. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 6 Nm.
4. Increase the torque of all bolts in the lower cross member area (Figure 2, circle) from 6 Nm to 10 Nm (note that only 1 of these is circled).
5. Reinstall center trunk trim panel, refer to WIS document AR68.30-P-4810V.
NOTE:
Steps 2 through 4 of this repair are non-time claimable under Group 68 with a maximum time allowed of 0.2 hrs. with a separate time punch.
A/T Controls - Limp Home Mode/Harsh Engagement

Order No.: P-B-27.00/95
Supersedes:
Group: 27
SUBJECT:
All Passenger Vehicles Equipped with Transmission 722.9
Trans. in Limp-Home Mode or Harsh Engagement After Programming/SCN Coding
If a vehicle equipped with a 722.9 transmission goes into limp-home mode after performing SCN coding and/or programming of the transmission
control module; or if after performing these actions the transmission engages harshly, there can be two causes for this issue. Scan the transmission
control module for the below fault / event codes.
Event Codes: 0602, 1644, 2010 and/or 2011
Note:
Do not perform a road test! This may cause transmission damage.
1. Cause 1: SCN coding was not accepted by the transmission control module. This condition can be confirmed by looking at the following menu
within the transmission control module: Transmission Control Module --> Control Unit adaptations --> SCN Coding --> Display of coding data
If the coding reads "NO VALUE", the transmission control module must be recoded again until it is confirmed that the coding has been accepted
by the transmission control module. This is confirmed when a four digit code is displayed as a coding value.
2. Cause 2: The coding was accepted by the transmission control module, but the vehicle is in limp home mode due to the presence of the stored
fault and/or event codes. In this case, simply erase the stored codes.
Note:

A/T - No Power Output From A/T


Supersedes: P-B-27.35/52 dated February 2, 2005
Group: 27
Revision History
a 3/28/07 Applicable Models Updated
SUBJECT:
All Passenger Models Equipped with 7G-Tronic (722.9) Transmission
No Transfer of Power from Automatic Transmission 722.9
In the above model vehicles if after replacing the electro-hydraulic control unit on automatic transmission 722.9 (7G-Tronic) you experience the below
conditions, this may be caused by an improper installation of the supply pipe for the multi-disc brake B3.
^ No gear can be selected in transmission mode "S" and there is no power flow in the transmission
^ In transmission mode "C" the vehicle can start off as usual.
To resolve, remove the electro-hydraulic control unit as described in WIS document AR27.19-P-0200w.
Before reinstallation, install the supply pipe (Figure 1) per WIS document AR27.19-P-0200w, step 6. Replacement parts are only necessary if the
original pipe was damaged during the original installation of the valvebody.
Parts Information
A/T - Selection Range Sensor Learning Not Possible

Supersedes: P-B-27.60/64 dated Dec. 13, 2005
Group: 27
Revision History

SUBJECT:
All Passenger Models Equipped with 7G-Tronic (722.9) Transmission
Learning in Selection Range Sensor Not Possible After EHS Replacement
In the above model vehicles, after removing/installing the electrohydraulic control unit (EHS), learning in the selection range sensor is not possible if
the retaining bolt of the detent plate was not inserted into the plastic bracket of the selector range valve (Figure 1). During initial start-up with Star
Diagnosis, the message "The prerequisites are not fulfilled or the peripherals are not operational" is displayed, although the shift rod has been correctly
adjusted. To resolve, remove/reinstall EHS being sure to insert bolt into bracket on valve and proceed to teach the sensor using Star Diagnosis.
Electrical - Steering Wheel Buttons Non-Functional

Date: March 8, 2007
Supersedes: P-B-46.10/27 dated August 30, 2005
Group: 46
Revision History
a 1/5/07 Remedy Note Added and Part Number Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, All Model Years
Model 211.026/056/065/070/076/082/083/087/256/265/276/282/283/287
with code 805
Multifunction Steering Wheel Buttons Non Functional
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of non functional Multifunction Steering Wheel Buttons and one or both of the following
fault codes are stored in the memory of the Steering Column Module (SCM), the Local Interconnect Network (LIN) transceiver in the SCM may have
been damaged due to Electro Static Discharge (ESD). Follow the procedure below to replace the SCM with a version with improved ESD protection.
^ DTC 9325 - [Fault in communication with component Multifunction steering wheel]

^ DTC 9340 - [The signal line of component Multifunction steering wheel has Short circuit or the component is defective]
Note:
For vehicles with SRS complaints, please refer to STAR TekInfo documents within Group No. 91.60 referencing SRS. Changing the SCM
contact does not provide a remedy to the LIN transceiver being damaged due to Electro Static Discharge (ESD).
1. Using STAR Diagnosis, verify that the above fault codes are stored in the fault memory of the SCM, by navigating to the following menu Control
Units --> Information and Communication --> SCM --> Fault codes.
2. Remove and replace the SCM as per the following WIS documents:
^ 171-AR46.10-P-0300V
^ 211-AR46.10-P-0300TA
3. Follow the initial start-up procedure as required by STAR Diagnosis by navigating to the menu Control Units --> Information and
Communication --> SCM --> Initial start-up.
Parts Information
Note:
Engine/Steering - ECO Harness Replacement Information

Date: June 26, 2007
Order No.: P-B-01.10/17
Group: 01
Revision History:
6/26/07 Initial issue
SUBJECT:
MODELS 171
(with Engine 272), 203, 209, 211, and 219 (with Engine 272 or 642)
Potentially Missing Connection to Proportioning Valve of the ECO-Power Steering Pump when Exchanging Engines
When replacing engines on vehicles with an ECO power steering pump, the wiring harness on the new engine also has to be replaced. Order the wiring
harness as outlined in Parts Information.
Note:
When replacing engines 272 or 642 on the above models, the connection of the proportioning value of the ECO-power steering pump may be
missing on the engine wiring harness of the new or reconditioned engine.
Repair Description
1. Check to see if an ECO power steering pump is installed. The ECO power steering pump has an electrical connection (see Figure 1, arrow) and
can also be recognized via the engine number (see Table 1).
2. If an ECO power steering pump is installed, replace the engine wiring harness of the reconditioned engine with the appropriate one in Parts
Information.
3. If an ECO power steering pump is not installed on the existing engine being replaced, the wiring harness must not be changed.
Warning!
The ECO power steering pump must be connected; otherwise a too light steering feel can occur around the steering wheel center position at
higher speeds, which could lead to diminished handling capacity.
Parts Information
Drivetrain - Front Axle Grinding Noise Diagnosis

Date: July 2007
Order No.: P-B-33.20/030
Suspension
Group: 33
SUBJECT:
MODEL 171, 203 (except 4MATIC), 208, 209, 210 (except 4MATIC), 211 (except 4MATIC), 215, 219, 220 (except 4MATIC), 221 (except
4MATIC), 230
MODEL YEAR ALL
GUIDELINES FOR DIAGNOSING GRINDING NOISES FROM FRONT AXLE
Some wheel bearings returned to the Quality Evaluation Center (QEC) with warranty damage type "noisy," are found not defective after testing.
To properly diagnose and to help avoid misdiagnosis, follow the guideline in cases of noise perceived to be coming from wheel bearings.
Tire noise mistaken for wheel bearing noise is also addressed in the guideline.
Refer to the following WIS documents for adjusting wheel bearing play.
^ AR33.20-P-0300V, Model 171
^ AR33.20-P-0300A, Model 203 (except 203.08/09/28/29), 208, 209, 210 (except 210.08/28), 211 (except 211.08/09/28/29), 215, 220 (except
220.08/18), 230
^ AR33.20-P-0300TX, Model 219
^ AR33.20-P-0300SX, Model 221

Procedure Flow Chart

Interior - Seat Noise Complaints

Date: July 31, 2007
Order No.: S-B-91.00/37
Supercedes:
Group: 91
SUBJECT:
Model Year-All
Models All
Repairs for Noise Complaints Regarding Seats
This bulletin addresses complaints regarding noisy seats. Follow the steps to ensure that the problem is fixed correctly.
A. Repair Instructions
1. To better analyze the seat noises, maintain the customer's original seat positions, including cushion angles and backrest positions. It is a good idea
to also store the customer's seat positions in vehicle memory.
Note:
Seat noises can depend on individual seat positions involving the backrest and cushions as well as the manner in which customers enter and
sit in the vehicle.
2. Analyze the noise problem with the customer present. Note their interpretations of various seat adjustments and resulting sounds from each seat
and back rest positions.
3. Before performing any adjustments, be sure to unbolt the seat from the vehicle while keeping the electrical seat harness connected.
4. With the seat unbolted, use the seat control switch to move the seats over the entire adjustment ranges; i.e., all the way forward, back, up, down,
etc.
5. Bolt the seat back into the vehicle. The majority of complaints will be remedied by simply loosening and refastening the seats.
6. If noise still exists, remedy with felt and lubrication as specified in the Noise Kit (see Parts Information). Use only the parts from this kit.
Parts InformationTechnical Service Bulletin # P-27_60-80A Date: 070808
Engine Controls - Code 061B After Reprogramming

Supersedes: P-B-27.60/80 dated August 30, 2006
Group: 27
Revision History
Revision Date purpose
a 8/8/07 Addition of Note Pertaining to Fault Code
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456
Model 203.052/054/056
Model 209.356/372/456/472
Model 211.056/072/256
Model 219.372
Model 221.171
Model 230.471
After Programming Engine and/or Transmission Control Units, Fault Code 061B Stored in Transmission Control Unit
If you encounter the situation described in the above model vehicles, the cause may be a torque interface issue between the engine and
transmission control modules.
To resolve, check for and install newer software for the engine control module using SDS and perform SCN coding of the engine control module
as well. Perform quick test and erase fault code.
Note:
If the fault code 061B reappears, it can be ignored. This is not cause for any parts replacement.
Note:
If no newer software is available for the engine control module, simply perform the SCN coding of the engine control module.Technical
Service Bulletin # P-80_57-38B Date: 070509
Interior - Seat Position Wrong Using Easy Entry/Exit

Date: May 9, 2007
Supersedes: P-B-80.57/38a dated Sept. 12, 2006
Group: 80
Revision History
b 5/9/07 171 Models and Appropriate Warranty Information
a 9/12/06 211 Models and Appropriate Part Numbers Added
11/23/05 Initial Issue
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Model 203.040/061/064/065/076/081/084/261/264/281/284/740/747/764
Model 209.365/375/376/465/475/476
Model 211.026/065/070/076/082/083/265/282/283
With Code 275 (Electric Seat Adjustment with Memory Package)
Seat Moves to Incorrect Position When Using Easy Entry/Exit Feature
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles with the below symptoms, this may be due to a software error in the Electronic Ignition
Switch (EIS). The EIS may be sending the incorrect key memory block number, which would move the driver side seat to the incorrect position.
^ After entering the vehicle and inserting the key in the ignition, the driver side seat adjustment during Easy Entry/Exit activation does not move to
the location stored in memory.
^ No stored or present fault codes in control units used in executing the Easy Entry/Exit feature.
To resolve, replace the EIS as per WIS document AR46.10-P-0810P with one of the part numbers listed below (or its successor).
Note:
For vehicles listed above as of model year 2006 (with code 806), the Easy Entry/Exit feature has been modified in the instrument cluster. In this
modified feature, only the steering column will move. The seat will not move during Easy Entry/Exit activation. Also, the user can only select Easy
Entry/Exit either "On" or "Off" in the instrument cluster display. New spare parts are also affected by this change. Please ensure the instrument
cluster installed in the vehicle has the capabilities of moving the seat in the Easy Entry/Exit mode.
Parts Information
Note:
May 9, 2007. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty, the table.
Body - Structural Adhesive Availability

Date: June 2007
Supercedes:
Group: 00
SUBJECT:
MODEL 171, 211, 216, 219, 221
Body Adhesive
The adhesive Betamate 2096 from Dow is now available under the replacement part no. A 009 989 36 71. The quality of this adhesive is identical
to that in the repair kit A 215 986 00 00 (3M DP490), but it is more favorably priced.
The pack size of approx. 50 ml is the same.
The new adhesive kit A 009 989 36 71 must be used for the repair procedures described in all WIS which require body adhesive.
The structural adhesive must be applied using the adhesive metering gun W 220 589 03 63 00.
Workshop Equipment
Special Tools
Body - Replacement Sheet Metal With Seam Sealer

Date: July 2007
Order No.: P-B-97.00/03
Group: 97
SUBJECT:
MODELS 170, 171, 202, 203, 204, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 216,
219, 220, 221, 230, 463
Introduction of Replacement Parts with Seam Sealant
In order to ensure a uniform quality standard, as of January 2007 sheet metal replacement parts with seam sealant will be delivered in stages via the
GLC. This affects hoods, doors, trunk lids and tailgates.
The sheet metal replacement parts for models 164, 204, and 251 have been supplied with seam sealant since their market launch.
A/T - Throttle/Brake Pedal Application Precaution

Date: August 2007
Order No.: S-B-27.00/101
Supercedes:
Group: 27
SUBJECT:
MODEL ALL WITH TRANSMISSIONS 722.4/5/6/9
MODEL YEAR ALL
DO NOT OPERATE THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND BRAKE PEDAL SIMULTANEOUSLY
NOTICE!
Operating the accelerator pedal and brake pedal simultaneously to heat up the automatic transmission fluid more quickly for the purpose of
testing or performing repairs on the transmission has adverse consequences on the transmission and torque converter.
Thermal overload on the transmission and torque converter will result from simultaneously operating the accelerator pedal and brake pedal.
Do not operate the accelerator pedal and brake pedal simultaneously.

Electrical - Connector Repair Information

Date: May 22, 2007
Supersedes: P-B-54.18/98 dated Sept. 10, 2003
Group: 54
Revision History
a 5/22/07 Applicable Models and Content Updated
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 203, 209, 211, 219, 221, and 230 Vehicles
Work on Electrical Connectors
For the above model vehicles, please note than when disconnecting electrical couplings or connectors the battery only needs to be disconnected if this
is specified in the associated test and/or repair documents in WIS.Technical Service Bulletin # P-83_00-97A Date: 070924
A/C - Fluorescent Dye Leak Testing

Group: 83
Revision History
a 9/24/07 Updated to Include Diagnostic Tree Information
SUBJECT:
Air Conditioning Not Cooling / Leak Test Using Fluorescent Dye
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the air conditioning not cooling, temperature fluctuations or noisy compressor operation,
the cause could be low refrigerant level. Refer to the applicable diagnostic tree in the Vehicle Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning (HVAC) Manual
found on STAR TekInfo --> EDAC --> Non EDAC Guides. The refrigeration system should be checked for leakage using fluorescent dye as per the
instructions supplied with the leak detection equipment. Please refer to the MBUSA Standard Service Equipment Program (SSEP) catalog
(1-888-458-4040).
Note:
In order to ensure compatibility with all components and materials in the AC system the only approved tracer dye additive to be used is
manufactured by Spectronics Corp. /Tracer Products. If other products are used, warranty submissions could be subject to debit.
Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Squeal

Order No.: P-B-42.10/79
Supercedes:
Group: 42
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456
All Model 203 Vehicles
Model 209.356/365/372/375/376/456/465/472/475/476/477
Model 215.374/375/376/379
Model 220.067/170/174/175/176/178/179/183/184
Model 230.471/474/475/476/477/479
Front / Rear Brakes Squeal When Braking
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles where either the front and/or rear brakes squeal, perform the following to resolve.
Note:
^ Bed in the brake pads in the course of a normal road test if new brake pads are installed. Do not perform any special "bedding-in"
operations.
^ Brake squeal does not usually necessitate the replacement of the brake disks. The only time the brake disks can potentially be the cause of
the brake squeal is when it is seriously warped or heavily scored.
^ A damping plate is adhered to the backing plate of the brake pads. This adhered joint must fix the damping plate to the backing plate over
its entire surface area in order to guarantee effective noise damping. If the adhered joint has become partially or entirely detached and the
damping plate can be lifted off as a result, the brake pads must be replaced.
^ If the brake pads exhibit signs of excessive heat (white or red discoloration at the edges), this is due to excessively high thermal stress on
the brakes (perhaps as a result of a misuse). In this case, the brake pads must be replaced because satisfactory noise damping can no
longer be guaranteed.
Front Brakes
1. Reproduce squealing noises when braking and ensure that the squealing noise is coming from the front wheel brake.
Note:
For vehicles with 4-piston fixed caliper brake on the front axle, continue and perform steps 2 through 4. For all other brake variants, resume
with step 5.
2. Check the version of the brake pads by comparing the designation number engraved on the backing plate (Figure 1) with the parts information
table. Replace brake pads and install the latest version if necessary.
3. Check the version of the removable damping plate (silver colored) and replace if necessary. The current version of the damping plate has
semicircular cutouts.
4. Check the version of the pressure spring. The current version of the pressure spring has retaining tabs (Figure 2). Replace the pressure spring if
necessary (corresponding to damage code 42116 36).
5. Check and see if the brake pads can be easily moved. Clean the brake pad guides if necessary.
6. Apply brake paste to the pads/caliper based on the information shown for the particular application.
7. If new pads were not installed and the problem still persists, replace the brake pads. Refer to EPC for the latest part number. Ensure to follow the
above instructions (step 6) for proper greasing location per application.
8. For Model 211/215/219/220/230 vehicles, install dampers in pistons of front brake calipers. Ensure that the rounded part of the piston damper(s)
is inserted first for 4-piston fixed caliper brakes (corresponding to damage code 42186 36).
Note:
Refer to the WIS documents shown above for instructions on replacing the brake pads.
Rear Brakes
1. Reproduce squealing noises when braking and ensure that the squealing noise is coming from the rear wheel brake.
2. Check and see if the brake pads can be easily moved. Clean the brake pad guides if necessary.
Figure 3 and 4
3. Apply brake paste to the pads/caliper based on the table shown above for the particular application.
4. If the problem persists replace the brake pads, refer to EPC for the latest part number. Ensure to follow the above instructions (step 3) for proper
greasing location per application.
Note:
Refer to the WIS documents shown for instructions on replacing the brake pads.
Parts Information
Note:
September 20, 2007. Please refer to Netstar ?? Star TekInfo ?? Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

Technical Service Bulletin # P-83_25-76C Date: 070928
A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative/DTC 09460 Set

Supersedes: P-B-83.25/76b dated March 9, 2007
Group: 83
Revision History
C 9/28/07 Work Instructions, Part Number

and Warranty Information Updated
b 3/9/07 Applicable Models and Content Updated
a 9/20/06 Addition of Note Pertaining to DTC Code 9460
SUBJECT: All 171, 203, 209, 211, 219 and 230 Models
Heater Blower Motor Stops Running
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the heater blower motor stops running, the blower motor regulator should be replaced.
The related symptoms for this condition are as follows:
1. During high blower demand, such as defrost or maximum cooling, the blower starts up and shuts off for approximately 90 seconds. The blower
tries to restart and may shut off again. This cycle may repeat.
2. Manual adjustment of the blower speed and the blower shuts off for 60 seconds and then restarts.
3. Once the blower has shut off by itself, cycling the ignition off and back on may allow the blower to operate again.
4. Diagnostic fault code DTC 9460 may be present.
These conditions may be caused by a high blower output requested by the climate system and the blower regulator overload protection engaging
unnecessarily. Follow the procedures below for corrective actions.
1. Replace the blower regulator as per the WIS document shown.
2. Additional procedures for 211 and 219 are shown above.
3. Following replacement, verify correct operation of the heater blower.
Parts Information
Note:
September 28, 2007. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

Technical Service Bulletin # P-32_25-19D Date: 071018
Suspension - Shock/Strut Replacement Guidelines

Supersedes: P-B-32.25/19c dated July 18, 2007
Group: 32
Revision History
d 10/18/07 Paragraph 1 Updated (statement of Tech. Documentation and EPC)
C 7/18/07 Addition of Note Pertaining to 211/219 Airmatic Struts (Section 1)
a 3/15/06 Applicable Models and Replacement Procedure for ABC Struts Updated
SUBJECT:
All Model 124, 129, 140, 170, 171, 201, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 219, 220 & 230
Replacement Procedure of Shock Absorbers and Suspension Struts
It has been noted that shock absorbers and suspension struts are repeatedly being replaced in pairs for no justifiable reason. When a repair
requires the replacement of a shock absorber or suspension strut, only replace the damaged part, unless otherwise noted in technical
documentation or the Electronic Parts Catalog (EPC).
Note:
There will be increased focus on the compliance with these rules when performing warranty parts inspection. DO NOT replace non-damaged
shock absorbers or suspension struts. Warranty claims will be denied in cases where a shock absorber or suspension strut was replaced
needlessly.
1) Guideline for Airmatic air suspension struts (Model 211, 219, 220) ABC suspension struts (Model 215, 220, 230) and ADS suspension struts
(Model 129, 140, 210)
Note:
Not applicable to AMG 211 and 219 Models (211.076/077/276/277 and 219.376/377)
Damage to one suspension strut does not justify the simultaneous replacement of the opposite suspension strut. This also applies to complaints of
noise, such as thumping. In such cases, thorough diagnostics to determine the responsible suspension strut should be performed by driving each
side of the vehicle on a road surface corresponding to the customer complaint. Only the affected suspension strut should be replaced.
Prior to replacing the suspension strut in the semi-supporting systems ABC, Airmatic air suspension, or ADS, relieve the tension on the
respective suspension strut to check whether this remedies the noise complaint. To do so, loosen both the upper and lower mountings on the rear
suspension struts and retighten to the prescribed torque with the vehicle resting on its wheels.
Experience has revealed that for the front suspension strut, it is sufficient to carry out this procedure on the upper mounting only.
Since it can be assumed that a new Airmatic/ADS suspension strut installed in a high mileage vehicle, would not match with the used suspension
strut and thus impair ride comfort and or vehicle dynamics, it is then recommended that these components be replaced in pairs only after the
vehicle has reached a mileage of at least 50,000 miles (80,000 km).
In contrast to Airmatic/ADS suspension struts or conventional shock absorbers, the ABC suspension struts do not have to be replaced in pairs at
high mileages (50,000 miles /80,000 km) as the damping of the vehicle body is taken over by the active actuation of the plunger.
2a) Guidelines for conventional shock absorbers (Models 171, 203, 209, 211 and successor models)
Damage to one shock absorber does not justify the simultaneous replacement of the opposite shock absorber. This also applies to complaints of
noise, such as thumping. In such cases, thorough diagnostics to determine the responsible shock absorber should be performed by driving each
side of the vehicle on a corresponding road surface. Only the affected shock absorber should be replaced.
Since it can be assumed that a new shock absorber installed in a high mileage vehicle, would not match with the used shock absorber and thus
impair ride comfort and or vehicle dynamics, it is then recommended that these components be replaced in pairs only after the vehicle has reached
a mileage of at least 50,000 miles (~80,000 km).
2b) Guideline for conventional shock absorbers (Model 124, 129, 170, 201, 202, 208, 210)
For these models, there exist various shock absorber variants. Thus requiring that the conventional shock absorbers be replaced only in pairs.
Drivetrain - Rear Axle Surface Corrosion

Order No.: P-B-35.30/03
Supersedes:
Group: 35
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 221 and 230
Vehicles Surface Corrosion on the Rear Axle Shafts
If surface corrosion on the rear axle half-shafts/axle-shafts is noticed on the above model vehicles, the surface corrosion is aesthetic in nature and has no
influence to vehicle functionality. Parts replacement for surface corrosion is not a warrantable repair.
Brakes - Whistle/Click/Thud Noise From Footwell Area

Order No.: P-B-43.10/04
Supersedes:
Group: 43
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Model 221.171/176/177/179/186
Noises from Driver Footwell When Driving in "DISTRONIC" or "SPEEDTRONIC" Mode
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of a whistling/clicking/thudding noise from the driver footwell area when driving in
Distronic or Speedtronic (cruise control) mode, the cause may be due to noises coming from the Brake Assist System (BAS) activation of the solenoid
valve in the brake booster. Since the Distronic and Speedtronic cruise control systems need to regulate speed, it may be necessary to actively increase
brake pressure. Activating the solenoid valve will apply brake pressure but it will also vibrate at a high frequency when actuated. Upon releasing brake
pressure, the solenoid is de-energized and may cause a thudding/clicking/striking noise. Please perform the following to reduce the noise.
1. Ensure that the brake booster is not under stress.
2. Loosen the threaded connection of the brake booster so that the housing of the brake booster is relieved of tension. Refer to WIS document
AR43.10-P-0350V (171) or AR43.10-P-0350SX (221).
3. Retighten threaded connection.
4. Fill the gap (approx. 1 cm) in the opening in the firewall with felt to soundproof the area.
Note:
This will not fully eliminate the problem but the sound will be reduced and masked.
On model 221 vehicles, the software for the ABR control unit can be updated to prevent the solenoid from vibrating. Using Star Diagnosis
navigate to menu item "Control Unit Adaptations" in the ABR control unit and follow the instructions within DAS.
Parts Information
Note:
October 26, 2007. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

Engine Controls - Mil ON/DTC P0217 Stored in Memory

Order No.: P-B-07.61/78
Supersedes:
Group: 07
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456
Model 203.052/054/056/087/092
Model 204.054/056
Model 209.356/372/456/472
Model 211.056/072/087/090/256/287
Model 216.371
Model 219.372
Model 221.171/186
Model 230.471
Check Engine Light Illuminated / Fault Code P0217 Stored in Engine Control Unit
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the check engine light is illuminated with fault code P0217 stored in the engine control
unit, the cause may be the software in the control unit. Other possible stored fault codes may be P0868, P0872, P0190, P0208, P1347 or P2182. To
resolve, perform the following.
Note:
Vehicles produced as of 11/2005 have the modified software version installed.
1. Check the throttle valve for mechanical faults and check intake tract for residues. If there is no mechanical fault, the throttle valve actuator is not
the cause and must not be replaced. Proceed to step 2.
2. Program the engine control unit with the latest available ME software in DAS.
Note:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair. This information has been
generated on September 28, 2007. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

ESP System - ESP Message Displayed on Cluster

Supersedes: P-B-42.45/60b dated August 29, 2005
Group: 42
Revision History
C 10/26/07 Applicable Models, Repair Procedure and Warranty Information Updated
b 8/29/05 Parts Information Footnote Revised
a 8/22/05 Applicable Models and Codes Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 171.456/473, MY 2005-2006
Model 211.026/056/065/070/076/082/083/087/256/265/282/283/287, MY 2005-2006
Model 219.375/376, MY 2005-2006
ESP Visit Workshop Displayed in Instrument Cluster

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of ESP Visit Workshop" displayed within the instrument clusters multifunction display in
conjunction with the fault codes listed in the table, perform the following:
1. Check and compare the actual values within the steering column (SCM) module and the ESP control unit to see if the steering angle sensor has
been installed correctly. If not, reinstall the steering angle sensor.
2. Check the CAN line and the X connector; repair the line if it is necessary.
3. Replace the steering angle sensor if it is determined to be defective.
Note:
Refer to the WIS documents shown for removal and installation instructions.
Parts Information
Note:
October 26, 2007. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

Body - Paint Damage on Trunk Lid
Order No.: P-B-98.10/19
Supersedes:
Group: 98
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 199, 203, 204, 209, 211, 216, 219, 221 and 230
Damage to Painted Surface on Trunk Lid
It has come to our attention that a large number of warranty claims have been submitted for paint repair on the trunk lid due to incorrect length license
plate attachment screws. Warranty claims with paint damage from the use of incorrect fastening hardware are not covered. The screws are to be used for
license plate installation. Please see the table shown for the correct license plate attachment screws.
Keyless Entry - LED on Transmitter Key Not Functioning

Order No.: P-B-80.35/43
Supersedes:
Group: 80
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 220 and 230
Equipped with Drive Authorization System (DAS3) (FBS3)
Battery Indicator (red LED) on Transmitter Key Not Functioning
If you receive customer reports on the above model vehicles that when using a new transmitter key for the first time the battery indicator is
nonfunctional (lock/unlock is unaffected), reinsert the key into the ignition a second time. Proper operation of the key is restored automatically once the
key is taught into the vehicle.
Interior - Dirty/Spotted Plastic Interior Trim Parts

Supersedes: P-B-72.18/35a dated October 13, 2005
Group: 72
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Model 171 and 204 Vehicles
Dirty/Spotted Plastic Interior Trim Parts
For cleaning the interior trim panels, do not use any dry, rough or hard cloths as the surface of the interior trim panels can be scratched or damaged due
to chafing by these incompatible cloths. Our recommendation, for each of the remedies below, would be the use of the Mercedes-Benz microfiber cloth.
Parts should not be replaced under warranty. Care in cleaning dirty or spotted plastic interior trim parts (instrument panel, center console, door paneling
etc.), is as follows:
Light Contamination:
Clean the plastic parts with a moist (use only clean water), fluff-free cloth (e.g. microfiber cloth)
Moderate Contamination:
Clean the plastic parts with a moist (use only clean water), fluff-free cloth (e.g. microfiber cloth). A small amount of non-abrasive hand cleanser can
also be applied to the cloth.
Severe Contamination:
Clean the plastic parts with a moist (use only clean water), fluff-free cloth (e.g. microfiber cloth). Apply a solvent-free and non-corrosive cleaning agent
to the cloth, we recommend the Mercedes-Benz cockpit-car care product for this.
Warning!
After cleaning, the surface can briefly assume another shading. In this case wait for the surface to dry.
Note:
No parts should be exchanged with reference to this condition!
Parts Information
Instruments - Displaying Vehicle Voltage Instructions

Supersedes: P-B-54.30/73a dated June 10, 2003

Group: 54
Revision History
b 12/21/07 Applicable Models and Instructions Added
a 6/10/03 Applicable Models and Instructions Added
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221 and 230
Display of Vehicle Electrical Network Voltage in the Instrument Cluster
In the above models, electrical network voltage may be displayed through the instrument cluster's multi-function display.
For model 203 (up to MY04), 215, and 220
1. Using the steering wheel mounted multifunction buttons, ensure that the vehicle's main odometer is displayed within the instrument cluster
multifunction display.
2. Turn key to position one in the electronic ignition switch
3. Within 1.5 seconds of turning to position one, press the instrument cluster's reset button three times
4. An audible sound will be heard and the vehicle voltage will appear in multifunction display
For model 171,203 (as of MY05), 209, 211, 219, and 230
1. Using the steering wheel mounted multifunction buttons, ensure that the vehicle's main odometer, or temperature/speed display (for
209/211/219), is shown within the instrument cluster multifunction display.
3. Press the reset button on the instrument cluster three times
4. An audible sound will be heard and the vehicle voltage will appear in multifunction display
For model 204, 216 and 221
2. Ensure standard display is shown in the instrument cluster multifunction display
3. Hold down the "send" key on the steering wheel
4. While still holding the "send" key, hold down the "Ok" key on the steering wheel.
5. After approximately 3 seconds, new menu selections will appear in the multifunction display
6. Select "vehicle data" in the multifunction display
7. The vehicle voltage will appear in multifunction display
Note:
generated on December 21, 2007. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

Steering - Steering Gear Apparent Leakage Information

Supersedes: P-B-46.20/57 dated June 21, 2007
Group: 46
Revision History
a 11/27/07 Updated to Include Model 204
SUBJECT:
All 171, 203, 204, 209, 210, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221 and 230 Models
Equipped with Rack-and-Pinion Steering Steering Gear Leaking Under Dust Cap on Control Head
During inspection of returned power steering racks, we have encountered cases where steering racks have been replaced due to leaking" but which
prove to exhibit merely "sweating" or a film of grease under the dust cap on the top of the control head.
If during power steering complaint diagnosis, moisture on the surface of the steering gear under the dust cap is noticed in a localized section, this is
considered sweating due to grease liquefying and not leakage.
This moisture can be caused by:
^ Grease under the dust cap to keep dirt (dust) away from the steering system.
^ Heat from the engine causes some of the grease under the cap to liquefy which produces a slight but noticeable moisture/grease film on the surface
and does not indicate leakage, nor is it a cause for power steering complaints.
Figures 1, 2 and 3 contain examples of steering racks that are "sweating" in this area. It can be seen that, on the sweating steering gear, only the top of
the control head is wet on one side (i.e. not all round). No droplets form (no run marks etc.) that run down the steering gear/control head. For this
reason, do not expect any contamination with grease/oil in the surrounding area or on the ground. The grease (film) adheres to the steering gear
housing.
In contrast, if the steering is genuinely leaking, the steering gear housing appears very wet, even when combined with dirt, and sometimes droplets are
formed.
Note:
Another form of leakage in the steering system is a drop in the oil level in the reservoir of the power steering pump. For this reason, the oil level
must always be checked with the dipstick when ascertaining findings.
Therefore, when assessing whether a steering gear is merely "sweating" due to liquefying grease in the area of the control head or whether it is actually
leaking, strictly adhere to the procedure described below:
1. Clean steering gear.
2. Spray or coat steering gear with a suitable leak detector spray.
3. Warm up the steering system by turning the steering wheel from lock to lock several times and, if necessary, perform a test drive and observe the
oil level in the power steering pump reservoir.
4. Assess steering for leaks
Note:
If leakage is found at the screw connections of the internal/external lines or at the power steering valve, repair parts are available. Steering
racks must not be replaced for this reason.
Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack

Supersedes: P-B-46.20/10b dated March 27, 2006
Group: 46
Revision History
C 12/19/07 Applicable Models Updated
b 3/27/06 Technical Content / Parts and Warranty Information Updated
a 8/26/05 Applicable Models / Technical Content Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Model 203.052/054/056/061/064/065/081/084/261/264/281/284/740/747/764
Model 209.356/365/375/376/456/465/472/475/476
Model 211.026/065/070/076/082/083/265/276/282/283
Model 219.372/375/376/377
Model 230.471/472/474/475/476/477/479
Leak at Steering Rack Connection
If you encounter leakage at the steering rack connection in the above models, the cause may be damage to the sealing ring of the hydraulic lines. In such
instances, replacement of the rack will not resolve the situation. To resolve, replace the sealing ring at the steering gear connection as per the below
procedure.
1. Loosen line connection on steering gear.
Note:
If necessary, loosen line supporting bracket.
2. Replace sealing rings and support ring.
Note:
Ensure that sealing rings and supporting ring are properly seated. Supporting ring only present on high pressure line (not on model 230 and
203 up to 03/02).
Note:
There are two versions of power steering high-pressure lines. The preceding version has a slotted support ring which can be replaced
individually. The new version has a support ring which is not slotted and which cannot be replaced individually; in this case the complete
power steering high-pressure line must be replaced (see parts list).
3. Fasten line connection on steering gear with retaining plate.
Note:
Observe below torque values for screw connection.
4. Bolt, oil line clamping plate to rack-and-pinion steering
a. Models 203, 211.082/083/087/282/283/287 - 20 Nm
Models 171, 209, 211 except 211/082/083/087/282/283/287 - 18 Nm
b. Bolt on Clamp Plate, high-pressure line / return line to rack-and-pinion steering
Model 230 - 18 Nm
5. Bleed steering system and check for leaks. Refer to the WIS documents shown for bleeding the system / checking for leaks.
Parts Information
Note:
December 19, 2007. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

Wheels - Recommendation Against Chroming Alloy Wheels
Date: February 2008
Supersedes: MBNA 40/18 dated April, 1991
Group: 40
Revision History
a 02/2008 Updated to include current models
- 04/1991 Initial issue
SUBJECT:
All Models
Chrome Plating of Mercedes-Benz Light Alloy Wheels
Warning!
Chrome plating of Mercedes-Benz light alloy wheels is not recommended.
The reason that we do not recommend chrome plating is as follows:
When chrome plating an Mercedes-Benz light alloy wheel, the wheel must first be anodized (copper plated).
The difference in EMF (Electro-Motive Force) values between copper and aluminum results in electrolytic corrosion with aluminum being the
sacrificial metal. This will result in weakening of the base metal as well as poor adhesion of the subsequent plating, and thereby premature flaking of
the chrome finish.
Wheels of cast light alloy, with their porous surface, are even more susceptible to this condition than those of forged light alloys.
A/T - Multiple DTC's Set/Limp Home Mode

Group: 27
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Passenger Models Equipped with 722.9 (7G-Tronic) Transmission
Transmission in Limp Home Mode

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the transmission being in limp home mode (intermittently or permanently) with fault
code(s) 0741, 0893, 0894, 2502, 2504, 2505, 2511, 2711, 2783 are stored in the transmission control module as well as particulate in the transmission
oil pan which corresponds to the pattern shown in Figure 1; the cause may be related to the torque converter lock-up clutch or the rear planetary gear
set.
Note:
Follow the WSG Pre-Authorization Process as outlined in DTB P-B-27.00/38d dated November 7, 2006 and be sure to provide all of the required
documentation.
To resolve, replace the transmission and torque converter. Be sure to flush all particulate out of the cooler before installing the new transmission/torque
converter.
Warning!
Do not clean any of the particulate from the oil pan or the magnets prior to sending the transmission back to the QEC.
Parts Information
Note:
January 9, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Anti-Theft System - DAS3 Diagnostic Information


Supersedes: P-B-80.57/24a dated Nov. 17, 2005
Group: 80
Revision History
b 1/9/08 Applicable Models and Paragraphs Three and Four Updated
a 11/17/05 Applicable Models and Paragraph Three Updated
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 203, 204, 209, 211 and 219 Vehicles
Diagnosis and Replacement of DAS3 Components
Diagnostic procedures for the DAS3 Drive Authorization System have been revised for models listed above. Please proceed as follows when
diagnosing systems conditions.
Select Control units --> Body --> EIS --> "Guided transmitter key check" or "Guided drive authorization system check"
Select the respective guided check. A guided diagnosis follows which is used to pinpoint the component that is causing the condition. Do not replace
any component before performing this diagnosis. Always perform the diagnosis in its entirety until SDS identifies the component to be replaced. At the
end of the test steps, the user will be prompted to print the results. When submitting a claim, copies of this printout and a quick test must accompany the
parts. The warranty claim may be debited a handling charge if the printout and the quick test do not accompany the parts.
Applied diagnostic steps are stored in the EIS (Electronic Ignition Switch) and ESL (Electric Steering Lock) components. The diagnostic steps utilized
by the dealer will be electronically verified by the QEC to determine if the control unit performed the diagnostic procedure. If it is determined that a
complete diagnosis was not performed, the warranty claim may be debited a handling charge.
Both vehicle keys are required to ensure a proper diagnosis. Please be sure that both keys will be available when the repair appointment is made.
Interior - Replacement Glove Box Modification

Order No.: P-B-68.10/69
Supersedes:
Group: 68
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, Up to VIN F096212
Glove Box Replacement Modification
On the above model vehicles, when replacing the glove box with the below part numbers, or its successor, the vehicle harness connector will not match
the connector on the glove box. This is due to a change in locking design in the glove box. To resolve, the 3-pin connector of the vehicle harness must
be converted to a 2-pin connector as per the instructions below.
New design glove boxes:
A 171 680 5387 + color code

A 171 680 4987 + color code
Connector conversion instructions:

1. Remove pin one (Figure 1, A) from existing connector (Figure 1, J) in body harness and insert into pin two (Figure 1, E) of new connector
(Figure 1, G).
2. Remove pin three (Figure 1, C) from existing connector (Figure 1, J) in body harness and insert into pin one (Figure 1, D) of new connector
(Figure 1, G).
3. Remove pin two (Figure 1, B) from existing connector (Figure 1, J) in body harness and wrap pin with electrical tape and secure to body harness.
Parts Information
A/C - Compressor/Drive Belt Noise

Supersedes: P-B-83.55/87a dated August 7, 2007
Group: 83
Revision History
b 11/30/07 Model 203.040/740 and Respective Information Added
a 8/7/07 Addtion of Mandatory Tool (Step 13)
SUBJECT:
All Model 203, 209, 211 and 220, Equipped with M112 Engine
All Model 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219 and 220, Equipped with M113 Engine All Model 203.040/740, Equipped with M271 Engine
All Model 171, 203, 209 and 211 Equipped with M272 Engine
All Model 209, 211, 216, 219 and 221 Equipped with M273 Engine
All Model Years
Replacement of Refrigerant Compressor Belt Pulley Due to Noise Complaints or No Cooling (M271 Engine Only)
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of noises at the refrigerant compressor, the cause could be a defective belt pulley or belt
pulley bearing. The pulley and pulley bearing can be diagnosed and replaced with the compressor still installed in the vehicle by following the
procedures below.
1. Locate the noise by duplicating the conditions under which the complaint occurred.
2. Before the belt pulley on the refrigerant compressor is replaced, verify that the following components in the belt drive are not the source of the
noise and repair as required.
^ Alternator
^ Power steering pump
^ Water pump
3. If there is also a cooling performance complaint, the noise could be caused by low refrigerant level. Perform a Refrigerant Circuit Test as per
SDS and follow instructions for corrective actions.
4. In addition, on 203 with engine M271 there may be no cooling due to the torque limiter in the drive hub of the pulley being sheared and the
compressor not turning. Follow instructions for no cooling starting with step 25.
5. If there is a whining noise that is RPM-dependant which is present with the air conditioning on or off and is determined to be caused by the
tensioner pulleys, guide pulleys or refrigerant compressor, continue with step 6.
Note:
The AC compressor does not turn off immediately when AC Off is selected at the control module. In order to insure the compressor is off,
select AC off --> select Climate system off --> select climate system on.
Engines M112/113/272/273
6. Remove the poly-V-belt from the refrigerant compressor.
7. Install shorter belt to bypass the compressor. Route belt as shown in Figure 1.
^ Engines M112/113 - 20 x 2315 to 2325 mm (A011 997 96 92)
^ Engines M272/273 - 20 x 2330 to 2340 mm (A011 997 04 92)

Note:
The belts can be sourced locally or by MB part number. The belts must be purchased to diagnose AC compressor pulley noise and are not to
be submitted on a warranty claim.
8. Run the engine with the short belt installed. If the noise is still present, check whether the tensioner and/or guide pulleys are the source of the
noise. Replace as necessary the defective tensioner and/or guide pulleys.
9. If the noise is no longer present, allow the engine to cool and proceed to step 10.
10. Replace the compressor pulley as follows.
Note:
It is not necessary remove the compressor or evacuates the refrigeration circuit.
11. Remove the poly-V-belt. Determine if the diameter of the pulley is 100 or 110 mm.
12. Raise the vehicle and remove the lower engine compartment paneling.
13. Refer to Figure 2 for component number references. Remove the belt pulley circlip (Figure 2, 6). With plastic belt pulleys, it is possible to insert a
screwdriver under the circlip (Figure 2, 6) and pry it out of the groove.
14. Remove hub (Figure 2, 1) using a socket and counter hold tool W112 589 07 40 00. Use a small magnet to remove flat washer from shaft.
Note:
There are two versions of the compressor shaft, a 7 mm hex and one with two flats. The shaft with two flats requires the use of socket W112
589 02 09 00.
To loosen the pulley:
Method A (Preferred): Hold the compressor shaft stationary and turn the drive hub counter clockwise to loosen. Turn the hub clockwise to
tighten.
Method B: Hold the drive hub stationary and turn the compressor shaft clockwise to loosen.
Turn counter clockwise to tighten.
It is not a left hand thread. If the shaft breaks off the compressor should be replaced.
15. Remove snap ring (Figure 2, 4) for pulley bearing.
16. Remove belt pulley (Figure 2, 2) from the end of compressor housing.
Note:
Do not apply a pulling force in an axial direction to the refrigerant compressor shaft.
17. Assemble the rubber dampers (Figure 2, 5) into new pulley the as shown in example A in Figure 3 and Figure 4. Make note of the direction of the
curvature of the rubber dampers and install them over the reinforcing webs in the pulley, not in the spaces between the webs.
18. Install new belt pulley (Figure 2, 2) onto the end of compressor housing. Make sure it is the same diameter as the original, 100 mm, 110 mm or
120 mm (M271).
19. Install the snap ring (Figure 2, 4) for pulley bearing with its flat side facing the refrigerant compressor. Make sure the snap ring is seated correctly
in the groove.
Note:
Use snap ring pliers with 90° tips that have a minimum reach of 19 mm (0.75").
20. Install washer (Figure 2, 3). Make sure it is flat against the shoulder of the shaft.
21. Install hub (Figure 2, 1) so the drive fingers are inserted into the gaps between the ends of the rubber dampers. Screw the hub onto the
compressor shaft clockwise and torque to 35 Nm. The hub continues to tighten when in the compressor is in operation.
22. Install circlip (Figure 2, 6) into the belt pulley. Make sure it is seated in the groove of the pulley.
23. Install a new standard length poly-V-belt. Start engine and verify correct belt operation.
24. Install lower engine paneling.
Engine M271
25. Remove induction silencer as per WIS document AR09.41-P-6825T.
26. Remove the poly-V-belt.
No Cooling
27. Inspect the AC compressor to see if the shaft is not turning due to a sheared torque limiter in the drive hub. If the hub has sheared follow
replacement instructions from step 13 to 23.
28. The cause of the hub shearing could be a seized alternator pulley freewheel. The alternator pulley needs to be inspected as follows. Pry the plastic
cover off the end of the alternator pulley. Insert socket wrench tool W602 589 00 10 00 to hold the shaft from turning. Turn the pulley clockwise
and it should lock. Turn the pulley counterclockwise, it should freewheel.
29. If the pulley did not freewheel it needs to be replaced. Use a 17 mm wrench on the end of the socket wrench tool and hold it stationary (allow it to
contact the frame/sub frame). Insert M10 socket W601 589 00 10 00 through the center of the socket wrench tool and into the end of the
alternator shaft and turn the M10 socket clockwise to remove the pulley (Figure 5).
30. Install new pulley and tighten with the M10 socket counterclockwise to 80 Nm. Use a torque wrench that functions in both directions. Install new
plastic cover on end of pulley. It is important to follow loosening and tightening instructions as described.
Note:
A seized alternator pulley freewheel will cause the belt tensioner to oscillate back and forth when the engine is running.
Pulley Noise
31. It is not possible to install a shorter belt to bypass the AC compressor due to belt routing. Use a stethoscope to determine if the AC pulley bearing
is the source of the noise.
32. Follow AC pulley replacement instructions from step 13 to 23.
Special Tools
Parts Information
Note:
November 30, 2007. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Tire Monitor - Tire Pressure Monitoring Inactive Message

Order No.: P-B-42.45/86
Supersedes:
Group: 42
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 203 and 209 Vehicles
Equipped with Sales Code 477 - Tire Loss Warning System (indirect ESP based) with Run Flat Tires
Model Year: 2005 to 2007
"Tire Pressure Monitoring Inactive" Displayed in Instrument Cluster
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles with the message "Tire Pressure Monitoring Inactive" displayed within the instrument and
the following fault code is stored within the ESP control unit, perform the following.
^ C1550 - Test voltage supply at control unit N47-5 (ESP and BAS control module)
Note:
This may result from an incorrect fault setting condition with the tire pressure loss warning software. If there is an under-voltage in the ESP
control unit when writing to the EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) or if an ignition change occurs when the
vehicle is moving, an invalid value can be supplied to the EEPROM check. This can produce fault code C1550 even if the ESP control unit is
OK.
1. Check power supply (> 12 V) at component N47-5 (ESP control unit) and correct any connection issues.
2. Check ground connection of component A7/3 (Traction system hydraulic unit) and correct any connection issues.
3. Using STAR Diagnosis perform a short test and erase fault codes
4. Cycle ignition on-off-on
5. Using STAR Diagnosis recheck for the above fault codes within ESP.
6. If no fault code is present the ESP control is OK.
7. If the fault code listed above is present, replace the ESP control module. Refer to ESP for latest part number. ESP control unit replacement is only
justifiable if the fault is currently stored and there is no under-voltage present at the ESP control or hydraulic unit.
Note:
generated on January 3, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

ABS/TCS - Cruise Control Message Displayed/DTR Lamp ON

Order No.: P-B-42.45/88
Supersedes:
Group: 42
SUBJECT:
All Model 203 Vehicles, as of August 2001 Production
"Speedtronic/Cruise Control, Visit Workshop!" Displayed In Instrument Cluster and / or DTR Lamp Illuminated After Engine Start and ESP Control
Unit Replacement
If after replacing the ESP control unit; "Speedtronic/Cruise Control, Visit Workshop!" is displayed in the instrument cluster and/or the DTR
indicator lamp is illuminated after the engine has been started, perform the following.
Note:
The following fault code and/or event code may be present. This is due to the incorrect ESP control unit replacement, since ESP control units
are not universally compatible or interchangeable.
^ ESP control unit: C1510 - Fault in CAN communication with control unit N63/1 (DTR control module)
^ Instrument cluster: 9104 - Control module DTR is not sending any data
1. If one of the following ESP control units was replaced on the affected vehicle, replace the ESP control unit with A034 545 72 32.
2. If one of the following ESP control units was replaced on the affected vehicle, replace the ESP control unit with A036 540 02 01.
Note:
Please refer to WIS document AR42.45-P-0820P for instructions on replacing the ESP control unit. After replacing the ESP control unit it
may be necessary to deactivate the speed-sensitive power steering via coding and activate the tire pressure loss warning system using the
"Initial Start-up" menu in STAR Diagnosis.
Parts Information
A/T - Limp Home Mode/Various Codes Set

Supersedes: P-B-27.50/59a dated March 16, 2006
Group: 27
Revision History
b 1/4/08 Operation Code Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Model 203.052/054/056
Model 209.356/375/456/475
Model 211.056/070/256
Model 215.375
Model 219.375
Model 220.170/175
Model 230.475
Equipped with 7G-Tronic Transmission (NAG2)
Transmission in Limp Home Mode with Fault Codes 2200, 2201, 2767 and 2768
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the transmission being in limp home mode with fault codes 2200, 2201, 2767 and 2768,
the condition can be related to an unfavorable production tolerance of the speed sensor ring of the K1 shift member.
In such cases, the flange (Figure 1, call-out 164) should be replaced to resolve. Follow the work procedures outlined in WIS Document
AR27.51-P-0800W (Dismantling and Assembling clutch K1) as well as the other associated documents.
Note:
This work procedure only applies to the above fault codes and to transmissions with a production range of 7229xx 00 327088 to 7229xx 00 338693.
For transmissions outside of the given production range, replace the electro-hydraulic control unit only. Refer to EPC for the specific application /
part number.
Parts Information
Note:
Paint - Adhesive Residue Removal

Order No.: S-B-98.30/22
Supersedes:
Group: 98
Subject:
All Passenger Car and Light Truck Models
Elimination of Adhesive Residues On Paint Work

If you receive customer reports of adhesive residues left on the paintwork from stickers which were removed on the doors and / or lift gate of new
vehicles, apply Mercedes Benz Stain remover (A001 986 28 71 10) to remove the residue. Carefully apply the stain remover using a sponge or brush,
leave it to act for a short time and then wipe off with a sponge or microfiber cloth. Also, refer to the relevant product information.
Audio System - CD Player Inop/Skips/Won't Accept CD's

Order No.: P-B-82.64/607
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, as of MY 2005
Model 211.026/056/065/070/076/082/083/087/256/265/276/282/283/287, as of MY 2003
Model 219.372/375/377/376, as of MY 2006
Equipped with Option Code 819
CD Changer Cannot Be Operated / CDs Not Drawn In or Ejected, Jumps, Skips or Sets Over Temperature Fault Codes
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the Compact Disc Changer (CDC) having any of the below conditions, these may be
caused by either one or both bolts which fasten the CDC to the mounting frame being long or there being a software error in the CDC.
Conditions
^ Cannot be operated
^ CD cannot be ejected or drawn in
^ CD jumps or skips noticeably
^ CD changer sets an over-temperature DTC that is current and stored

To resolve, check for physical damage at the bolting point of the changer (Examples - Figures 1, 2 and 3). If it is evident that the fastening/mounting
bolts are too long, replace the mounting bolts size M4x6 as listed in the parts information section.
If the changer shows NO physical damage due to bolts being too long, the condition may be due to a software error in the CD Changer. In this case,
replace the current CD Changer with part number A211 870 61 89 or later which has software and hardware versions of 36/05 (or newer).
Note:
Should a changer require a replacement, prior to return shipment to QEC, please insert the shipping bracket ONLY if the replaced changer does
NOT contain any CDs. If the changer contains CDs which could not be removed by pressing the eject button while the changer was powered, do
NOT insert the shipping bracket as it will damage the internal parts of the changer.
Parts Information
Note:
February 1, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

Technical Service Bulletin # P-27_00-47F Date: 080124
A/T - Fluid Leaks at The Electrical Connector

Order No.: P-B-27.00/47f
Supersedes: P-B-27.00/47e dated January 19, 2007
Group: 27
Revision History
f 1/24/08 Part Number and Warranty Information Updated
e 1/19/07 Warranty Information Updated
d 5/1/06 Warranty Information Updated
c 3/22/06 Campaign Information Included
b 4/5/05 Technical Content and Parts Information Updated
a 10/11/04 Parts Information Corrected
SUBJECT:
All Passenger Models with 722.6 Automatic Transmission
Leaking Oil in the Area of the Electric Connection

Note:
As of March 22, 2006, this DTB must not be performed on the vehicles shown which are covered under Service Campaign No. 2006020008.
Combining this DTB with the above referenced Campaign will result in a charge back of this DTB.
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the automatic transmission is leaking oil in the area of the electric connection,
secondary concerns may be oil in the wiring harness, perform the below remedy to resolve.
1. Clean the transmission in the affected area and replace the electrical connector and the related 0-rings.
Note:
The electrical connector may only be assembled/disassembled when transmission oil temperatures are less than 50 degrees C in order to
prevent damage to the conductor plate.
2. If there is transmission oil in the wiring loom, wipe dry and blow out the plug at the transmission and ECU connections. The contacts can be
cleaned with commercially available contact cleaner.
Note:
When connecting the wiring harness to the transmission, ensure that the harness is routed in a tension free path (Figure 1) and that no tension
is applied to the electrical connector from the harness (Figure 2).
Parts Information
Note:
Steering - Flow Noises/Fluid Foaming After Repairs

Supersedes: P-B-46.30/40 dated April 26, 2006
Group: 46
Revision History
a 11/27/07 WIS Document Information Updated
SUBJECT:
Flow Noises from Area of Power Steering Pump and/or Foaming of Power Steering Oil in Reservoir
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of flow noises from the area of the power steering pump, and/or foaming of the power
steering fluid in the reservoir following work carried out on the hydraulic steering system; this may be caused by an improper procedure followed for
filling and bleeding of the power steering fluid into the system.
To remedy, it is absolutely necessary to make sure that the procedure described in the WIS documents is strictly adhered to. In particular, it is necessary
to turn the steering to full lock-to-lock at least 30 times BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE. If this is not done prior to starting engine, there is a high
risk of air entering the steering system, which is subsequently very difficult to eliminate.
Note:
Starting the engine prior to bleeding can cause irreparable damage to the power steering pump and will cause an air cushion to form in the steering
gear which causes noise. Once the air is ingested, the ingested air will only dissipate after driving the vehicle for at least 30 miles.
Refer to the chart shown for the correct WIS document reference for the proper filling and bleeding procedure of the power steering pump.
A/C - Unpleasant Odor From Air Conditioning Vents

Order No.: S-B-83.00/115
Supersedes:
Group: 83
SUBJECT:
All Model 164, 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230 and 251
Vehicles Unpleasant Odor from Air Conditioning Vents

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of an unpleasant odor coming from the air conditioning vents, the cause may not be the air
conditioning system, but an odor being circulated in the air and then perceived as coming from the air conditioning system. In the event of odor
complaints, always determine whether the odor is caused by the air conditioning system, by items in the interior compartment, or by smells from the
environment. To accurately identify odors, please reference the Odor Diagnostic Tree found on Star TekInfo --> EDAC --> Non EDAC Guides -->
Vehicle Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Manual.
Note:
All filters installed in the air conditioning system must be replaced in the event of an odor complaint.
Please see below for specific odor complaints and their corresponding remedies:
1. A "damp air or musty odor just after engine start" is due to the moisture that accumulates at the evaporator and gets absorbed by the air in the
evaporator housing when the blower is shut off. When the blower is activated again, the damp air is carried into the interior compartment within
the first few minutes. There is no fix for this, as this is due to various laws of physics. Please explain this to the customer.
2. For odors coming from the interior that are intensified in air recirculation mode, check the vehicle interior for foreign objects, contamination or
vapors. For example:
^ Food leftovers
^ Spilt fluids
^ Air outlets (e.g. for fluids that may have entered)
^ Cigarette smell/ashtrays
^ Animal hairs
^ Shoes/clothing
^ Air fresheners
^ Interior (e.g. instrument panel, door rubber seals)
^ Damping mats/materials (e.g. on firewall, transmission tunnel, spare tire well, doors) refer to Star TekInfo document P-B-94.20/05c (or latest
version)
3. Odor of chlorine/rotten eggs: Check for leaks in the bodywork, fumes entering from the engine compartment or outside environmental sources
while driving. Try to obtain ambient condition information from the customer when the complaint occurs.
4. Musty/moldy odor, refer to Star TekInfo document P-B-83.30/74j (or latest version) and T-B-83.30/91c (or latest version).
Exhaust System - Exhaust Pipe Chrome Tip Care

Date: May 14, 2008
Order No.: S-B-49.10/11
Supersedes:
Group: 49
SUBJECT:
MY-All
Models-All with Chrome Tail Pipe Finisher
The Care of Tail Pipe Finishers

Chipping damage from stones hitting tail pipe finishers cannot be prevented, but regular care of the chrome finishers can prevent ensuing corrosion and
rust from forming on the chipped areas.
To retain the gloss and appearance of the chrome on the tail pipe finishers over the life of the vehicle, observe the following:
^ Do not use alkaline or aggressive cleaners, such as wheel cleaner.
^ Particularly in the winter months, use chrome polishing paste on the tail pipe finishers.
Corrosion from stone chipping, rust deposits and dirt.
The replacement of the exhaust system components, such as tail pipes, tail pipe finishers or rear mufflers is not justified when proper care will maintain
the chrome.
Showing untreated left-hand side and treated right-hand side.
Warning!
In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury, wait until the rear exhaust pipes have completely cooled before applying chrome polishing paste.
Parts Information
M/T - Clutch Pedal Cracking/Squeaking When Operated

Order No.: P-B-29.10/02

Supersedes:
Group: 29
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456
Model 203.040/061/064/740/747
Model 204.054/056
Equipped with Manual Transmission Only (716.6)
Noise (Cracking/Squeaking) When Operating Clutch Pedal
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of noise (cracking/squeaking) when operating the clutch pedal, the cause may be
insufficient grease on the over-center spring and pin. To resolve, perform the following. For further reference, see WIS document AR29.10-D-0300-01
(Remove/install over-center spring of clutch petal) located on Star TekInfo --> Temporary Postings.
1. Apply grease to contact surfaces of over-center spring at bottom (Figure 1) and top (Figure 2).
2. Grease guide of over-center spring as shown in Figure 3.
3. Grease mounting pin as shown in Figure 4.
Parts Information
Note:
April 11, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty, use the table.Technical Service Bulletin # S-68_30-75 Date: 080415
Interior - Interior Damage From Scent Dispensers

Order No.: S-B-68.30/75
Supercedes:
Group: 68
SUBJECT:
Surface Damage Caused by Scent Dispenser
If you receive customer reports of surface damage such as the surface coating loosening on the radio, COMAND, upper control panel or air vents, this
may be caused by the use of an aggressive interior scented product (e.g. scented oils) (Figure 1, arrows). During vehicle workshop visits, check whether
there is a scent dispenser in the vehicle and inform the customer of any consequential damage caused by the product. This type of damage is not
covered by warranty.
A/C - Control Module/Control Functions/Diagnostics

Date: April 4, 2008
Order No.: S-B-83.00/116
Supercedes:
Group: 83
SUBJECT:
All 164, 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230 and 251 Vehicles
AC Control Module / Control Functions
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the below conditions, replacing the AC control module does not rectify the
problem.
1. Air conditioning not functioning:
The sensors or actuators of the climate control system that are networked to the AC bus (e.g. sun sensors or actuator motors) can completely
disable the AC bus if they are not operating. Please check the sensors, actuator motors and SDS for fault codes. If communication faults are
stored, then the operating unit is not the cause.
2. Implausible control:
The multi-zone sun sensors have a significant influence on the temperature control. The sun shining at a specific angle can result in different
outlet air temperatures and blower output on different sides of the vehicle. This effect is also possible on a cloudy day because of UV radiation.
Adjustment of the interior temperature is also heavily influenced by environmental conditions (e.g. heat from the transmission tunnel, heat from
the radio or COMAND unit influencing the in car temperature sensors). Replacing the operating unit will not change the control response.
3. Poor control quality/cold feeling, too warm, too cold:
Condition may be due to body leaks and predominantly occurs at high speeds. At very high speeds, the refrigerant compressor output is lowered
to provide the engine with extra power; this can cause the report of "blower output too warm". Since this is a normal function, replacing the AC
control module is not a solution. The same condition can occur during rapid speed changes (heavy braking, rapid acceleration).
4. Fogged windows:
This condition is not related to the operating unit. Possible causes include moisture in the vehicle interior, driving with the air conditioning off or
with the air condition and recirculation mode on.
Perform the following if a report regarding one of the above conditions is received:
1. Check all steps in the diagnosis tree found on Star TekInfo --> EDAC --> Non EDAC Guides --> Vehicle Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) Manual.
2. Erase the fault memory.
3. Perform system reset via circuit 30.
Note:
The operating unit is generally not the cause of reported concerns regarding climate control operation. Check all of the other components in
the climate control system using the diagnostic tree prior to performing work on the operating unit. Always submit the related diagnosis
printouts and findings report when submitting a warranty claim.Technical Service Bulletin # S-40_10-60 Date: 080501
Wheels/Tires - Nitrogen Usage Recommendations

Date: May 2008
Order No.: S-B-40.10/60
Supersedes:
Group: 40
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models All
Nitrogen Use in Tire Inflation
Original equipment and approved replacement tires for Mercedes-Benz passenger cars and light trucks are designed to be inflated with ordinary
compressed air, which generally contains approximately 80% nitrogen. Inflation with ordinary compressed air provides the expected operating
performance for these tires so long as the operator regularly checks and maintains the air pressures as recommended by Mercedes-Benz on the vehicle's
fuel filler door or the driver-side B-pillar.
In normal vehicle use, nitrogen offers negligible benefits and is rarely cost effective. Although, the physical properties of nitrogen can reduce inflation
pressure losses due to the permeability of tire materials and thus, improve the damping behavior; the existence of several other possible sources of
leaks, such as tire/rim interface, valve, or rim/valve interface can significantly limit the effectiveness of nitrogen in maintaining tire pressure in ordinary
vehicle use.
In summary, all tires approved for use on Mercedes-Benz passenger vehicles are designed to deliver their expected performance when inflated with
ordinary compressed air. Mercedes-Benz does not require or recommend the use of nitrogen as the results and benefits derived from its use are not in
proportion to the expense. Technical Service Bulletin # P-91_30-146 Date: 080311
Interior, A/C Heated Seats Inoperative

Order No.: P-B-91.30/146
Supercedes:
Group: 91
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, Up to VIN A143228
Equipped with SA code 873 (Heated seats)
Heated Seats Nonfunctional

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the driver or passenger side seat heaters not functioning, this may be due to a
hardware fault in the left or right side heater bolster. To resolve, perform the following.
1. Investigate all stored or present fault codes relating to the seat heater before proceeding.
2. If the seat heater still does not function, continue to step 3.
3. Remove the seat cushion as per WIS document AR91.10-P-3310V.
4. Disconnect the main power supply connector for the heated seat from the seat separation point and the black and white connectors at the side
bolsters.
5. Using a Mercedes Benz approved multimeter, check the resistance of the seat cushion heating element at the connector (Figure 1, circle).
a. If the measured resistance is less than ten ohms, the seat cushion element does not contain a hardware fault and is not the cause of the issue.
Terminate any further diagnosis of the heating element in the seat and inspect all connectors for kinks, shorts or bent pins. Then reinstall
seat cushion. Refer to WIS document AR91.10-P-3310V.
b. If the measured resistance is greater than ten ohms, proceed to step six.
6. Disconnect the secondary connector plugs from the side bolsters (Figure 2, circles).
7. Using a Mercedes Benz approved multimeter, check the resistance of the individual side bolsters at the connectors.
a. If the measured resistance is greater than five ohms in one or both side bolsters, replace the bolster(s) with the high resistance. Refer to
WIS document AR91.30-P-0007V.
b. If the measured resistance is less than 5 ohms, the side bolsters do not contain a hardware fault. Replace the entire seat cushion because the
hardware fault is located in the center cushion heating element.
Parts Information
Note:
March 11, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty, use the table above. Technical Service Bulletin # P-80_35-50 Date: 080418
Keyless Entry - Inoperative/Range Too Short

Order No.: P-B-80.35/50
Supercedes:
Group: 80
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Radio Remote Control/Central Locking Not Functioning
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the radio remote control/central locking is nonfunctional and/or range insufficient,
check that the rod antenna (A28) is installed correctly on the rear fender. The system may not function correctly if the antenna is not installed properly.
Garage Door Opener - Range Too Short/Can't Program

Date: April 8, 2008
Order No.: S-B-68.05/74
Supercedes:
Group: 68
SUBJECT:
All Model 129, 140, 163, 164, 170, 171, 202, 203, 204, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 216, 220, 221, 230, 251 and 463 Vehicles
Garage Door Opener Cannot Be Programmed and/or Range is Too Short
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the handheld garage door transmitter cannot be programmed into the integrated garage
door opener transmitter (inside the rearview mirror) or that the range of the integrated garage door opener transmitter is too short, refer to the remedies
below depending on the symptom encountered.
Symptom 1:
Integrated garage door opener buttons are already preprogrammed.
Remedy 1:
Before a handheld transmitter can be programmed, a reset must be performed on the integrated garage door opener. To do so, press and hold down
buttons 1 and 3 on the integrated garage door opener simultaneously for approx. 20 seconds until the LED begins to flash rapidly (also refer to the
operating instructions for the vehicle).
Symptom 2:
Garage door transmitter frequency or coding technology is not compatible with vehicle system.
Remedy 2:
Order and install a universal receiver for the opener installed in your home via the HomeLink hotline.
Note:
If you have further questions relating to the garage door opener, compatibility, programming of the regional code, synchronization or ordering of a
universal receiver, visit Internet site: www.homelink.com or contact the HomeLink toll-free hotline 1-800-355-3515.
Symptom 3:
Handheld transmitter uses a rolling code system.
Remedy 3:
It may be necessary to learn the code now stored to the integrated garage door transmitter into the garage door opener's receiver because they are now
out of sync. (Refer to the garage door opener on how to learn a transmitter into the receiver.)
Symptom 4:
Distance when programming handheld transmitter to integrated garage door opener is too small/too large or programming time is terminated too soon.
Remedy 4:
Pay attention to the distance when programming. The distance varies between 5 cm and 30 cm depending on the system. Several programming attempts
may be necessary; every attempted setting position should be maintained for at least 15 seconds.
Symptom 5:
Timeout time of hand transmitter exceeded (switches off after approx. 20 sec).
Remedy 5:
Attempt learning the handheld transmitter into the vehicle again.
Symptom 6:
Timeout time of integrated garage door opener exceeded (switches off after approx. 60 sec).
Remedy 6:
Change the position of the hand transmitter and then start programming again.
Symptom 7:
On vehicles with infrared coated glass, the openers which use 390MHz have no range; however 300MHz is OK in same vehicle. (Sears/Liftmaster
openers used 390MHz up until 2005.)
Remedy 7:
Construct a passive repeater antenna from a piece of RG174 coaxial cable (locally sourced) to resolve the issue.
a) Cut a piece of coaxial cable (locally sourced) approximately 152 cm long.
b) Strip 18.5 cm of the outer shield from each end, leaving center conductor insulator intact (Figure 1).
c) Remove mirror from vehicle and open the mirror.

d) Remove cover on left A-pillar.
e) One end of the cable is cable tied to the garage door opener antenna in the mirror (Figure 2).
f) Route the cable above the headliner and place the other end of the cable along the edge of the glass on left side of the windshield (Figure 3).
g) Reinstall the mirror and test the range of opener.
h) Replace panels
Interior - Seats are Dirty/Stained

Order No.: S-B-91.18/151
Supersedes:
Group: 91
SUBJECT:
All Passenger and Light Truck Models Dirty Seats
If seat covers are stained/dirty caused by food, perspiration, skin peeling, creams, dirt from clothing, dust, inadequate or non-existent care of the seat
covers, or color bleeding from clothing or sheepskin covers, based on the type of seat covering perform the recommended action below to resolve.
Note:
Leather covers are natural products that are subject to a natural aging process, and therefore might behave differently under different temperature
conditions.
Genuine leather covers:
Wipe down with a damp cloth and allow to dry. Be careful not to soak the leather especially in perforated areas. After they have been cleaned, treat the
leather covers with leather care foam (A001 986 59 7110).
Imitation leather covers:
Clean using approximately 1% mild soap solution and water with a damp cloth and allow to dry.
Alcantara covers:
Clean using only a damp cloth. It is important to treat complete sections of the covers, e.g. an entire side bolster or the entire cushion surface, otherwise
visible edges (cleaned vs. non cleaned areas) will be noticeable. When needed Alcantara covers can also be cleaned using a very soft brush.
Steering - Power Steering Diagnostic Tips

Date: March 2008
Supercedes: P-B-46.25/37
Group: 46
Revision History
a 03/03/08 Additional Models Added
SUBJECT:
MODELS 129, 140, 163, 164, 170, 171, 199, 202, 203, 204, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, 463
Processing of Steering System Complaints
For any Power Steering Complaint, please always refer to the latest version of the EDAC Diagnostic Guide found on Star TekInfo. It includes all
the latest bulletins repair information.
1.) Complaints about noise from the vicinity of the hydraulic steering system:
Many complaints about noise from the steering system, particularly during the colder seasons, can be caused by the fluid level in the power
steering pump reservoir being too low, without the system having a leak.
Depending on the reservoir, small shortages are sufficient to cause the pump to take in air or foaming fluid, which then produces noises. As a
result, if a complaint is received about noise when the engine is running, such as hissing, gushing or humming from the vicinity of the pump, first
check the fluid level in the reservoir.
If the fill level is only slightly lower i.e. just under the relevant specified marking, correct this before performing any other work on the steering
system and reassess the vehicle.
To prevent this type of effect, we recommend always filling the fluid level in the power steering pump reservoir to "Maximum" for the
corresponding temperature, particularly during winter inspections or other relevant vehicle checks.
2.) Information on replacing the power steering pump in the case of steering system leaks:
The power steering pump does not have to be replaced if the hydraulic steering system is leaking and the vehicle was driven a short distance
without power steering fluid in the reservoir. Driving without power steering fluid for up to 30 miles does not damage the power steering pump.
Without fluid, it is not placed under any stress (pressure buildup) compared to normal operation.
The residual fluid in the pump is sufficient to provide an adequate lubricating film. After repairing the steering system, perform a function and
noise check on the steering system, including the power steering pump. In the case of leaks, the location of the leak is to be indicated with a wax
pen if the complete component, such as steering racks and pumps, are replaced.
3.) General information on warranty return parts:
It is crucial to attach a detailed description of the damage profile to be able to specifically investigate the damaged part and initiate remedial
measures if necessary. We urge dealers to fully utilize the warranty text field to provide as much information as possible on the reasons for the
replacement of specific components, particularly power steering racks and pumps.
The reason for replacement of a steering rack or pump must be included on all warranty claims.
Warranty claim text will be compared to the subject vehicle's Warranty history. If it becomes apparent in the review that an existing repair
method (i.e. fluid level corrected, a repair kit, etc.) has not been utilized prior to replacing a power steering rack or pump this claim will be
subject to charge back.Technical Service Bulletin # P-72_10-51B Date: 080416
Body - Wind Noise/Water Leaks Between Door/Quarter Glass

Supercedes: P-B-72.10/51a dated May 22, 2006
Group: 72
Revision History
Revision Date purpose

b 4/16/08 Damage Code Revised
a 5/22/06 Adjustment Procedure Updated
- 11/14/05 Initial Issue
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Wind Noise and/or Water Leak Between Door Glass and Rear Quarter Window
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding wind noise and/or water leak from the area between the door glass and the rear
quarter window, this may occur if the gap between these windows is not parallel or even (Figure 1, arrows) when the windows are fully closed. The
non-parallel or uneven gap can occur if either or both windows are adjusted too far rearward. To resolve, perform the below adjustments
Adjustment to Door Glass
1. Connect battery charger to maintain voltage of 12.5V.
2. Remove interior door trim panel, refer to WIS Document AR72.10-P-1000V.
3. Turn the height stops (Figure 2, circle only front adjuster shown) fully downwards.
4. Loosen front and rear bolts on window lifter with window lowered 2/3 of the way down (Figure 3 and 4, circles). Be careful not to shift the
window and plastic wedge in the vertical direction.
5. Push window all the way forward to the stop.
6. Mark position of the window and then move the window 2 mm rearward.
7. With the door closed, check window for parallel gap and readjust if necessary. The gap must be parallel to the front section of the roof and 1 mm
smaller in the area of the A-pillar (Figure 5, arrows).
8. Check the vertical dimension (protrusion of the side window relative to the mirror triangle 1 mm (Figures 6 and 7). If the dimension is not okay,
loosen the front clamping jaws with the window up and adjust window.
9. Retighten front and rear bolts (Figures 3 and 4, circles) to 9 +/- 0.5 Nm.
10. Check the position of the front and rear guide rails in the vertical direction. The window overlaps the roof seal by 2 mm (Figure 8 arrow).
11. With the door and window closed, move height adjustment stops into position from inside the vehicle by pressing the quick release fitting (Figure
2, circle only front adjuster shown) upwards.
12. With the door and window closed, push height adjustment stops (Figure 2, circle - only front adjuster shown) upwards again from inside the car.
13. Reinstall interior door trim panel, refer to WIS Document AR72.10-P-1000V.
Adjustment to Rear Window
1. Open Vario Roof.
2. Detach trim at base of window.
3. Raise rear window using DAS actuations.
4. Check B-gap, should be 8.5 +1 mm (Figure 9).
5. If the B-gap is not okay, loosen bolts of clamping jaws (Figure 10, circles) and readjust rear window. Then retighten bolts (Figure 10, circles) to
4.5 +/- 0.5 Nm.
6. Check transition from door window to side window in Z-direction (Figure 11). The front edge of the door window must be set approximately 1 to
2 mm lower than the top edge of the side window.
7. The Z-direction setting is adjusted via the height stops (Figure 12, arrows); the direction of adjustment is indicated by the arrows. The rear side
window must be lowered again using DAS actuations in order to obtain the maximum range of adjustment for the height stops. Then loosen the
bolts for the height adjustment stops by turning the bolt clockwise (Figure 13, circle) and adjust the stop. After adjusting, retighten the bolts to 6 -
1 Nm.
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the B-gap and Z-setting (transition) are okay.
9. Close Vario Roof with rear window lowered and check whether the window reaches the end position and that the B-gap is okay.
10. Reattach trim at base of side window and close roof.
11. Reinstall interior door trim panel.
12. Denormalize and renormalize windows using DAS.
13. Disconnect battery charger.
Note:
generated on April 16, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Engine Controls - Engine Squeal On Acceleration

Order No.: P-B.54.21/202
Supersedes:
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
Model 171.456, Up to VIN F070672
Squealing Noise from Engine Compartment When Accelerating
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicle of a squealing noise coming from the engine compartment when accelerating after the
engine control unit has been flashed from VC6.x to VC9.x or VC11.x, the ignition angle correction is not active in these versions. To resolve, flash the
engine control module to VC13, (as of DAS 5/08 or higher) and perform SCN coding.
Note:
Copy of the SDS short test and all tests performed must accompany returned parts. If the documentation is missing or does not support the
diagnosis, the warranty claim may be debited.
Note:
August 18, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Technical Service Bulletin # S-32_25-19E Date: 080604
Suspension - Shock/Strut Replace Guidelines

Date: June 4, 2008
Order No.: S-B-32.25/19e
Supersedes: P-B-32.25/19d and T-B-32.25/20b dated October 18, 2007
Group: 32
Revision History
e 6/4/08 Replacement Procedure & Applicable Models Updated
d 10/18/07 Paragraph 1 Updated (statement of Tech. Documentation and EPC)
c 7/18/07 Addition of Note Pertaining to 211 / 219 Airmatic Struts (Section 1)
a 3/15/06 Applicable Models and Replacement Procedure for ABC Struts Updated
SUBJECT:
All Model 124, 129, 140, 163, 164, 170, 171, 201, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251 and 463 Vehicles
Replacement Procedure of Shock Absorbers and Suspension Struts
It has been noted that shock absorbers and suspension struts are repeatedly being replaced in pairs for no justifiable reason. When a repair
requires the replacement of a shock absorber or suspension strut, only replace the damaged part, unless otherwise noted in technical
documentation or the Electronic Parts Catalog (EPC).
Note:
There will be increased focus on the compliance with these rules when performing warranty parts inspection. DO NOT replace non-damaged
shock absorbers or suspension struts. Warranty claims will be denied in cases where a shock absorber or suspension strut was replaced
needlessly.
1) Guideline for Airmatic air suspension struts (Model 164, 211, 219, 220, 221, 251), ABC suspension struts (Model 215, 216, 220, 221, 230), and
ADS suspension struts (Model 129, 140, 210)
Note:
Not applicable to AMG 211 and 219 Models (211.076/077/276/277 and 219.376/377)
Damage to one suspension strut does not justify the simultaneous replacement of the opposite suspension strut. This also applies to complaints of
noise, such as thumping. In such cases, thorough diagnostics to such cases, thorough diagnostics to determine the responsible suspension strut
should be performed by driving each side of the vehicle on a road surface corresponding to the customer complaint. Only the affected suspension
strut should be replaced.
Prior to replacing the suspension strut in the semi-supporting systems ABC, Airmatic air suspension, or ADS, relieve the tension on the
respective suspension strut to check whether this remedies the noise complaint. To do so, loosen both the upper and lower mountings on the rear
suspension struts and retighten to the prescribed torque with the vehicle resting on its wheels.
Experience has revealed that for the front suspension strut, it is sufficient to carry out this procedure on the upper mounting only.
Since it can be assumed that a new Airmatic/ADS suspension strut installed in a high mileage vehicle, would not match with the used suspension
strut and thus impair ride comfort and or vehicle dynamics, it is then recommended that these components be replaced in pairs only after the
vehicle has reached a mileage of at least 50,000 miles (~ 80,000 km). In the cases where a strut may have been previously replaced, the mileage
differential between struts must be at least 50,000 miles (~ 80,000 km) in order to replace in pairs.
In contrast to Airmatic/ADS suspension struts or conventional shock absorbers, the ABC suspension struts do not have to be replaced in pairs at
high mileages (50,000 miles / 80,000 km) as the damping of the vehicle body is taken over by the active actuation of the plunger.
2a) Guidelines for conventional shock absorbers (Models 171, 203, 209, 211 and successor models)
Damage to one shock absorber does not justify the simultaneous replacement of the opposite shock absorber. This also applies to complaints of
noise, such as thumping. In such cases, thorough diagnostics to determine the responsible shock absorber should be performed by driving each
side of the vehicle on a corresponding road surface. Only the affected shock absorber should be replaced.
Since it can be assumed that a new shock absorber installed in a high mileage vehicle, would not match with the used shock absorber and thus
impair ride comfort and or vehicle dynamics, it is then recommended that these components be replaced in pairs only after the vehicle has reached
a mileage of at least 50,000 miles (~ 80,000 km). In the cases where a strut may have been previously replaced, the mileage differential between
struts must be at least 50,000 miles (~ 80,000 km) in order to replace in pairs.
2b) Guideline for conventional shock absorbers (Model 124, 129, 163, 164, 170, 201, 202, 208, 210, 251, 463)
For these models, there exist various shock absorber variants. Thus requiring that the conventional shock absorbers be replaced only in pairs.
Body - Noises From The Sunroof Pivot Area

Supersedes: P-B-77.33/55 dated January 10, 2008
Group: 77
Revision History
a 9/19/08 VIN Cut-Off Added / Remedy Updated
Subject:
All Model 171 Vehicles, Up to VIN F082324
Noises from Vario Roof in Area of Pivot Cam

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of noises coming from the roof in the area of pivot cam (Figure 1), this may occur if the
eccentric cam latch (gate valve) is incorrectly positioned or if the eccentric cam has loosened. The latch may not be fully engaged on the eccentric cam.
To remedy, check the position of the eccentric cam latch (gate valve) with the Vario roof locked. It may be necessary to reinstall the eccentric bolt to
the frame as per the instructions outlined below.
1. To install eccentric cam, enlarge existing hole (Figure 2, item 2) in link to 6.2 mm and apply anticorrosion primer stick A000 986 06 50.
2. Install eccentric cam
3. Install bolt with thread locking agent A003 989 31 71 (Loctite 242). Tightening torque 10 Nm.
4. Adjust eccentric cam as necessary reference WIS document AR77.33-P-3475V
Parts Information
Note:
September 19,2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.

Campaign - Engine V-Belt Guide Pulley Replacement

FILE:
Campaign No. 2008070002, August 2008

SUBJECT:
Models 164, 164.8, 171, 203, 209, 211, 216, 219, 221, 230, and 251
With Engine 272 or 273, Model Years 2006 - 2007
Replace V-Belt Upper Guide Pulley
A 08/15/08 Revision to warranty information
- 08/15/08 Initial release
This Service Campaign has been initiated because Daimler AG (DAG) has determined that a V-belt upper guide pulley optimized for noise reduction is
available. The dealer will replace the V-belt upper guide pulley at the next workshop visit.
^ Please check VMI to determine if the vehicle is involved in the Campaign and if it has been previously repaired.
^ Please review the entire Service Campaign bulletin and follow the repair procedure exactly as described.
Procedure
1. Remove engine cover.
2. Remove plastic cap (A, Figure 1) covering pulley bearing and discard.
3. Remove V-belt (A, Figure 2) from pulley (arrow); refer to WIS for models:
^ 164/164.8/251: AR13.20-P-0001GZA.
^ 171: AR13.22-P-1202VA.
^ 203/209: AR13.22-P-1202QB.
^ 211/219: AR13.20-P-0001TS.
^ 216/221: AR13.20-P-0001SX.
^ 230: AR13.22-P-1202RX.
Note (regarding above WIS instructions):

^ Do not remove V-belt from engine.
^ Do not replace belt tensioner.
4. Replace guide pulley (arrow, Figure 2), torque guide pulley bolt to: 35 Nm.
Note:
Do not reinstall cap (A, Figure 1).
5. Assemble in reverse order.
Primary Parts Information
Note:
^ Please be aware that only the part number(s) referenced in the Campaign Bulletin is/are approved for use to repair the vehicle. Repairs
performed using any other part(s) will not have been performed in accordance with the campaign. Accordingly, warranty claims submitted with
reference to an improper part number(s) will be denied.
Warranty InformationTechnical Service Bulletin # P-26_50-02A Date: 080616
M/T - Hard To Engage 1st or Reverse/Shifter Sticking

Date: June 16, 2008
Group: 26
Revision History
a 6/16/08 Applicable Models Updated (204 Added)
SUBJECT:
Model 170.449/465
Model 171.454/456
Model 203.040/052/054/056/061/064/261/264/740/747/764
Model 204.054
Equipped with Manual Transmission 716 Only First or Reverse Gears Difficult to Engage from Neutral and/or During 1-2 Up-Shift Shifter May Catch
Between Gears
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of first or reverse gears being difficult to engage from neutral and/or the shifter catching
between gears during 1-2 up-shift, this may be due to insufficient lubrication of the transmission input shaft not allowing the clutch disc to move freely.
Note:
Prior to removing the transmission, first confirm that the shifter console is properly adjusted.
^ For vehicles produced up to June 2000, refer to WIS AR26.60-P-0635-02D
^ For vehicles produced after June 2000, refer to WIS AR26.60-P-0635-02E
Proceed as indicated below only after the adjustment of the shifter console has been ruled out as the cause of the concern.
1. Remove the transmission.
2. Lightly grease the transmission input shaft around the splines with heat resistant lubricant (anti-size).
Warning!
It is critical that no grease gets onto any of the clutch friction surfaces.
3. Reinstall the transmission.
Body/Lighting - Moisture in Mirror Turn Signals

Date: May 23, 2008
Supersedes: P-B-88.70/48a dated May 21, 2007
Group: 88
Revision History
b 5/23/08 Addition of Note Pertaining to Model 204, Parts and Warranty Information
SUBJECT:
Moisture in Additional Turn Signal Lamp(s) in Rearview Mirrors
If you receive customer reports regarding moisture or water inside the additional turn signal lamp(s) (Figure 1), please advise the customer that surfaces
fog up whenever they are cold and come in contact with warmer, humid air. An example of this is the mirror in the bathroom which often fogs up after
showering because the warm humid air from the shower may condense on the colder surface of the mirror. The same occurs to the additional turn signal
lamps. Water vapor that is normally present within the lamp housing may condense on the colder surface in the surrounding area which typically is the
lens as the ambient temperature decreases. Any fogging will typically disappear after 1 or 2 hours during the day depending on temperature and
humidity. This condition is normal operation and does not call for repair. If there is any indication of greater moisture in the housing, please check for
external damage to the housing that may be the cause of the condition. Damage to other than production defect in the housing is not covered by
warranty.
Note:
For Model 204 vehicles, produced up to 08/2007 (up to VIN A064140 and F057431), there may be isolated cases of the turn signal lamp in the
outside mirror housing exhibiting a crack at the edge (weld seam), in these cases the turn signal lamp must be replaced must be replaced.
Parts Information
Note:
May 23, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Technical Service Bulletin # 2006110005C Date: 080817

Campaign - Navigation System Disc Update
FILE:
Campaign No. 2006110005, August 2008
Revision History
C 8/17/08 Navi DVD part numbers updated, note added and revised in parts information
B 12/01/06 Updates to work instructions
A 11/22/06 Update to Navigation DVD version checking procedure
SUBJECT:
MODELS 164, 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, X164
MODEL YEAR 2005-2007
INSTALL SOFTWARE FOR NAVIGATION SYSTEM

This Service Campaign has been initiated because DCAG has determined that certain affected vehicles (see VIN range shown above) may have an
earlier version navigation disc installed than that specified. This could in some cases lead to navigation directions based upon non updated map data.
Dealers will update the navigation disc in the affected vehicles as required.
Please review the Effective Serial Number chart shown above, and if necessary, repair the subject vehicles during the vehicle's next service.
^ Please check VMI to insure the vehicle is involved and to determine if the vehicle has been previously repaired.
^ Please review the entire Service Campaign bulletin.
Parts Information
NOTE:
^ Due to the multiple Navigation DVD released annually, there may be a newer Navi DVD version than the one referenced in this Campaign
Bulletin. Please use the latest Navigation DVD available from Navteq. MUBSA will update this bulletin to reflect latest Navi DVD part
numbers as they become available.
^ Repairs performed using any other part(s) than the ones in this Bulletin will not have been performed in accordance with the campaign.
Accordingly, warranty claims submitted with reference to an improper part number(s) will be denied.
Procedures A - C
A. MODELS 171, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230: CHECK VERSION OF NAVIGATION DVD AND UPDATE NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF
NECESSARY
Note:
Note:
On these models the Navigation module is located in the trunk.
^ Press Eject button on Navigation module.
^ Visually check part number on DVD label.

^ If part number is BQ 646 0232: Reinsert DVD into Navigation module; this campaign has been completed.
^ If part number is not the above number: Proceed to next step to update Navigation system.
NOTE:
You must obtain Navigation DVD BQ 646 0232 (or newer) by calling Navteq. Navteq does not require the VIN for these vehicles.
4. Eject old Navigation DVD from module if present.
^ Insert new Navigation DVD into Navigation module.
Note:
The DVD is automatically detected and the update process starts. Shut off vehicle upon completion of the update process.
Note:
The Navigation DVD must remain inside the module from this point forward in order for the Navigation system to operate correctly.
Note:
The replaced Navigation DVD for the above models must be returned to Navteq through the standard process.
B. MODELS 164, 203, 209, 251, X164: CHECK VERSION OF NAVIGATION DVD AND UPDATE NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF NECESSARY
Note:
Note:
On these models the Navigation drive is located inside the head unit.
^ Press Eject button on head unit to eject DVD from "Navigation" slot.
^ Visually check part number on DVD label.
^ If part number is BQ 646 0226: Reinsert DVD into Navigation drive; this campaign has been completed.
^ If part number is not the above number: Proceed to next step to update Navigation system.
NOTE:
You must obtain Navigation DVD BQ 646 0226 (or newer) by calling Navteq. Navteq does not require the VIN for these vehicles.
4. Eject old Navigation DVD from drive if present.
^ Insert new Navigation DVD into Navigation drive.
Note:
^ Shut off vehicle upon completion of the update process.
Note:
The Navigation DVD must remain inside the drive from this point forward in order for the Navigation system to operate correctly.
Note:
The replaced Navigation DVD for the above models must be returned to Navteq through the standard process.
C. UPDATE NAVIGATION SYSTEM (MODEL 221 ONLY)
NOTE:
^ You must obtain the correct DVD per VIN by filling out the form shown above and fax to Navteq. For reliability, we encourage
you to fax in the form. The DVD will be sequentially numbered according to the VIN you provide in the form. If you have more
than one vehicle listed in the campaign in your dealership, please submit multiple VINs in a single form, Navteq will mail you one
DVD per VIN entered.
Note:
Prior to starting procedure ensure to:
^ Connect battery charger and turn OFF ignition and all electrical consumers
^ Turn ignition key to second position
^ Follow the order of steps exactly as outlined below
1. Power on head unit.
CAUTION!
Ensure that slot # 1 in the DVD changer is empty prior to inserting the Navigation DVD.
2. Press Button 1 of the DVD changer (A, Figure 1) and insert the Navigation DVD BQ 646 0233 into the changer (B).
3. Press COMAND controller to confirm the "Disc Drive Audio Format Unknown" message.
4. Press COMAND controller to confirm the "Proceed with Update" message.
Note:
The update process takes approximately 30 minutes to complete. The technician is not required to be present during the process and
may perform other tasks while the process is running. The update process run time is not included in the labor time paid under this
Service Campaign.
5. Press COMAND controller to acknowledge completion of update process.
6. Press Button 1 to eject Navigation DVD and place it in DVD case.
Note:
This Navigation DVD is property of MBUSA; it must remain with the vehicle/customer after the update process has been completed.
Reproduction is prohibited!
Lighting - Auto Lamps/Rain Sensor Malfunctions

Order No.: S-B-82.30/634
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
All Model 164, 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230 and 251 Vehicles Equipped with Rain/Light Sensor (SA Code 345)
Auto On/Off Driving Lights and/or Rain/Light Sensor not Functioning Properly
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the auto on/off and/or rain/light sensor is not functioning properly, the cause may be
one of the following:
^ The windshield is not a genuine Mercedes-Benz part
^ The rain/light sensor is not the correct part
^ No adaptation or coding was performed on the rain/light sensor
Perform the following procedure to remedy the issue:
1. Verify that the windshield is indeed a genuine Mercedes-Benz part (the genuine parts have the Mercedes-Benz three-pointed star on them).
2. Verify that the correct rain/light sensor is installed by performing a quick test.
3. Perform adaptation and parameterization of the Rain/light sensor via DAS. In most vehicles, the process in DAS is as follows: Control Units -->
Body --> OCP - Overhead control panel --> Control unit adaptations --> Rain/light sensor --> Parameterization and windshield adaptation.
4. If applicable, follow guided tests in Star Diagnosis.
Note:
Please submit all damaged parts along with an initial and final quick test. Costs for components submitted without a documented fault code
WILL NOT BE REIMBURSED.
Note:
generated on September 16. 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance labor time
allowance.
In Case of Warranty, use the table.Technical Service Bulletin # P-77_33-63 Date: 080711
Body - Water Leaks at Side of Vario Roof

Date: July 11, 2008
Order No.: P-B-77.33/63
Supersedes:
Group: 77
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473
Water Entry at Side of Vario Roof

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that water may be entering the cabin at either one of two locations (Figure 1), the contact
pressure of the seals may be too low. Perform the following procedure to resolve.
1. Mark position of seal joints with strips of adhesive tape on vario roof (Figure 2, Pos. 3 and 5).
2. Remove trim on front section of vario roof. Refer to WIS document AR68.30-P-4350V.
3. Unscrew bolts (Figure 3, 7) on retaining rail.
4. Pull seal (Figure 2, Pos. 4) to stretch length by 1-2 mm and retighten bolts (Figure 3, 7).
Note:
Do not pull the seal too far forward otherwise the seals in the area of gap 1 will flatten.
5. Close roof and windows and perform leak test.
6. Re-install trim on front section of vario roof. roof.
7. Lubricate seals at joints (Figure 1, Pos 1 and 2) with special lubricant, part no. A000 989 36 60, open/close vario roof several times and remove
any excess lubricant.
Note:
Crushed seals must be replaced.
8. Check adjustment of side windows and correct the setting if necessary. Refer to WIS documents AR72.10-P-1950V (front window) and
AR67.30-P-4200V (rear side window).
Parts Information
Note:
July 11, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Parking Assist System - Erroneous Activation

Group: 54
a 9/17/08 Applicable Models Updated / Note Added (cause and remedy)
SUBJECT:
All Models Equipped with Parktronic (SA Code 220)
Erroneous Parktronic Activation
Parktronic, the optional vehicle parking assist system, can be erroneously activated with or without warning tones by the following conditions as noted
below.
Note:
The causes mentioned can lead to complaints that may be unduplicatable at the workshop. The workshop technician should thoroughly
inspect the Parktronic sensors for interferance, cleanliness, and proper orientation.
1) Accessory license plate frames installed on the front bumper.
2) Incorrect front license plate orientation.
3) Other detachable accessories that are located within range of the Parktronic sensors.
4) Decreased vehicle ride height, resulting in an echo from the ground.
5) Snow, slush, hail, and sleet.
6) Heavy rain
7) A gush of water, running down the vehicle's hood over the Parktronic sensors when the vehicle is braking.
8) Sensors heavily soiled.
9) Extraneous ultrasonic sources such as air brakes, jackhammer, etc.
10) In ground electrical induction loops, located at traffic lights or in basement garages.
11) Waste heat, from excessively heated engines (exhaust), forms in front of the vehicle when stopped.
Note:
Replacing sensors or control modules will not resolve the false activation. The sensitivity of the Parktronic system is a result of its design, and
is required for accurate operation. Please inform the customers accordingly. Additionally, present to the customer the information contained
within the vehicle's operating instructions, concerning Parktronic operation.
Note:
In cases where the sensors have been replaced/repainted previously, incorrect painting (Figure 1, incorrect) of the sensor may lead to
erroneous readings. Painting the entire front of the sensor changes its vibration characteristics. These altered vibration characteristics may
lead to erroneous readings and random triggering of the system. To remedy, paint the sensors in the provided box (Figure 2). If the box is not
available, mask off the sensor accordingly.
Technical Service Bulletin # S-00_00-80F Date: 081030
Engine - Test For Increased Oil Consumption

Order No.: S-B-00.00/80f
Supersedes: P-B-00.00/80e and T-B-00.00/81e dated January 29, 2007
Group: 00
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Model 164.186, Up to Engine Serial No. 272 967 30 053879
Model 171.454/456, Up to Engine Serial No. 272 9xx 30 058705
Model 203.052/054/056/087/092, Up to Engine Serial No. 272 9xx 30 053555
Model 209.356/456, Up to Engine Serial No. 272 9xx 30 053555
Model 211.056/087/256/287, Up to Engine Serial No. 272 9xx 30 052208
Increased Engine Oil Consumption
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding increased oil consumption based on the below repeated oil level messages in the
instrument cluster, the cause may be due to incomplete engine break-in process.
- Add 1 Quart Oil When next Refueling (Model 211 until production date 06/2005)
- Check Engine Oil Level When Next Refueling (Models 164, 171, 203 and 209 as of production start up and 211 as of production date 06/2005)
NOTE:
As of engine production date February 2005 and engine serial numbers listed above, modified piston ring set has been introduced in series.
The M272 is equipped with an oil level switch. Therefore, no values relating to oil consumption can be read out using SDS or DAS. Oil
refilling between oil change intervals is normal and does not necessarily mean oil consumption has increased.
If the customer's information indicates that the oil consumption is less than 2000 miles/quart; e.g. 2500 miles/quart no further measures are necessary
as that level of consumption is within specification. If oil consumption is greater than 2000 miles/quart; e.g. 1700 miles/quart, perform oil
consumption measurement by weight as follows.
1. Check engine for external oil loss; e.g., oil leaks.
2. Pre-condition the engine of the vehicle by completing the break-in process of the engine as follows:
a. Check the oil level and correct level if necessary.
b. Drive the vehicle for 1 hour under high load and high engine speed (between 4,000 and 6,000 rpm) appropriate for the local conditions and
circumstances.
c. Vary the engine speeds during the road test.
NOTE:
If possible perform this test on interstate type roads where speeds of 55 - 65 mph can be obtained and use the appropriate transmission
gears to maintain engine speed of 4000 to 6000 rpm.
3. Oil consumption measuring drive:
a. Prepare oil consumption measuring drive according to the attached work instructions.
b. Measuring drive should be performed by customer until the oil level warning reappears in the instrument cluster.
c. Determine oil consumption as per work instructions and document calculation on the attached test sheet.
NOTE: Customer should maintain his or her driving style during the entire measuring drive.
4. Limits And Engine Repair Criteria:
NOTE:
Replacing the valve stem seals does not provide an effective remedy to this condition. Therefore valve stem seals must not be replaced.
The engine break-in process depends strongly on the usage conditions and driving style of the customer, and in some cases, the break-in process
can extend to greater than 6500 miles.
a. If mileage is less than 6500 miles and the measured oil consumption is greater than 750 miles/quart; e.g. 600 miles/quart, adjust oil level
to MAX (14.95 lbs. of oil by weight) and continue to observe oil consumption up to mileage reading of at least 6500 miles.
NOTE: Document oil level and mileage reading.
b. If mileage is between 6500 miles and 13,000 and the measured oil consumption is greater than 2000 miles/quart; e.g. 1700 miles/quart,
repair only with a complete engine replacement.
c. The procedure for vehicles with a mileage higher that 13,000 miles is described in WIS document AR18.00-P-0025QB.
NOTE:
- Oil consumption of up to 2000 miles/quart is considered to be within specification.
- Do not replace any engines which have not gone through an oil consumption measuring drive. The filled out test sheet must be
enclosed with any returned engine. Any claims submitted that have not followed the above procedures or do not have full
documentation will be denied.
- The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair. This information has been
generated on October 30, 2008. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Engine, check for oil leak(s)/loss (01-1010)

Engine oil level, correct (00-6000)
Oil consumption test drive, perform (18-1010)
Flex. Service plus - oil/filter change, perform (00-1212)
Engine oil and filter, change (00-2080)
Engine with auto. trans., R&R (01-2800)
Engine - exchange, (engine w/ auto. trans. removed) (01-4015)
Engine with manual trans., R&R (01-2400)
Engine - exchange, (engine w/ man. trans. removed) (01-4011)
Engine - exchange (01-4010)
M272 Oil Consumption Measurement By Weighing Method
Preparation:
Equipment Requirement:
- Scales with 0.01 lb. accuracy.
- Oil Container with 10-liter capacity (Oil drain pan with spout as oil container for this purpose is recommended)
- Stop watch
Procedure:
Weigh Engine Oil (At Start of Oil Consumption Measuring Drive)
1. After pre-conditioning the engine to operating temperature (90 degrees C coolant temperature), raise vehicle on lifting platform.
2. Weigh the empty and clean oil container as "TARE".
3. Open oil filter cap and pull out oil filter.
4. Remove engine lower encapsulation and open oil drain plug.
5. Allow engine to drain into the oil container for 15 minutes.
6. Place the container with drained oil on scales and weigh.
7. Adjust the weight of the oil in the container to 14.95 lbs.; e.g. if "TARE" = 2.55 lbs fill up the container with oil up to the combine weight of
17.50 lbs. (14.95 lbs. + 2.55 lbs.)
8. Pour the engine oil back into the engine.
9. Re-install back the oil filter and oil filler cap.
10. Record the weight of the oil in pounds as m1 and the mileage odometer reading of the vehicle as s1.
Have the customer perform the oil consumption measuring drive.
Weigh Engine Oil (At End of Oil Consumption Measuring Drive)
11. Customer arrives at workshop after oil level warning message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
12. Lift vehicle on lifting platform with engine at operating temperature (90 degrees C coolant temp.).
13. Weigh empty oil container in pounds as "TARE".
14. Open oil filler cap and pull out oil filter.
15. Remove under engine encapsulation and open oil drain plug.
16. Allow engine to drain into the oil container for 15 minutes.
17. Place the container with drained oil on scales and record combined weigh in lbs. as M.
18. Record weight of drained oil in pounds as m2; i.e., m2 = M - "TARE".

19. Calculate oil consumption as described in test sheet.
Power Steering - Fluid Filling/Bleeding Precautions

Group: 46
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Passenger and Light Truck Models
Flow Noises from Area of Power Steering Pump and/or Foaming of Power Steering Oil in Reservoir
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of flow noises from the area of the power steering pump, and/or foaming of the power
steering fluid in the reservoir following work carried out on the hydraulic steering system; this may be caused by an improper procedure followed for
filling fluid and bleeding of the hydraulic power steering system.
To remedy, it is absolutely necessary to make sure that the procedure described in the WIS documents is strictly adhered to. In particular, it is necessary
to turn the steering to full lock-to-lock at least 30 times BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE. If this is not done prior to starting engine, there is a high
risk of air entering the steering system, which is subsequently very difficult to eliminate.
NOTE:
Starting the engine prior to bleeding can cause irreparable damage to the power steering pump and will cause an air cushion to form in the steering
gear which causes noise. Once the air is ingested, the ingested air will only dissipate after driving the vehicle for more than 30 miles.
Refer to the chart for the correct WIS document reference for the proper filling and bleeding procedure of the power steering pump.
Technical Service Bulletin # S-00_30-08H Date: 081024
Engine - MIL ON/Multiple Camshaft Codes Set

DTB

Order No.: S-B-03.30/08h
Supersedes: S-B-03.30/08g dated October 20, 2008
Group: 03
SUBJECT: Model 164.172/186/871/886

Model 171.454/456
Model 203.052/054/056/087/092
Model 204.054/056/081
Model 209.356/372/456/472
Model 211.056/072/087/090/256/287
Model 216.371
Model 219.372
Model 221.171/186
Model 230.471
Model 251.156/165
Equipped with M272 or M273 Engine
Check Engine Light On / Fault Codes 0059, 0060, 0063, 0064, 0271, 0272, 0275, 0276, 1200 and/or 1208 Stored in ME-SFI Control
Module / Camshaft Adjustment Solenoid Leaking Oil
If you receive customer reports of the check engine light being illuminated and the following fault code scenario is found in the above model vehicles,
follow the applicable procedure below to resolve.
Fault Code Scenario 1: DTC 1200 and/or 1208 are stored in ME-SFI control module. The fault codes are recorded as current and stored in the fault
memory. When the fault memory is erased and the engine is restarted, the fault codes reoccur immediately. This is due to the positioning of the
camshafts of the right cylinder bank relative to the crankshaft being impaired by a worn sprocket on the balance shaft on engine M272 or by a worn
guide (idler) gear for the timing chain on engine M273.
Applicable Models (Not Applicable to Model 204): Equipped with M272 Engine Up to Serial No. 2729..30 468993 or M273 Engine Up to Serial No.
2739..30 088611
Procedure 1:
a. Perform a visual inspection for wear of teeth on sprocket of balance shaft (M272) or of guide (idler) gear for timing chain (M273) by removing
the timing case cover on the engine.
NOTE: When inspecting the component, refer to Figure 1 for an example of a damaged gear.
b. To repair engine, replace the balance shaft on engine M272 or to replace the guide (idler) gear of chain drive on engine M273 as per WIS
instructions...
NOTE: When replacing the balance shaft on engine M272 the counterweight must also be replaced. The balance shaft and counter weight are
specific to engine designation. Order parts accordingly.
c. Replace the engine oil pump.
d. Replace the chain tensioner.
e. Change engine oil and filter.
f. Drive with engine at high load and rpm for approx. 15 miles.
g. After completed step f, change engine oil and filter once more.
h. Replace all four of the camshaft adjustment solenoids with A272 051 01 77.
Fault Code Scenario 2: One or more of the fault codes 0059, 0060, 0063, 0064, 0271, 0272, 0275, and 0276 are stored in ME-SFI control module. The
fault codes are recorded as current and stored in the fault memory. These codes are caused by a malfunctioning camshaft adjustment solenoid.
Applicable Models: Equipped with M272 Engine Up to Serial No. 2729..30 759427 or M273 Engine Up to Serial No. 2739..30 193592
Procedure 2: Diagnose each DTC as per Star Diagnosis. If it is determined the solenoid is faulty, replace with solenoid A272 051 01 77 as per
appropriate WIS instructions.
NOTE (Applicable to Procedure 2): Only replace the solenoid that has a corresponding fault code. Copy of the SDS short test must accompany
returned parts. If the documentation is missing or does not support the diagnosis, the warranty claim may be debited.
Fault Scenario 3: Camshaft adjustment solenoid is leaking oil, no fault codes current or stored.
Procedure 3: Replace solenoid sealing ring with A019 997 37 45.
NOTE: It is not necessary to replace the solenoid assembly if it is leaking oil.
Parts Information
NOTE: The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair. This information has been
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Scenario 1:
Short test perform (54-1011)
Ground cable-elec. system battery, D&C (when separating elec. connectors) (54-7989)
Ground cables on both batteries remove/install (when disconnecting elect. connectors w/o accidental contact protection) (54-7991)
Ground cables on both batteries remove/install (when disconnecting elect. connectors w/o accidental contact protection) vehicles as of
modification year (54-7992)
Ground cable to battery negative terminal replace vehicle as of modification year (54-7996)
Timing chain cover-(engine removed), R&R (01-8005)
Timing chain cover-R&R (engine removed) (01-0000)
Timing chain cover, R&R / seal (01-8000)
Engine compartment panels-bottom (all), R&R (61-1069)
Engine compartment panel, bottom-front & rear part, R&R (61-1070)
Engine compartment trim at bottom, remove/install (61-1105)
Front engine compartment paneling, remove/install (vehicle with offroad package) (61- 1101)
Engine with manual trans., R&R (01-2400)
Engine with auto. trans., R&R (01-2800)
Manual transmission, D&C from engine (engine with transmission removed) (26-2200)
Autom. Transmission, R&R (engine with transmission removed) (27-2110)
Engine balancing shaft R&R/replace as required (03-0000)
Timing chain idler sprocket, replace (timing chain cover removed) (05-0000)
Timing chain idler sprocket, replace (timing chain cover removed) (05-8052)
Engine oil pump - (main/lower oil pan removed), R&R/replace (18-6022)
Engine oil pump - R&R/replace as required (oil pan removed) (18-6023)
Engine oil pump - (engine removed), R&R/replace if required (18-6025)
Solenoid units-(all) var. valve time-cam control mech, replace (05-7290)
Wheel alignment, check (40-6500)
Front wheel toe angle adjust (with vehicle alignment check) (40-4064)
Engine oil and filter, change (00-2080)
Oil change, perform (00-6555)
Road test (00-9151)
Additional to road test (00-0000)
Scenario 2:
Short test perform (54-1011)
Test program-after short test, perform (54-1012)
Magnet-Camshaft Adjustment Camshaft A, Replace (05-7300)
Magnet-Camshaft Adjustment Camshaft B, Replace (05-7301)
Magnet-Camshaft Adjustment Camshaft C, Replace (05-7302)
Magnet-Camshaft Adjustment Camshaft D, Replace (05-7303)
Scenario 3:
Magnet-Camshaft Adjustment Camshaft A, Replace (05-7300)
Magnet-Camshaft Adjustment Camshaft B, Replace (05-7301)
Magnet-Camshaft Adjustment Camshaft C, Replace (05-7302)
Magnet-Camshaft Adjustment Camshaft D, Replace (05-7303)
A/T - Limp Home Mode/Multiple Codes Stored

Supersedes: P-B-27.00/102a and T-B-27.00/103a, dated January 9, 2008
Group: 27
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Models Equipped with 722.9 (7G-Tronic) Transmission
Transmission in Limp Home Mode
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the transmission being in limp home mode (intermittently or permanently) with fault
code(s) 0741, 0893, 0894, 2502, 2504, 2505, 2511, 2711, 2783 are stored in the transmission control module as well as particulate in the transmission
oil pan which corresponds to the pattern shown in Figure 1; the cause may be related to the torque converter lock-up clutch or the rear planetary gear
set.
NOTE:
Follow the WSG Pre-Authorization Process as outlined in DTB P-B-27.00/38d dated November 7, 2006 and be sure to provide all of the required
documentation.
To resolve, replace the transmission and torque converter. Be sure to flush all particulate out of the cooler before installing the new transmission/torque
converter.
WARNING:
Do not clean any of the particulate from the oil pan or the magnets prior to sending the transmission back to the QEC.
Parts Information
NOTE:
December 16, 2008. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Short test, perform (54-1011)

Oil pan on auto. trans. remove/install/seal, repl. if necessary veh. with 722.9 trans. (27-7033)
Oil level auto. trans. (after leak test), check/correct veh. with 722.9 trans. (27-1256)
Automatic transmission (veh. with 722.9 trans), R&R (27-2029)
Auto. transmission - (transmission removed), replace (27-2150)
Control unit - software (after short test), install (54-0991)
Control unit - ... code (after short test), perform (54-0992)
Adaptation perform (27-1047)
Analysis form, fill out (02-3472)
M/T - Clutch Pedal Slow To Return To Upper Position

Order No.: P-B-29.10/03
Supersedes:
Group: 29
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/458
Model 204.054
Clutch Pedal Sluggish to React
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the clutch pedal feels sluggish or slow to return to the upper position, the cause may be
the hydraulic line connection to the clutch release bearing. To resolve, replace the hydraulic line (Figure 1, 6) per the steps below.
1. Raise vehicle on lift.
2. Disconnect hose connector by floor pan and release retainer clip at transmission end (Figure 2, 1) to remove hose. Install in reverse order.
NOTE:
Observe brake fluid notes as per WIS AH42.50-P-0001-01A when replacing line.
3. Bleed clutch operating system. Refer to WIS document AR25.20-P-0070V (171) or AR25.20-PP0070CW (204).
4. Check for leaks and proper clutch operation.
Parts Information
NOTE:
October 30, 2008. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Engine compartment panel, bottom - rear part, R&R (61-1072)
Clutch hydraulic hose, replace (29-0000 Clutch release mechanism, bleed air from system (29-1010)
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple O2 Sensor DTC's Set

DTB

Supersedes: S-B-49.00/12 dated August 18, 2008
Group: 27.49
SUBJECT: Model 164.172/186/871/886

Model 171.454/456
Model 203.040/052/054/056/092/087/740
Model 204.054/056/081
Model 209.356/372/456/472
Model 211.056/072/087/090/256/287
Model 215.376/379
Model 216.371/376/379
Model 219.372
Model 220.176/179
Model 221.171/176/179/186
Model 230.471/476/477/479
Model 251.156/165
Engine Running Characteristics / Check Engine Light Activated
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles about engine running characteristics, and the check engine light is activated by stored
oxygen sensor faults, this may be due to the below causes. To resolve, perform a new diagnostic test for the oxygen sensor, available as of DAS DVD
09/07.
Causes
- Mixture formation not ideal
- Line connection of oxygen sensor incorrect
- Oxygen sensor heater defective
NOTE: Copy of the SDS short test and all tests performed must accompany returned parts. If the documentation is missing or does not support
the diagnosis, the warranty claim may be debited.
In Case of Warranty

O2 sensor - left before catalyst, replace (after test) (07-5210)
O2 sensor - right before catalyst, replace (after test) (07-5212)
O2 sensor - left after catalyst, replace (after test) (07-5211)
O2 sensor - right after catalyst, replace (after test) (07-5213)
Technical Service Bulletin # S-13_22-01E Date: 081027
Engine - Grinding/Howling/Whining Noises

DTB

Order No.: S-B-13.22/01e
Supersedes: S-B-13.22/01d dated July 10, 2008
Group: 13
SUBJECT: All Passenger and Light Truck Models

Equipped with Engine M272 Up to Engine Number 272xxx 30 476520
Equipped with Engine M273 Up to Engine Number 273xxx 30 085890
Noise Coming From Front of Engine
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of a RPM dependent grinding, howling, whining or high pitch whistle noise coming from
the front section of the engine, this noise maybe caused by a faulty upper idler pulley. The noise can no longer be heard when the poly-V belt is
removed. To resolve, replace the upper idler pulley with a new unit (Figure 1). The pulley is supplied with a mounting bolt, dust cover, flat spacer
washer and a black plastic retainer (plastic assembly protection) that holds the assembly together.
NOTE: Revised instruction: It is not necessary to remove the spacer before installation. The black plastic retainer will assist in centering the flat spacer
washer and pulley on the mounting lug (Figure 2).
Parts Information
generated on July 10, 2008. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Guide pulley A - V-belt, replace (13-3350)
Computers/Controls - ME 9.7 Control Unit Software Info.

Supersedes: S-B-07.00/84 dated October 9, 2008
Group: 07
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Models, Equipped with Engine M156, M272 and M273
Software Flash Requirements for ME 9.7 Control Units
To help us understand the effectiveness of control unit software updates and determine how we can better inform you regarding these updates, we will
reintroduce the process outlined below effective immediately (for ME 9.7 Control Units Only). For your reference, this control module is used with
M156, M272 and M273 gasoline engines. For every instance of software flashing of this control unit, be sure to:
1. Indicate the customer complaint, all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and the DAS software version in the dealer text field of the warranty claim.
2. Upload the control unit logs from the Star Diagnosis System (SDS) before the new software is installed.
The steps for creating and uploading the log are as follows:
1. Once you are in the "ME 9.7 - Motor electronics 9.7" screen, scroll down to and select "Control unit log" (Press the F3 button to select).
2. You should now be in the "Control Unit Log" screen. Scroll down to and select "Generation of control unit log" (Press the F3 button to select).
3. You should now be in the "Reporting party/contact person" screen. Enter in the required information (Press the F2 button to scroll down the
page).
4. When all of the required information is entered, press the F11 button to print the information for your records and then press F10 to upload the
log file to the server.
The below message box (Figure 1) will appear for approximately 2-3 seconds if the control unit log has made it to the Daimler server. The log transfer
is now finished and you can proceed to the next steps of flashing the ME control unit.
If you receive the below message box (Figure 2), it is because the control unit log has failed to transmit. This is because your Star Diagnosis System is
not finding the internet through your network. Control unit logs can only be transmitted by SDS units which have access to the internet for SCN
Coding. Please check your entire network settings on your SDS unit and attempt to retransmit the log using the procedure found later in this document.
Control unit logs once generated are kept on the SDS unit until they are manually deleted.
NOTE:
This process is being monitored daily. Failure to comply may result in non-payment of your warranty claim.
Process for locating stored control unit logs and resending them:
1. Start DAS with any vehicle connected or in DAS-SIM
2. Go into the menu selection: ME 9.7 - Motor electronics 9.7.
3. Go into the menu selection: Control Unit Log
4. Go into the menu selection: Management of stored control unit logs
5. Mark all of the control unit logs that you want to resend
6. Push the "F6" Button
7. Click on the "OK" button when the "Start Data Transfer" dialog box pops-up, and the log will be resent. The confirmation box shown above
(Figure 1) will pop-up if the log was sent successfully.
NOTE:
In the event that you cannot upload the log file to the server, and you have: checked all of your network settings, confirmed that the SDS unit
is able to SCN Code, attempted to resend the control unit log and are still getting the Data transfer faulty pop-up (Figure 2) please fill out the
"SDS Online Error Report" located on NetStar -> STAR TekInfo -> Feedback & Quality -> SDS Online Error Report Technical Service
Bulletin # S-09_10-30 Date: 081202
Engine - Air Filter Replacement Precautions

Order No.: S-B-09.10/30
Group: 09
SUBJECT:
MY- All, Models 164, 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 216, 219, 221, 230, 251, and 463 (with Engine 272 or 273)
Installing Air Filters
An improperly installed air filter assembly can cause the air mass sensor to receive turbulent, instead of laminar air flow due to air leakage at the sealing
ring (4c, Figure 1). This in turn can cause 0745, 0749, 2091, or 2095 ME fault codes.
A. Procedure for Installing Air Filters
1. Apply lubricant to the retaining clip (4b, Figure 1) and the sealing ring (4c, Figure 1).
NOTE:
Apply only a thin layer of lubricant to the ring to avoid getting any on the HFM-SFI (hot film air mass sensor fuel injection system).
2. Fit the air filter housing (4, Figure 2) on the HFM-SFI while checking that the sealing ring (4c, Figure 1) is correctly positioned.
3. Fit retaining clips (4b, Figure 1) on the support (4a, Figure 1). If necessary, adjust by positioning retaining clips (4b, Figure 1) precisely.
4. Before pressing the raining clips in, ensure that the air filter housing is correctly set on the HFM-SFI.
NOTE:
Check that the sealing ring (4c, Figure 1) is correctly positioned and realign it if necessary. The housing may have to be shifted slightly
toward the radiator. Check that there is no gap between the air filter housing (4, Figure 2) and the ME-SFI [ME] (motor electronic sequential
multiport fuel injection/ignition system) control unit at the firewall end and that they are both parallel and aligned evenly.
5. Press the air filter housing (4, Figure 3) evenly into the support (4a, Figure 3) without applying excessive force. If unsuccessful, start again at step
2.
7. Install the hose (3, Figure 2) for the air pump at the air filter housing (4, Figure 3) so that the arrows on the hose (3, Figure 2) and the air filter
housing (4, Figure 3) point towards each other.
8. Install the left and right intake air ducts (2, Figure 3). Inspecting for any cracks, do not pull on the braided hose. Pull or press the vinyl ring only.
Sealing rings must make contact over the entire surface.
9. Fit the front engine cover on the vehicle.
Parts Information
Navigation System - DVD Not Recognized

Supersedes: P-B-82.85/524b dated Oct. 16, 2008
Group: 82
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, MY 05 and Later
Model 211.026/056/065/070/072/076/077/082/083/087/090/265/282/283, MY 04 and Later
Model 215.373/374/375/376/378/379, MY 04 - 06 Model 219.375/376, MY 06 and Later
Model 220.170/173/174/175/176/183/184, MY 04 - 06
Model 230.471/472/474/475/476/477/479, MY 04 and Later
New Navigation Processor / DVD Not Recognized
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the Navigation DVD not being recognized after a Navigation Module replacement, or
when a customer wants to update the latest Navigation DVD database version, please follow the part replacement and Firmware update guidelines
below. If the customer vehicle is equipped with any of the Navigation Modules listed below, the earliest (minimum) Navigation DVD that it can read is
BQ646 0223.
A 211 870 52 26 A 211 870 09 85 A 211 870 10 85

A 211 870 57 85 A 211 870 60 85
For more details, reference the Navigation Module - DVD Compatibility Chart (Figure 1) by looking at the Navigation Module part number on the left
and checking the compatible Navi DVD part number. Please refer to the special case.
Special Case: If the installed Navigation DVD part number is BQ646 0205 and the customer requests the latest Navigation DVD (BQ6460229 or
newer), the Navi DVD may not be recognized by the module. To remedy, please update the Navi Module Firmware using DVD W211 589 15 22 00
outlined by the process below.
Navigation Module Software Update Process:
1. Park the vehicle in an area where there is unobstructed view of the GPS satellites.
2. Turn ignition ON, Head Unit ON -> press the MAP hardkey.
3. In the trunk, locate the Navigation Module -> eject the existing navigation DVD
4. Insert Service Update DVD part number W211 589 15 22 00, wait about 20 seconds -> the update process starts automatically.
If process does not start automatically, turn system and vehicle OFF, allow MOST and CAN to sleep -> turn system ON again
5. After about 4 minutes the update process is complete, eject the Service Update DVD.
6. Insert the latest Navigation Database DVD, you will notice the progress bars on the head unit, this indicates the new Navigation Database DVD is
loading successfully.
7. When the update process is complete, turn ignition OFF and wait about 3 minutes to allow MOST and CAN to sleep.
8. Turn the ignition ON and allow the Navi to warm-start and acquire the satellites.
9. Check Navi for correct operation by entering a destination.

NOTE:
This is a required Special Tool and is automatically released to every MBUSA dealer. Additional quantities can be ordered at the dealer's discretion
upon receipt of your initial units.Technical Service Bulletin # S-82_70-666 Date: 081124
Cell Phone - iPhone(R) Address Book Not Loading

Order No.: S-B-82.70/666
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
Model 164.122/172/175/177/186/822/871/886, MY 2006 - 2008
Model 171.454/456/473, MY 2005 - 2008
All Model 203 Vehicles, MY 2005 - 2008 (Except 203.065 and 203.747)
All Model 209 Vehicles, MY 2005 - 2009
All Model 211 Vehicles, MY 2004 - 2008 with COMAND Head Unit (528 or 530) Model 216.371/376/377/379, MY 2007 - 2009
Model 219.372/377 2006 - 2008
Model 221.171/176/179/186/177 MY 2007 - 2009
Model 230.470/471/472/474/475/476/477/479 MY 2005 - 2008
Model 251.122/156/165/175/177 MY 2006 - 2008
Model 463.249/271, MY 2007 - 2008 Apple iPhone or iPhone 3G Address Book Not Loading In vehicles Equipped With Hands-free Telephone and
Blue Tooth Cradle (HFP-Puck)
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles equipped with a hands-free blue tooth cradle HFP-Puck that the address book did not load
(only with Apple iPhone or iPhone 3G), this may be caused by a software error in the iPhone itself. The remedy is revised software for the iPhone,
which is currently being developed by the Apple Corporation. Please do not replace any parts, the solution is forthcoming and this DTB will be revised
accordingly.
NOTE:
For model vehicles (MY 05 - 08) which use a hands-free Bluetooth Puck (HFP), the iPhone 3G will not fit on the current iPhone Cradle, the
dimensions between phones are different. Please look for specific communication from MB-Accessories regarding a new iPhone 3G specific cradle.
Technical Service Bulletin # S-18-00-37D Date: 081024
Engine - Low Oil Level Symptom Diagnostics

DTB

Order No.: S-B-18.00/37d
Supersedes: S-B-18.00/37c dated October 6, 2008
Group: 18

Equipped with M156, M272, M273 or M642
Engines Low Oil Level Symptoms
NOTE: This document supersedes the following previously published DTBs.

T-B-01.45/20 dated September 19, 2007
P-B-18.00/31c dated February 1, 2007
T-B-18.00/32a dated August 21, 2006
T-B-18.00/33b dated March 27, 2007
P-B-18.00/35a dated July 26, 2007
P-B-18.40/34 dated May 8, 2007
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the oil level warning message frequently appearing in the instrument cluster, "Oil level
too low" or "Check Engine Oil Level at Next Service Stop", but the oil level is correct on the dipstick, there could be several causes depending on the
vehicle. This document is a consolidation of those possible causes.
1. Model 203.087/092 and 211.087/287, Equipped with M272 - Erroneous IC Warning Display "Check Engine Oil Level at Next Service Stop": Oil
level warning message frequently appears in the instrument cluster, however the oil level correct on the dipstick, the cause may be the incorrect
oil data record stored in the ASSYST control unit (Model 211), or instrument cluster (Model 203). To resolve, perform the following procedures.
Message:
"Pour in one liter of oil at next refueling stop" (Model 211 4MATIC with M272 up to 6/2005) "Check oil level at next refueling stop" (Model
211 4MATIC as of 6/2005 and Model 203 4MATIC with M272 as of production startup)
1a. Adaptation of Modified Oil Data Record with SDS 10/06 or Later
Model 203 4MATIC with M272 Engine, up to VIN F886321: Control Units -> Information and communication -> ICM - Vehicle code 12 /
NO -> CU adaptations -> select code 807 -> select national version select M272 all-wheel drive change status 3 "or higher" confirm selection.
Model 211 4MATIC with M272 Engine, up to VIN X218820
- Check whether CGW programming is possible by using SDS: Control units -> Body -> CGW -> Control Unit adaptations -> Control Unit
programming. If yes, perform control unit programming and then perform parameterization in ASSYST. If no, perform parameterization
in ASSYST.
- Perform parameterization in ASSYST by using SDS: Start Control -> Units -> Information and communication -> ASSYST -> CU
adaptations -> select engine M272 -> Select national version -> Select engine for ASSYST M272 Model 211 all-wheel drive "National
version" status 5 or higher.
1b. Check Oil Dipstick Marking on Handle (Model 203 / 211 up to Engine No. 2729..30467144)
NOTE: As of February 2, 2007, Section 1b of this DTB must not be performed on the following vehicles which are covered under Service
Campaign No. 2007010010
Model 203.087 - Serial Nos. AF725595 to F864624

Model 203.092 - Serial Nos. F725472 to F885088
Model 211.087 - Serial Nos. X177825 to X219293
Model 211.287 - Serial Nos. X174229 to X219226
Combining step 1b with the above referenced Campaign will result in a charge back of step 1b.
a. Oil dipstick with marking 27214 is correct.
b. Oil dipstick with different marking should be replaced with part number A272 010 14 72.
c. Check whether quantity of engine oil in engine corresponds to specification in WIS.
2. Model 164.186 - Erroneous IC Warning Display "Check Engine Oil Level at Next Service Stop" Confirm engine type coding in ASSYST using
the current issue of SDS: Control unit -> Information and Communication - ASSYST Active Service System -> Control Unit Adaptations ->
Engine Type - Code to correct engine type.
3. Model 164.871 - Oil Level Too Low Displayed In Instrument Cluster: Initial oil level too low, perform the following applicable corrective
measure.
3a. Vehicles Up to VIN No. A213990 / Production Date 12/20/2006 - Check and correct oil level where necessary by adding 0.3 liter oil at PDI
or at the customers "1st Visit" for all newly sold GL450 vehicles. Refer to WIS document AP-18.00-P-0101GZ. Costs are to be charged using
the warranty code 00001 70.
3b. Check Oil Dipstick Marking on Handle - Oil dipstick with marking 27314 is correct. Oil dipstick with different marking should be replaced
with part number A273 010 14 72. New specification for quantity of engine oil in engine is 9.0 liters with filter change.
3c. Vehicles with VIN No. A213991 up to A235524 / Production Date 2/9/2007
NOTE: Do not automatically add 0.3 liters of oil; check dipstick first.
Oil dipstick with marking 27314 is correct. Oil dipstick with different marking should be replaced with part number A273 010 14 72. New
specification for quantity of engine oil in engine is 9.0 liters with filter change.
4. Model 221.186, Equipped with M273 Engine and 4-Matic, Erroneous IC Warning Display "Check Engine Oil Level at Next Service Stop" -
Update oil data record in ASSYST using SDS: Control unit Information and Communication ASSYST Control Unit Adaptations SCN coding
Perform SCN online coding Work through steps 1-3 in SDS to perform SCN coding.
5. Model 209/211/219, Equipped with M156 Engine, Oil Level Warning Message "Add 1 liter engine oil at next refueling stop" or "Check oil at
next refueling stop" in Instrument Cluster / Oil Level on Dipstick is OK - Perform the following steps.
a. Check the coding of the engine model designation and oil data set of the ASSYST control unit in SDS -> Control units -> Information and
communication -> ASSYST -> Control unit adaptations -> Engine type -> Engine type M156 E63 Version for rest of world Status: 3 has been
recognized -> Information and communication -> ASSYST PLUS -> Control unit adaptations -> Control module reset
b. Check installed oil dipstick and replace if necessary. The correct oil dipstick is identifiable by the red handle and by the code 156 16
(previously 156 12 or 156 14)
c. Check oil level and correct if necessary.
6. Model 164.122/822 (up to VIN A261645) and 251.122 (up to VIN A059019), "Check oil at next refueling stop" Warning in Instrument Cluster -
If you receive customer reports that at speeds above 75 mph the instrument cluster displays - Check engine oil level at next refueling stop, the
cause may be the position of the oil level switch.
NOTE: Condition only relevant when the oil level is significantly above "min".
a. To resolve, install a lengthened bracket (7 mm) for the oil level switch (part number A642 018 27 40) and check software in the Central
Gateway. For Model 164 vehicles, the data records in software version 30A9 (and higher) are OK and for Model 251 vehicles, the data
records in software version 30AA (and higher) are OK. SDS path: Control units -> Information and communication -> ASSYST -> Control
unit log. The software description in the ECU control unit log from ASSYST (not ASSYST Plus). In the Line "Variant code", the first 4
characters "00 01..." gives you the information on the above mentioned software (Figure 1). If the software is incorrect, look for the latest
software with DAS.
b. Replace the oil level switch as per step 7.
7. All Passenger and Light Truck Models, Equipped with Engine M156, M272, M273 or M642 (Up to engine no. 642 xxx 40 673486), Faulty Oil
Level Switch - If after performing the applicable remedy(s) 1 through 6 stated within this document, the issue has not been resolved, the cause
may be a malfunctioning oil level switch. Perform the following.
a. Check the oil level using the dipstick.
b. If the oil level is confirmed between the "MIN" and the "MAX" marks on the dipstick, replace oil level switch with part number A001 153 11
32 as per the applicable WIS document.
NOTE: For Engines M272, M273 and M642 - If there is any deformation of the stamped steel bottom section of the oil pan after removal, it
must be replaced. Refer to EPCnet for applicable part number.
c. It is possible to install the switch upside down. For correct installation refer to Figure 2.
Parts Information
In Case of Warranty

Oil dipstick, check and replace if necessary (01-0000)
Engine oil level, correct (00-6000)
Oil dipstick, check and replace if necessary (18-0000)
Control unit - .... code (after short test), perform (54-0992) Panels all, below all, engine R&R (Operation Code: 94-5305, 61-1069,
61-1070, 61-1071, 61-1072, 61-1075, 61-1105, 61-1110 or 61-1128)
Engine oil level / oil quality sensor, R&R/replace (18-4110)
Engine Controls - Misfire Diagnostic Information

Supersedes: P-B-07.61/72 and T-B-07.61/73 dated July 10, 2007
Group: 07
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Model 129.068
Model 163.154/157/172/175
Model 164.172/175/186/871/886
Model 170.465
Model 171.454/456
Model 202.029
Model203.040/052/054/056/061/064/081/084/087/092/261/264/281/284/740/764
Model 204.054/056
Model 208.365/370/465/470
Model 209.356/365/372/375/456/465/472/475
Model 210.065/070/082/083/265/282
Model 211.056/065/070/072/082/083/087/090/256/265/282/283/287
Model 215.375
Model 216.371
Model 219.372/375
Model 220.067/070/083/170/175/183/184
Model 221.171/186
Model 230.471/475
Model 251.156/165/175
Model 463.249
Diagnosis in DAS for Misfire Fault Codes
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles concerning combustion misfiring, process the faults using the guided diagnosis in DAS. A
guided diagnosis program for the fault codes listed below is available in DAS as of DVD 03/2007.
NOTE:
Only parts indicated by the SDS test may be replaced. The engine control unit must not be replaced in the case of the fault codes listed below. If the
guided test does not indicate there is a malfunctioning ignition coil, do not replace the ignition coil. All other components being replaced and
requested by the QEC for inspection must be accompanied by full supporting documentation (i.e. control unit log, short test and fault code / freeze
frame data from other related control modules). If the documentation is missing or does not support the diagnosis, the warranty claim may be
debited.
Electrical - Horn Replacement Information

Supersedes: S-B-54.35/193 dated Feb. 21, 2008
Group: 54
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Up to April 2008 Production
Replacing the Fanfare Horns
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the horn not functioning correctly, and it is due to corrosion, replace both the tweeter (
510 Hz) and the woofer (420 Hz) even if only one horn is defective. Refer to vehicle specific WIS documentation for replacement instructions.
Body - Luggage Compartment Partition Wall Is Loose

DTB

Supersedes: P-B-68.30/46 dated Feb. 27, 2006
Group: 68
SUBJECT: Model 171.454/456/473

Luggage Compartment Partition Wall Loose
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding the luggage compartment partition wall being loose, the holding force of the
expansion rivet between the bracket and partition wall may be insufficient. To resolve, replace the expansion rivets (Figure 1, arrow). Be sure to grease
the rivets (Figure 2) before installing.
Parts Information
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Expansion rivet - rollo trunk partition panel, replace (02-5119)
Body - Mirrors Are Noisy When Extending/Retracting

DTB

Order No.: P-B-88.70/70
Supersedes:
Group: 88
SUBJECT: All Model 171, 204, 211, 219 and 230 Vehicles
Up To Mirror Production 2/6/2008
Electric Folding Outside Mirror Makes Noise While Extending or Retracting
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles where mirrors are noisy during extending or retracting, at cold temperatures (<59 degrees F
), the electric folding outside mirror (code 500) may make a creaking noise during the folding sequence. Perform the following procedure to resolve.
1. Remove outside mirror trim. Refer to WIS document AR88.70-P-9040 (V 171), (CW 204), (T & TM 211), (TX 219) or (RA 230)
2. Determine mirror production date (Figure 1 - 204 on harness tag and Figure 2 - other models on motor label).
3. Grease retaining washer in area of slots (Figure 3).
4. Drill hole (3 mm diameter) at a height of 3 cm (Figure 4).

5. Grease the sliding disk. It must be greased with the outside mirror in three positions (folded in, intermediate position and folded out - Figures 5
and 6).
6. Operate outside mirrors electrically several times (approx. 8 times).
7. Install outside mirror trim. Refer to WIS document AR88.70-P-9040 (V 171), (CW 204), (T & TM 211), (TX 219) or (RA 230).
NOTE:
- In the event of complaints, repair both outside mirrors!
- For the complaint of high pitched squeak noise after mirror movement, at the present time no 2 remedy is available. Do not replace any parts.
Parts Information
generated on September 25, 2008. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Outside rear view mirror housing cover - left, R&R (88-3424)
Outside rear view mirror housing cover - right, R&R (88-3427)
Outside rear view mirror modification - left (88-0000)
Outside rear view mirror modification - right (88-0000)
Technical Service Bulletin # S-27_60-61J Date: 081120
A/T - Harsh 1-2/3-2 And 2-1 Shifts

Order No.: S-B-27.60/61j
Supersedes: P-B-27.60/61i dated August 21, 2007 and T-B-27.60/62i dated Dec. 4, 2007
Group: 27
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Models with Automatic Transmission 722.9, 7G-Tronic (NAG2) Uncomfortable Shift Quality of 1-2, 3-2 and 2-1 Gear shifts
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of rough 1-2, 3-2 and 2-1 gearshifts, this may be due to the specific gear not being fully
adapted or there could also be a mechanical cause as well. To resolve, perform the following diagnostic sequence.
1. Reproduce the complaint and identify the affected shifts using Star Diagnosis.
2. Print out adaptation data in the form of a transmission control unit log (do not reset the adaptation values).
3. Re-adapt the problem shift using the adaptation process in Star Diagnosis and print a post process transmission control unit log.
NOTE:
For downshifts, the vehicle must coast to a stop without braking in order for adaptation to occur.
For upshifts, the vehicle must be driven and shifted within the valid torque window (green zone in torque display in Star Diagnosis).
If the condition still exists after adaptation, compare adaptation values before and after adaptation test drive. If the values for the filling times of these
shift operations are close to the negative limit of -20 cycles (between -15 and -20), but move further into the negative with further adaptation, this may
have the following cause / remedy.
Cause A - An incorrectly installed retaining ring for return spring B1 or B3.
Remedy A:
1. Remove the transmission
2. Disassemble multi-disk brake B1& B3
3. Remove / install / replace retaining ring and disk spring. Refer to test/repair work procedure in WIS document AR27.50-P-0870W and
AR27.50-P-0890W.
NOTE:
There are two different versions of the B1 and B3 multi-disk brake. It is essential to ensure that the retaining ring is ordered correctly. Refer
to Figures 1 through 3 and the parts table, identification groove on the inside/outside of the plate supports.
4. When assembling, insure that the anti-twist locks are correctly positioned! (See Figure 4: Correct positioning of anti-twist lock for thrust
bearing).
5. Completely reset all adaptation data.
6. If shift quality complaints still occur after the work has been completed, the affected shifts must be adapted before further steps are taken.
Cause B- Warped disks of the B1. This can be determined by placing them on a flat surface - they do not lie flat and are uneven.
Remedy B
1. Replace disks of B1, disk spring and retaining ring.
2. Completely reset all adaptation data.
3. If shift quality complaints still occur after the work has been completed, the affected shifts must be adapted before further steps are taken.
Parts Information
NOTE:
November 20, 2008. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty
Operation: Road test, perform (00-9151)

Short test, perform (54-1011)
Oil level - auto. trans. (after leak test), check/correct vehicle w/ 722.9 trans. (27-1256)
Adaptation, perform (27-1047)
Automatic transmission (vehicle with 722.9 trans.), R&R (27-2029)
Auto. trans. (722.6/722.9) - K1/K2/K3/B1/B2/B3/Freewheel, D&A/repl. parts as required transmission removed) (27-9999)
Keyless Entry - Various Malfunctions

Order No.: S-B-80.00/53
Supersedes:
Group: 80
SUBJECT:
MY- All, Models All
Replace Battery in Transmitter Key
In the event of complaints about the function of the vehicle key, first check for and remove any soil or grease from the battery or battery contacts using
the lint-free cloth and alcohol.
NOTE:
To ensure faultless contact, do not touch the batteries on their contact sides. Technical Service Bulletin # S-68_05-47A Date: 081219
Accessories - Can't Program Garage Door Opener

Group: 68
Revision History
SUBJECT:

Garage Door Opener Cannot be Programmed
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the integrated garage door opener on the interior rearview mirror or overhead control
panel unable to accept coding from a hand-held garage door transmitter, this may be caused by the integrated garage door opener being preprogrammed.
You can determine if the system has been preprogrammed by pressing a signal transmitter button. The indicator lamp will illuminate but will not flash.
To resolve, please refer the customer to the instructions noted in the Operator's Manual on erasing the integrated remote control memory. Attached is a
copy of the instructions that can be provided to the customer.
NOTE:
The enclosed procedure cannot be claimed under Warranty.
Instructions on Resetting the Integrated Remote Control Memory

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Simultaneously press and hold down the outer signal transmitter buttons (Figure 1 or 2, 2 and 4) for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator
lamp (Figure 1 or 2, 1) flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
3. The codes of all three channels are erased.
4. Program integrated garage door opener as per the instructions outlined in the Operator's Manual.
WARNING:
Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way
of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When
programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes. Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April
1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming the
integrated remote control. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling
it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Technical Service Bulletin # S-18_00-17G Date: 080926
Vehicle - Approved Service Products On WIS

DTB

Group: 47

Equipped with FSS / FSS+ or MB Maintenance System
Approved Service Products
NOTE: As of July 15, 2008, information on approved service fill oils can be found on WIS-Net.
Locate the Search Aid for Specifications for Operating Fluids (BB00.40-P-0900A) within WIS-net, by entering the number in the Document number
field and clicking Enter (Figure 1).
Please note the specified engine oils by engine type are listed in BB00.40-P-0223-02A and relevant sheets for Engine Oil in search results are 229.3,
229.5 and 229.51. Transmission fluid sheets have a 236.X number.
Technical Service Bulletin # S-91_10-125C Date: 081216
Memory Systems - Easy Entry/Exit Feature Is Inoperative

Order No.: S-B-91.10/125c
Supersedes: S-B-91.10/125b dated Oct. 20, 2008
Group: 91
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All 164, 171, 203, 209 and 251 Vehicles, Equipped with Memory Seats (Code 275)
All 211, 219 and 230 Vehicles
Easy Entry/Exit Feature for Seat Position Not Functioning
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding the easy entry/exit feature for the seat position not functioning, this may be due to
prior replacement of the instrument cluster (A1) on vehicles up to production date 06/01/2005. This can be corrected by installing one of the following
seat ECU (N32/1 or N32/2) part numbers and programming the ECU with SDS release 09/06 or newer.
Models 164, 171, 219 and 251: Control units with the following part numbers should only be programmed and coded with SDS release 09/2006 or
later.
A211 820 11 85 A211 820 85 85 A211 870 05 85 A211 870 49 85
Model 203 without Central Gateway (CGW or N93): Control units with the following part numbers are to be replaced with A211 870 46 26 and then
programmed and coded with SDS release 09/2006 or later. Control units with part number A211 870 46 26 should only be programmed and coded with
SDS release 09/2006 or later.
A203 820 15 26 A211 820 01 26 A211 820 40 85 A211 820 11 85

A211 820 85 85 A211 870 05 85 A211 870 49 85
Model 203 with Central Gateway (CGW or N93) and Model 211: Control units with the following part numbers are to be replaced with A211 870 46
26 and then programmed and coded with SDS release 09/2006 or later.
A203 820 15 26 A211 820 01 26 A211 820 40 85
A211 820 11 85 A211 820 85 85 A211 870 05 85 A211 870 49 85
Model 209: Control units with the following part numbers are to be replaced with A211 870 46 26 and then programmed and coded with SDS release
09/2006 or later.
A203 820 15 26 A211 820 01 26 A211 820 40 85
A211 820 89 85 A211 870 17 26 A211 870 46 26
NOTE:
On model 209 vehicles produced prior to 03/2004, the control units cannot be programmed in the vehicle. Instead, the control units must first be
installed and programmed in a model 211 vehicle, or a model 203 vehicle as of 08/2003, then installed in the 209 vehicle.
Model 230: Control units with the following part numbers are to be replaced with either A230 820 60 26 A230 820 61 26 (or equivalent superseding
parts) and then programmed and coded with SDS release 09/2006 or later.
A230 820 05 26 A230 820 06 26 A230 820 32 26 A230 820 33 26

A230 820 43 26 A230 820 44 26
Parts Information
NOTE:
October 20, 2008. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
In Case of Warranty

Power seat memory control module - for driver seat, replace (after test) (91-6685)
Driver seat cushion, R&R (91-5008)
Power seat control module - for driver seat, replace (seat cushion removed) (91-6687)
Control unit - .... code (after short test), perform (54-0992)
A/C - Airscarf Blower Motor Noises

Order No.: P-B-91.30/182
Supersedes:
Group: 91
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/458/473, Equipped with Airscarf (SA Code 403)
Fan Blade Deflection Noises when Airscarf in Use
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that there are fan blade deflection noises coming from the seat backrest when the Airscarf is
in use in an occupied seat, this may be caused by the Airscarf blower fan housing flexing enough to where the fan blades strike the housing. As of
October 2008, the Airscarf blower motor housing was modified to be more robust. To remedy the issue, replace the Airscarf blower motor (Figure 1) on
both seats as per WIS document AR91.30-P-2000V.
Note:
Ensure that the blower motor replacement part has a production date of at least 08T288 (October 14, 2008).
Parts Information
Note:
In Case of Warranty, use the table above.

A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance

Order No.: S-B-83.55/118
Supersedes:
Group: 83.55
SUBJECT:
Defective Refrigeration Circuit / Refrigerant Compressor
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles related to "no or low AC cooling performance", it may be due to a locked refrigerant
compressor, a broken torque limiter on the refrigerant compressor, the refrigeration circuit blocked or an electrical defect in the refrigerant compressor.
To remedy any of these issues please proceed with the following.
Note:
This document is intended as a supplement to the SDS function test "Refrigerant circuit test". Only perform repair and replacement work on the
refrigerant circuit if the SDS refrigerant circuit test was unsuccessful and you have received appropriate instructions in the SDS function test.
Prerequisites:
1. Before parts can be replaced, the exact quantity of the refrigerant in the refrigeration circuit must be determined by evacuating the system. When
returning parts be sure to indicate the exact amount of refrigerant in the circuit and any other findings by the technician. If the filling capacity is not
indicated, warranty claims may be rejected.
2. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low, parts should only be replaced if the torque limiter is broken.
3. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low and the torque limiter is damaged, the leak test (Test 6 "Leak in refrigeration circuit") must be
performed using the "Technology Guide Vehicle Climate Control" located in SDS SDMedia first and then the system must be refilled and checked. If
the amount of refrigerant in the circuit is less than 80% of the normal level, it is too low. Inadequate fill levels may be the cause of the air conditioning
shutting down or malfunctioning.
Remedy A - Broken Torque Limiter:
1. Ensure the alternator freewheel (when applicable) is not damaged and that the belt pulley of the refrigerant compressor rotates in the belt drive.
2. If the alternator freewheel is blocked, replace the alternator freewheel. For refrigerant compressors with a replaceable belt pulley, replace the belt
pulley only, otherwise replace the refrigerant compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
3. If the alternator freewheel is not blocked and black refrigerant/oil is evacuated from the system, replace the AC compressor. Refer to EPCNet for
applicable part number.
Remedy B - Blockage in the Refrigeration Circuit
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not been underfilled or overfilled.
2. Inspect along the AC lines to check for blockage at the points with marked temperature differences.
3. Identify and replace the blocked components in the refrigeration circuit. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
Remedy C - Electrical Defect in Refrigerant Compressor
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not been underfilled or overfilled.
2. After ruling out a short circuit in the actuation and ground wiring, replace the refrigerant compressor only. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part
number.
Note:
^ Always empty the oil from the new refrigerant compressor before installing.
^ When completely refilling the system, ensure the quantity of oil and refrigerant is correct (refer to WIS document BF83.00-Z-9999AZ). Take into
consideration whether individual components or the entire refrigerant circuit are to be replaced.
^ Always perform a leak test on the system after changing the refrigerant circuit but before filling it with refrigerant.
Note:
In Case of Warranty, use the tables above.
Technical Service Bulletin # P-83_00-70D Date: 090416
A/C - A/C Lamp Flashing/A/C Inoperative

Supersedes: P-B-83.00/70c dated June 16, 2008
Group: 83
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Model 171, 203, 209, 211, 216, 219 and 221 Vehicles
AC or AC Off Indicator Lamp Flashes After Actuation / Air Conditioning Not Functioning
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the AC or AC Off indicator lamp flashing and the air conditioning is not operating, the
cause could be the coding of the climate system control module. Follow the instructions below to overcome the specification parameter in the
refrigerant level logic circuit.
1. Process any fault codes in the climate system and repair as necessary.
2. Confirm refrigerant level by performing a Refrigerant Circuit Test as per SDS and following instructions for corrective actions.
3. Only after steps 1 and 2 are completed, use Star Diagnosis to deactivate the fill level control as per the instructions listed below.
Model 203: Control unit groups --> Body --> EZS - Electronic ignition switch --> Control unit adaptations --> Read coding and change if necessary -->
Climate control --> Standard setting: Climate control --> Refrigerant level check --> Set to Inactive
Model 216/221: Main groups --> Control units --> Air conditioning --> AAC - Automatic air conditioning (Interior CAC bus) --> Read coding and
change if necessary --> Control unit adaptations --> Workshop coding --> Refrigerant level check --> Set to Deactivated
Model 171, 211 and 219: If the fluid level control is still active, there will be a menu item in 'Main groups' labeled 'Check for necessary coding
measures' (Figure 1). Process this menu item to deactivate the coding of the fluid level controls (Figure 2 and 3). If the fluid level control is already
inactive, this additional menu item will not appear when "Main groups" is selected (Figure 4).
Note:
If the fluid level control has already been deactivated and the vehicle has the symptoms described, there is a fault that has not been corrected and further
diagnosis is necessary. Refer to applicable diagnostic trees in the Vehicle Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning (HVAC) Manual found on STAR
TekInfo --> EDAC --> Non EDAC Guides.
Note:
April 16, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Engine Controls - Engine Won't Start When Hot

Order No.: S-B-54.21/215
Supersedes:
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
All Models Equipped with Engine M272 and M273
Engine Cannot Be Started When Engine is Hot but Will Start After Engine has Cooled
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles that the engine cannot be started when the engine is hot but will start after the engine has
cooled and there are no Diagnostic Trouble Codes stored in the ME control unit, check the signal to the fuel pump relay from the ME Control unit
(12VDC with Key in position "1" N3/10 pin 17 + and pin 4). If no signal is found, check the wiring from the ME control unit to the fuel pump relay. If
the wiring checks out, it may be due to an open circuit in the ME control unit. In this case, replace the ME control unit and retest the signal to the fuel
pump relay. Refer to EPCnet for applicable part number.
Note:
A copy of the short test and all tests performed must accompany returned parts. If the documentation is missing or does not support the diagnosis, the
warranty claim may be debited.
Note:
Steering - Leaks At Steering Gear/Hose Junction

Supersedes: P-B-46.20/16d dated Nov. 10, 2008;

P-B-46.20/10c dated Dec. 19, 2007
Group: 46
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Models 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230
Leaks at the Steering Gear Control Head Connection to High or Low Pressure Lines or Leaks at Internal Steering Lines of the Control Head Connection
to Steering Gear Housing
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of leakage at the steering gear control head connection of high and low pressure lines or
from the internal steering lines at the connection between the control head and the steering housing, this may be caused by damage to a respective
O-ring at the control head or steering housing. Follow the below to resolve.
Note:
It is not necessary to replace the entire rack-and-pinion steering system. The O-rings are now available as separate parts or as part of repair kits.
Repair A (Model 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221 and 230)
To replace the O-rings of the affected connections at the steering gear control head to the high or low pressure steering lines, it is necessary to seal both
lines at the same time, due to the common retaining plate for both lines. Proceed as follows.
1. Loosen line connection on steering gear. Refer to applicable WIS documents shown above.
Note:
If necessary, loosen line supporting brackets.
2. Replace sealing rings and support ring.
Note:
Ensure that sealing rings and supporting ring are properly seated. Supporting ring only present on high pressure line.
Note:
There are two versions of power steering high-pressure lines. The preceding version has a slotted support ring which can be replaced individually. The
new version has a support ring which is not slotted and which cannot be replaced individually; in this case the complete power steering high pressure
hose must be replaced (refer to EPC to specify correct high pressure hose).
3. Fasten line connection on steering gear with retaining plate. Fasten any loosened line supporting brackets and reinstall any removed panelings.
Note:
Observe torque values for screw connection. Refer to WIS documents for specifications.
4. Bleed steering system and check for leaks. Refer to the DTB S-B-46.30/40b (or latest version).
Repair B (Model 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 219 and 220):
To remedy leaks at the connections of internal lines between the steering gear head and the steering housing individually, replace the short or long
internal oil lines and respective seals. Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the steering gear from the vehicle as described in the WIS documents as shown above.
2. Replace internal pipelines from control head to steering gear housing. Refer to applicable WIS document as shown above.
3. Reinstall the power steering gear as described in the WIS documents listed under step 1 based on the respective model.
4. Toe adjustment after removal/reinstallation of the steering gear is NOT necessary. (Refer to latest version of DTB P-B-46.20/28
Note:
Always refer to EPC for the latest information on parts.

Parts Information
Note:
Wheels - Approved Alloy Wheel Cleaning Product

Order No.: S-B-40.10/66
Group: 40
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models All
Approved Alkaline MB Wheel Cleaner for Light Alloy Disk Wheel
Any under top coat discoloration which occurs on vehicle wheel bolts (Figure 1) and light alloy disk wheels (Figures 2 - 4) can indicate that the wheels
have been cleaned with an acid-containing product. Harsh, non-recommended products diffuse through the top coat and leave behind visible run-like
tracks on the wheel finish as well.
Any wheels returned with such damage will not be covered by warranty.
NOTE:
Use only the approved alkaline MB wheel cleaner in parts information below. Ensure that all cleaning products and care systems are acid-free as well.
Parts Information
Wheels/Tires - Alloy Wheel Radial Crack Information

Order No.: S-B-40.10/69
Group: 40
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models All
Radial Crack in Light Alloy Disk Wheel
Through inspection of returned warranty parts, it has become evident that light alloy disk wheels are being replaced under warranty for radial cracks.
This type of damage is attributable to driving over obstacles and resulting punctures. The rim flange becomes deformed and a radial crack occurs
immediately or later due to the vehicle's operating load. This type of damage is not covered under warranty.
Low section tires also significantly contribute to mechanical damage because of their lower side wall height and the possibility of a crack can be
exacerbated by low tire inflation pressure.
For safety reasons, a tire should be replaced after it has been punctured to preclude internal fabric damage of the tire carcass.
Electrical - Battery Maintenance Information

Order No.: S-B-54.10/213
Supersedes:
Group: 54
SUBJECT:
MY- All, Models 164, 171, 199, 203, 204, 209, 211, 216, 219, 221, 230, 251, 463
Battery Maintenance
The vehicle battery must be checked periodically on vehicles that remain inactive for extended periods of time. The maximum allowable time
between performing battery checks is 4 weeks. In the event that a vehicle is going to be stored for more than 4 weeks, it is recommended to
disconnect the ground lead at the battery. This will prevent battery discharge by quiescent current (rest current) draw from the vehicle's no-load
current consumers.
NOTE:
If it is deemed necessary to charge the on-board electrical system battery and the vehicle is equipped with more than one battery, then the
starter battery must also be charged. On vehicles with more than one battery, ground leads should be disconnected from all batteries equipped
on the vehicle including the on-board electrical system battery, starter battery and the auxiliary/additional battery (G1/7).
Check the battery voltage of the on-board electrical system battery via the instrument cluster or multimeter, as described in AR54.10-P-1132A. A
battery should be charged when the measured voltage drops below 12.2 V.
If the vehicle has been inactive for 6 months or longer, prior to putting the vehicle back in service, the batteries must be charged to counteract any
effect of self-discharge. If equipped, the auxiliary/additional battery (G1/7) does not need to be recharged, just reattach the ground lead for this
battery.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster displays a white battery symbol with the text "Visit Workshop," if the auxiliary/additional battery voltage is < 11.5 V.
If the auxiliary/additional battery is < 11.5 V and > 6.0 V, this battery will be charged by the Front SAM (N10/1) at a charge rate of 150 mA,
when the engine is running or STAR Diagnosis is left connected and set to charge the auxiliary battery. If the measured voltage of the
auxiliary/additional battery is < 6.0 V, the battery should be replaced.
Battery maintenance is the responsibility of the dealer for all new vehicles in dealer inventory. Batteries replaced and claimed as warranty while
the vehicle is in dealer inventory, other then auxiliary/additional batteries, are subject to debit. Additionally, the customer is responsible for
battery maintenance when vehicles remain inactive for extended periods of time. Technical Service Bulletin # S-14_30-15F Date:
090313
Emissions - Multiple Codes Set/MIL ON

Supersedes: S-B-14.30/15e dated Nov. 11, 1008
Group: 14
Revision History
SUBJECT
Check Engine Light with DTC P2003, P2047, P0810 and P0814 Stored in Engine ECU
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the check engine light coming on and codes P2003 (M112, M113, M275), P2047
(M271), P0810 (M272, M273), P0814 (M272, M273) are stored in the engine control module memory, please perform the below procedure.
1. Air Pump Relay
Valid for Models shown above.
This condition may be caused by a malfunctioning air pump relay. When the secondary air pump relay malfunctions, the air pump may be actuated
beyond the maximum permissible operating time. This overload may lead to failure of the secondary air injection pump and results in a malfunction in
the secondary air injection system. Proceed as follows:
Note:
If diagnosis reveals a malfunctioning air injection pump, refer to step 1.2.
1.1 Test the secondary air injection function chain with SDS.
1.2 If the secondary air pump is determined to be defective remove/replace secondary air pump and air pump relay (refer to WIS document:
AR14.30-P-7251QB).
1.3 If it is determined that only the relay is defective, replace the relay only and retest the secondary air injection function chain with SDS.
1.4 Program engine control module.
2. Check Valve for Vacuum Actuation of Air Pump
Valid for Models shown above.
This condition may be caused by a malfunctioning check valve in the vacuum line (Figure 1) to the air pump switch over valve. When the check valve
malfunctions, vacuum flow to the diverter valve is restricted preventing it from opening. Proceed as follows.
2.1 Test the secondary air injection function chain with SDS.
2.2 If the air pump can be activated with SDS but the function chain test fails, the vacuum flow between the air pump switchover valve and the diverter
valve may be restricted preventing the diverter valve from opening.
2.3 Check vacuum supply (Figure 2) at the diverter valve. If vacuum is < 500mbar, change check valve.
Note:
Copy of the SDS short test and all tests performed must accompany returned parts. If the documentation is missing or does not support the diagnosis,
the warranty claim may be debited.
Note:
When ordering a replacement relay order the part number of the relay being removed. The parts system will deliver the current version of the ordered
part.
Parts Information
Note:
Cell Phone - Calls Dropped Or Cut Off

Group: 82
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Telephone Calls Being Cut Off or Dropped
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles for telephone calls being dropped or disconnected even with adequate signal strength,
please read the below information on possible causes.
1. Dead Zones - Depending on the location and the respective network provider, 100% network coverage may not be present. Network coverage can
vary at the same location depending on the network provider. When crossing from an area with network coverage to an area without network coverage,
reception may drop to zero and the call may be cut off, even though the phone or head unit may still continue to show signal strength. There are many
things that can diminish "dead zones" and weather is a large contributor.
2. Switching Cells - While driving, the telephone transfers from network cell to the next network cell. Sometimes switching between cellular towers can
also cause calls to be dropped. This can be fixed by the customer's service provider (Verizon, Sprint, Alltel, Cingular, T-Mobile, etc.). If customers
experience dropped calls on a regular basis along the same route, they should take note of the cross streets or address and contact their service provider
and describe where the drops are taking place and time of day.
3. Cells Operating at Full Capacity - While driving, the telephone transfers from network cell to the next network cell. Each cell can only process a
maximum number of calls. If the vehicle with an active call transfers to a cell operating at full capacity, the cell cannot handle the call and it will be
dropped. The call is cut off even though the head unit and/or telephone may be showing full signal strength and anywhere from 1 to 5 bars.
These are network problems and not related to the vehicle; replacing components will NOT resolve the complaint.
Restraints - Seat Belts Don't Retract Properly

Supersedes: P-B-91.40/130 and T-B-91.40/131 dated October 11, 2006
Group: 91
Revision History
a 3/19/09 Parts Information Updated
SUBJECT:
All Model 164, 171, 203, 209, 211, 219, 220, 221, 230 and 251
Seat Belt Does Not Roll Up Correctly
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the front or rear seat belts not rolling up fully, the cause could be dirt deposits on the seat
belt guide due to a soiled seat belt. Cleaning the belt guide and seat belt should restore proper function of the seat belt retraction.
To resolve, perform the following.

1. Clean the belt guide using MB Plastic Cleaner (Figures 1 and 2).
2. Clean the seat belts using MB Car Shampoo mixed with water, MB Textile Carpet/Fabric Care or clean, lukewarm water and soap. Do not treat the
belt with any other cleaning agents.
3. Extend belt and allow to air dry. Do not dry at temperatures above 175°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Do not bleach or dye.
Note:
If these instructions are not followed, proper retraction of the seat belt may be impaired.
Note:
This repair cannot be claimed under warranty.
Parts Information
A/T, M/T - Flywheel/Flexplate Replacement Information

Order No.: S-B-03.30/11
Supersedes:
Group: 03
SUBJECT:
MY- All, Models All with Engine 272 with Transmission 722.6/9, Engine 273 with Transmission 722.9, Engine 272 with Transmission 722.6
Flywheel/Flexplate Replacement Procedure
The following must be observed when replacing the flywheel/flexplate in vehicles with engine 272 and transmission 722, as well as vehicles with
engine 273 and transmission 722.
Flywheel/Flexplate Replacement Procedure
1. Spacer washer A 273 032 00 52 must be installed between the new flywheel/flexplate A 273 030 03 12 and the crankshaft.
2. Spacer plate A 112 032 02 52 must be installed between the bolt heads and the flywheel/flexplate.
NOTE:
The screw-in depth of bolts A 007 990 88 04 in the flywheel/flexplate plate may be insufficient due to unfavorable tolerances; and therefore,
the torque converter must be fastened to the new flywheel/flexplate using bolts N 007 984 010 036 and washers A 327 990 06 40.
This procedure is to be followed until further notice.
Parts Information
Technical Service Bulletin # S-27_19-82D Date: 090325
A/T - Electro-Hydraulic Control Module ID/Ordering

Order No.: S-B-27.19/82d
Supersedes: S-B-27.19/82c, February 3, 2009
Group: 27
Revision:
Parts information for models 230, 209, 211, and 215.
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models 164, 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251 (with Transmission 722.9)
Ordering Correct Transmission Electro-Hydraulic Control Modules
Effective immediately, use only the following Parts Information when replacing a transmission electro-hydraulic control module.
NOTICE!
On some models, it is crucial to consider any fault codes for the respective model year and the presence of an auxiliary oil cooler. It is therefore
necessary to inspect models with (marked **) or without auxiliary oil coolers (marked *) before ordering the transmission electro-hydraulic control unit
when the vehicle production date is after 01/2007. The auxiliary oil cooler in models with Engine 273 and Engine 642 is in front of the radiator and
air-conditioning condenser and is connected in series with the existing oil/water cooling system of the radiator. Failure to comply may prevent Star
Diagnosis from correctly programming and coding the valve body.
Note:
This Parts Information reflects only correct part number information for use should transmission electro-hydraulic control module replacement be
necessary. This Parts Information does not serve to determine that the correct or latest version transmission electro-hydraulic control module is
installed, nor does it justify parts replacement.
Note:
Use the most current version Star Diagnosis software along with all necessary add-ons.
Parts Information
A/C - Various Compressor Noise With A/C ON

Supersedes: S-B-83.55/87e dated Nov. 20, 2008
Group: 83
Revision History
SUBJECT
Replacement of Refrigerant Compressor Belt Pulley Due to Noise Complaints If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of noises at
the refrigerant compressor with air conditioning activated and deactivated, the cause could be a defective belt pulley or belt pulley bearing. The pulley
and pulley bearing can be diagnosed and replaced with the compressor still installed in the vehicle by following the procedures below.
1. Locate the noise by duplicating the conditions under which the complaint occurred.
2. If there is also a cooling performance complaint, the noise could be caused by low refrigerant level, perform a Refrigerant Circuit Test as per SDS
and follow instructions for corrective actions.
3. Before the belt pulley on the refrigerant compressor is replaced, verify that the following components in the belt drive are not the source of the noise
and repair as required.
^ Alternator
^ Power steering pump
^ Guide pulleys / tensioner pulleys
^ Water pump
4. If there is a whining noise that is RPM-dependant which is present with the air conditioning on AND off and is determined to be caused by the
tensioner pulleys, guide pulleys or refrigerant compressor, continue with step 5.
Note:
Make sure that the AC is SHUT OFF! On the push button unit, select "AC off" then "OFF" to turn the Climate System off, then select climate system
on. The compressor should now be off. To see more details on the various push button units, please refer to the climate book, section 2.1 for each
model.
Engines M112/113/272/273
5. Remove the poly-V-belt from the refrigerant compressor.

6. Install shorter belt to bypass the compressor. Route belt as shown in Figure 1.
Engines M112/113 - 20 x 2315 to 2325 mm (A011 997 86 92 or A 011 997 96 92)

Engines M272/273 - 20 x 2330 to 2340 mm (A011 997 04 92)
Note:
A short test belt for OM642 is currently not available.
Note:
The belts can be sourced locally or by MB part number. The belts must be purchased to diagnose AC compressor pulley noise and are not to be
submitted on a warranty claim.
7. Run the engine with the short belt installed. If the noise is still present, check whether the tensioner and/or guide pulleys are the source of the noise.
Replace as necessary the defective tensioner and/or guide pulleys.
8. If the noise is no longer present, allow the engine to cool and proceed to step 10.
9. Replace the compressor pulley as follows.
Note:
It is not necessary to remove the compressor or evacuate the refrigeration circuit. Refer to WIS document AR83.55-P-7685B
10. Remove the pulley-V-belt. Determine if the diameter of the pulley is 100 mm or 110 mm.
11. Raise the vehicle and remove the lower engine compartment paneling.
12. Refer to Figure 2 for component number references. Remove the belt pulley circlip (Figure 2, Part 6). With plastic belt pulleys, it is possible to
insert a screwdriver under the circlip (Figure 2, Part 6) and pry it out of the groove.
13. Remove hub (Figure 2, Part 1) using a socket and counter hold tool W112 589 07 40 00. Use a small magnet to remove flat washer from shaft.
Note:
There are two versions of the compressor shaft, a 7mm hex and one with two flats. The shaft with two flats requires the use of socket W112 589 02 09
00. To loosen 7mm hex head, ensure that proper METRIC tool is utilized. To loosen the pulley:
Warning!
It is not a left hand thread!
Method A (Preferred and shown in picture above): Hold the compressor shaft stationary and turn the drive hub counter clockwise to loosen (Figure 3a).
Turn the hub clockwise to tighten.
Method B: Hold the drive hub stationary and turn the compressor shaft clockwise to loosen. Turn counter clockwise to tighten.
14. Remove snap ring (Figure 2, Part 4) for pulley bearing.
15. Remove belt pulley (Figure 2, Part 2) from the end of compressor housing.
Note:
Do not apply a pulling force in an axial direction to the refrigerant compressor shaft.
Components damaged due to improper repair procedures may be subject to debit.

Assemble the rubber dampers (Figure 2, Part 5) into new pulley the as shown in example A in Figure 4 and Figure 5. Make note of the direction of the
curvature of the rubber dampers and install them over the reinforcing webs in the pulley, not in the spaces between the webs.
16. Install new belt pulley (Figure 2, Part 2) onto the end of compressor housing. Make sure it is the same diameter as the original, 100 mm, 110 mm.
17. Install the snap ring (Figure 2, Part 4) for pulley bearing with its flat side facing the refrigerant compressor. Make sure the snap ring is seated
correctly in the groove.
Note:
Use snap ring pliers with 90° tips that have a minimum reach of 19 mm (0.75").
18. Install washer (Figure 2, Part 3). Make sure it is flat against the shoulder of the shaft.
19. Install hub (Figure 2, Part 1) so the drive fingers are inserted into the gaps between the ends of the rubber dampers. Screw the hub onto the
compressor shaft clockwise and torque to 35 nm. The hub continues to tighten when in the compressor is in operation.
20. Install circlip (Figure 2, Part 6) into the belt pulley. Make sure it is seated in the groove of the pulley.
21. Install a new standard length poly-V-belt. Start engine and verify correct belt operation.
22. Install lower engine paneling.

Special Tools
Parts Information
Note:
November 20, 2008. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Tire Monitor System - Steel Valve Stem Cap Precautions

Order No.: S-B-40.15/65
Group: 40
SUBJECT:
MY-2001 - Present, Models - All (With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Steel Valve Caps on Vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Important Information
On all vehicles equipped with direct reading TPMS systems, that is with wheel pressure sensors, and their corresponding aluminum valve stems; it is
not advisable to install steel or chrome valve stem caps as the subsequent electrolysis may make it impossible to remove the valve cap at a later time.
Such damage is not covered by warranty.
Body - New Window Glazing Adhesive Repair Kit

Order No.: S-B-67.00/25
Supersedes:
Group: 67
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models All
New Window Glazing One-Component Adhesive Repair Kit
Since January 2004, all MB plants use a higher grade adhesive to bond windows. To match the quality of this adhesive, the glazing repair kits for
replacing windows have been improved. It is no longer a two-component item and is without the booster component.
In addition, the new repair kit is to be used to glue the fixed glass cover on model 203.7 and 211.0 panoramic roofs.
NOTE:
The special tool is recommended for squeezing all of the sealant out of the kit's cartridge.
Parts Information
Special Tools
Audio System - Various iPod(R) Concerns

Supersedes: S-B-82.60/629 dated June 26, 2008
Group: 82
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Model 164 / 203 / 209 Vehicles, as of Model Year 2005
All Model 171 / 251 Vehicles, as of Model Year 2006
All Model 204 Vehicles, as of Model Year 2008
All Model X204 Vehicles, as of Model Year 2010
All Model 211 Vehicles, as of Model Year 2004, Equipped with COMAND (528 or 530)
All Model 216 / 219 / 221 / 463 Vehicles, as of Model Year 2007
All Model 230 Vehicles, as of Model Year 2009
Equipped with iPod Interface System or Media Interface System (Option Code 518)
Various iPod Issues: iPod Battery Discharge, No Data Display, Slow Reaction When Listening to Audio Books
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the conditions below, this may be due to old iPod Software which must be updated via
Apple's Website.
^ iPod Battery discharged after a continuous lengthy use of iPod in vehicles (3-5 continuous hours).
^ Display illumination of iPod does not go out after docking the iPod connector.
^ Track display on the head unit (only in vehicles equipped with Media Interface) or instrument cluster does not correctly show the track number and
title.
^ Cluster or head unit do not display iPod data completely.
^ Pod-casts are intermittently not displayed.
^ Slow iPod reaction when listening to audio books.
^ iPod does not charge while connected to the vehicle's iPod Interface Cable or Media Interface.
Note:
In certain cases, you may need to reset the iPod if it locks up during operation. When the iPod does not charge while connected to the interface, this
may be caused by insufficient battery voltage at the iPod Interface Module. For this, make sure the voltage across PIN 1 and PIN 11 of the iPod
Interface Module Cable-set is > 10V, otherwise perform a continuity check and make sure the kit is correctly installed using the corresponding WIS
Document.
Apple Website Support Notes:
The Customer needs to ensure the iPod Software is up to date. For current iPod Application Software and supported iPod models, navigate to this
official Apple Website:
http://support.apple.com/kb/HT1353?
To find the correct iPod Application Software version for the iPod, navigate to this official Apple Website:
http://docs.info.apple.com/article.html?artnum=60984-en
Audio System - Various iPod(R) Malfunctions

Supersedes: P-B-82.85/544 and T-B-82.85/545 dated March 1, 2007
Group: 82
Revision History
a 2/12/09 Step 1 and Damage Code Updated

SUBJECT
iPod Intermittently Cannot Be Operated or Controlled Using Steering Wheel Controls, Delayed Response on Instrument Cluster Display, iPod Volume
Too Low Compared to Other Audio Sources
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles equipped with iPod Interface Kit of the below iPod conditions, this may be due to
incorrectly loaded MP3 files from the user's music library onto the iPod, the Aux level of the iPod is too low or a CAN communication error between
the head unit and the instrument cluster. To resolve, follow the diagnostic steps below.
^ Cannot be controlled by the multifunction steering wheel controls.
^ A delayed response (sometimes up to 2 minutes) in display of the track information or the radio station on the instrument cluster.
^ The iPod volume is too low in comparison to other Audio sources such as the CD or CD changer.
Step 1 - Compare Audio Volume of Identical Tracks from the iPod and an Audio CD
Note:
To complete step 1, you need a computer, an internet connection, iTunes, CD-R Compact Disc, a CD burner with reliable CD burning software set to a
lower burning speed (8x) with data verification option checked.
^ Using a reliable internet connection, log onto the website: www.mercedes-benz.tv/mixedtape
^ When the page loads, select the menu "Mixed Tape Music Magazine".
^ Select "MP3 Download"
^ Select "MP3 Download" again (note that the Album is in a "zip" format
^ Save and unzip the file onto a local folder on your Computer
^ Insert a blank CD-R in you CD burner start the burning software and burn the selected track from your computer onto the CD-R.
^ When the burn process is complete, copy the track from your computer (NOT from the CD-R) onto your music library in iTunes.
^ From iTunes, pull this track onto the iPod (make sure you have the MP3 format checked in your iTunes burning preferences).
^ On the iPod, scroll to Settings --> Sound check --> OFF
^ Adjust the iPod to max, connect the iPod and adjust head unit's volume to any desired level.
^ Scroll to the acquired iPod track and inspect the volume.
^ Insert the burned CD-R and play the same track on the Head Unit CD player, compare the audio levels of both tracks from the iPod and CD player.
If no significant volume difference is noted between both audio sources from the iPod and the Audio CD-R, then any reported concern for volume
difference may be caused by an incorrect burning process or using a poor quality audio source file.
If a significant volume difference is noted, proceed to step 2 prior to any replacement of the iPod Interface Module.
Step 2 - Adjust the Aux Output Volume Level

^ Use the MFS buttons to select the iPod menu (Aux) in the instrument cluster (IC)
^ Simultaneously, hold down the down-arrow + Tel hang-up MFS buttons for about 8 seconds, the IC displays the words "DIAG" on the top and
"SW.." on the bottom --> wait 5 seconds, the IC displays "DIAG", "HW.." --> wait another 5 seconds --> "DIAG", "Vol..."
Within 5 seconds of the "DIAG", "Vol" display appearing, you can press the up or down arrow to adjust the Aux output volume. Make sure it is set to
the loudest --> wait 5 seconds without pressing any MFS buttons --> the display will return to iPod main screen automatically.
If necessary replace the iPod Interface Module with part number B6 782 42 52 (or later). Reference the applicable WIS documents listed below and
adjust the Aux output volume level after replacement per the below procedure.
Note:
If the vehicle is equipped with the latest iPod interface Module, you can use the procedure to adjust the Aux volume output.
Instructions to Remove the Head Unit and iPod Interface Module
Parts Information
Note:
Audio System - Poor Radio Reception/Interference

Date: March 2, 2009
Order No.: P-B-82.85/673
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT
Poor Radio Reception Quality / Interference
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of poor radio reception quality or interference, this may be due to a software error in one of
the following control units: Tuner Amplifier (216/221) and Audio Gateway - AGW (171/211/219). To remedy, update the tuner amplifier's software to
version 25/08 or later, and update the AGW to software or newer. Use DAS 11/08 or newer to perform the software updates.
Notes on Logic 7 Surround and Window Tinting:
When the choice "logic 7" is selected by the user, both tuners produce a permanent surround sound even in marginal reception areas. Earlier generation
tuners switched between Mono and Stereo in low/poor reception areas minimizing the possibility of the user to experience this interference. In the new
generation tuners/receivers, as the signals get weaker such that when the user is approaching the "fringe" to radio stations coverage, the audio-blend
chips inside the tuners will not switch to MONO and therefore it may be perceived by the user that there's an error in the system. Constant Stereo-Mono
switching will create an undesirable "picket-fence" audio effect that may also be perceived as poor audio quality by the user. Window tinting / privacy
film may also lead to poor reception quality.
Note:
Steering - Speed Sensitive Steering Malfunctions/DTC's

Supersedes: P-B-46.50/34 dated March 27, 2006
Group: 46
Revision History
a 2/4/09 Applicable Models Updated. Content Revised, Parts and Warranty Info. Updated
SUBJECT:
Models 164, 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251 with code 213 (Speed Sensitive Power Steering - Parameter Steering)
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (Parameter Steering) Malfunction
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of malfunctioning Speed Sensitive Power Steering (Parameter Steering), this may be due to
the following causes.
1. Speed sensitive power steering valve, electrical malfunction.
2. Electrical connection on speed sensitive power steering valve damaged or broken.
As a result, the fault codes above may be stored in the ESP control unit.
To resolve issues, replace the speed sensitive power steering valve with a new part as per the below procedure.
Note:
It is not necessary to replace the entire rack-and-pinion steering system.

1. Remove steering gear as per respective WIS document shown above.
2. Remove loose dirt from steering gear and clean area around speed sensitive power steering valve. Do not use any cleaning agents!
Important!
Ensure that the utmost cleanliness is maintained at the work area during the following steps!
3. Unscrew bolts (Figure 1, 2) attaching speed sensitive power steering valve (Figure 1, 1).
4. Replace the speed sensitive power steering valve (Figure 1, 1). Ensure that the new sealing ring is seated properly. Attach speed sensitive power
steering valve (Figure 1, 1) by screwing in bolts (Figure 1, 2), observe torque (5 Nm +/- 0.3 Nm).
5. Install steering gear, refer to the respective WIS document as stated in Step 1
Note:
There are two versions of power steering high pressure lines that must be detached when removing steering gear. The earlier version has a slotted
support ring, which can be replaced individually. The new version does not have a slotted support ring. In this case, the complete power steering high
pressure line must be replaced (see parts list).
6. Check steering for leaks.
7. Check speed sensitive - parameter function using the DAS, read out fault memory and erase if necessary.
A toe adjustment after removing/installing the steering gear is no longer necessary according to the latest findings (refer to the latest version of the DTB
P-B-46.20/28).
Note:
Always refer to EPC for the latest information on parts.

Parts Information
Note:
February 4, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star Teklnfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Drivetrain - Axle Mount Service Guidelines

Date: March 4, 2009
Order No.: S-B-35.00/08
Group: 35
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models All
Repairing Self-Locking Threaded Axle Mount Connections
Self-locking screws/bolts with thread-lock must always be replaced. As described in the WIS-net document AH00.00-N-0001-01A, it is mandatory that
the nut threads on the axle mount be recut and blown out with compressed air.
Adhesive residue in the threads affects the strength of the bolt even when the correct tightening torque and angle is applied. The bolt may bend and
eventually break. Any consequent vehicle damage would not be covered under warranty.
See WIS-net document AH00.00-N-0001-01A for notes on self-locking nuts and bolts.
Suspension - Rumbling Noises On Bumps/Rough Roads

Supersedes: P-B-33.10/11b dated June 27, 2007
Group: 33
Revision History
c 2/4/09 Applicable Models Updated / VINs Included / Technical Content and Parts Information Revised
b 6/27/07 Warranty Information Updated
a 3/28/07 Technical Content Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/458/473
Model 203.040/061/064/065/261/264/740/764,
as of VIN A034000, F018700 and R001000
Model 209.365/375/376/465/475/476
Rumbling Noises While Driving Over Bumps or On Rough Roads

If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of rumbling noises while driving over bumps or on rough roads, the cause may be that the
rubber mount on the torque strut is cracked and losing fluid. To resolve, replace the bushing only (not the torque strut). Refer to WIS document
AR33.15-P-0160P.
Parts Information
Note:
Body - Vario Roof Contour Gauge Modification

Order No.: P-B-77.33/74
Supersedes:
Group: 77
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/458/473
Modification of Gauge for Checking Contour of Vario Roof
In the above model vehicles, if it is noted during the checking and adjustment procedure of the vario roof that the contour gauge does not fit correctly,
the gauge must be modified. Modify gauge special tool part no. W171 589 04 23 00 according to specification outlined below.
1. Cut gauge (Figure 1, 1) at intersection line (Figure 1, 3) and deburr edges.
2. Cut off 8 strips 10 mm x 40 mm of stone chipping protective cover.
3. Glue 4 strips over each edge of the modified gauge (Figure 1, 4 and 5).
4. WIS document AR77.50-P-3040V is revised in accordance with the modified gauge.
Parts Information
Technical Service Bulletin # S-83_30-74P Date: 090604
A/C - Musty/Moldy Odor Issues

Date: June 4, 2009
Order No.: S-B-83.30/74p
Supersedes: S-B-83.30/74o dated April 29, 2009
Group: 83
Revision History
SUBJECT:
All Model 164, 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230 and 251 Vehicles
Air Conditioning Musty/Moldy Odor Complaints
Under certain environmental conditions, typically in a hot and humid climate, the vehicle may emit a musty/moldy odor from the air conditioning
system. This may be more noticeable when starting the vehicle due to residual condensation on the evaporator and on the interior surface of the heater
box.
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles regarding a musty/moldy odor from the air conditioning system, the evaporator should be
cleaned using Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept and the interior using the "ultrasonic atomizer", refer to WIS document AR83.30-P-5556A. For the best
lasting results, follow the instructions provided below.
1. Remove all filters installed in the air conditioning system. The following filter may be fitted: Pollen filter, dust filer, combination filter or active
charcoal filter.
2. Clean evaporator with Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept as per WIS document AR83.30-P-5555T.
Contra Sept is applied using a spray gun attached to a long probe. It is imperative to have as much of the evaporator sprayed with the cleaner by moving
the probe in / out and up / down inside the case. It may be necessary to bend the probe in order to gain access. The cleaner is applied and allowed to dry.
Refer to Figure 1a for spraying angle recommendation.
Note:
After cleaning the evaporator, a second treatment has to be conducted. After completion of section A (ContraSept), refer to section B (Wynns).
Parts Information
Note:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair. This information has been generated on June
4, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
A. ContraSept Cleaning Procedure

A. ContraSept Cleaning Procedure:
Caution!
Wear safety glasses and respiratory protection when spraying cleaner.
^ Spray the evaporator in a 90° angle.
^ Move up and down, left and right to reach all areas of the evaporator
^ Do not rotate the probe to reach other areas of the evaporator. This will change the spraying angle and the cleaning effect will diminish.
Warning!
Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum air pressure as stated on the label affixed to the pressure cup (Figure 1b). Excessive air
pressure could cause the canister to explode and potentially cause personal injury. The recommended pressure to clean the evaporator effectively is
120psi.
Additional Procedures - Model 203 / 209
1. Equipped with ACC climate system Option Code 580 - It is necessary to drill a 15mm hole in the climate housing to access the evaporator with the
spray probe. The location for drilling the hole is described in WIS document AR83.30-P-5555-01A and Figure 1, A1 and B1.
2. A white foam block may be mounted to the housing between the blower motor and the main section of the case, see (Figure 2). On these housings,
there is an alternate location of the hole as shown in Figure 1, A2 and B2.
Figure 3 - bend probe as shown
3. Bend the shorter of the two probes (Figure 3). Move the probe up and down as well as side to side to ensure the entire evaporator is sprayed with the
cleaner. Plug hole after cleaning with seal plug A110 987 10 44 64.
4. Using the instructions below check the "REHEAT" setting. It should be set to "Anti-icing". Control Units --> Body --> EIS --> Control unit
adaptations --> Read coding and change if necessary --> Climate control Standard setting: Climate control --> REHEAT mode --> Change From:
"Standard" to: "Anti-icing protection"
Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept product as described above, a Biocide coated evaporator entered production as of VIN A731368 and F634900 (203) and
F144091 and T042954 (209). In this case, this part can be installed in earlier vehicles. Be sure to thoroughly clean the inside of the heater box and make
sure the drain tubes are not clogged before reassembling the system.
Additional Procedures - Model 211
1. Using the instructions below check the "REHEAT" setting. It should be set to "Fixed value". Control Units --> Air Conditioning --> C-AAC, AAC
--> Control unit adaptations --> Read coding and change if necessary --> Workshop coding --> Evaporator-Control (REHEAT mode) --> Change From
"Humidity-dependent (SERIES)" To: "Fixed value"
Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept product as described above, a new slanted heater box bottom which allows the condensation to drain better and a coated
evaporator entered production as of VIN A675828 and X171590. In this case, these parts can be installed in earlier vehicles. Be sure to thoroughly
clean the inside of the heater box and make sure the drain tubes are not clogged before reassembling the system.
Note:
Replacement of the heater box bottom and evaporator on the 211 and replacement of the evaporator on the 203 and 209 can only be claimed if the
Mercedes-Benz Contra Sept treatment has already been performed. Dealers must claim which option was performed in the text of the claim.
Procedure for 164 and 251

Caution!
Wear safety glasses and respiratory protection when drilling hole and spraying cleaner.
1. Clean the evaporator with MercedesBenz Contra Sept as per WIS document AR83.30-P-5555T and the additional information in this document.
2. To clean the driver side of the evaporator, the spray probe is inserted into the hole for the evaporator temperature sensor as described in WIS
document AR83.30-P-5555T, Step 4.1.
3. To clean the passenger side of the evaporator, the spray probe is inserted into a 15 mm hole that needs to be drilled in the climate housing as
described in Steps 4 through 6.
4. Remove the cover below the instrument panel on the passenger side and fold carpet down. Refer to WIS document AR68.10-P-1520GZ (164) or
AR68.10-P-1520RT (251).
5. Location of hole is shown in Figures 4 and 5. The hole should be centered in the triangular shaped section of the climate housing as shown in Figure
5.
6. Drill a 15mm hole in small increments using a mechanical drill stop to limit how far the drill bit penetrates the climate housing. A collar type drill
stop, a piece of rubber hose or tape can be used as the drill stop.
Warning!
The drill bit cannot be allowed to penetrate the housing more than 13mm or damage to the evaporator could occur. When the drill bit breaks through the
housing it has a tendency to pull inward. This is why a drill stop is necessary.
7. Bending of the probe may be required to be able to spray all parts of the evaporator. Move the probe up and down as well as side to side to ensure the
entire evaporator is sprayed with the cleaner.
8. Follow the remainder of instructions in WIS document AR83.30-P-5555T. Reassemble vehicle in reverse order. Do not replace any filter back into
the system!
Warning!
Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum air pressure as stated on the label affixed to the pressure cup (Figure 3). Excessive air
pressure could cause the canister to explode and potentially cause personal injury.
B. Wynns Treatment
B. Wynns Treatment
1. Warm up vehicle with air conditioning switched off for a minimum of 30 minutes in order to dry out the climate housing and ducts. Set the climate
control to the following settings:
Blower speed 2-3
Heat to maximum
Recirculation activated
Air distribution to the footwell
All doors, windows and sliding roof closed
Note:
AC compressor does not turn off immediately when the AC Off is selected at the control module. In order to ensure the compressor is off, use the
following instructions:
Select AC Off
Select Climate System Off
Select Climate System On. The AC compressor will now be off.
2. Remove all filters installed in the climate system. This could include dust, activated charcoal or combination filters.
3. Close the recirculation flap for cleaning using SDS.
For 171, 204, 211, 219, 216, 221, 164 and 251 models follow path: Control Units --> Air Conditioning --> C-AAC, AAC --> Actuations --> Closing air
recirculation flap for cleaning --> Select recirculation.
For 203 and 209 models, follow path: Functions performed by more than one control unit --> Body --> Climate control --> Climate control --> C-AAC
--> Actuations
The system will come out of recirculation when SDS is disconnected from the vehicle.
Note:
This menu item is not available in SDS for all vehicles. On these vehicles, recirculation must be manually selected on the control module.
4. Place the Wynn's(R) AIRCOMATIC(TM) Ultrasonic Cleaning System in the passenger footwell. Insert the hose in the luggage net and orient the end
of the hose to insure the output from the device is sucked into the footwell vents.
5. Start engine, AC off, press recirculation button, select lowest blower speed and set the temperature(s) to minimum.
Note:
The compressor must not be running.
6. Install one container of Wynn's(R) AIRCO-CLEAN(TW) in the Wynn's system.
7. Plug in the Wynn's system and check that it is running.
8. Close all doors and windows.
9. When the fog stops coming out of the Wynn's(R) system (after approximately 20 minutes), the dispersion process has been completed.
10. When the cleaning procedure is finished, switch engine off, turn off the Wynn's(R) system and leave windows and doors closed for approximately 1
hour.
11. Open doors and trunk lid/tailgate.
12. Open the air recirculation flap again if the automatic recirculation function has been deactivated by coding, and set the recirculated air function to
"unimited" again.
13. Restart engine, switch on A/C, select the highest blower speed and set the temperature(s) to minimum.
14. Allow system to run for about 10 minutes. The cleaning process is now complete.
15. After cleaning, install new filters.
16. If cleaning the interior does not remedy the complaint, please refer to the following documents: SI83.00-P-0004A and SI83.30-P-0008A.
Engine - Low Oil Level Symptoms/Diagnostics

Date: June 2, 2009
Supersedes: S-B-18.00/37e dated March 20, 2009
Group: 18
Revision History
f 6/2/09 Model 211 Production Information Included to Steps 1a and 4
e 3/20/09 Step 6 Revised
d 10/24/08 Damage Type Revised - Step 7
c 10/6/08 Warranty Information Updated - Step 7 Op Code 18 4110
b 9/17/08 Warranty Information - Step 7 Updated
a 7/28/08 Updated Step 3a (removed reference to 229.5 and 229.51 oil) and Step 7
SUBJECT:
Equipped with M156, M272, M273 or M642 Engines
Low Oil Level Symptoms
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the oil level warning message frequently appearing in the instrument cluster, "Oil level
too low" or "Check Engine Oil Level at Next Service Stop", but the oil level is correct on the dipstick, there could be several causes depending on the
vehicle. This document is a consolidation of those possible causes.
1. Model 203.087/092 and 211.087/287, Equipped with M272 - Erroneous IC Warning Display "Check Engine Oil Level at Next Service Stop": Oil
level warning message frequently appears in the instrument cluster, however the oil level correct on the dipstick, the cause may be the incorrect oil data
record stored in the ASSYST control unit (Model 211), or instrument cluster (Model 203). To resolve, perform the following procedures.
Message:
"Pour in one liter of oil at next refueling stop" (Model 211 4MATIC with M272 up to 6/2005) "Check oil level at next refueling stop" (Model 211
4MATIC as of 6/2005 and Model 203 4MATIC with M272 as of production startup)
1a) Adaptation of Modified Oil Data Record with SDS 10/06 or Later
Model 203 4MATIC with M272 Engine, up to VIN F886321: Control Units --> Information and communication --> ICM --> Vehicle code 12 / NO -->
CU adaptations --> select code 807 --> select national version --> select M272 all-wheel drive change status 3 "or higher" --> confirm selection.
Model 211 4MATIC with M272 Engine, up to VIN X218820 (up to production September 2006). As of approximately October 2006, vehicles were
produced with modified oil data record.
^ Check whether CGW programming is possible by using SDS: Control units --> Body --> CGW --> Control Unit adaptations --> Control Unit
programming. If yes, perform control unit programming and then perform parameterization in ASSYST. If no, perform parameterization in ASSYST.
^ Perform parameterization in ASSYST by using SDS: Start Control Units --> Information and communication --> ASSYST --> CU adaptations -->
select engine M272 --> Select national version --> Select engine for ASSYST M272 Model 211 all-wheel drive "National version" status 5 or higher.
1b) Check Oil Dipstick Marking on Handle (Model 203 / 211 up to Engine No. 2729..30467144)
Note:
As of February 2, 2007, Section 1b of this DTB must not be performed on the following vehicles which are covered under Service Campaign No.
2007010010
Combining step 1b with the above referenced Campaign will result in a charge back of step 1b.
a) Oil dipstick with marking 27214 is correct.
b) Oil dipstick with different marking should be replaced with part number A272 010 14 72.
c) Check whether quantity of engine oil in engine corresponds to specification in WIS.
2. Model 164.186 - Erroneous IC Warning Display "Check Engine Oil Level at Next Service Stop"
Confirm engine type coding in ASSYST using the current issue of SDS:
Control unit --> Information and Communication --> ASSYST Active Service System --> Control Unit Adaptations --> Engine Type --> Code to
correct engine type.
3. Model 164.871 - Oil Level Too Low Displayed In Instrument Cluster: Initial oil level too low, perform the following applicable corrective measure.
3a) Vehicles Up to VIN No. A213990 / Production Date 12/20/2006 - Check and correct oil level where necessary by adding 0.3 liter oil at PDI or at
the customers "1st Visit" for all newly sold GL450 vehicles. Refer to WIS document AP-18.00-P-0101GZ. Costs are to be charged using the
warranty code 00001 70.
3b) Check Oil Dipstick Marking on Handle - Oil dipstick with marking 27314 is correct. Oil dipstick with different marking should be replaced with
part number A273 010 14 72. New specification for quantity of engine oil in engine is 9.0 liters with filter change.
3c) Vehicles with VIN No. A213991 up to A235524 / Production Date 2/9/2007
Note:
Do not automatically add 0.3 liters of oil; check dipstick first.
Oil dipstick with marking 27314 is correct. Oil dipstick with different marking should be replaced with part number A273 010 14 72. New specification
for quantity of engine oil in engine is 9.0 liters with filter change.
4. Model 221.186, Equipped with M273 Engine and 4-Matic, Erroneous IC Warning Display "Check Engine Oil Level at Next Service Stop"
Vehicles Up to Production Date end of 03/2007 (as of 04/2007 vehicles produced with modified oil data record) - Update oil data record in ASSYST
using SDS: Control unit --> Information and Communication --> ASSYST --> Control Unit Adaptations --> SCN coding --> Perform SCN online
coding --> Work through steps 1-3 in SDS to perform SCN coding.
5. Model 209/211/219, Equipped with M156 Engine, Oil Level Warning Message "Add 1 liter engine oil at next refueling stop" or "Check oil at next
refueling stop" in Instrument Cluster / Oil Level on Dipstick is OK - Perform the following steps.
a) Check the coding of the engine model designation and oil data set of the ASSYST control unit in SDS --> Control units --> Information and
communication --> ASSYST --> Control unit adaptations --> Engine type --> Engine type M156 E63 Version for rest of world Status: 3 has been
recognized --> Information and communication --> ASSYST PLUS --> Control unit adaptations --> Control module reset
b) Check installed oil dipstick and replace if necessary. The correct oil dipstick is identifiable by the red handle and by the code 156 16 (previously
156 12 or 156 14)
c) Check oil level and correct if necessary.
6. Model 164.122/822 and 251.122, "Check oil at next refueling stop" Warning in Instrument Cluster
If you receive customer reports when driving at constant speeds ranging from 60 to 75 mph the instrument cluster displays "Check engine oil level at
next refueling stop", the cause may be:
a) the position of the oil level switch,
b) a malfunctioning oil level switch,
c) incorrect oil data record coded into the instrument cluster.
Note:
Condition only relevant when the oil level is significantly above "min".
To Resolve:
164.122/822 up to VIN A261645
251.122 up to VIN A059019
a) Install a lengthened bracket (7mm) for the oil level switch (part number A642 018 27 40).
b) Replace the oil level switch as per step 7.
c) Code current oil data record with SDS to Version for USA even if already coded. This will update the oil data record (Figures 1 through 4).
164.122/822 from VIN A261645 up to A425120 (prod. 06/2008)

251.122 from VIN A059019 up to A086462 (prod. 06/2008)
b) Replace the oil level switch as per step 7.
164.122/822 as of A425120 (prod. 06/2008)

251.122 as of VIN A086462 (prod. 06/2008)
7. All Passenger and Light Truck Models, Equipped with Engine M156, M272, M273 or M642 (Up to engine no. 642 xxx 40 673486), Faulty Oil Level
Switch - If after performing the applicable remedy(s) 1 through 6 stated within this document, the issue has not been resolved, the cause may be a
malfunctioning oil level switch. Perform the following.
a) Check the oil level using the dipstick.
b) If the oil level is confirmed between the "MIN" and the "MAX" marks on the dipstick, replace oil level switch with part number A001 153 11 32
as per the applicable WIS document.
Note:
For Engines M272, M273 and M642 If there is any deformation of the stamped steel bottom section of the oil pan after removal, it must be replaced.
Refer to EPCnet for applicable part number.
c) It is possible to install the switch upside down. For correct installation refer to Figure 5.
Parts Information
Note:
Technical Service Bulletin # S-03_30-08J Date: 090617
Engine - Multiple DTC's Set/MIL ON

Date: June 17, 2009
Order No.: S-B-03.30/08j
Supersedes: S-B-03.30/08i dated April 29, 2009
Group: 03
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Check Engine Light On / Fault Codes Current and/or Stored in ME-SFI Control Module / Oil Leaking at Camshaft Adjustment Solenoid
If you receive customer reports of the check engine light being illuminated and one of the following Fault Code Scenarios (no corresponding Fault
Codes in Scenario 3) is found in the above model vehicles, follow the applicable procedure below to resolve.
Note:
Corresponding protocols (i.e. ME Control Module log file related to DTC code) must always be included with any returned parts as indicated on the
Warranty Return Form Printout Matrix (RFPM). If the documentation is missing or does not support the diagnosis, the warranty claim may be debited.
Note:
Flashing the ME Control Module will not resolve these issues and is unnecessary at this point.
Note:
Mobil Training Coach (MTC) "M272 Engine Timing" can be referred to when performing repairs. However, this DTB takes precedence in terms of
technical and warranty content as well as referred WIS documents. Any parts specified in the DTB or in referenced WIS documents should be replaced
accordingly (e.g. seals, gaskets or bolts and screws as required).
Note:
When preparing / cleaning any surfaces for resealing, extreme care must be taken not to damage surfaces with sharp tools. It is absolutely not
permissible to use any abrasive materials (i.e. sand paper, abrasive pads, etc.) for cleaning resalable surfaces. Proper application of sealant is a must as
excessive sealant can result in damage to the engine (refer to MTC listed in the note above). Failure to follow these precautions could result in severe
and permanent engine damage.
Special Tools
Note:
Always refer to EPC for the latest parts information and use the correct VIN number when specifying parts.
Parts Information
Note:
17, 2009 Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Fault Code Scenario 1

Fault Code Scenario 1:
DTC 1200 and/or 1208 is/are present in ME-SFI control module. The fault codes are recorded as current and/or stored in the fault memory. When the
fault memory is erased and the engine is restarted, the fault codes reoccur immediately. This is due to the positioning of the timing chain driven
camshafts relative to the crankshaft and can be caused by a worn sprocket on the balance shaft on engine M272 or by a worn guide (idler) gear for the
timing chain on engine M273. Figure 1, 2 and 3 show extremely worn sprocket gears. Figure 4, for comparison, shows a new sprocket gear.
Note:
In rare cases, a stretched timing chain might be the reason for the DTC fault codes when the sprocket does not exhibit any signs of wear.
Applicable Models (Not Applicable to Model 164.156, 204 or 216.386): Equipped with M272 Engine Up to Serial No. 2729..30 468993 or M273
Engine Up to Serial No. 2739..30 088611.
The material for the balance shaft sprocket and the timing chain guide wheel (idler) was modified on engines past the serial numbers listed above.
Procedure 1 (Follow all steps and the order as described):
a) Perform a visual inspection for any wear of the teeth (damage profile) on the sprocket of the balance shaft (M272) or of the guide (idler) gear for
timing chain (M273) by removing the timing case cover on the engine. Refer to WIS instructions AR01.40-P-8000* (* - applies to a specific model
designation e.g. AR01.40-P-8000SX models 221, 216). Ensure the use of the Special Tool W001 589 81 09 00 when removing / installing timing
case cover.
Note:
Refer to Figure 1 through 3 for examples of damaged / worn sprocket profile. Refer to Figure 4 for example of a new gear (for comparison).
b) Only if worn (sprocket teeth profile damaged), replace the balance shaft on engine M272 or replace the guide (idler) gear of the chain drive on
engine M273 as per WIS instructions AR03.20-P-1000* (* - applies to a specific model designation e.g. AR03.20-P-1000VA model 171).
Note:
Cylinder heads are not needed to be removed.
Note:
When performing repair, pay attention to cleanliness. Remove any debris, shavings and contaminants.
Note:
When replacing the balance shaft on engine M272, the counterweight must also be replaced. The balance shaft and counter weight are specific to engine
designation. Order individual parts and kits specifically to a VIN number.
c) Replace the engine oil pump. Refer to WIS instructions AR18.10-P-6020* (* - applies to a specific model designation).
d) Replace the chain tensioner.
Caution!
New timing chain tensioner must be installed and only after the engine head covers (valve covers) are installed / bolted on. Failure to observe that, will
result in the over tightening the timing chain which will ultimately lead to engine head damage. Noted the timing chain tensioner is a single use part.
Once the tensioner is installed, it cannot be taken out or readjusted, doing so will result in over tightening of the timing chain as well.
e) Change engine oil and filter.
Note:
Use inexpensive, appropriate engine oil from MB sheet 229.1 and 229.3 for this step.
f) Drive with engine at high load and rpm for approx. 15 miles.
g) After 15 miles, drive, change engine oil and filter once more. Use appropriate engine oil from MB sheet 229.5 in this step.
h) Replace all four of the camshaft adjustment solenoids with A272 051 01 77 this step applies only to Scenario 1.

Fault Code Scenario 2:
One or more of the fault codes 0059, 0060, 0063, 0064, 0271, 0272, 0275, and 0276 is/are present in ME-SFI control module. The fault codes are
recorded as current and/or stored in the fault memory. If current and/or stored, these codes are caused by a malfunctioning camshaft adjustment
solenoid.
Applicable Models: Equipped with M272 Engine Up to Serial No. 2729..30 759427 or M273 Engine Up to Serial No. 2739..30 193592. Engines
produced after serial nos. listed above are already equipped with improved camshaft adjustment solenoids (A272 051 01 77).
Procedure 2:
Diagnose each DTC as per Star Diagnosis. If it is determined the solenoid is faulty, replace with solenoid A272 051 01 77 as per appropriate WIS
instructions. Refer to WIS instructions AR05.20-P-7295* (* - applies to a specific model designation e.g. AR05.20-P-7295RTB model 251).
Note:
For this scenario only, replace the solenoid that has a corresponding fault code. Copy of the SDS short test and ME Control Module log file related to
DTC code must accompany returned parts. If the documentation is missing or does not support the diagnosis, the warranty claim may be debited (i.e.
only two Fault Codes but all four solenoids are changed or low voltage situation might result in a code to be stored but not current).

Fault Scenario 3:
Camshaft adjustment solenoid is leaking oil, and no Fault Codes are current or stored in the ME Control Module. Determine the cause of the leak. The
solenoid can be leaking from under the sealing ring or through the harness connector.
Procedure 3:
a) If the leak appears to be between the solenoid and the cylinder head replace solenoid sealing ring (Figure 5, 145).
b) If the leak is from the electrical connector, replace the solenoid (Figure 5, 140).
Note:
Provide description of where the leaking occurred and mark the replaced solenoid.
Brakes - Brake Pad Paste Usage

Date: June 16, 2009
Order No.: S-B-42.10/110
Supersedes:
Group: 42
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models All
Brake Pad Paste Usage

When performing repair or maintenance work on the brake system it is imperative that only the specified brake pad paste is used. Different models and
brake variants may use different types of brake paste (Figures 1-3). Please reference any corresponding LIs, DTBs and or WIS document
AR42.10-P-0161-01B for paste type and application location. Do not apply too much paste, only a light coating of brake paste is required when
instructed.
Warning!
Under no circumstances should aftermarket brake paste or anti-squeal type chemicals be used on brake components. These chemicals are not approved
by Mercedes-Benz, and their affect on brake components is unknown.
Warning!
Never apply brake paste or any other chemicals to the brake pad friction surfaces.
Note:
Failure to follow guidelines for proper brake paste usage may result in brake noise issues.
Parts Information
Steering, A/C - Grinding/Gushing Noises

Date: May 12, 2009
Supersedes: S-B-46.30/21a dated Feb. 12, 2008
Group: 46
Revision History
b 5/12/09 Parts Information Updated / Sound Files Included
a 2/12/08 Applicable Models, Content, Parts and Warranty Information Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 163.154/157/172/174/175
Model 164.172/175/186/871/886
Model 171.454/456/473
Model 203.052/054/056/061/064/065/081/084/087/092/261/264/281/284
Model 209.356/365/372/375/456/465/472/475
Model 211.056/065/070/072/082/083/087/090/256/265/282/283/287
Model 215.373/374/375
Model 216.371
Model 219.372/375
Model 220.170/173/174/175/183/184
Model 221.171/186
Model 230.471/472/475
Model 251.156/165/175
Noise from the Area of the Steering System / Power Steering Pump
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of grinding or gushing noises which may be heard from the area of the steering
system/power steering pump, one of the possible causes may be in the A/C compressor belt drive.
This noise is similar to the noise produced by the power steering pump when ingesting air. This type of noise is present at both idle and higher engine
speeds, can be heard whether the steering wheel is stationary or moving and the noise frequency increases with the engine speed. The noise intensity
increases towards steering wheel end limit stops. Below sound files provide noise examples.
1. First noise example with engine running
2. Second noise example with engine running
Note:
The noise does not change by switching the A/C compressor on and off. Evacuating the refrigerant will not change the noise since the A/C compressor
belt pulley runs continuously with the engine.
Note:
Do not replace the A/C compressor belt pulley merely on suspicion. To ascertain whether the noise is caused by the A/C compressor, perform the
following test using a shorter poly-V-belt. It is absolutely essential to follow in sequence the below procedure:
1. Detach the original poly-V-belt.
2. Install poly-V-belt part number A011 997 96 92 on vehicles with M112 / M113 engines or install poly-V-belt part number A011 997 04 92 on
vehicles with M272 / M273 engines. With the shorter belt installed, the A/C compressor is not driven by the belt. The A/C compressor pulley is
by-passed) (Figure 1, 1). Route the rest of the belt the same way as the original belt (Figure 1).
3. Start the engine and listen for the complaint noise:
Correction:
4. If the complaint noise is no longer present, replace the A/C compressor belt pulley refer to the latest version of DTB P-83.55/87 (latest version) for
A/C compressor poly-v-belt pulley replacement.
5. If the complaint noise is still present, it is not due to the A/C compressor. Therefore, resolve the noise issue by following the procedure in Star
TekInfo > EDAC > Diagnostic Guides > Power Steering Diagnostic Guide (latest version) > Start > Noises in steering system.
6. Reinstall original belt.
Parts Information
Note:
Engine - Cylinder Wall Inspection

Date: May 19, 2009
Order No.: S-B-01.00/27
Group: 01
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models with Engines 112, 113, 137, 272, 273, 275
Cylinder Barrel Inspection
Cylinder Wall Inspection
If engine complaints regarding noises, overheating, or oil consumption arise, visually inspect the mounted cylinder head with a light probe and
endoscope (bore scope). If visual inspection with an endoscope is not sufficient, consult the following documents in WIS: "Check compression
pressure" and "Check cylinder leakage" before removing the cylinder head (WIS documents AR01.00-P-1300, AR01.00-P-0200, AR01.00-P-1200,
AR01.40P9201AA, etc.).
When inspecting Silitec barrels with a light probe it is absolutely essential to observe all possible scenarios before removing an engine or replacing a
crankcase. Section A describes acceptable cylinder barrel wear and section B describes the cases where cylinder barrels are deemed unacceptable and
the crankcase should be replaced.
Ideal (Normal) Cylinder Wall Condition
The ideal is a matte gray surface, no honing pattern, and a dry cylinder barrel without polished sections or mirror polished flats. Individually assess any
irregularities (Figure 1).
Note:
Do not replace crank case based on suspicions only. Perform checks and / or repairs according to published WIS, DTBs, and other official documents.
If other than crankcase components are determined to be a cause of complaint, replace only affected components.
Note:
Use only approved methods to remove any carbon deposits when performing a repair. Do not use any sand paper, abrasive pads or disks or grinding and
sanding tools. Use only approved fuel additives. Dealers might be debited when performing unapproved or incorrect repairs as well as when
unnecessarily replacing parts.
Deviations
DEVIATIONS
A. Cylinder Wall Deviations from Normal Wear Where Crankcase Can Continue to be Used For any deviations from normal wear and tolerance values,
document the direction of the leakage while checking the leak tightness of the cylinder (in the direction valve or in the direction of the crankcase). In
the case of deviating compression pressure values, in particular when not achieving the installation tolerance/new values (measured with a compression
recorder), one should check for indications of a fluid lock (e.g. wet piston crown, wet air filter, water-oil-glycol residues).
In the following cases of deviation, continue to use the crankcase.
1. Individual or Fields of Score Marks

In cases where individual or fields of score marks (Figure 2), (usually caused by residual waste or soiling through back pulsation of particle from the
catalytic converter or the exhaust system), continue to use the crankcase.
2. Ring Shaped Imprints
In cases where upper and lower reversal range of piston rings (Figure 3), continue to use the crankcase.
3. Brown Coloration at Upper Cylinder

In cases where brown coloration (Figure 4) (oil varnish) over large areas of the cylinder barrel, (which indicates that the engine has been driven at a
high temperature level); continue to use the crankcase.
4. Pressure Gloss Marks and Smooth Spots
In cases where individual blank points (Figure 5), as on the middle of the cylinder or around the cylinder head bolts or an all-round impression at the
piston ring reversing point above and below; continue to use the crankcase.
5. Optical Stripes, Friction Marks

In cases where dry friction marks (Figure 6), which cannot be felt, which start from the first, second or third piston ring and run out after approx. 30
mm; continue to use the crankcase.
NOTE:
These traces of friction marks which occur principally around the cylinder head bolts and on pressure side are not a problem provided they are
smoothed. They are caused by soot particles and oil film being washed off by fuel as a result of frequent cold starts associated with short-distance
driving.
6. Imprint on Valve Cooling Bore for an 8- and 12- Cylinder Engine
In cases where the cooling bore in the crankcase shows a different coloration (Figure 7) than the cylinder barrel; continue to use the crankcase.
B. Deviations Necessitating Replacing the Crankcase
1. Corrugated Wear of the Cylinder Barrel In cases where the cylinder barrel surface has a washboard appearance (Figure 8), partially or all around; do
not use the crankcase anymore.
2. Roughened Mottling, Friction Scoring

If friction eroded marks or streaks (Figure 9) are observed starting from the first, second or third piston ring and taper down to the cylinder bottom, the
cylinder barrel is unusable and the crankcase should no longer be used.
3. Piston seizure, eroded areas on the ring
Most of cylinder wall perceptibly roughened over the entire length (Figure 10). Material deposits and perceptible scoring marks on cylinder wall and at
piston skirt. The cylinder barrel is unusable and the crankcase should no longer be used.
Brakes - Caliper Bolt Replacement Information

Date: June 16, 2009
Order No.: S-B-42.10/111
Supersedes:
Group: 42
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models All
Self-Locking Brake Caliper Bolt Replacement

When performing repair or maintenance work on the brake system it is imperative that the corresponding instructions contained within WIS be
followed. If the brake caliper (front or rear) requires removal then the self-locking bolts (caliper support to steering knuckle / wheel carrier) will require
replacement. Reference WIS document AH00.00-N-0001-01A. Refer to EPC for the proper part number per application.
Note:
Do not reuse self-locking bolts.
Interior - Noise From Power Seat During Movement

Date: June 17, 2009
Group: 91
Revision History
b 6/17/09 Damage Code Revised
a 11/20/08 VIN Cut-Off and Linkage Protection Strut Installation Added
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, up to VIN F191914
Equipped with SA Code 275 (Power driver seat with memory) and SA Code 242 (Power passenger seat with memory)
Noise During Fore / Aft Seat Movement
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of noises originating from under the seat when the fore/aft seat movement is actuated, this
may be due to a damaged (deformed) linkage between the motor and the seat adjustment track under the seat. Do not replace the electric seat adjuster.
To resolve, perform the following procedure.
1. Inspect linkage (Figure 1, C) between the motor (Figure 1, A) and seat adjustment track (Figure 1, B) under the seat for twisting or deformations.
Proceed if deformed.
2. Using the power seat controls, move the seat all the way forward and all the way up.
3. Ensure that the cable routing under the seat is correct (refer to WIS document AR91.10-P-3436-01V for cable routing in left and right seats).
4. Remove seat from vehicle as per WIS document AR91.10-P-1000V.

5. Remove flexible linkage (Figure 2, 1) from the motor (Figure 2, 2).
6. Remove the linkage (Figure 3, 1) from the seat adjustment track (Figure 3, 3).
Caution!
Do not move the seat while the linkage is removed. Damage to the seat adjuster will occur.
7. First, install new linkage to the seat adjustment track end (Figure 4). The new linkage will fit tighter into the seat adjustment track. Ensure the linkage
has been inserted completely into the seat adjustment track.
8. Then attach linkage to the motor (Figure 5).
Caution!
Exercise care when installing the new linkage. The linkage may be damaged if installed forcefully.
9. Install linkage protection strut (Retrofit in right seats up to VIN...191914)
a. Loosen and remove hold down device for the dust cap on the upper rail on the linkage side (Figure 6).
b. With the hold down device removed, replace the hex bolt with the one provided in the replacement set and tighten to 15 Nm.
c. Remove the rear bolt on the linkage side of the upper rail (behind the bolt removed in step 1)
d. Place the linkage protection strut from the replacement part set as illustrated in Figures 7 and 9.
e. Hand tighten M8 hex bolt on linkage side.
f. Fasten the M8 hex bolt on the angle bracket side using the M8 self-locking nut provided in the replacement part set (the bolt must be inserted from
below as illustrated in Figure 9).
g. Tighten both M8 hex bolts to 15 Nm.
h. Ensure that the linkage is not obstructed, and is protected by the linkage protection strut (Figure 10).
10. Reinstall seat in vehicle as per WIS document AR91.10-P-1000V

Parts Information
Note:
Tire Monitor System - 'Inoperative' Message Displayed

Order No.: P-B-40.15/67
Supersedes:
Group: 40
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/458/473, MY 05-08 (with Telephone Kit Installed)
Model 209.456/472/477. MY 05-09 (with Telephone Kit Installed)
Display Message "Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative"
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the instrument cluster displaying "Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative" and there is a
corresponding event code of A279 with the possibility of fault codes D162/163/164/165 being current and/or stored, this is caused by data transfer from
the tire pressure system being disrupted by the MHI (Multiple Handset Interface) control unit. To resolve, shield component N123/1 (MHI control unit)
as per the below steps.
This is caused by the radio signal of the tire pressure system being blocked by radio frequency noise from the MHI control unit.
1. Remove component N123/1 (MHI control module).
2. Check the cover of the N123/1 (MHI control module) and tighten if necessary.
3. Degrease the N123/1 (MHI control module) by wiping with brake cleaner. Do not spray directly on module.
4. Seal the three seams of the N123/1 (MHI control module) cover with the copper tape (Figure 1).
5. Route the wiring harness away from the N123/1 MHI control module (Figure 2 and 3).
6. Set tire pressures (cold) to the correct levels at ambient temperatures (outside/not in a heated workshop).
7. Clear fault and event codes.
8. Reactivate the TPMS system.

Parts Information
Note:
April 27, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
COMAND(R) - Various Audio/Navigation Malfunctions

Date: May 8, 2009
Supersedes: P-B-82.60/382b dated August 7, 2007
Group: 82
Revision History
c 5/8/09 Service Update CD Part Numbers Updated
b 8/7/07 New Software and Remedy Information Updated
a 5/18/06 Applicable Models / Remedy and Warranty Information Updated
SUBJECT:
Model 171.454/456/473, as of MY 2005
Model 211.026/056/065/070/076/082/083/087/256/265/276/282/283/287,
as of MY 2003
Model 219.375/376, as of MY 2006
COMAND Head Unit Mismatching Radio Stations or Frequency Bands, Disc Drive Errors, CD Changer Panel Stuck, Head Unit Resets, Navigation
Destination Entry Errors and Various Audio Conditions
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the conditions listed below, the COMAND head unit software must be updated to
version 29/08 using one of the above applicable Service Update Discs.
Note:
The Audio Gateway's (AGW) software version must be updated to at least version 08/05 using Star Diagnosis version 10/08 or newer.
COMAND Head Unit Conditions:
^ Telephone book entries are not completely downloaded into the head unit. The head unit may now handle up to 600 telephone book entries.
^ Remedy for destination entry in navigation: Intermittently, the user cannot enter a destination and Navi goes back to the base screen.
^ During start up, the head unit displays a certain radio station but actually plays another station within the same or different frequency band.
^ When the user is in radio mode, the station switches on its own usually to the lowest frequency or to the first preset if they are stored by the user.
^ Head unit resets (turns OFF and back ON).
^ Head unit hangs up and possibly resets during a telephone book down load in vehicles equipped with a Cellular Telephone System.
^ While the vehicles is running, the user cannot load an audio disc into the head unit Compact Disc (CD) player, or if the disc is accepted, it may not be
played unless the ignition is turned OFF and then ON allowing MOST and CAN buses to go to sleep.
^ Intermittent audio not available at system start up for up to 30 seconds and the MB star hangs up on the head unit display.
Procedure 1 - COMAND Head Unit Software Update
Note:
The software update process is very sensitive, DO NOT press any buttons on the head unit, or turn the ignition OFF or ON at any time during the
update process
1. Power up the COMAND head unit and select "Radio" mode, make sure the head unit's CD player is empty.
2. Press and release the Key Combination (1, 3, 8) on the head unit simultaneously.
3. When prompted, insert the correct Service Update Disc into the head unit disc player.
4. Wait a few seconds while the head unit detects the disc, you may be prompted to accept the software update. Press "OK" hardkey to start the update
process.
5. When the update is complete, the head unit will eject the disc --> Remove the disc and wait as the head unit will automatically reboot. The update
process is now complete.
Note:
If you did not remove the update disc from the head unit when the process is complete, the head unit may display a "CD error message", this is normal
just remove the disc. The CD drive is not faulty
Procedure 2 - Audio Gateway Software Update
Check the Audio Gateway (AGW) software and update using the following path. Perform an AGW software update only if the AGW's software version
is earlier than 08/05.
Connect DAS using version 04/07 or newer and navigate through the following menus: Control Units --> Information and communication --> Audio,
video, navigation and telematics --> AGW - Audio Gateway (MOST network management, diagnosis gateway, radio tuner) --> Control unit adaptations
--> Control module programming --> Determination of new control unit software and subsequent control unit programming -->
Follow the steps as guided by DAS to complete the software update

Note:
This is a required Special Tool and will be automatically released to every MBUSA dealer in July 2007. Additional quantities can be ordered at the
dealer's discretion upon receipt of your initial units.
Note:
August 7, 2007. Please refer to Netstar --> Star TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R)/Cell Phone Diagnostic Tool

Date: 5/18/2009
Group: 82
Revised: Tool Release Messages are on STAR TekInfo under MB Special Tools
SUBJECT:
MY2005 to the Present, Models All
Telephone and Bluetooth Adapter Diagnosis and Test Tool W203 589 07 63 00 and Warranty Return Requirements
This is a follow-up to the "February 2009 Tool Release" message, which is located under MB Special Tools on STAR TekInfo.
All dealers must use special tool W203 589 07 63 00 to test and diagnose any telephone and Bluetooth-related conditions on all vehicles equipped with
the hands-free blue tooth telephone system.
The special tool can test the following telephone functions:
^ Pairing capability, cradle line voltage checks
^ Testing whether the customer's cellular phone is on the approved list http://www.mbusa-mobile.com or http://www.wireless4mb.com
^ Testing the data connection between Bluetooth cradle and the vehicle's telephone control unit (MHI)
^ Testing the data connection between Bluetooth phone and vehicle's integrated Bluetooth system (non-MHI vehicles)
To perform the test, follow the path: Select proper chassis --> Control Unit --> Information & Communication --> Audio, video, navi and telematics -->
select Ctel --> control unit actuations --> Test of Telephony (test Adapter required) --> Test of Function (Full Procedure).
Please reference the Netstar Message above for a detailed description on the tool and its capabilities.
Any request for a cradle replacement must be accompanied by the required documentation, which is outlined below.
HFP Cradle Replacement Required Documentation:
^ A screen shot/print copy of the test protocol clearly showing one of the results negative
^ Telematics control unit log
^ Place all documentation with the returned inoperative unit to the, QEC.
Should a component be sent to the QEC without the specified documentation, the claim handling fee will be debited as of release date of this Service
Bulletin.
QEC reserves the right to review the documented diagnosis forms with each claim.
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Brightness Explanation

Date: May 18, 2009
Order No.: S-B-82.10/680
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
All Models 140, 163, 164, 170, 171, 202, 203, 204, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, and 251 Equipped with Xenon Headlamps
Headlamp Color and/or Brightness Difference When Changing Xenon Bulb
You may receive customer reports regarding the above model vehicles after replacing one xenon bulb. Headlamps will have a visible color difference
between the two when only one bulb is replaced.
Explain to the customer that in situations where only one bulb is replaced:
^ There is a perceptible color difference for the first 100 hours when comparing new bulbs with those that have been in service for some time.
^ Once this "breaking-in period" has passed, the color becomes bluer and resembles that of the older bulb.
Wipers/Washers - Wiping Quality Maintenance

Date: June 2, 2009
Order No.: S-B-82.35/ 621a
Supersedes: S-B-82.35/621, May 2008
Group: 82
Revision History
a 6/2/09 Part Numbers added.
- 5//08 Initial issue
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models-All
Windshield Washer System: Maintaining Wiping Quality and Controlling Noise
Consult this document to help the customer improve the wiping quality on their vehicle windshields.
NOTICE!
Always consider the windshield, wiper arm, wiper blade and windshield washer system as a matched system that works together. Recommend only
Mercedes-Benz genuine parts and cleaner to the customer to ensure the best possible wiping system and to maintain the surface quality of the
windshield itself.
A. Windshield Surface Quality
1. Pollution, chipping, scratches, chemical additives at carwash facilities and even the wrong cleaning fluid can create an irregular windshield surface
that will either cause noise or an ineffective wiping action.
2. Use Mercedes Benz cleaning solution part A 001 986 38 71 for a typical windshield cleaning or A 000 986 40 71 for a more intense cleaning.
3. Consider windshield replacement at customer expense if the surface is marred enough to create wiping problems.
B. Wiper Arm Quality
1. Check the angle of the wiper arms as per appropriate WIS documentation. Wiper arm adjustment outside the specified tolerance will cause noise and
wiping complaints. Only use the Mercedes-Benz approved wiper adjustment tool.
2. Check for the wiper arm physical damage. Replace the wiper arm when necessary:
^ Clinch bolt loose
^ Locking lug bent
^ Change in spring length (alters the contact pressure)
3. If complaints are related to rattling, whistling, or chirping noises, check the mounting of the wiper arm. Loose wiper arms can lead to excessive
rubbing.
C. Wiper Blade Quality
1. Wiper blades may degrade more quickly when:
^ Exposed to severe environmental influences such as heat cold, ice, snow, ozone, UV radiation
^ Not used for extended periods of time (wiper profile deformation)
^ Dirt and foliage falls on the wipers when they are in the rest position
^ Unsuitable cleaning agents or methods are applied.
2. Customer induced actions that will degrade the wiper more quickly are:
^ Ripping wiper blades from a frozen windshield. This action damages the microedge. In isolated cases the rubber profile may be disconnected. Do not
loosen wiper blades from the windshield with an ice scraper. Use a de-icer to melt the ice and snow.
^ Using wiper blades on an icy windshield. Use an ice scraper to clear away all ice.
^ Bending or adjusting the actual blade in any manner.
3. A worn or damaged wiper blade may lead to increased lines and noises. Before replacing a wiper blade examine for defects and perform a system
check on the wiper arm and windshield.
D. Windshield Washer System
1. During any amount of rainfall, use the windshield washer system to pre-clean before fully using the wipers.
2. Check all nozzles and openings of the washer fluid system for calcification or lime deposits and clean if necessary.
3. Ensure correct water/fluid mixing ratio is used. Using the incorrect mixing ratio in cold temperatures can cause damage to the windshield
washer system.
4. Adjust any faulty nozzle settings.
Parts Information
Special Tools
Technical Service Bulletin # S-27_50-59G Date: 090505
A/T - Limp Home Mode/DTCs 2200/2201/2767/2768

Date: May 5, 2009
Order No.: S-B-27.50/59g

Supersedes: S-B-27.50/59f dated January 22, 2009
Group: 27.50
Revision History
g 5/5/09 Warranty Information Updated - Op Code 02-3472 Included
f 1/22/09 Revised Information (sensor ring removed as possible cause)
e 12/2/08 Warranty Information Updated
d 10/31/08 Warranty Information Updated Op Code 27-1255 Included
c 10/17/08 Applicable Models Updated and Remedy Revised
b 1/4/08 Operation Code Updated
SUBJECT:
All Models Equipped with 7G-Tronic Trans.(NAG2)
Transmission in Limp Home Mode with Fault Codes 2200, 2201, 2767 and 2768
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the transmission being in limp home mode with fault codes 2200, 2201, 2767 and 2768,
the condition is related to the speed sensor. To resolve, replace the electrohydraulic control module (valve body). Refer to WIS document
AR27.19-P-0200w. Refer to EPCnet for the applicable part number, being sure to regard the footnotes carefully.
Note:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this repair. This information has been generated on May
Audio System - Copy Protected CD Information

Date: May 5, 2009
Order No.: S-B-82.60/690
Supersedes:
Group: 82
SUBJECT:
All Passenger Car and Light Truck Models, As of Model Year 2005
Faulty Playback of Copy Protected CDs
Certain companies in the music industry have been enforcing Digital Rights Management (DRM) to protect their produced music from being copied. As
a result of this implementation, some music CDs or tracks in the CDs may not be recognized (played) by Mercedes-Benz media players (head units, CD
changers). A reason for this condition is copy-protection encoding algorithms of the subject CD do not match the industry standard.
Please note this condition is not caused by Mercedes Benz medial players and therefore head units, changers and other media players cannot be replaced
due to this condition. Prior to diagnostics, inspect the subject CDs and their labels for any indication of copy-protection on the CD and advice
customers of this information.
Brakes - Brake Component Corrosion Information

Date: June 15, 2009
Order No.: S-B-42.10/109
Supersedes:
Group: 42
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models All
Corrosion of Brake Components

Corrosion protection coatings for brake components and hardware may be damaged and or stripped away (Figures 1 and 2) if highly concentrated
acid-based cleaners are used. Once the corrosion protection is damaged or removed the brake components and or hardware can begin to corrode. These
acid-based chemicals (Figure 3) are typically found in wheel cleaners, but may also be found in other general high strength cleaning solutions. It is
imperative that only approved Mercedes-Benz paint care products and cleaners be used. Reference WIS document AP98.30-P-8070-06Y for approved
paint care products and Mercedes-Benz Service Bulletin S-B-40.10/66 for an approved alkaline wheel cleaner for light alloy wheels.
Note:
Components damaged by cleaning solutions are not covered under warranty.
Vehicle - Maintenance Systems Overview

Date: July 30, 2009
Order No.: S-B-00.20/91
Supersedes:
Group: 00
SUBJECT:
MY1998 -
Present
Models All
Maintenance Systems Overview
This bulletin provides an overview of the various maintenance systems that have been used in Mercedes-Benz vehicles since 1998. The document
explains which maintenance system is used by model, describes the service differences between them, and how they are determined. It is crucial that the
Mercedes-Benz Maintenance Sheets and the Mercedes-Benz Maintenance Booklet be referenced for specific maintenance requirements. Refer to
www.startekinfo.com under the menu headings "Maintenance Sheets" and or "Operator Manuals."
Different onboard vehicle maintenance system nomenclatures were used in US specific documents compared to WIS and the vehicle's instrument
cluster display. Reference the table above for system identification.
Maintenance System: FSS (Flexible Service System)
Model Years: MY1998 - MY2004
Models: 129, 140, 163, 170, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 215, 220, 230, 463
With the FSS maintenance system there is a minor or major service designated as "A" or "B" respectively. If the last service performed was an
A-service, than the next service will be a B-service. For subsequent services; if the distance driven since the last B-service is less (<) than 14,000 miles,
than an A-service should be performed. Consequently; if the distance driven since the last B-service is greater or equal than 14,000 miles, than another
B-service should be performed. Service intervals are based on oil quality, which is determined by the vehicle's oil quality sensor.
MY1998 - MY1999 the instrument cluster service reminder displays one wrench (figure 1). Any additional work to the respective A or B service scope
is calculated using the maintenance sheet.
As of MY2000 - MY2004, there is one or two wrenches displayed within the instrument cluster (Figure 2) indicating "A" or "B" service respectively.
Any additional work to the respective A or B service scope is still calculated using the maintenance sheet. (Figure 2)
Maintenance System: FSS + (Flexible Service System Plus)

Model Years: MY2003 - MY2004
Model: 211
The entire service scope is calculated by the FSS +. With this maintenance system there is no minor "A" or major "B" services. Service intervals are
based on oil quality which is determined by the vehicle's oil quality sensor.
The maintenance service time will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the multi-function display and possibly followed by a
"+" symbol (Figure 3). Types A through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service, ranging from Service A
(approximately 1 hour) to Service H (approximately 8 hours). The plus "+" symbol indicates that the brakes need to be inspected as well, based on
system calculations.
Note:
The alphabetic designations (A, B, C....H) do not represent minor or major services more commonly known as Service A and Service B. Instead these
codes strictly represent an estimated amount of time required to perform the corresponding service.
Maintenance System: MBMS (Mercedes-Benz Maintenance System)
Model Years: MY2005 - Present
Models: 163, 164, 171, 199, 203, 204, 207, 209, 211, 212, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, 463
The MBMS uses various instrument cluster displays and intervals. Refer to model specific information below.
^ Model 163, 199, 203, 209, 215, 220, 230, 463
The MBMS indicates a minor or major service by displaying one or two wrenches within the instrument cluster's multifunction display (Figure 2)
indicating "A" or "B" service respectively, similar to the FSS system. Additional work is calculated using the maintenance sheet. The difference from
FSS is that the service interval is not based on oil quality. Fixed Intervals 10,000 miles (AMG models and 12 - cylinder engine only) or 13,000 miles
(all other models).
^ Model 164, 171, 211, 216, 219, 221 and 251
The service scope is calculated by the MBMS. The maintenance service times will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the
multi-function display. Types A through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service, ranging from Service A
(approximately 1 hour) to Service H (approximately 8 hours). Fixed Intervals - 10,000 miles (199, AMG models, 12 - cylinder, and 642 diesel engines
only) or 13,000 miles (all other models and 648 diesel engine).
Note:
The alphabetic designations (A, B, C....H) do not represent minor or major services more commonly known as Service A and Service B. Instead, these
codes strictly represent an estimated amount of time required to perform the corresponding service.
^ Model 204, 207, 212
With the MBMS there is a minor or major service designated as "A" or "B" respectively. The instrument cluster displays "AX" or "BX", where "X" is a
one-digit number representing the additional work. Additional work is determined using the Mercedes-Benz Maintenance Sheet. Fixed Intervals -
10,000 miles (except MY2008 204 13,000 miles).
Note:
As of 2009 a new 10,000 mile maintenance strategy was implemented for all models and engine variants. Service is divided by "Required" and
"Recommended" at each interval. Refer to the Mercedes-Benz Maintenance Sheets and the Mercedes-Benz Maintenance Booklet for specific model
requirements. Refer to www.startekinfo.com under the menu heading "Maintenance Sheets" and or "Operator Manuals".
The chart shown above provides an easy and quick method of determining the type of maintenance system, instrument cluster display, and interval
based on model and model year.
A/C - No Or Insufficient Cooling Output

NO OR INSUFFICIENT COOLING OUTPUT, PERMANENTLY OR OCCASIONALLY/DEFECTIVE REFRIGERANT LINE
Topic Number LI83.00-P-047480
Version 1
Design Group 83.00 general
Date 07-29-2009
Validity Passenger car model series with air conditioning
Reason for change
Reason for block
COMPLAINT:
No or insufficient cooling output, permanently or occasionally/defective refrigerant line.
CAUSE:
Refrigerant line (engine-side low-pressure line, from compressor to connecting point upstream of expansion valve) whose inner coating comes loose in
the flexible section of the hose, causing constriction.
Attachments
REMEDY:
Air conditioning system may not be evacuated before test steps 1. - 3., this could affect the test result.
1. Start engine, activate air conditioning on control panel (max. cold, blower setting 3), medium engine speed.
2. Connect pressure gauge to high and low-pressure side.
3. Check whether the refrigerant compressor is delivering refrigerant (limiter on belt pulley turns or pressure builds up in refrigeration circuit): If the
refrigerant, eliminate this fault.
If the refrigerant compressor builds up pressure,
4. Read off the high and low-pressure values from the pressure gauges after approx. 5 minutes.
If the installation space does not permit reliable temperature measurement using an infrared thermometer, continue with 6:
5. If the low pressure is noticeably high (> approx. 60psi) and the evaporator temperature is significantly too high at the same time (> approx. 50°F) use
an infrared thermometer to check the engine-side low-pressure line against the refrigerant flow direction (from compressor to connecting point upstream
of expansion valve). If there is a noticeable temperature drop in the line (Delta > 45°F),
6. Dissemble the engine-side low-pressure line (from compressor to connecting point upstream of expansion valve) and
7. Use an endoscope or the procedure described in the attachment to check the line for clear passage (checking for clear passage using welding wire or
similar is not permissible as this can damage the inner hose and cannot detect peeling anyway).
8. Replace the line if you detect and constriction. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
Attachments
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
Validity
Attachments - Visual inspection of intake line for clear passage
Engine - Oil Level Message General Information

GENERAL INFORMATION ON OIL LEVEL MESSAGE IN INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Version 1
Design Group 01.45 Oil Pan

Date 08-06-2009
Validity Valid for engines: M111, M112, M113, M166, M266, M271, M272, M273, M275, M285, OM611, OM612, OM613, OM628, OM
Reason for change Update model designation/Supercedes SI S-B-01.45/26a and S-B-18.00/36a
Reason for block
COMPLAINT:
The attachment to this document contains detailed information on procedures and possible remedies in the event of implausible display messages
concerning the engine oil level in the Instrument Cluster (IC).
Specifically, it contains information on:
1. Notes on implausible display messages
2. Overview chart of the relevant switches
3. Supplemental notes on oil level measurement
CAUSE:
For causes of implausible display messages, please refer to the document in the attachment (observe correct language version).
REMEDY:
For procedures and remedies in the event of implausible display messages, please refer to the document in the attachment (observe correct language
version).
Attachments
Symptoms
Work Units
Validity
TIPS Information Display: Display message concerning engine oil level

Remedies for known complaints in OM642, M272 and M273 engines

System description on the oil sensor and oil level switch

Oil level message, oil level warnings

General oil level measurement

Procedure for "Implausible display messages"

Engine - Surface Cleaning Recommendations/Precautions

Order No: S-B-01.10/29a
Supercedes: S-B-01.10/29, July 30, 2009
Group: 01
Revision History
a 9/30/09 Updated footnotes 1 and 2, in parts information.
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Engines 112, 113, 272 and 273
Cleaning Sealing Surfaces
When performing any engine repair or maintenance work where cleaning sealing surfaces is recommended, such as cylinder head cover removal or
installation, always follow the methods described below.
It is important to remember to never use abrasive cloths, pads, paper or any sanding procedures to remove silicon residue. In addition, never use any
sharp-edged tools or wire brushes that will damage the sealing surfaces.
Note:
When preparing and cleaning any surfaces for resealing, extreme care must be taken. Consequent damage resulting from not following the prescribed
methods for cleaning will not be covered by the warranty.
Note:
Use only approved methods to remove any carbon deposits when performing a repair. Do not use any sand paper, abrasive pads or disks or sanding
tools. Use only approved fuel additives. Dealers might be debited when performing unapproved or incorrect repairs as well as when unnecessarily
replacing parts.
Note:
Proper application of sealant is a must as excessive sealant can result in damage to the engine (refer to MTC "M272 Engine Timing"). Failure to follow
these precautions could result in severe and permanent engine damage.
Sealant Removal Procedure
1. Using a rag, wipe away all operating fluids (oil) and any other residue from sealing surface.
2. Observing all manufacturer application directions for product application, spray Loctite 7200 (or substitute as indicated in the parts information
below) on all sealing surfaces and let alone for 10 to 30 minutes.
3. Using a soft (plastic or wood) scraper, scrape away any loosened silicone sealant and wipe with a rag.
4. Note that the sealing surface should now feel even with a visible deposit of silicon sealant remaining (Figure 1). The surface should not be metallic
bright.
5. Thoroughly clean the sealing surface (follow product label directions) with Loctite 7063 (or substitute as indicated in the parts information below)
cleaning spray. Wipe surface when still wet with a dry, clean cloth and blow with compressed air.
6. The Loctite spray should be fully blown off before applying the new silicone sealant (the surfaces must be completely dry); otherwise, leaks may
occur.
Parts Information
Suspension - Front End Squeaking/Grunting Noise

SQUEAKING/GRUNTING NOISE FROM AREA OF FRONT AXLE DURING JOUNCE MOVEMENTS
Version 1
Design Group 32.20 STEEL SPRINGS/TORSION BARS, NIVEAUMAT
Date 07-23-2009
Validity MODEL 171.### #F UP TO 076559
Reason for change Supercedes DTB P-B-32.20/38a
Reason for block
Complaint:
Squeaking/grunting noise from area of front axle during jounce movements!
The noise can be reproduced by rocking the vehicle at the front axle on both sides.
Cause:
When the suspension is compressed at the front axle, the compression/deformation of the stop buffer in the suspension strut can cause friction noises
between the piston rod and the stop buffer (see attachment)
Attachments
Remedy:
1. Raise vehicle at front axle.
2. Pull down stop buffer with boot.
3. Lightly grease piston rod with lubricant.
4. Push stop buffer with boot back up to original position.
5. Lower vehicle.
1 Sufficient for 10 cars, Submit as Local Purchase - SGR00203, Qty 1, handling is included.
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
Validity
Stop buffer, model series 171
Recall - ECM Update For Various Issues

FILE:
PARTS: GROUP I OF INFORMATION PARTS & ACCESSORIES BINDER
Campaign No. 2008070001, October 2009
SUBJECT:
Models 164, 164.8, 171, 203, 204, 209, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, 463
Model Years 2003 - 2009
Re-code the Software Calibration Number (SCN)

a 10/16/09 Revision to step 2, in work procedure
This Recall Campaign has been initiated because Daimler AG (DAG), the manufacturer of Mercedes-Benz vehicles; has determined that between April
15, 2008 and April 17, 2008 and between June 5, 2008 and June 10, 2008, a temporary failure occurred in the Mercedes-Benz computerized on-line
Workshop Systems. Due to this failure some online-inquiries from the Mercedes-Benz Workshop-Systems may have been answered with incorrect
SCN-Coding data. Depending on the model year and model affected, the results of an incorrect SCN coding can affect a number of vehicle safety and
emission functions including the following types of functions:
The fuel gauge readings may be incorrect.
A stuck fuel-level sensor may not be displayed in the instrument cluster.
The OBD system may cause the Check Engine Light to illuminate incorrectly.
The speedometer may be out of tolerance.
In the event of a vehicle crash the electrical fuel pump may not receive a crash signal as designed that is required for the fuel pump to disconnect and
prevent further fuel delivery.
Shown in this bulletin is a sample copy of a letter which owners of the affected vehicles will receive.
Prior to performing this Recall Campaign:
Please check VMI to determine if the vehicle is involved in the Campaign and if it has been previously repaired.
Please review the entire Recall Campaign bulletin and follow the repair procedure exactly as described.
Approximately 409 vehicles are involved.
Procedure
Note:
^ Use DAS 07/09 with all associated patches or higher.
^ Follow the steps exactly as described in DAS.
^ Connect battery charger (battery voltage >12.5V).
1. Connect Star Diagnosis to vehicle.
2. SCN code Engine control module:
^ Follow the DAS path: Main groups/Check for necessary coding measures.
^ Perform corresponding "Control unit adaptations", "SCN coding" (follow on-screen instructions).
Note:
^ The Menu "Main groups/Check for necessary coding measures" will only appear when SDS is connected to a vehicle affected by this campaign.
^ For model 204, do not access the vehicle via XENTRY, but rather via Start/All Programs/Star Diagnosis/ DAS. A password must be requested from
the SDS Help Desk via the following e-mail address: [email protected] to recode the SCN. Please specify the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) and the DAS release used.
3. Fill out Repair Label and affix on underside of hood next to existing emissions labels (as shown in Figure 1).
Note:
^ Ensure the surface is clean prior to affixing the label.
^ Use a ball point pen to fill in the label; do not use a marker or felt tip pen.
^ Campaign is now complete except for California dealers.
^ California dealers only, please proceed to next step.

4. California dealers only: Print Proof of Correction form also shown above and fill out as shown in Figure 2.
Note:
The Proof of Correction form can also be found on STAR TekInfo under the "Forms and Test Sheets > Other Forms" heading.
^ Scan form and keep a copy for dealer records.
^ Hand the form to customer or place in glove box.

A/T - 722.9, Delayed Reverse Engagement

DELAYED ENGAGEMENT OF REVERSE GEAR
Version 1
Design Group 27.00 General
Date 06/24/2009
Validity Transmission 722.9 with code 809
Reason for change Additional procedure for remedy
Reason for block
Complaint:
When reverse is selected, the engagement sequence may be delayed.
A double jolt may occur at an interval of approx. 3 seconds after moving the gearshift lever from P to R.
The complaint occurs with electrohydraulic controller (EHS) 220 270 2406 and 220 270 2306.
These electrohydraulic controllers are installed in transmissions as of model year 2009 (code 809).
Cause:
Parameterization of adaptation values for clutch pack BR (reverse gear)
Remedy:
1. Perform software update in transmission control unit and then perform SCN coding.
It is absolutely essential to make sure that DAS version 01/09 or higher including add-on 1077 is used.
2. Then the reverse gear adaptation data must be reset using DAS (menu guide in attachment).
3. The engagement sequences for N-D and N-R must be taught in again:
NOTE:
Always remain in the gear ranges N/R/D for at least 5 sec!

Start the engine from cold,
shift 5 times N-R,
shift 5 times N-R --> warm up transmission 40°C and while doing so, exceed a speed of 50 km/h at least once.
shift 5 times N-R,
shift 5 times N-D --> warm up transmission to 70°C and while doing so, exceed a speed of 50 km/h at least once.
shift 5 times N-R,
shift 5 times N-D.
Attachment
Symptoms
Validity
NOTE:
In case of Warranty, use the table above.

Computer/Control System - DAS/XD Software Update

DAS/XD ADD-ON 2009-07-15-1214 FOR PASSENGER CARS
Version 1
Design group 58.40 Workshop equipment/MB testers
Date 09-29-2009
Validity DAS version 07/2009
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
All telematics flash CUs - Model series: 204,207,212 - During control unit programming of telematics control units, the selection menu "Component
'TV' is not installed" sometimes does not appear. During control unit programming, no symptoms are displayed on the "New software found" screen.
CDI6 - Model series: 204,212,207 CU access not possible. CU programming from boot software cannot be performed. Initial startup cannot be
performed.
SGR - Model series: 221,195 Communication cannot be established with the radar sensors control unit (SGR).
Audio/COMAND - Model series: 164,169,211,219,245,251,230,203,463,171 Missing texts during control unit programming
SAM - Model series: 169/245 Initial startup of SAM control unit not possible for vehicles prior to YM 2008
ETC - Model series: 204,212 Communication aborted when accessing current adaptation of torque converter lockup clutch
Cause:
For all complaints: DAS data assignments.
Remedy:
DAS/XD add-on 2009-07-14-1214 for passenger cars
This add-on can be installed over DAS/XD version 07/2009.
This add-on does not supersede any other add-ons and must be additionally installed.
Symptoms
Control unit/fault code

Validity
Computer/Controls - Software Update

Version 1
Date 09-29-2009
Validity DAS version 07/2009
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
CDI6 - Model series: 211 Control unit programming for software object numbers 009 448 97 40, 010 448 02 40, 009 448 98 40, 010 448 03 40, 009
448 99 40, 010 448 04 40, 010 448 00 40, 010 448 05 40, 010 448 01 40, 010 448 06 40 reports: "No newer control unit software found".
ME - Model series: 204,207,212 Control unit programming for software object numbers 271 903 08 00, 271 903 65 00, 271 903 66 00, 271 903 10 00,
271 903 67 00, 271 903 05 00, 271 903 74 00 reports: "No newer control unit software found".
ETC - Model series: 212 Control unit programming for software object number 002 448 67 10 reports: "No newer control unit software found".
ME - Model series: 169,245 Control unit programming for hardware object number 003 446 60 40 reports: "The following control unit software
versions are available for control unit programming: 002 448 57 40, 266 903 06 00" After control unit programming, the control unit cannot be started
up.
ME 9.7 - Model series: 204 Control unit programming for hardware object number 003 446 77 40 reports: "The following control unit software
versions are available for control unit programming: 272 902 05 00, 006 447 63 40" After control unit programming, the control unit cannot be started
up.
ETC - Model series: 171 Control unit programming for software object number 003 446 03 10 reports: "No newer control unit software found".
Cause:
For all complaints: DAS data assignments.
Remedy:
DAS/XD add-on 2009-08-13-1238 for passenger cars.
Symptoms

Validity
Cell Phone - iPhone(R) Music Won't Mute During Call

!PHONE/!PHONE 3G: MUSIC PLAYBACK CAN BE HEARD DURING PHONE CALL
Version 1
Design group 82.70 Cellular telephone, voice control system (VCS)
Date 08-18-2009
Validity Model series 164, 169, 171, 203, 204, 207, 211, 212, 216, 219, 221, 245 with !phone UPCI cell phone holder (A34/15) and data co
Reason for change Remedy entered/Supercedes DTB S-B-82.70/687
Reason for block
COMPLAINT:
Music playback from the !phone/!phone 3G during a phone call can be heard over the vehicle speakers. This means that the audio source is not muted at
the beginning of the phone call.
The complaint only occurs if the following boundary conditions exist:
1. The !Phone/!Phone 3G is inserted in the UPCI cell phone holder (A 34/15).
2. The UPCI cell phone holder (A 34/15) of the !Phone is connected to an !Pod interface via a data connection cable (installation instructions, see WIS
references).
3. The vehicle is equipped with (multiple-handset interface) MHI.
4. Music playback via the !Pod interface prior to the phone call
CAUSE:
!Pod interface software is faulty.
REMEDY:
Replace !Pod interface control unit (see parts note).
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
WIS-References
Validity
COMAND(R) - Various Radio Display/Navigation Problems

COMAND: RADIO STATIONS ARE SHOWN TWICE IN THE DISPLAY, STORED STATIONS ARE OVERWRITTEN, SEVERAL SYSTEM
ERRORS AND NAVIGATION PROBLEMS
Version 1
Design Group 82.85 Navigation and communication systems (CNS, ICS, COMAND, FleetBoard)
Date 09-22-2009
Validity models 171, 230, 164, 251, 169, 245, 211, 219 and CLC 203 with SA code 512, 527 or 528 and SA code 809 or 800 (NTG2.5)
Model 463 with SA code EU1
Reason for change Title, complaint and remedy revised/Supercedes DTB S-B-82.85/679
Reason for block
Complaint:
Radio stations are displayed twice in the COMAND unit (A40/3). Radio stations saved by the customer are sporadically overwritten by other radio
stations.
The COMAND unit sporadically performs a reset while driving. The map in the navigation function freezes....
Cause:
Software error in COMAND head unit (A40/3).

Remedy:
With telematics CD released with DAS 06/09 (A 171 827 40 59), the software of the COMAND unit must be updated to version 02/09.-->We strongly
recommend using DAS 07/09 and later with all of the patches installed.
NOTE:
If the software release of the COMAND unit (A40/3) is 08.08, it is necessary to update the map data. DAS automatically checks and displays the
necessity of updating the map data.
The software update also remedies the following fault profiles:
Bluetooth connection to head unit terminates prematurely or calls are aborted and reconnected
Systems:
- System starts until star appears, performs a reset and then restarts normally
- Cyclic resets with system starting only until star appears
- Random resets during navigation mode
Radio:
- Stations change at random
- The display station name does not match the station being received
- Preset list is overwritten
Navigation:
- Improved TMC behavior, improved route options (avoiding toll roads)
- Improved route options (shortest/quickest/dynamic route)
- Navigation cannot compute a route (automatic continuation of route). The second time the direction is changed, the route is not recalculated. The blue
line disappears.
Navigation map The
freezes
system announces: :The route cannot be computed - follow the direction arrows". Head unit shows "No route"-
New functions are implemented as of software release 02/09
- Static guide lines in reversing camera image for model series 164/251
- Implementation of Service call
- Automatic reading of Traffic Message warning messages on the route
- Audio volume reduction for navigation announcements (activatable)
- Level adjustment for AUX signal
- Support for SD cards greater then 2GB
- RDS Radio Text and Radio Text plus
- Blower speed reduction when voice control is active
Software update notes:
^ Battery charger must be connected throughout the update process
^ The head unit may display the message "SOFTWARE MISSING" or may reset a few times during the entire update process: This is NORMAL!
do NOT interrupt the update process
^ Do not disconnect XENTRY/DAS even if you see the software update process bar not moving
^ Do not interrupt the update process unless guided by XENTRY DAS
Symptoms
Work units
Validity
Lighting - Exterior Light Bulb Replacement

REPLACING EXTERIOR LIGHT BULB
Version 3
Design group 82.10 Exterior lights
Date 10-01-2009
Validity All Model 163, 164, 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220,
230 and 251 Vehicles
Reason for change LI did not match DTB from which it was created. (Main remedy for repair was missing.) / Supersedes DTB SB-82.10/598b
Reason for block
Complaint:
Replacing Exterior Light Bulbs
Cause:
N/A
Remedy:
If you receive customer reports of exterior bulbs requiring replacement, only long life bulbs are to be used as replacement bulbs.
Refer to Table 1 for applicable models.
Note [i]:
In cases where a new tail lamp housing (which does not have long-life bulbs) is being installed, replace the bulbs with long life bulbs.
Note [i]:
This information has been generated on October 30, 2008. Please refer to Netstar -> Star TekInfo -> Star Time for the most current labor time
allowance.
Attachments
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
Validity
Attachment - Table 1
Audio System - Intermittent Vibration Noise From Woofer

VIBRATION NOISE FROM WOOFER
Version 1
Design Group 82.62 Loudspeakers, amplifiers, antennas
Date 09-17-2009
Validity MY 2005 and later 171 SLK
Reason for change Technical content updated/Supercedes DTB P-B-82.62/450
Reason for block
Complaint:
Intermittent vibration noises can be heard from the woofer in the driver or passenger door.
Attachments
Cause:
The magnets of the woofer in the R171 do not always have a uniform black surface. So that these magnets are not visible through the speaker covers
(speaker grilles), black self-adhesive stickers have been affixed to them. Sometimes these black stickers become detached and can cause vibration
noises.
Remedy:
Completely remove the black sticker from the magnet of the woofer. Any areas that are visible through the speaker covers (speaker grilles) must be
colored black.
Symptoms
Work units
Validity
Attachment - Partially detached sticker on speaker magnet.
Body - Windshield/Window Glass Bonding System

Date: July 23, 2009
Order No.: S-B-67.10/27
Supercedes:
Group: 67
Subject:
MY-All, Models All
Introduction of Improved Single-Component Windshield/Window Bonding System

A. Advantages Of Narrower Nozzle
1. A narrower nozzle affords easier application and produces a more accurate bead for going around components, such as a center high-mounted brake
lamp.
2. The yield of the cartridge has been increased by 63 cm and covers all windshield and window scopes. This eliminates the need for a second cartridge.
3. There is less soiling in the inner headliner.
B. New Applicator Sticks Include a Primer and an Activator (Figure 2)
1. New applicator sticks ensure quicker application in a precise width with a reliable one-time use.
3. Wait Time After Windshield or Window Installation

1. When performing a windshield or window install, wait at least two hours after using the new application kit. This is a reduced wait time from older
kits.
Parts Information
Audio System - Satellite Radio Unavailable

SATELLITE RADIO NOT AVAILABLE AND "DEVICE UNAVAILABLE" DISPLAYING ON THE HEAD UNIT MAY CAUSE CURRENT
DRAW
Version 2
Design Group 82.60 Radio, audio/video systems
Date 07-08-2009
Validity Model 164.122/125/172/175/177/186

Model 171.454/456/458/473
Model 211.022/056/072/077/090/087/277/287
Model 219.372/377
Model 230.470/471/472/477/479
Model 251.122/125/156/165
Model 463.237/271
All Model Year 2009 Equipped with Satellite Radio/HD Turner
Reason for change New remedy (software) available, technical information updated. Notes reguarding the process included. Supercedes DTB S-B-82
Reason for block
Complaint:
Head unit displays "device unavailable" when user switches to satellite radio with a possible Battery current draw.
Cause:
Under-voltage condition with the vehicle itself can cause the satellite radio to go into bypass. The satellite radio operation can be recovered by a
hard-reset to the receiver; however, this condition may reoccur.
Remedy:
Use DAS version 06/09 or newer and telematics CD # 171 827 40 59 ES2:0001 to update the revelent telematics components. The satellite Radio/HD
Turner version will be 47/08.
Software update process:
1. Connect a battery charger and DAS. DAS must be connected at all times and throughout the update process.
2. Do NOT disconnect DAS at all during the update process, this can corrupt the flash and render the head unit's operation unrecoverable even if you
perform a hard-reset on the head unit during software the update process
3. Start the telematics update by selecting COMAND > control unit adaptations > control module programming, follow DAS prompts.
While DAS is searching the telematics CD for the proper application software for Head unit such as DVD mechanism, Bluetooth, navigation, voice
control or for other telematics components such as sound amplifier, UCI, satellite radio/combi turner it may display this message "Software Missing".
This id normal. <br style="font-style:italic," /> Do NOT interrupt or restart the update process, or other wise the head unit can get corrupted.
Software update process bar may not indicate the elapsed time/time remaining for the update. Even if the process bar does not seem to be changing, the
update process is taking place in the background. Please be patient, do not interrupt the process and allow DAS to continue through until the process is
complete and you are prompted by DAS to eject the telematics CD from the head unit.
4. During the update, the telematics system will reset (restart) a few times, this is normal.
5. After update is complete and SCN coding is carried out, delete DTCs and check for correct functionality
Telematics components bypass notes:
Telematics components are specified go into bypass (self protection) when sensing an under-voltage condition of 10.6 V or lower. Due to a software
error in the satellite radio, it is more susceptible to go into bypass before any other telematics components even if the voltage supply to the receiver is
over the low voltage threshold. As a result a "device unavailable" message is despayed on the head unit.
Symptoms
Validity
Lighting - Automatic Lights Switch OFF Too Late

DRIVING LIGHTS SWITCH OFF TOO LATE OR ON TOO EARLY (BLUE SKY EFFECT)
Version 1
Design Group 82.10 Exterior lights
Date 09-10-2009
Validity Models 203 as of 06/2003, 169, 245, 215, 216, 209, 219, 211, 164, 251, 220, 221, 230, 171. With rain/light sensor (RLS)
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
The customer complains that, under a cloudless, blue sky (away from direct sunlight), the driving lights switch off too late when the rotary light switch
is in the "Auto" (automatic) position.
Cause:
Under a blue sky, the sensor interprets the ambient brightness as being too dark due to its physical operating principle (blue sky effect). The reason for
this is that the sensor measures light in the infrared range, and range of light occurs less then usual under a cloudless sky.
Remedy:
Please advise the customer of the technical limitations in this special situation.
NOTE:
Replacement of the rain/light sensor (RLS) is not justified and does not remedy the complaint!
Symptoms
Work Units
Validity
TPMS System - Tire Pressure Monitor Inop./DTC 5581

DISPLAY MESSAGE "TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR INOPERATIVE" DTC 5581
Version 1
Design Group 40.15 Tire pressure/tire pressure monitoring
Date 09-24-2009
Validity Model 171.454/456/458/473

Model 204.054/056/077/081/956/987
Reason for change: Instructions revised foe Xentry/Supersedes DTB S-B-40.15/68
Reason for block
Complaint:
Display Message "Tire pressure Monitor Inoperative" DTC 5581
Cause:
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the instrument cluster displaying "Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative" and there is a
corresponding stored fault code of 5581 (front or rear sensor localization failed), this is because the difference in the signal strength between the front
and rear axle may not be enough for the wheel assignments to be accurately made.
Remedy:
NOTE:
If the DTC is present for three consecutive axle location sequences, then the activation menu on the instrument cluster is no longer present until a
successful axle location occurs. Do Not replace the control unit!
To resolve, gain access to the TPM control module (N88) and the module's wiring harness in the rear of the vehicle. For information on component
location, refer to the WIS documents GF40.15-P-0001RC (171) or GE40.15-P-0001CE (204).
NOTE:
Do not erase or clear any of the fault/event codes until the complete repair instructions have been completed.
Repair Part One - Hardware Modifications
Model 171 (Control unit in right side of trunk
1. Starting 57cm from the connector for the TPMS control unit, separate the ground wire (brown wire - Pin # 2) from the electrical harness then cut the
ground wire.
2. Insulate the terminated ground wire which is not being used.
3. Attach a right terminal, part no. A003 546 85 40, to the 57cm long ground wire which runs to the TPMS control unit.
4. Re-route the harness as shown in Figure 1 and 2 with the harness being run vertically from the TPMS control unit down to the body of the vehicle.
NOTE:
If the routing of the ground wire is not followed as shown or the wrong length is used, the repair will not be effective! Do not route wire as shown in
Figure 3!
5. secure to the ground lug as shown in Figure 2.
6. Proceed to Repair Part Two of procedure.
Model 204 - Not Including 204.956/987 (Control Unit in left side of trunk)
NOTE:
For Models 204.956/987, no ground wire modification is required, proceed to Repair Part Two of procedure.
1. Remove 5A fuse 70 from rear SAM.
2. Separate the ground wire (brown wire - Pin # 2) from the TPM control module (N88) electrical connector then cut and remove the ground from the
TMPS harness at the rear bulkhead (at the rear seat area) and insulate the terminated ground wire which is not being used.
3. Make new ground wire 79cm long using ring terminal, part no A0003 546 85 40, and terminal part no. a016 545 41 26.
4. Install the new ground wire into pin # 2 at the N88 connector and route as shown in Figure 1 with the ground terminating at the cable lug on the left
side quarter panel. (The routing spaces the wire away from the body by following the drain tube).
NOTE:
If the routing of the ground wire is not followed as shown or the wrong length is used, the repair will not be effective!
NOTE:
On vehicles with panoramic roof (Code 413), there is no drain tube installed. remove the rubber plug and install drain tube, part no. A204 639 05 94,
into hole. cut tube length as required securing the ground wire as shown in Figure 4.
5. replace fuse and all panels.
6. Proceed to Repair Part Two.
Part Two - Parameter Optimization via Star Diagnosis (171/204)
1. Set the inflation pressures on the vehicle to at least minimum pressure values (according to the fuel filler door) with the vehicle at ambient
temperatures. Take into account the difference between workshop and the outdoor temperatures and only set the pressures on cold tires which have
normalized to ambient temperatures.
2. Go to the actual fault code while in the TPMS control unit menu.
3. Select "5581 Front or Rear sensor localization was unsuccessful" and press F3.
4. Select "Sensor localization was unsuccessful" and press F3.
5. If there are no other fault codes present for TPMS the parameters in the TPMS control unit will be updated. refer to Figures 5 through 8 for reference.
6. Reactivate the TMPS system, and take the vehicle for a test drive.
NOTE:
The vehicle must have been standing for 30 minutes before test drive. Sensor IDs are only sent at the time they wake up. If the status message in the
instrument cluster "Tire pressure monitor inoperative" is present before this test drive, this is not a fault code and can only be reset with a 15 minute test
drive.
Attachments
Symptoms
Control unit/Fault code
Parts
Work units
WIS-Reference
Validity
Attachment - Figure 1
Attachment - Figure 2 and 3
Attachment - Figure 4
Attachment - Figures 5 to 8
ABS/TCS - Yaw Rate Sensor Fastener Update

Order No: S-B-61.10/06
Supercedes:
Group: 61
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Model 171
Retrofitting Threaded Studs to Weld Studs for Turn Rate Sensor on Right-Hand Floor
The replacement part A 171 610 04 60 "right-hand floor" does not have threaded studs for attaching the turn rate sensor. Therefore, threaded studs (M6)
have to be retrofitted as weld studs when working on Chassis F 168695 from 04/17/2007 onwards.
A. Applying the Template
1. Note the two part numbers for right-hand floor. Part A171 610 04 60 replaces Part A 171 610 06 60 when working on vehicles April 17, 2007 to the
present. (Part A 171 610 06 60 can only be used on vehicles before production March 2007 (Figure 1)).
2. Print the template out as is (Figure 2).
3. Cut out the template and attach it to the right-hand floor.
4. Transfer bolt marks (circle with center cross) using position 1 if working on vehicles with F 168695 04/2007 to the present (Figure 2). Only use
transfer bolt marks using position 2 if working on vehicles F 168649 to 04/2007 (Figure 2), which do not require retrofitting thread studs to weld studs.
Parts Information
Engine Controls - Multiple DTC Troubleshooting

Date: November 2009
Order No: S-B-07.61/59A
Supercedes: S-B-07.61/59, February 2006

Group: 07
Revision: Models 204, 207, 212 Added.
SUBJECT:
Troubleshooting DTC Fault Codes Related to:
^ Adaptation Limits of Lambda Control
^ Mass Air Flow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Models
204, 207, 212, 171.454, 171.456, 203.052, 203.054, 203.092, 203.056, 203.087, 209.356, 209.456, 211.056, 211.087, 211.256, 211.287, 164.186,
251.165, 221.171
This bulletin explains how to troubleshoot DTC fault codes 0337, 0338, 0341, 0342, 0537, (0620), 0745, 0746, 0749, 0750, 0789, 0790, 0793, 0794,
1045, 1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052, 1345, 1346, 1347, 1349, 1350, 1351, 1352, 1857, 1858, 2025, 2026, 2029, 2030, 2032, 2089, 2090,
2091, 2092, 2093, 2094, 2095, 2096, 2181, 2082 by providing special diagnostic trees based on DAS for each fault code.
Troubleshoot each fault code by solving it before moving onto the next code.
Required DAS-printouts for warranty returns:
^ Printout of all fault codes of the ME 9.7-motor electronics 9.7 (Quick test).
^ Freeze frame data of all fault codes stored in the ME 9.7-motor electronics 9.7.
^ All other required printouts within this document.
^ Returned hot film mass air flow sensor (component B2/5) without the required information will be debited back to the dealer as of repair date
February 20, 2006.
Note:
Only original, readable printouts with the VIN number (DAS-readout) of the vehicle will be accepted. The required printouts can be made only with
DAS-Version starting 11/2005. A hot mass air flow sensor (component B2/5) may be returned and debited back to the dealer should it be determined
that it was not properly tested with DAS and in fact, is working correctly.
General Information: Description of the adaptive mixture control as part of the lambda control:
The catalytic after treatment of the exhaust gas using a closed loop three way catalytic converter has proven to be a highly effective means of meeting
the current low emission limits.
Approximately 14.7 kg of air are required for complete combustion of 1 kg of gasoline. The excess air factor lambda is used to define this A/F ratio.
The engine must be operated within a very narrow range in which lambda = 1 +/- 0.005 . Such precision can only be achieved with precise closed loop
control of the A/F mixture with a lambda oxygen sensor installed upstream of the converter. A second lambda sensor downstream of the catalytic
converter increases the precision even further.
To compensate individual engine differences and long-lasting drifts in sensors and actuators of the injection system and also to compensate small not
measured air leakage, the lambda control contains an adaptive pilot control. This adaptive pilot control takes over the controller correction in two
different ranges (see Figure 2). It takes a certain time of learning in each range, until the correction is completed.
Deviations of the A/F ratio in range 1 is compensated by an additive factor and in range 2 by a multiplying factor. There are individual factors for the
right and the left banks of the engine.
Note:
In the idle speed range, the additive factor can also be affected by the multiplicative factor. For example, if the multiplicative factor (adapted in range 2)
at idle speed is too large, the additive factor (adapted in range 1) will adapt in a negative direction.
Example:
Idle adaptation of 3 % means mixture control at idle is adding fuel. Look for cause of engine is running lean. Partial load adaptation of 0.80 means
mixture control at partial load is taking fuel away. Look for cause of engine is running to rich.
Repair process for fault codes from adaptation of mixture formation:
Self-adaptation of mixture formation (right/left bank) for enrichment at partial load is above the permissible limit (fault codes 0337, 0341,
0789, 0793, 1045, 1049, 2089, 2093).
If this value is greater than 1.20 there may be unmetered air (a leak) in the intake system or not enough fuel is being supplied to the combustion
chamber.
The oxygen sensor measures a lean signal which causes the lambda control to compensate for the problem by making the mixture richer.
Note:
Self-adaptation of mixture formation is at the limit or out of the range on one cylinder bank only, indicates that the hot film mass air flow sensor is not
the cause. Do NOT replace the hot film mass air flow sensor (component B2/5)!
Self-adaptation of mixture formation (right/left bank) for enleanment at partial load is below the permissible limit (fault codes 0338, 0342,
0790, 0794, 1046, 1050, 2090, 2094).
If this value is less than 0.80 the fuel pressure may be higher than 4 bar (affects both cylinder banks) or a fuel injector is leaking. In this case too much
fuel is supplied into the combustion chamber. The oxygen sensor measures a rich signal, which causes the lambda control to compensate for the
problem by making the mixture more lean.
Note:
Self-adaptation of mixture formation (right/left bank) for enrichment at idle speed is above the permissible limit (fault codes 0745, 0749, 1045,
1049, 2091, 2095).
If the actual value of self-adaptation in the idle speed range is 3 % above the stated set values on both cylinder banks, there may be unmetered air (a
leak) in the intake system or the connected vacuum and crank chase ventilation lines. In this case not enough fuel is being supplied into the combustion
chamber. The oxygen sensor measures a lean signal which causes the lambda control to compensate for the problem by making the mixture richer.
Note:
Self-adaptation of mixture formation (right/left bank) for enleanment at idle speed is below the permissible limit (fault codes 0746, 0750, 1046,
1050, 2092, 2096).
If the actual value of self-adaptation at the idle speed range is 3 % below the stated set values the fuel pressure may be higher than 4 bar (affects both
cylinder banks) or a fuel injector is leaking. In this cases too much fuel is supplied into the combustion chamber. The oxygen sensor measures a rich
signal, which causes the lambda control to compensate for the problem by making the mixture more lean.
Note:
In the case of an adaptation mixture formation fault code on both cylinder banks please check the following:
^ Check seal of component B2/5 (hot film mass air flow sensor).
^ Inspect air filter housing for correct installation.

A damaged seal (Figure 3) between the hot film mass air flow sensor and the air filter housing or a improper installation of the air filter housing (Figure
4) can cause a false air flow measurement. The measured value of this improper air flow does not represent the actual air mass. The difference between
the measured value (based on the false measurement) and the actual value of the air mass in the engine is corrected by the lambda control. In this case a
rich or lean condition on both cylinder banks can occur.
Note:
Please be informed that models 203 and 209 do not have air intake housing mounting clip due to design packaging.
^ Check for restriction on air filter inlet (diesel restrictor plate).
A further source for a false air flow measurement can be a restriction before the air filter (plastic bag, ¡Ä) or in the air filter inlet (Figure 5).
Figure 6 shows a restrictor plate for a diesel engine. If this restrictor plate is installed in a vehicle with gasoline engine (M272, M273) it causes also a
false air flow measurement!
^ Inspect hot film mass air flow sensor for correct installation.
Incorrect installation (Figure 7) of the hot film mass air flow sensor (component B2/5) to the intake manifold might be source for two problems:
- A false air flow measurement (improper air flow at sensor element).
- Unmetered air (leak) at the intake system (lean running condition on both cylinder banks).
In case of improper installation, correct the installation of the hot film mass air flow sensor to the intake manifold (securely place the clips).
Do NOT replace the hot film mass air flow sensor!
^ In case of "Self adaptation of mixture formation for enrichment is above the permissible limit" check for air leaks in the air intake system and
connected hoses.
Check for cracks (Figure 9) and open (broken) connection (Figure 10 & 11) on all hoses connected to the intake manifold.
In case of Warranty, use the table above.
Hot Film Air Flow Sensor Related Fault Codes

Functional description of the hot film air flow sensor (component B2/5):
Upon engine start, a current is passed through the hot film air flow sensor, heating the sensor element (Figure 12) to a certain constant temperature. As
air passes through the sensor, this film is cooled and the sensor determines how much electricity is required to keep the film up to temperature. This
enables the sensor to determine how much air (in weight) is passing through the sensor at any given moment. It also recognizes the direction in which
the air is flowing it is able to take pulsation and backflows into account. This means that the hot film air flow sensor is able to measure the actual air
mass independent of pulsation and backflows. This signal is then sent to the ME9.7 engine control unit which it compares to a preprogrammed map to
deliver fuel and ignition spark, taking into account other engine inputs such as engine rpm and temperature. The hot film air flow sensor HFM 6
transmits a frequency (HFM 5 of engine management system ME2.8 transmitted a signal voltage) to the ME9.7 engine control unit. The integrated
deflection particulate contamination and reduce drift over lifetime.
The air intake temperature sensor is also mounted into the mass air flow sensor
Repair process for hot film air flow sensor (component B2/5) related fault codes:
Repair process for fault codes 1345, 1346, 1347:
The fault codes are stored in case of a problem with the cables or the connectors of the hot film mass air flow sensor (component B2/2) or the hot film
mass air flow sensor itself. Please use the symptom overview for components B2/5 (hot film mass air flow sensor) to locate the problem.
NOTE
Fault code 1347 is stored when the connector (5-pin) of the hot film mass air flow sensor (component B2/5) was unplugged during two key cycles.
To check the signals of component B2/5 (Hot film MAF sensor) on vehicles with ME 9.7 - Motor electronics 9.7 there are two guided test available in
DAS:
1.) Check signal of component B2/5 (Hot film MAF sensor) via actual value with engine OFF.
2.) check signal of component B2/5 (Hot film MAF sensor) via actual value with engine speed greater then 3500 rpm.
Repair process for fault codes 1349, 1350, 1351, 1352:
These fault codes are stored if the measured air mass is implausible compared to the position of the throttle valve actuator. in this case, please check
component m16/6 (throttle valve actuator) for proper operation.
Repair process for fault codes 1857, 1858:
These fault codes are stored if the ratio of the hot film mass air flow sensor signal to intake manifold pressure is out of range. In this case, please check
component B28 (pressure sensor) for proper operation.
Repair process for fault codes 2181, 2182:
Check for a proper connection of the connector (5-pin) on the hot film mass air flow sensor (component B2/5).
NOTE
Diagnostic Tree for Hot film air Flow Sensor

Symptom Overview for Hot Film Mass Air Flow Sensor
Note:
The HFM-SFI signal check of component B2/5 (Hot film mass air flow sensor) via actual value with engine OFF is to be done with ignition ON and
engine OFF. If the engine speed (also shown in the screen of the HFM-SFI signal test) is not 0 rpm, the specified value of the HFM-SFI signal can't be
used for this test.
If the status of the relevant actual value is out of range from the specified value and all test requirements were fulfilled, replace the hot film mass air
flow sensor (component B2/5) and send this part with the required DAS original printouts (see below) to our Quality Evaluation Center.
Note:
Before replacing the hot film air flow sensor, check for sand and dirt particles in the clean side (between air filter and engine) of the air intake system
and clean if necessary. Check complete air intake system with air cleaner and repair as necessary.
^ Printout of all fault codes of the ME 9.7 - Motor electronics 9.7 (Quick test).
^ Freeze frame data of all fault codes stored in the ME 9.7 - Motor electronics 9.7.
^ Printouts (Figure 14, 15) of the HFM-SFI signal of component B2/5 (Hot film mass air flow sensor).
Returned hot film mass air flow sensors (component B2/5) without the required information will be debited back to the dealer as of repair date February
20, 2006.
Note:
Only original, readable printouts with the VIN number (DAS-readout) of the vehicle are accepted. The required printouts can be made only with
DAS-Version starting 11/2005.
Air Temperature Sensor Related Fault Codes

Functional description of the air temperature sensor (component B2/5b1):
The air temperature sensor (component B2/5b1) is integrated into the hot film mass air flow sensor (component B2/5). It contains a temperature
dependent resistor whose resistance falls with rising temperature. The engine management system (ME9.7 Motor electronics 9.7) uses the change in the
applied voltage in order to determine the air temperature.
Repair process for air temperature sensor (component B2/5b1) related fault codes:
Repair process for fault code 2025, 2026:
These fault codes are stored in case of a problem with the cables or the connectors of the intake air temperature sensor (B2/5b1).
Note:
Diagnostic Tree for Fault Code 2025

Diagnostic Tree for Fault Code 2026
Repair process for fault code 2029, 2030, 2032

These fault codes are stored if the measured value of the intake air temperature sensor (component B2/5b1) is implausible.
During the plausibility of intake air temperature procedure the actual value of intake air temperature (component B2/5b1) and coolant temperature
(component B11/4) is compared at engine cold start. A fault code will be stored when these two temperature values are not close enough to each other.
Please check component B11/4 (coolant temperature sensor) for proper operation.
Note:
Fault Code 1101, 1102, 1103, 1104, 1599, 1600, 2069, 2070 are related to the Ambient temperature display temperature sensor (component B14).
Diagnostic Tree for Coolant Temperature Sensor
If the measured value of the resistor of the intake air temperature sensor (component B2/5b1) is out of range from the specified value and all test
requirements were fulfilled, replace the hot film mass air flow sensor (component B2/5) and send the part with the required DAS-printouts (refer ti
Repair process for fault codes of adaptation of mixture formation) to our Quality Evaluation Center.
Note:
Before replacing the hot film mass air flow sensor, check for sand and dirt particles in the clean side (between air filter and engine) of the air intake
system and clean if necessary. Check complete air intake system with air cleaner and repair as necessary.
^ Printout of all fault codes of the ME 9.7 - Motor electronics 9.7 (Quick test).
^ Freeze frame data of all fault codes stored in the ME 9.7 - Motor electronics 9.7.
Note:
Document the value of the measured resistance and the approximate temperature of the area surrounding of component B2/5b1 for test purposes in our
Quality Evaluation Center in the dealer text section of the warranty claim.
Returned hot film mass air flow sensor (component B2/5) without the required information will be debited back to the dealer as of repair date February
20, 2006.
Note:
Only original, readable printouts with the VIN number (DAS-readout) of the vehicle are accepted.
Fault Codes of Adaptation of Mixture Formation/Diagnostic Trees

Repair process for fault codes of adaptation of mixture formation - Diagnostic trees of related systems and components:
The main diagnostic tree for adaptation of mixture formation links to several related systems and components. For a complete diagnostic solution it may
be necessary to follow the diagnostic path of a linked diagnostic tree.
Diagnostic Tree for Lambda Control

Diagnostic Tree for Fuel system (lean condition) - "Fuel Restriction"

Diagnostic Tree for Fuel System (rich condition) - "too much fuel"
Diagnostic Tree for Fuel injectors

Performing Self-Adaptation of Mixture Formation
COMAND(R) System - System Starts Then Switches OFF

COMAND APS: SYSTEM STARTS AS FAR AS THE STAR DISPLAY AND THEN GOES OFF, NAVIGATION NOT AVAILABLE, DRIVE
ERROR
Version 2
Design group 82.85 Navigation and communication systems (CNS, ICS, COMAND, FleetBoard)
Date 10-28-2009
Validity Model 171, 230, 164, 251, 169, 245, 211, 219, 203.7 with COMAND (code 512 or 527) and code 809 or 800 (NTG2.5)
Reason for change Complaint revised

Reason for block
Complaint:
1. The COMAND (A40/3) starts only until the star appears and then switches off again.
2. The message "Navigation unavailable" appears in the navigation basic menu.
3. The message "Drive unavailable, temperature too low or too high" appears in the navigation basic menu.
4. The COMAND (A40/3) does not power ON
5. Fault message in the display "Error on Update - Error code 0x....".
6. Audio CDs or video DVDs are not read, drawn in or ejected.
Attachments
Cause:
There is a hardware fault in the Comand (A40/3).
Remedy:
Replace COMAND APS (A40/3). Before replacement, please look at the notes below.
NOTE:
For fault number 3 above, ensure that the replacement head unit serial number is newer than what is listed below.
211/219 COMAND with HDD/Navi --------------90233487
171 COMAND with HDD/Navi --------------81202465
230 COMAND with HDD/Navi--------------81210689
463 COMAND with HDD/Navi-------------- 90200791
NOTE:
If a COMAND head unit (A40/3) with PIN theft protection is installed in the vehicle, the PIN code must be documented in the VeDoc system. Observe
the [initial start-up] instructions guided by DAS/XENTRY Diagnostic. During the SCN coding process, DAS updates the head unit relevant data in
VeDoc. All this documentation is done automatically by DAS/XENTRY as part of the SCN coding process.
You must complete the SCN coding process so that XENTRY Server loads and documents and correct theft-protection PIN onto the head unit, other
wise, the head unit will not function after 50 ignition cycles have been reached.
NOTE on Hard-drive operation at high altitude (3000 Meters or higher):
To protect the head unit's hard-drive (HDD) from being permanently inoperative, we specified the HDD to shut itself down as the vehicle (and therefore
the head unit) reaches an altitude of about 3000 Meters (9842 ft.) or higher with temperature around the head unit and its surroundings reach 55 °C or
higher. This condition is normal.
At that altitude and temperature, the Hard-drive music register, Navigation System, Voice Recognition, Gracenote Database CD/DVD drive will not be
available to the user. Once the vehicle is brought down to altitude lower than 3000 Meters, the above functions should return to normal operation. Do
NOT replace head units or the claim will be denied.
Symptoms
Work units
Validity
Attachment - Head unit display "drive unavailable..."

Attachment - An example of Error Code 0x: 0202
Suspension - Front Axle Area Noise When Maneuvering

Knocking/creaking noises from area of front axle when maneuvering
Version 2
Design group 33.15 Axle links
Date 01-12-2010
Validity Model series 203 except 4MATIC, 171, 209, 204
Reason for change Damage code and WIS documents removed
Reason for block
Complaint:
Knocking/creaking noises from the area of the front axle when maneuvering (forwards/reverse) just before the steering reaches the limit stop.
Note:
Service brake is applied.
Cause:
Torsion of the hydro-mount in the strut rod.
When maneuvering, the hydro bushing end stop plug can collide with the inside of the outer sleeve.
In isolated cases, this surface can exhibit pinpoint wear depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle. This wear is caused by the end stop plug
resting against the outer sleeve during braking maneuvers.
As the end stop plug slides over the damaged area, fluctuations in friction pairing occur which cause the knocking/creaking noises.
Note:
The noise can generally be reproduced by driving a figure-8 in reverse. If the noises occur during this maneuver, the steering gear is not the cause of the
problem and must not be replaced. Please contact the TAC in urgent cases.
Remedy:
No remedy exists at the present time.
Symptoms
Validity

Antitheft System - DAS3 Diagnosis/Replacement Info.

DIAGNOSIS AND REPLACEMENT OF DAS3 COMPONENTS (KEY, EIS, ESL)
Version 2
Design group 80.57 Drive authorization systems (DAS)
Date 10-28-2009
Validity All Model 164, 171, 203, 204, 207, 209, 211, 212, 219
and 251 Vehicles
Reason for change Added applicable models / Supersedes DTB SB-80.57/24c
Reason for block
Complaint:
Diagnostic procedures for the DAS3 Drive Authorization System have been revised for models listed above. Please proceed as follows when
diagnosing systems conditions.
Cause:
N/A
Remedy:
Select Control units -> Body -> EIS -> "Guided transmitter key check" or "Guided drive authorization system check"
Select the respective guided check. A guided diagnosis follows which is used to pinpoint the component that is causing the condition. Do not replace
any component before performing this diagnosis. Always perform the diagnosis in its entirety until SDS identifies the component to be replaced. At the
end of the test steps, the user will be prompted to print the results. When submitting a claim, copies of this printout and a quick test must accompany the
parts. The warranty claim may be debited a handling charge if the printout and the quick test do not accompany the parts.
Applied diagnostic steps are stored in the EIS (Electronic Ignition Switch) and ESL (Electric Steering Lock) components. The diagnostic steps utilized
by the dealer will be electronically verified by the QEC to determine if the control unit performed the diagnostic procedure. If it is determined that a
complete diagnosis was not performed, the warranty claim may be debited a handling charge.
Note:
Both vehicle keys are required to ensure a proper diagnosis. Please be sure that both keys will be available when the repair appointment is made. If this
is not possible, ensure you have the correct diagnosis path when conducting diagnosis in SDS.
Symptoms
Validity
Computers/Control - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-10-09-1280


Version 1
Date 11-25-2009
Validity DVD version 09/2009
This add-on is dependent on the following add-ons: 1266, 1274
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
ETC
Model series:
171, 203, 209, 211, 219, 230
The new transmission control unit VGS3NAG2 could not previously be programmed.
ETC
Model series: 204, 216, 221
ETC
Model series: 221
Control unit programming for hardware object number 0335457332 reports: "The following control unit software versions are available for control unit
programming: 0094484910" After control unit programming, the control unit cannot be started up.
CDI
Model series: 212
Control unit programming for software object number 6519030700 reports: "No newer control unit software found".
Cause:
For all complaints: XD and DAS diagnostic data.
Remedy:
DAS/XD add-on 2009-10-09-1280 for passenger cars:
This add-on can be installed over DVD version 09/2009.
This add-on is dependent on the following add-ons: 1266, 1274
Symptoms

Validity
Computers/Control - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-09-28-1266

Version 1
Date 11-25-2009
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
CDID2
Model series: 204, 212
DAS personalizing cannot be performed
MCMSFL221 / MCMSFR221
Model series: 221 model ref. pkge.
Multicontour seat fails during air release procedure. The system becomes operational again after an ignition change.
Fault code 9E8900 is stored.
TV tuner

Notes adjusted with respect to. coding/extended options. Required in case of replacement of TV-05 (221) with TV-09 (221 model refinement package).
SRS/airbag
Model series: X204
FC A208 cannot be erased even when stored.
ME
Control unit programming for software 0094487540 reports: "The following control unit software versions are available for control unit programming:
0094487540" After control unit programming, the control unit cannot be started up.
DTR
Control unit programming for hardware object number 2125450416 reports:
"The following control unit software versions are available for control unit programming: 2214420956" The control unit cannot be programmed."
CDI 5
Model series: 211
Control unit programming for software object number 010 448 51 40 reports: "No newer control unit software found".
ME
Model series: 451
Control unit programming for software object numbers 033 447 24 02 and 017 448 27 02 reports: "No newer control unit software found".
ME 9.7
Model series: 221
Control unit programming for several software object numbers reports: "No newer control unit software found".
ESP
Model series: 230
Control unit programming for software object numbers 230 448 02 02 and 211 448 08 02 reports: "No newer control unit software found".
ME 9.7
Control unit programming for hardware object number 0034467640 reports: "Control unit software versions are available for control unit
programming". After control unit programming, the control unit cannot be started up.
ETC
Model series: 204
DCU-RF
Model series: 221
Control unit programming for hardware object number 221 870 96 91 reports: "Control unit software versions are available for control unit
programming". After control unit programming, the control unit cannot be started up.
ETC
Model series: 207
ME9.7 (AMG)
Control unit programming for several software object numbers reports: "No newer control unit software found".
ETC
All flashable CUs
FDOK redocumentation of CVN is not performed during SCN coding - SCN coding on vehicles with China variant of COMAND not possible. -
Enabling offline control unit programming not possible.
SIM271DE20
SCN is not written during SCN coding
Cause:
Remedy:
Symptoms

Computer/Controls - DAS/XD 2009-10-05-1274

Version 1
Date 11-25-2009
Reason for change

Reason for block
Complaint:
ETC
Model series: 171, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463
CDI
Control unit programming for hardware object numbers 651 901 26 00 and 651 901 25 00 reports: "No newer control unit software found". New
software for actuation of piezo injectors.
Cause:
Remedy:
Symptoms

Validity
Computer/Controls - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-10-05-1271

Version 1
Date 11-25-2009
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
All flashable CUs
Model series: 129, 163, 164, 168, 169, 170, 171, 199, 203, 204, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 240, 245, 251, 451, 461, 463
3 fault messages displayed during SCN coding
IC
Fault messages during automatic initial startup
FSCM212
Model series: 204

FSCM212 is not shown in the quick test and in the control unit list
All flashable CUs
FDOK redocumentation of CVN is not performed during SCN coding - SCN coding on vehicles with China variant of COMAND not possible. -
Enabling offline control unit programming not possible.
Cause:
Remedy:
Symptoms

Validity

Version 1
Date 11-25-2009
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
Audio or Comand
Model series: 169,245,164,251,171,203,211,219,463
Initial startup cannot be completed with Audio20
ABR
Model series: 216
Control unit programming cannot be performed.
CDI6
Unknown variant of CDI control unit.
SCR
Test prerequisites incomplete - Faults during actuations
Teleaid
PRL update nonfunctional
AAC
Special function for eliminating coding problem after software programming

CDI6BIN5
Actuation cannot be started
Cause:
Remedy:
Symptoms
Validity

Version 1
Date 11-25-2009
Validity DVD version 09/2009 - 11/2009
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
ETC
Model series: 171
Not possible to flash from VGS2 to VGS3 after EGS replacement.
Cause:
Remedy:
This add-on can be installed over DAS/XD versions 09/2009 - 11/2009.
Symptoms
Validity

Version 1
Date 12-16-2009
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
SCR
Guided test does not work
COMAND
Model series: 203, 219, 211, 164, 251, 463, 230, 171, 245, 169
Navigation actual values cannot be displayed.
COMAND
Impossible to create a control unit log for telematics.
SCR
The SCR is missing from the list of control units.
Diesel, transmission CUs
Model series: 212
New diesel and transmission control units cannot be commissioned. CU programming: CAN TO errors are logged FSCU212
Test "Fuel pressure and internal leak tightness" cannot be performed, selection of FSCU in model series 204
DCU-LF, DCU-RF, DCU-LR, DCU-RR
Model series: 221
Coding in diagnostics per factory specifications is not possible STH stationary heater with remote control
If fault codes are stored in the fault memory, the following message appears in DAS when the initial startup is performed: "sst file not found". Initial
startup is aborted.
ETC
Model series: 171
Not possible to flash from VGS2 to VGS3 after EHS replacement. ABS traction systems. Model series: 461 Variant coding in control unit variant
0x0001 not possible
Cause:
Remedy:
This add-on does not supersede any other add-ons and must be additionally
installed.
Symptoms

Validity

Version 1
Date 2-16-2009
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
ME9.7
Model series: 171, 203, 209, 211, 219, 221, 216, 230, 164, 251, 463
Engine warning lamp is currently on or was on according to customer, and a delay fault of the camshaft adjuster is current or stored in the engine
control unit.
CDI D
Model series: 204
Fault memory cannot be erased
ETC
Diagnosis as per factory specifications is possible without a password.
ETC
CDID
Model series: 204
Actuations faulty and some cannot be performed.

Cause:
Remedy:
Symptoms

Validity
Computers/Controls - DAS/XD Add-On 2009-11-27-1321

Version 1
Date 01-07-2010
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
ME9.7
Model series: all except 168, 169, 245 and smart
control unit.
CDI D
Model series: 204
ETC
ETC
1. Display of adaptation data for development department as text file
2. Activation of control unit 3. Correction programming in Diagpass and XD modified for hotline cases
CDID
Model series: 204
Cause:
Remedy:
Symptoms

Validity
Interior - Cup Holder Noise On Uneven Road Surfaces

CUP HOLDER NOISES
Version 1
Design group 68.10 Instrument panel
Date 11-25-2009
Validity R171 with code 309
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
Noises can occur in the area of the cup holder when driving over uneven road surfaces.
Cause:
Tolerances
Remedy:
Apply two felt strips (2) of size 70x25x2mm to the upper side of the cup holder housing while maintaining the distance (1) of 15mm to the torsion
spring.
* Sufficient for 14 cars, Submit as Local Purchase FSR00037, Qty 1, handling is included
Attachments
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
WIS-References
Validity
Attachment - Instructions
Interior, A/C - Heated Seats Inoperative

HEATED SEATS NONFUNCTIONAL
Version 1
Design group 91.30 Seat heater, seat ventilation
Date 11-18-2009
Validity R 171 all VIN as of ....00001 up to .....166314 with SA code

873
R 171 AMG, VIN as of ....00001 with SA code 873
R 171 Designo, VIN as of ....00001 with SA code 873 + X00/X50
Reason for change Validity adjusted. All veh. except AMG&Designo have been technically modified / Supersedes DTB P-B-91.30/146
Reason for block
Complaint:
Heated seats nonfunctional
Cause:
The seat heating leaks at the side of the seat cushion break as a result of frequent entry/exit.
Remedy:
1.) Please expose the seat heating contacts:
To do so, the seat cushion must be removed in the way described in AR91.10-P-3310V.
2.) Then disconnect the main supply connector for the heated seat from the seat separation point. Disconnect the black and white connectors at the side.
3.) The black main connector plug (see picture 1, item 1) with the catch tab is the connector of the heating element for the front seat cushion.
4.) Please check the resistance of the seat cushion heating element.
a) If the resistance is lower than 10 ohm, the cushion heating element is OK.
b) If the resistance is higher than 10 ohm, the cushion heating element is broken.
5.) If the cushion heating element is defective, please disconnect the secondary connector plug from the base and side bolster (see picture 2, item 2).
6.) Please check the resistance of the heating element in the individual heating panels (left, center and right in each panel).
a) If the resistance is lower than 5 ohm, the cushion heating panel concerned is OK.
b) If the resistance is higher than 5 ohm, the cushion heating panel concerned is broken.
The side bolster heating panels are available as individual parts from the Replacement Parts department; for this reason, replacement of the complete
seat cushion is no longer permitted.
Detailed work instructions (AR91.30-P-0007V) describing how to replace the side bolster heating panels are available.
Attachments
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
WIS-References
Validity
Attachment - Main connector plug for heated seat cushion
Attachment - Secondary plug connecting side bolster to mirror
Interior - Heated Seats Inoperative

HEATED SEATS NONFUNCTIONAL
Version 2
Design group 91.30 Seat heater, seat ventilation

Date 12-17-2009
Validity R 171 all VIN as of ....00001 up to .....166314 with SA code 873

R 171 AMG, VIN as of ....00001 with SA code 873
R 171 Designo, VIN as of ....00001 with SA code 873 + X00/X50
Reason for change Parts description corrected
Reason for block
Complaint:
Heated seats nonfunctional
Cause:
The seat heating leaks at the side of the seat cushion break as a result of frequent entry/exit.
Remedy:
1.) Please expose the seat heating contacts:
To do so, the seat cushion must be removed in the way described in AR91.10-P-3310V.
2.) Then disconnect the main supply connector for the heated seat from the seat separation point. Disconnect the black and white connectors at the side.
3.) The black main connector plug (see picture 1, item 1) with the catch tab is the connector of the heating element for the front seat cushion.
4.) Please check the resistance of the seat cushion heating element.
a) If the resistance is lower than 10 ohm, the cushion heating element is OK.
b) If the resistance is higher than 10 ohm, the cushion heating element is broken.
5.) If the cushion heating element is defective, please disconnect the secondary connector plug from the base and side bolster (see picture 2, item 2).
6.) Please check the resistance of the heating element in the individual heating panels (left, center and right in each panel).
a) If the resistance is lower than 5 ohm, the cushion heating panel concerned is OK.
b) If the resistance is higher than 5 ohm, the cushion heating panel concerned is broken.
The side bolster heating panels are available as individual parts from the Replacement Parts department; for this reason, replacement of the complete
seat cushion is no longer permitted.
Detailed work instructions (AR91.30-P-0007V) describing how to replace the side bolster heating panels are available.
Attachments
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
WIS-References
Validity
Attachment - Main connector plug heated seat cushion
Attachment - Secondary plug connecting side bolster to mirror

BULLETIN OBSOLETE - REFER TO BULLETIN S-01_30-23B

Supersedes: S-B-01.30/31a, January 22, 2010
Group: 01
Revision History
b 2/3/10 Bulletin No Longer Applicable
a 1/22/10 Bulletin text modified
SUBJECT:
All Passenger and Light Truck Models, Equipped with Engine M272 / 273
Up to approx. June 2008 Production
Oil Seepage from Back of Cylinder Head Interim Repair Method - INTERIM REPAIR METHOD IS NO LONGER VALID - BULLETIN IS NO
LONGER APPLICABLE
The interim repair method for this situation is no longer valid. The provision under this bulletin is no longer applicable.
Please refer to DTB S-B-01.30/23b for repair solution.
Engine - Oil Leaks At Back Of Engine

Camshaft caps leaking: Oil loss at rear of engine
Version 4
Design group 01.30 Cylinder head
Date 03-03-2010
Validity All models with engine 272

All models with engine 273
Cleanpoint engine for cap A000 998 5690:

Engine 273: 2739xx30268766
Engine 272: 2729xx31006851
Cleanpoint engine for cap A000 998 5590:

Engine 273: 2739xx30264566
Engine 272: 2729xx30992044
Reason for change Supersedes DTB S-B-01.30/23b
Reason for block
Complaint:
Oil loss at rear of engine.
Note:
In isolated cases oil loss can occur at the rear caps (cover plugs) of the camshafts.
Cause:
Cap sealing ring leaking.
(In the event of borderline tolerances and under unfavorable climatic conditions the sealing ring can lose the preload necessary to seal off the oil
gallery)
Remedy:
Replace cap.
Note:
Replace all 3 or both (on engines with mechanical vacuum pump) caps.
Part number:
A000 998 55 90 (cap, small)
A000 998 56 90 (cap, large)
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
Validity
Engine - Misfire Or Oil Consumption Service Guidelines


Supersedes: S-B-01.30/28 June 8, 2009
Group: 01
Revision History
a 3/29/10 Bulletin text modified
SUBJECT:
MY-All, All Models Equipped with M272 and M273 Engines
Cylinder Head-Related Complaint Guidelines
If you receive customer reports regarding vehicles equipped with Engine 272 or 273 related to a misfire or oil consumption, follow the guidelines
herein to determine further actions.
Perform checks and / or repairs according to published WIS (such as, AH01.00-P-0300-01VA), DTB (such as S-B-07.61/72a - misfire codes; DTBs and
LIs in group 18 or 01 related to oil consumption) and other official documents.
Note:
Do not replace cylinder heads based on suspicion alone and follow the guidelines to make a proper determination. Only the compression and leak down
test values taken from engines at operating temperature could be taken for consideration. Proper inspection of combustion chamber requires MB Special
Tools approved Borescope.
Note:
Use only approved methods to remove any carbon deposits when performing a repair. Mechanical carbon deposit cleaning (and use of any sand paper,
abrasive pads or disks or sanding tools) is not allowed under warranty and cylinder heads should not be removed to do that. Use only approved fuel
additives - Keropur part # A000 989 25 45 12. Dealers might be debited when performing unapproved or incorrect repairs as well as when
unnecessarily replacing parts.
Note:
If the guideline test steps are inconclusive, revert to the SDS guided test as indicated by the DTB S-B-07.61/72a and / or properly determine a root
cause of the complaint.
Complaint Process Guidelines (Pages 2-4) shown above.
Audio 50/COMAND APS - Theft Protection Active Displayed

Audio 50 APS / COMAND APS: The display shows the message "Theft protection active", as a result initial startup not possible/cannot be
completed
Version 1
Date 3-25-2010
Validity Models 169, 245, 171, 230, 211, 219, 203 CLC, 164 and 251 with COMAND (code 512 or 527) or Audio 50 APS (code 511 or 52
Model 463 with COMAND (code ET4) NTG2.5
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
Fault profile 1/2: The display of the COMAND unit (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) shows the message "Theft protection active".
Fault profile 3/4/5: Initial startup of the COMAND unit (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) cannot be performed with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics or is
aborted prematurely.
Cause:
Re. 1. The COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) is in the "as-delivered state". In DAS/Xentry Diagnostics go to Actual values/Theft protection
and check the status of the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56). Initial startup of the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) with
DAS/Xentry Diagnostics was not performed during the last installation. The PIN is still stored in the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56). The
COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) locks after approx. 50 activation sequences.
Re. 2. The COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) is in the "as-delivered state". Initial startup was performed approx. 2-4 weeks ago and the PIN
has already been redocumented in VeDoc. However, the initial startup was not completed properly due to a procedural error in DAS/Xentry
Diagnostics.
Re. 3. The COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) is in the "as-delivered state" and is new from the warehouse. Initial startup cannot be
performed with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics because the PIN cannot be read from the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56). During initial startup,
the PIN was erased with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics too early to allow initial startup to be completed successfully.
Re. 4. In model series 164 and 251 the EZS/EIS control unit (N73) A164 545 15 08 or A164 545 16 08 is installed. The EZS/EIS control unit (N73)
and the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) are not compatible with the "Theft protection" function.
Re. 5. The COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) is in the "CAN signal disrupted" state. The fault code DA00 is stored in the fault memory of
the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56). Initial startup is not possible because there is a CAN fault. CAN communication to the EZS/EIS
control unit (N73) is disrupted or faulty.
Remedy:
Use at least DAS/Xentry Diagnostics version 11/09 with add-on 1352 or DAS/Xentry Diagnostics version 01/10 with add-on 1354!
Re. 1. Perform initial startup of the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics.
Re. 2. Perform another initial startup of the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics.
Re. 3. Report the case to your market coordinator with a control unit log of the telematics control unit. He will forward the case to Daimler AG
headquarters. They may be able to determine the PIN again. When the PIN has been determined, perform initial startup of the COMAND (A40/3) or
Audio 50 APS (A2/56) with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics.
Re. 4. Replace the EIS (N73). To do this, determine the part number in the EPC system. Perform initial startup of the EIS (N73) and transfer the chassis
number to the EIS (N73). Be sure to use the correct upper and lower case letters. Perform another initial startup of the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50
APS (A2/56) with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics.
Re. 5.a:
Check whether the chassis number has been transferred correctly in the EIS (N73).
1. Use DAS/Xentry Diagnostics to access the menu "EZS/EIS / Control unit adaptations / Write VIN" and check that the chassis number is written
correctly (including upper and lower case letters).
2. Perform a "MOST ring restart" in the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics. The menu item "Restart optical
ring" can be found in DAS/Xentry Diagnostics under Audio, Video, Navigation and Telematics.
3. Erase the stored fault in the Audio 50 APS (A2/56) and COMAND (A40/3).
4. Perform initial startup of the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56) with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics.
Re. 5. b
b: Check whether CAN communication is functioning correctly at the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56). Perform a quick test to check
other control units for CAN faults and process these faults completely. Then perform initial startup of the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56)
with DAS/Xentry Diagnostics.
Re. 5.c:
If there are no other CAN faults stored in other control units and the EZS/EIS control unit (N73) contains the correct chassis number, but the fault code
DA00 is still stored and current in the COMAND (A40/3) or Audio 50 APS (A2/56), please log the CAN-B as described in the attachment. Send the log
file to Service Engineering at this Fax Number" 201 573 4381
Note:
When an Audio 50 APS (A2/56) or COMAND APS (A40/3) with PIN theft protection is installed in a vehicle, the PIN code is automatically
redocumented in the VeDoc system (online) as of DAS version 11/09. After successful initial startup, please check whether the PIN has been
redocumented correctly in the VeDoc system.
Attachments
Symptoms
Work units
WIS-References
Validity
Attachment - Instruction Sheet for logging the CAN-B

A/T - Hard Converter Lock-Up/Hard 1-2 Shift

Hard 1-2 shift or hard torque converter lockup clutch engagement
Version 1
Design group 27.00 General
Date 04-06-2010
Validity Transmission 722.9
Reason for change Remedy revised / Supersedes DTB S-B-27.00/112
Reason for block
Complaint:
The customer complaint of "Hard shift, presumable the 1-2 shift, occurs when moving off" is often received even though the problem is hard
engagement of the torque converter lockup clutch (KUB) in the start-off process.
In order to permit a clear diagnosis, restrict the transmission to 1st gear by shifting to position 1.
If a jolt occurs at the point where the state of the torque converter lockup clutch changes from "open" to "slipping", then the cause should be sought in
the control of the torque converter lockup clutch.
Cause:
Control of torque converter lockup clutch engagement not optimized.
Remedy:
1. Via DAS menu item "Initial startup", perform transmission software update and then perform SCN coding.
2. Via DAS menu item "KUB adaptation", adapt the torque converter lockup clutch according to the coolant temperature and torque window.
3. Then perform a test drive.
Symptoms
Work units
Validity

Emissions - Variable DTC's/Driveability Concerns

Engine diagnosis warning lamp activated, fault code 0171, 0172, 0441, 0745, 0749, 1046, 1050, 1077, 1078, 1081, 1089, 1085, 2187 stored in
engine control unit
Version 1
Design group 47.30 Evaporative emission control system
Date 03-18-2010
Validity Model 203 (CLC) with engine 271/272 vehicle production 10.07.2009 - 30.11.2009
Model 204 with engine 156/271/272 vehicle production 14.05.2009 - 30.11.2009
Model 207 with engine 272/273 vehicle production 16.05. 2009 - 30.11.2009
Model 171 with engine 113/272 vehicle production 15.05. 2009 - 30.11.2009
Model 230 with engine 156/272/273/275 vehicle production 01.06.2009 - 30.11.2009
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
Engine diagnosis warning lamp activated.
Complaints about engine running characteristics may arise.
Cause:
Magnetic short between armature and pole core due to calibration error at valve and tolerance deviation by supplying manufacturer.
This causes the purge valve to jam in the open state.
Remedy:
Installation of a purge valve as of production date 09T306, 09S306, or 09N306.
The production date is marked on the upper shell of the purge valve.
All stocks have been cleared out.
Symptoms

Parts
Work units
Validity
COMAND(R) - 'Drive Unavailable, Temp. Too High' Message

COMAND APS: Fault message "Drive unavailable, temperature too low or too high"
Version 1
Date 02-18-2010
Validity Model 171, 230, 164, 251, 169, 245, 211, 219, 203.7 with COMAND (code 512 or 527) and code 809 or 800 (NTG2.5)
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
Complaint 1:
At high altitudes (over approx. 3000 meters above sea-level) the navigation main menu sporadically displays the fault message "Drive unavailable,
temperature too high".
The following functions are restricted due to the shutdown of the hard drive.
- Navigation
- Voice control
- Address book
- Music register (downloaded music onto the head unit hard-drive)
- Gracenote database for identifying album, track and performer information on an audio CD
Complaint 2:
The navigation main menu permanently displays the fault message "Drive unavailable, temperature too low or too
high"
Cause:
Re 1.)
The hard drive shuts down at high altitudes (over approx. 3000 m) and when the temperature of the hard drive is high.
a) At low altitudes the message disappears and the COMAND unit (A40/3) operates without problems. This is due to a safety feature created to
protect the hard-drive from permanent damage.
b) High hard drive temperatures are increased by high volume settings especially in vehicles without sound system (SA code 810), high outside and
engine temperatures and unfavorable settings on the heating/air conditioning. With the altitude increase and decreasing of air around hard-drive
assembly, the HDD starts the shut down process as the surrounding head unit temperature also reaches around 55 degrees Celsius.
The head unit is working as specified in this use case.
Re. 2.)
There is a hardware fault in the COMAND unit (A40/3).
Remedy:
Remedy 1.)
To prevent damage to the hard drive, it is shut down at high altitudes and high temperatures. This is due to a safety feature (series production
configuration). => Do not replace any equipment!
Remedy 2.)
If the fault occurs constantly, replace the COMAND APS (A40/3). Refer to EPC.
Note:
If the vehicle is fitted with a COMAND APS (A40/3) with PIN theft protection, the PIN code must be recorded in the VeDoc system. Pay attention to
the relevant information during initial startup with DAS / Xentry Diagnostics.
Symptoms
Work units
Validity
COMAND(R) - Freezes When Using The 'TEL' Key

COMAND APS: COMAND can no longer be operated on changing to telephone menu
Version 1
Design group 82.85 Navigation and communication systems (CNS,

ICS, COMAND, FleetBoard)
Date 02-18-2010
Validity Models 171, 230, 164, 251, 169, 245, 211, 219 and CLC 203 with SA code 512, 527 or 528 and SA code 809 (NTG2.5)
Reason for change Remedy with Telematics CD 01/2010 / Supersedes DTB

S-B-82.85/688
Reason for block
Complaint:
The COMAND unit (A40/3) can no longer be operated (freezes) when changing to the telephone menu using the "TEL" key.
Cause:
Software error in the COMAND unit (A40/3). The COMAND unit (A40/3) has saved 21 entries in the call log. However, the software can only manage
20 entries.
Remedy:
Update the entire telematics ring using DAS version 01/10 or newer and Telematics CD A171 827 41 59 (or newer). The software of the COMAND
unit (A40/3) must be updated to version 29/09
Note:
If the software release of the COMAND unit (A40/3) is 08/08, it is absolutely necessary to update the map data using patch DVD A230 827 02 59 or
newer as prompted by DAS. DAS automatically checks and displays the necessity of updating the map data.
Do NOT perform the map update as a "customer upgrade" or your claim will be denied
If DAS prompts you to use a map update, you must complete this step otherwise the head unit may not function correctly
The software update also remedies the following errors:
- Uncommanded overwriting of the FM station memory list is prevented
- HU freezes in telephone application as soon as more than 20 entries are saved in the call log
- Audio application is audible at the start of a phone call
Notes about software updates:
You MUST complete the software update for the entire Telematics Ring. It is critical that you follow DAS prompts, search for new software and carry
out the entire update process for all of the telematics components which DAS has found new software for. Software updates are done as a
"package/profile". Failure to complete the update process for these components will result in operation errors.
Checking for new software MUST always be carried out after a component replacement. Use the "control unit programming" step to check for any new
software and perform the necessary updates as guided by DAS. Additionally:
^ DO NOT Interrupt the update process
^ All telematics components software must be updated together as guided by DAS
^ You must check for new software - if after diagnostics- a component replacement is deemed necessary, if a new software is found by DAS you must
complete the update for all components found
^ Always use a battery charger throughout the entire update process
^ Always complete the SCN coding
^ Where applicable (during parts replacement after diagnostics), an initial start up must be performed
Failure to adhere to the above process may cause the head unit and telematics ring to be faulty, any parts replacement claims as a result will be denied
Symptoms
Work units
Validity
Audio Sys. - iPod(R)/iPhone(R) Will Not Charge

iPod/iPhone 3G is not charged
Version 3
Design group 82.60 Radio, audio/video systems
Date 03-18-2010
Validity Model 164, 169, 171, 203, 204, 207, 209, 211, 212, 216, 219, 221, 230, 245, 251 with media interface (code 518) or retrofitted iPo
Reason for change Model designation added

Reason for block
Complaint:
1. Apple iPod or iPhone 3G is not charged when used on media interface (code 518).
Affected consumer cables:
A001 827 65 04 (supplied with ECE straight connector)

A204 827 04 04 (iPod cable with straight connector)
A001 827 70 04 (supplied with ECE straight connector)
A001 827 68 05 (iPod cable with straight connector)
B6 782 45 26 (supplied with ECE angled connector)
B6 782 45 25 (iPod cable with angled connector)
A204 827 05 04 (supplied with USA straight connector)
A001 827 69 04 (supplied with USA straight connector)
B6 782 45 27 (supplied with USA angled connector)
2. Apple iPod or iPhone 3G is not charged when used with the iPod interface kit (Mercedes-Benz Accessories retrofit).
Affected iPod interface kits:
B6 782 2890
B6 782 4239
B6 782 4246
B6 782 4253
B6 782 4254
B6 782 4258
B6 782 4094
Cause:
Discontinuation of the 12V charging circuit by the Apple Corporation in Apple iPhone 3G and iPod Nano 4G, iPod Touch 2G and iPod classic 120GB.
Note:
Previous iPod/iPhone generations could be charged with 5V and 12V. The iPods/iPhones listed above and future generations can only be charged at 5V.
Note on model series 221, 216:
Due to the power management in model series 221 and 216, the iPod/iPhone is charged only when the engine is running in vehicles with iPod interface
kit installed.
Note:
The change in charging circuit from [5v/12v] to 5v is Apple Corporation responsibility and not Mercedes-Benz/Daimler AG. Any unnecessary
replacements will be debited.
Remedy:
1. Replace iPod consumer cable (see parts note).
Note:
Occasionally, the message "Charging not supported with this accessory" appears on the display of the iPod Nano even though the iPod Nano is being
charged. This message can be ignored if the charging symbol of the iPod nano indicates that the rechargeable battery is being charged (see picture in
attachment).
2. Replace iPod cable set of iPod interface kit (see parts note).
Note:
The iPod interface kits listed are not approved for the iPhone 3G or iPod Nano 4G, iPod Touch 2G and iPod classic 120GB.
Note:
Older iPods can be charged with both the old and new consumer/charging cables.
Note:
Occasionally, the message "Charging not supported with this accessory" appears on the display of the iPod Nano even though the iPod Nano is being
charged. This message can be ignored if the charging symbol of the iPod Nano indicates that the rechargeable battery is being charged (see picture in
attachment).
Attachments
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
Validity
Attachment - iPod charging symbol

Computer/Controls - XD/DAS Add-On 2009-11-27-1321
DAS/XD add-on 2009-11-27-1321 for passenger cars
Version 1
Date 03-23-2010
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
ME9.7
Model series: all except 168, 169, 245 and smart
control unit.
CDI D
Model series: 204
ETC
ETC
1. Display of adaptation data for development department as text file
2. Activation of control unit 3. Correction programming in Diagpass and XD modified for hotline cases
CDID
Model series: 204
Cause:
Remedy:
Symptoms

Validity
Body - When Operating Vario Roof Trunk Lid Won't Close

Trunk lid fails to close when opening/closing the Vario roof
Version 1
Design group 77.37 Vario roof, soft top - hydraulic components
Date 02-05-2010
Validity R230 & 171
Reason for change Model designation extended / Supersedes DTB P-B-77.

37/21
Reason for block
Complaint:
The trunk lid closes slowly or not at all when the Vario roof is opened or closed.
Cause:
Three possible causes:
- internal leakage on hydraulic cylinder at front of Vario roof (item 6)
- internal leakage on hydraulic cylinder at trunk lid latch (item 4/5)
- internal leakage on hydraulic cylinder at trunk lid actuator (item 3)

Attachments
Remedy:
Perform hydraulics test with special tool valve block, part no. 230 589 00 91 00:
1. Expose hydraulic unit, unplug connectors, unscrew nuts.
2. Reposition hydraulic unit so that the hydraulic lines are accessible, remove cable straps (A).
3. Release left connection plate and remove hydraulic lines 90, 92, 93, 94 on hydraulic unit.
4. Remove yellow stop plugs (B) from hydraulic line on valve block special tool and and use to seal connectors of detached hydraulic lines.
5. Connect first 4 hydraulic lines (C) from special tool valve block to hydraulic unit.
6. Connect hydraulic lines 90, 92, 93, 94 to special tool valve block in ascending numerical order.
7. Return hydraulic unit to its operating position, reconnect connectors and close trunk lid.
8. Operate Vario roof in the "Open" direction until the trunk lid is opened, then release the switch.
9. Close connection for line 94 on valve block with knurled screw.
10. Operate Vario roof in the "Open" direction.
If the trunk lid closes:
Important:
Release the switch just before it reaches the trunk lid latches otherwise the latches may be damaged by the tubular frame.
Observe this instruction in the subsequent test steps too.
11. See notes on replacing right hydraulic cylinder for trunk lid latch, see AR77.37-P-3540R.
If the trunk lid does not close:
Operate Vario roof in the "Close" direction until the Vario roof rests on the windshield cross member. Release the switch while the trunk lid is still open
and when the side flaps are retracted.
Note:
With the roof in this position, the valve block in the trunk is accessible.
12. Reopen connection for line 94 on valve block and close connection for line 93 on valve block.
14. See notes on replacing left hydraulic cylinder for trunk lid latch, see AR77.37-P-3540R.
15. Reopen connection for line 93 on valve block and close connection for line 90 on valve block.

17. See notes on replacing hydraulic cylinder for front Vario roof latch, see AR77.37-P-3560R.
18. Reopen connection for line 90 on valve block
19. Operate Vario roof in the "Close" direction and get an assistant to simultaneously push the trunk lid closed by hand until the tubular frame latches
engage and lock.
If the latches fail to lock:
Unlock trunk lid with emergency key, open it and lock the tubular frame latches with an Allen wrench.
20. Seal connections for lines 90, 92, 93, 94 on valve block using knurled screws, push to close and lock trunk lid.
21. Operate roll bar with convenience switch in the "Raise/Lower" direction.
If the roll bar cannot be raised:
Hydraulic unit OK. See notes on replacing hydraulic cylinder for trunk lid actuation, see AR77.37-P-3550R. If the roll bar cannot be retracted:
22. Replace hydraulic unit, AR77.37-P-3500R.
Attachments
Symptoms
Parts
Attachments
Validity
Attachment - Possible causes
Attachment - Connectors (step 2)
Attachment - Cable straps (A) and hydraulic lines (steps 4 and 5)
Attachment - Hydraulic lines (step 8)

Attachment - Diagram of special tool valve block (D) with knurled screws (E) (step 8)
Attachment - Operating position of connected valve block (D) (step 8)
Attachment - Special tool for valve block
A/T - Harsh Engagement From Park To Drive

Harsh engagement when changing gear range from P to D
Version 1
Design group 27.50 Gear assembly
Date 04-06-2010
Validity Transmission 722.9
Reason for change

Reason for block
Complaint:
When changing gear range from P to D, harsh engagement may be noticeable.
Cause:
The engagement sequences for N-D and N-R may not be optimized
Remedy:
The engagement sequences for N-D and N-R must be taught in again as follows:
Note:
Always remain in the gear ranges N/R/D for at least 5 sec!
Start the engine from cold,
shift 5 times N-R,
shift 5 times N-R,
shift 5 times N-R,
shift 5 times N-D.
Symptoms
Validity
Engine - Squeaking Noises From The Belt Drive

Squeaking noises from the belt drive
Version 1
Design group 13.20 Belt drive, general
Date 03-10-2010
Validity Belt drive, engine 272 and engine 273.
Reason for change
Reason for block
Complaint:
Squeaking noises from the belt drive
Cause:
Axial shifting (temperature-related) of the individual belt pulleys and guide pulleys can lead to squeaking noises in isolated cases.
Remedy:
Application of Krytox lubricant - belt dressing A000 989 36 60 (from lubricating kit A000 580 03 50) - one to two drops at each point to the inner and
outer side edges of the poly-V belt. Procedure:
- Bring the engine to the operating temperature (80 deg. C) and switch it off.
- Remove top front engine cover as required to get access to the poly-V-belt.
- Apply one to two drops of Krytox lubricant to the inner and outer side edges of the poly-V belt near the top idler pulley (important: only treat the
edges of the belt. If the lubricant is applied to the running surface of the belt, this can cause the poly-V belt to slip).
- Start the engine so that the lubricant can spread along the edges of the belt.
* Sufficient for 15 cars, Submit as Local Purchase - KRY00284, Qty 1, handling is included
Attachments
Symptoms
Parts
Work units
Validity
Attachment - Description: Apply Krytox to edges of poly-V belt
Satellite Radio - 'Device Unavailable' Displayed

Satellite Radio Not Available and "Device Unavailable" Displaying on the Head Unit May Cause Current Draw
Topic number LI82.60-U-046896
Version 4
Design group 82.60 Radio, audio/video systems
Date 03-17-2010
Validity Model 164

Model 171
Model 211
Model 230
Model 251
Model 463
All Model Year 2009 Equipped with Satellite Radio / HD Tuner
Reason for change Remedy clarified, added notes regarding telematics software updates
Reason for block
Complaint:
Head unit displays "device unavailable" when user switches to satellite radio (SDAR) with a possible Battery current draw.
Cause:
Under-voltage condition with the vehicle itself can cause the satellite radio to go into bypass. The satellite radio (SDAR) operation can be recovered by
a hard-reset to the receiver; however, this condition may reoccur.
Remedy:
Use DAS version 01/10 or newer and telematics CD # 171 827 41 59 ES2:0001 (or newer) to update the relevant telematics components.
Before you start the update process:
Before you start the actual Control unit programming process, it is highly recommended to check all available software and print this sheet showing
which component is getting an update along with current and new software. This sheet is useful to make sure all found updates are successfully
completed.
Software updates in general: (Read this first)
Always use the latest DAS version along with all of the patches. DAS patches (AddOns) can be found in the Aftersales XENTRY portal, one of the
links you can use is this:
https://aftersales.i.daimler.com/sdupdate/
^ You MUST update all of the components which DAS has found newer software for, otherwise the autio video system will not function normally.
^ Under no condition can a component update be skipped unless DAS clearly indicates " no newer software found"... for that component. Every
component MUST be flashed.
^ Always note the telematics update CD referenced by DAS as it may be newer than the latest CD available to you.
^ Do not use an older telematics CDs (even if you know it may belong to that specific telematics generation) than what DAS displays for you during
the control unit programming process, if you do not have the prompted CD, do NOT attempt to flash.
^ Update process normally starts out with the ring master (head unit) and continues through the rest of the telematics ring, but not necessarily. It is
possible that the process does not start with the head unit, in this case select the one of the components on the update list and start with it then
continue updating the remainder of the ring.
^ Make sure the head unit's DVD/CD drive is empty before inserting the telematics CD. The head unit CANNOT have any other CD except for the
telematics update CD/DVD during the update process, you should always use slot #1 in the changer as this is the first slot DAS looks for a CD in.
^ You must connect DAS and start the control unit update process and WAIT for the DAS prompts to advise you to insert the telematics CD. Please do
NOT insert the telematics CD into the head unit first, then start a DAS session, this may cause the telematics CD to keep ejecting.
^ You must reset the optical ring after software update and allow CAN and MOST asleep.
Software update process:
1. Connect a battery charger and DAS. DAS must be connected at all times and throughout the update process. If DAS is disconnected during the
update, the flash will interrupt and may corrupt the telematics system and render the head unit's operation irrecoverable even if you perform a hard-reset
on the head unit so it is critical that you have a stable power supply connected at all times.
Before you start the actual control unit programming process, it is highly recommended to check all available software and print this sheet showing
components that are going to get the update along with current and new software. This sheet is useful to make sure all found updates are successfully
completed.
2. Start the telematics update by selecting COMAND > control unit adaptations > control module programming, follow DAS prompts.
While DAS is searching the telematics CD for the proper application software for Head unit such as DVD mechanism, bluetooth, navigation, voice
control or for other telematics components such as sound amplifier, UCI, satellite radio / combi tuner it may display the message " Software missing ".
This is normal. Do NOT interrupt or restart the update process, other wise the head unit can get corrupted.
Software update progress bar may not indicate the elapsed time/time remaining for the update. Even if the progress bar does not seem to be changing,
the update process is taking place in the background. Please be patient, do not interrupt the process and allow DAS to continue through until the process
is complete and you are prompted by DAS to eject the telematics CD from the head unit
3. During the update, the telematics system will reset (restart) a few times, this is normal. If DAS could not start out by updating the head unit first, then
select another component on the ring --> start updating it --> then manually select all of the components until you have completed the software update
for the entire telematics ring.
4. After update is complete and SCN coding is carried out, delete DTCs and reset the optical ring --> allow CAN and MOST asleep.
5. Start the head unit and check for correct functionality.
Telematics components bypass notes:
Telematics components are specified to go into bypass (self protection) when sensing an under-voltage condition of 10.6 V or lower. Due to a software
error in the satellite radio, it is more susceptible to going into bypass before any other telematics components even if the voltage supply to the receiver
is over the low voltage threshold. As a result a "device unavailable" message is displayed on the head unit.
Symptoms
Validity
Interior - Floor Mat Safety Information

Order No.: S-B-68.00/81
Group: 68
Floor Mat Safety
We are sure you are aware of recent events that have prompted another OEM to issue recalls involving several million vehicles. One of the issues being
focused on by NHTSA is the possibility that the floor mats in these vehicles may interfere with accelerator or brake pedal movement.
Given the critical safety concerns involved, we'd like to take this opportunity to remind our dealers of the proper procedures for installing floor mats in
our vehicles so they may properly communicate this information to our customers:
^ Any existing floor mats should be removed prior to installing new floor mats. Never install floor mats on top of existing floor mats.
^ Floor mats must be secured using the MB floor mat fixation system. We do not recommend using aftermarket floor mats that are not compatible with
this fixation system. For additional information, please refer to the installation instructions included with floor mat sets.
^ Floor mats are model specific. Only install floor mats designed for a specific model and model year. Do not install floor mats if you are unsure of the
model application.
^ Ensure that the driver's mat is installed in the driver's foot area - passenger mat in the passenger foot area.
^ Ensure that floor mats are installed correctly - not upside down!
^ Floor mats should be checked periodically for proper fastening and to insure that the floor mat is not interfering with pedal movement.
^ We strongly recommend only using Genuine Mercedes-Benz floor mats. These are the only floor mats approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
^ Only Genuine Mercedes-Benz floor mats utilize the factory-approved fixation system.
Adhering to these recommendations can help to prevent potentially dangerous situations for our customers. This notice applies to both carpet and
all-season floor mats.
Fuel System - Modified Fuel Tank/Replacement Info.

Date: May 10, 2010
Group: 47
SUBJECT: MY-All, Model 171
Modified Fuel Tank
As of VIN F168007 a modified fuel tank (1) is used.
With the modified fuel tank (1) (Figure 1) the connection of the rear window water drain and the openings (A, B) (Figure 1) in the rear floor has
change.
A Assignment of rear window water drain with old fuel tank.

B Assignment of rear window water drain with new fuel tank or new rear floor.
Procedures
A. Replacing Fuel Tank
Up to VIN F168006 with the old rear floor A 171 610 03 61 the following modifications must be made to the rear floor:
1. Drill bore (B) (Figure 3):
Drill bit size: 20.7 mm
a 130.3 mm (Figure 2)
b 63.8 mm (Figure 2)
c 67.2 mm (Figure 2)
d 137.5 mm (Figure 2)
2. Mount new water drain hose A 171 639 05 94 into bore (B) (Figure 3).
3. Adapt soundproofing to new drill holes.
4. Seal the two rear openings for the hose passages at left/right (A) (Figure 3) with stop plugs A 003 997 55 86 in combination with body sealer.
B. Renewing Rear Floor

Up to VIN F168006 with the new rear floor A 171 610 04 61 (2) (Figure 3) the following modifications must be made to the rear floor:
1. Seal the two rear openings for hose passages at left/right (A) (Figure 3) with stop plugs A 113 987 00 44 in combination with body sealer.
2. Mount new water drain hose A 171 639 05 94 into opening (B) (Figure 3).
Parts Information
Restraints - Air Bag Durability And Reliability

Date: June 11, 2010
Order No: S-B-91.60/193
Group: 91
Subject:
MY-All, Models All
Airbag Durability and Reliability
The air bag SRS control module (N2/2) does not have a set shelf life and will normally be reliable for the life of a Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
NOTE:
With 164, 216, 221, 251 and newer, the airbag control unit can be reset five times. With models 202, 210 and newer, the airbag control unit can be reset
three times.
Earlier models would have to have their airbag control unit and triggered restrain components changed only after an accident.after an accident.
AT - Electrohydraulic Control Unit Order Notes Update

Date: June 14, 2010
Order No: S-B-27.19/118A
Supercedes: S-B-27.19/118, April 29, 2010
Group: 27
Revision History
a 6/14/10 Procedure 2-3 ordering notes modified
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Transmission 722.9 in Models 164, 171, 203, 204, 207, 209, 211, 212, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, 463
Ordering Notes for Electrohydraulic Control Unit
The following information clarifies how to determine the correct electrohydraulic control units.
A. Procedure 1a
1. Diagnosis on the vehicle is possible:
2. To determine the correct EHS part number, the currently installed EHS should first be read out with the Star diagnosis.
a. Xentry Diagnostics:
^ via the path "Control units view" - "Current quick test" - "Fully integrated transmission control" - "EHS part number".
^ Ordering the new EHS with this read out part number.
b. DAS:
^ "Quick test">"EGS > electronic transmission control serial number".
^ Ordering the new EHS with this read out serial number.
B. Procedure 1b
Diagnosis on the vehicle is no longer possible, as the control unit no longer responds. Therefore, the number must be read off directly by the EHS
and the ordering process is started with this number.
C. Procedure 2
1. Read out part number A 220 270 14 06
2. This part number was replaced by A 220 270 13 06 or by A 220 270 18 06, depending on the vehicle model range.
For this the following must be observed for correct ordering:
Model 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230 with transmission 722.901
A 220 270 31 06
Model 209 with transmission 722.902 and engine 642.910 up to 5/31/2007
^ A220 270 14 06 replaced by
^ A 220 270 21 06 replaced by
^ A220 270 29 06
Model 209 with transmission 722.902 and engine 642.910 as of 6/1/2007
A220 270 19 06 replaced by
A220 270 32 06
A 220 270 27 06
A 220 270 27 06
Model 171, 209, 211, 219 and 230.471 with transmission 722.904
A 220 270 27 06
A 220 270 27 06

A 220 270 27 06
D. Procedure 3
1. Read out the part number A 220 270 12 06
2. For this the following must be observed for correct ordering:
^ Model 219.356, 171.456 with transmission 722.906 up to and including model year 2005 (code 805)
A 220 270 12 06.
^ For all other baumusters/model designations (except 219.356, 171.456) order with the read off part number A 220 270 12 06
A 220 270 31 06
Interior - Simplified Instrument Panel Supports

Date: June 22, 2010
Group: 62
SUBJECT: MY2005-MY2008, Model 171
Parts Simplification of Instrument Panel Support
Instrument panel supports are now simplified by providing brackets for the body or body-in-white area. Should this type of part be shipped in the case
of the below VINs for this model, a bracket (1) attached with two resistance weld spots (2) must be removed before installation.
Consult Parts information for model and appropriate part.
Procedure:
1. Drill off the two resistance weld spots Figure 2 (2).
2. Remove bracket Figure 1 (1). Grind off any burr which has arisen and clean and degrease any contamination occurring.
3. Apply corrosion protection.
4. Once the corrosion protection has dried the instrument panel support can be installed.
Parts Information
Audio System - Radio Interruption Information

Order No.: S-B-80.57/56
Group: 80
SUBJECT:
MY-All, Models 129, 163, 164, 170, 171, 199, 202, 203, 204, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, 463
Interruptions in Radio-Operated Vehicle Systems
In the frequency range of the transmitter key or KEYLESS-GO, many other radio-operated Systems can also be transmitting and with a stronger signal.
Systems such as, radio frequency headphones, radio thermometer, garage door opener, alarm systems, etc. can prevent or interrupt unlocking, locking,
and engine starting via a KEYLESS-GO.
Fortunately, in parallel with radio remote control, most MB vehicles also have infrared remote control, so that even with radio disturbance, the
transmitter key will unlock and lock at short range. Exceptions are the 163 and the 170 as they do not have additional infrared remote control, but the
mechanical key will always work.
Advise customers that taking a vehicle key is always recommended as it is conceivable that a criminal might use a radio interferer to block the locking
of a vehicle. Locking is ensured by 3-signal flashing.
Paint - Clearcoat With Higher Scratch Resistance

Date: August 2010
Order No.: S-B-98.00/28
Group: 98
SUBJECT:
Models 164,170,171, 203, 204, 207, 209, 211, 212, 215, 216, 219, 220, 221, 230, 251, 463
Clearcoat Paint Systems with Higher Scratch Resistance
Since June 2002, starting with the model 215, clear paint Systems with higher scratch resistance came into use. The changeover took place in the
following years and was completed by mid 2004.
From June 2002 up to 06/30/2010 with a few exception (see Table) all vehicles with a more scratch resistant clear paint system, are marked with a "C"
in front of the paint code on the model plate.
As since 2005 on all models only the scratch resistant clear paint systems are always used, the identification "C" is deleted as of 7/1/2010.
In the table below, the data for the production changeover and marking are once again listed for the period 2002 up to June 2010.
Special protection vehicles (Guard) were painted with conventional dual-component Systems up to 01/2005 The changeover to the new scratch resistant
systems took place in 02/2005. As of this time all vehicles are also marked with a "C".
In collaboration with all of our approved paint partners suitable paint repair systems have been developed for the new clearcoat paints with improved
scratch resistance and these have been approved after comprehensive on-road testing.
All the paint partners we approve have incorporated the repair instructions and materials to be used in their repair guidelines.
These can be found on the After-Sales paint technology internet page.
The paint specialists of these companies are also available to help you on site, if required. Please remember to ensure without fail, that only these
approved refinish systems are used for paint repair.
This also always applies to Mercedes-Benz service operations that out source their paint work to external paint operators.
These Mercedes-Benz service operations are responsible for ensuring that only the approved refinish systems are used.
The application methods have not been changed.
The plastic attachment parts continue to be coated with conventional 2-K-clear coats. In the case of repair we recommend the scratch resistant repair
systems for plastic parts.
The existing sanding and polishing process has been changed. These techniques for scratch resistant paint are described in the work instructions
AR98.00-P-0012A.
The process and auxiliary materials to be used and the required workshop equipment are specified in detail.
Training courses on offer
Please remember that our paint and polish partners offer a wide variety of training courses on repair materials and processes, which are normally free of
charge.
According to our knowledge the training capacities of the paint suppliers are underutilized. We therefore ask you to take advantage of the qualifications
of the paint specialists within the market. This is the only way of ensuring a smooth repair procedure, which provides customer satisfaction with proven
Mercedes-Benz quality.
If you have any questions contact your Technical Representative.
For more information please refer the table above.

MBenz SLK350 R171 272 Repair

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MBenz SLK350 R171 272 Repair

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MBenz SLK350 R171 272 Repair

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Benz SLK 350 (171.456) V6-3.5L (272.

Mercedes Benz SLK350

AP00.20-P-0053V Check All Visible Parts For Leaks and Damage

Model 171 shown

AR00.10-P-1010A Check Gear Capacity

AH54.21-P-0001-03Y Notes on Programming Control Units

Program using STAR DIAGNOSIS (Xentry flash)

Further explanation of terms:

Deliveries and costs

Offline programming with Release CD

Offline programming with Special Release CD

Program using STAR DIAGNOSIS (Xentry flash)

Further explanation of terms:

Offline programming with Special Release CD

AH54.21-P-0001-04Z Flow Chart For Off-line Programming With Special Release CD

Offline programming with Special Release CD

AH54.21-P-0004-01X Notes on SCN Coding of Control Units

Precondition for SCN coding:

Entry into coding in the Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS)

7. Continue with "F2".

The SCN coding of the control unit is completed.

Precondition for offline SCN coding:

The offline SCN coding is broken down into 2 steps:

14. Continue with "F2".

Offline programming with Release CD

Offline programming with special release CD.

AR54.21-P-0014Y Programming Of Control Units

Off-line programming with Release CD

AR54.21-P-0014Z Programming Of Control Units

Offline-Programmierung mit Special Release-CD

AR54.21-P-0015X SCN Coding Of Control Units

The following formula is used to calculate the torque to be set.

Shown on engine 275

Cleaning and preserving engine and engine compartment

AH01.00-P-0300-01VA General Information on Inspecting Cylinder

1. Pressure Gloss Marks, Smoothings

2. Visible Stripes, Friction Marks

4. Rotary Bright, Reflecting, Polished Upper Surfaces Of Cylinder

5. Roughened Streaks, Rubbing Seizures (+ 6, 7, 8)

AR01.00-P-0200V Inspecting Cylinders With A Light Probe

Commercially Available Tools

AR01.00-P-1300VA Inspect Cylinders For Leaks

Commercially Available Tools

AR18.00-P-0025QB Measure Oil Consumption

AR18.00-P-0025V Measure Oil Consumption

Workshop Equipment/MB Testers

AR18.00-P-1250SX Check Oil Pressure

Oil pressure test specifications

Crankcase, timing case cover, end cover

Crankcase, timing case cover, end cover

AH01.00-N-1300-02A Determine Loss of Pressure at Cylinder

Possible causes for the pressure loss are:

pressure loss at cylinder head gasket

pressure loss at inlet valve(s)

3. Outlet of air through exhaust:

pressure loss at exhaust valve(s)

4. Outlet of air through oil filler opening:

pressure loss through pistons and piston rings

Pressure gloss marks, smooth spots